Engineering Construction Methods Guidelines Cbs

A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledgeEngineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 1 of Civil Engineering Construction Method Statements P Eng Suraj Singh Buildings Practice General Activities Contents index For navigation please click these pasted hyperlinks Construction Method Statements for various activities within civil engineering for plants works Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 2 of Site Preparation & Earth Work CONCRETING TO WALLS OF CENTRAL CONTROL BUILDING LABORATORY PROTECTION SERVICES / OF EXISTING RE-ROUTING OF 33KV CABLES Concrete Pipe Culverts CONCRETE CULVERTS PIPE CULVERT CROSSINGS TO AVENUE E AND MAIN HIGHWAY. PLACING CONCRETE ON SERVICE WATER TANK 58-TK-205 FOUNDATIONS EXCAVATION IN Operating Authority CONTROLLED AREAS CONSTRUCTION OF FLOOR SLAB CENTRAL CONTROL BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL-PIPERACKS ROAD CROSSING KV ROUTE FOR 132 TO CONCRETE REPAIR Top CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN SUBSTATION MORTAR FOR BLOCKWORK COMPRESSORS’ STRUCTURES RCC COLUMN PLATE INSERTS NIGHT SHIFT EARTHWORKS WORKING - CONSTRUCTION RACK BASES OF PIPE REMOVAL MATERIALS OF HAZARDOUS CONTROL OF CAMP SEWAGE SYSTEM EXCAVATION FOR 132KV CABLE INTERCONNECTION GROUTING TO PIPE RACK FOUNDATION BASES PROPANE COMPRESSOR MASSIVE FOUNDATION (CONCRETE POUR) PROPANE COMPRESSOR MASSIVE FOUNDATION (CONCRETE POUR SEAWATER BASIN (WATER TIGHTNESS BS 8007 : 1987 ) ADMINISTRATION BUILDING STAIR LANDING EXTENSION AT GRID 4 J ADMINISTRATION BUILDING CERAPlant Operating Authority FLOORING SYSTEM CEMENTITIOUS GROUTING FOUNDATION BASES ETYLENE COMPRESSOR MASSIVE FOUNDATION POUR (CONCRETE PROPANE COMPRESSOR MASSIVE FOUNDATION (CONCRETE POUR) PROPANE COMPRESSOR MASSIVE FOUNDATION (CONCRETE POUR SEAWATER BASIN (WATER TIGHTNESS BS 8007 : 1987 ) ADMINISTRATION BUILDING STAIR LANDING EXTENSION AT GRID 4 J PROPANE COMPRESSOR MASSIVE FOUNDATION (CONCRETE POUR SEAWATER BASIN (WATER TIGHTNESS BS 8007 : 1987 ) ADMINISTRATION BUILDING STAIR LANDING EXTENSION AT GRID 4 J FENCING Top ADMINISTRATION BUILDING PLASTERING AND RENDERING BUILDINGS ROOFING SYSTEM WATER TIGHTNESS TESTS FOR THE COLLECTION SUMPS ACCORDING TO BS 8007 : 1987 SECTION 9 PROPANE GAS COMPRESSOR TABLE TOP POUR CONCRETE COATING USING MASTER SEAL 550 TILES ADMINISTRATION BUILDING CERAPlant Operating Authority TILES FLOORING SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION BUILDING ROOFING SYSTEM CRACKED GAS COMPRESSOR TABLE TOP CONCRETE POUR ADMINISTRATION BUILDING MARBLE FLOORING ROOFING SYSTEM WATER TIGHTNESS TESTS FOR THE COLLECTION SUMPS ACCORDING TO BS 8007 : 1987 SECTION 9 ETHYLENE GAS COMPRESSOR TABLE TOP POUR EXPANSION JOINTS IN DITCHES EXPANSION JOINTS IN DITCHES DEWATERING FOR THE 84” GRE LINE PARALLEL TO CORNICHE ROAD EAST WEST PAIR Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 3 of Top CERAPlant Operating Authority WALL TILES FIXING ABOVE GROUND CONCRETE PROTECTION USING MASTERSEAL 300 H BACKFILLING OF THE WEST SIDE OF THE QUENCH TOWER FOUNDATION – (RIB) SITE OFFICE ESTABLISHMENT BEDDING AND GRAVEL FILLING BENEATH 60 “ DIA PIPE COOLING WATER PIPE ABOVE GROUND CONCRETE PROTECTION USING MASTERSEAL 300 H EXCAVATION COOLING WATER OUTFALL CHAMBER Welding of Earthing Lugs on East West Piperack (SR0099A &B) TERMINATION DETAIL TO PROTECTIVE MEMBRANE AROUND RCC COLUMNS SUPPORTING THE STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMNS FOR PIPE RACKS CASE (1) WITH ALUMINIUM BEAD CASE (2) WITH REBATE CASE (3) GRAVEL FILL CASE (4) PAVING ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING 2 PIPES 1 FOR 20” RAW ETHANE & 1 FOR 6” PROPANE FIRST STREET Operating Authority ENTRY 2 #s ROAD CROSSINGS FOR LAYING 1 FOR 14” DESALINATED WATER 1 FOR 8”POTABLE WATER & 1 FOR 20” RAW ETHANE 1 FOR 8” NATURAL GAS 1 FOR 6” PROPANE AVENUE ‘C’ AT FIRE STATION PAINTING ADMINISTRATION BUILDING EXTERNAL CONCRETE ADMINISTRATION BUILDING PROTECTION HAND EXCAVATION TO INSTALL TELEPHONE DUCTS BETWEEN BOX NO. 20 TO TELECOM CENTRE DRILLING OF HOLES ON PIPE RACK & STRUCTURES ON SITE FILLING AROUND ALL THE PIPES WITHIN THE Plant AREA TERMINATION DETAIL TO PROTECTIVE MEMBRANE AROUND RCC COLUMNS SUPPORTING THE STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMNS FOR PIPE RACKS CASE (1) WITH ALUMINIUM BEAD CASE (2) WITH REBATE CASE (3) GRAVEL FILL CASE (4) PAVING PRECASTING MAN HOLES CATCH BASIN AND VALVE CHAMBERS Top DIRECTIONAL BORING FOR LAYING SLEEVES FOR 2 PIPES 1 # 20” RAW ETHANE & 1 # 6” PROPANE Operating Authority Plant REFINERY ENTRY ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING 2 PIPES 1 FOR 20” RAW ETHANE & 1 FOR 6” PROPANE FIRST STREET Operating Authority ENTRY 2 #s ROAD CROSSINGS FOR LAYING 1 FOR 14” DESALINATED WATER 1 FOR 8”POTABLE WATER & 1 FOR 20” RAW ETHANE 1 FOR 8” NATURAL GAS 1 FOR 6” PROPANE AVENUE ‘C’ AT FIRE STATION PAINTING ADMINISTRATION BUILDING ADMINISTRATION BUILDING GRC PANEL FIXING Top Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 4 of ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING 2 PIPES 1 FOR 20” RAW ETHANE & 1 FOR 6”PROPANE AVENUE ‘C’ EARTHWORKS SYSTEM SURVEY ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING 84”G R E PAIR SEAWATER COOLING LINES AT AVENUE ‘D’ / CORNICHE JUNCTION ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING 84”G R E PAIR SEAWATER COOLING LINES AT AVENUE ‘D’ / CORNICHE JUNCTION TENNIS COURTS SURFACING PRECASTING LIGHTING FOUNDATIONS POLES Top SEA WATER SURGE BASIN CONCRETE PROTECTION MASTER SEAL 550 SEA WATER SURGE BASIN JOINT SEAL CONCRETE COATING OF USING MASTERSEAL 550 STRUCTURES LIGHTING FOUNDATIONS POLES ABOVE GROUND CONCRETE PROTECTION SEAWATER SURGE BASIN PAINTING SUB STATIONS PULL PITS ROAD CROSSING TO MAKE GOOD WEARING COURSE OVER COMPLETED 1# FOR 14” DESALINATED WATER & 1# FOR 8”POTABLE WATER AVENUE ‘C’ PAINTING SUB STATIONS ELECTRICAL TRENCHES & INSTRUMENTATION ELECTRICAL TRENCHES & INSTRUMENTATION PULL PITS ROAD CROSSING TO MAKE GOOD WEARING COURSE OVER COMPLETED 132 KV ELECTRIC CABLE AVENUE ‘C’ PULL PITS ROAD CROSSING TO MAKE GOOD (temporarily) WEARING COURSE OVER COMPLETED 132 KV ELECTRIC CABLE AVENUE ‘C’ DRINKING CONNECTION WATER Top GROUTING TO STEEL BEARINGS ON RING BEAMS EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WATER TANK TANKS PROTECTION TO TRANSFORMER FOUNDATION SIDES IN SUB STATIONS WITH ALUMINIUM BEAD TERMINATION FOR BELOW GROUND AND MASTERSEAL 300H FOR ABOVE GROUND IN GRAVEL FILL AREA TIMBER DOORS FIXING ADMINISTRATION BUILDING GROUTING TO STEEL BEARINGS ON RING BEAMS TANKS EXCAVATION WATER TANK FOR CCB UNDERGROUND CCB SOAKAWAY CHAMBERS EPOXY FLOORING BUILDINGS VINYL WALL COVERING BUILDINGS RUBBER FLOORING (BUILDINGS) RUBBER FLOORING (BUILDINGS) EPOXY FLOORING BUILDINGS DRY WALL LININGS BUILDINGS RUBBER FLOORING (BUILDINGS) EPOXY FLOORING BUILDINGS RUBBER FLOORING (BUILDINGS) RUBBER FLOORING (BUILDINGS) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 5 of SUSPENDED CEILINGS ALL BUILDINGS PIT 21 WATER CONNECTION Top REPAIR OF SCREEDS CONCRETE FLOOR REPAIR OF SCREEDS CONCRETE FLOOR CEMENT BASED NON SHRINK GROUTING TO FOUNDATION BASES USING MASTERFLOW 928 T Top KERBS & INTERLOCKING BLOCKS PAVING AROUND BUILDINGS ERECTION OF STEEL STRUCTURES (FOR HIGHER LEVELS) CENTRAL CONTROL BUILDING CERAPlant Operating Authority TILES FLOORING SYSTEM BLACK TOP REPAIR IST STREET BETWEEN AVENUE C & B RESIN INJECTION TO LEAKING JOINT SEA WATER SURGE BASIN FIRE WATER LINE EXCAVATION AROUND CONSUMER RECEIPT STATION EPOXY GROUTING TO VIBRATING INSTALLATION BASES USING MASTERFLOW 648 CP GENERAL FOUNDATIONS VINYL FLOORING BUILDINGS CONCRETE PLACEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PRECAST RCC COVERS CABLE & INSTRUMENTATION TRENCHES REPAIR TO FLOOR SCREED LEVELS RESIN INJECTION TO LEAKING JOINT SEA WATER SURGE BASIN REPAIR OF SINGLE LEAF SWING GATES RESIN INJECTION TO LEAKING JOINT SEA WATER SURGE BASIN ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING 1 FOR 20” RAW ETHANE 1 FOR 6” PROPANE FIRST STREET TREATMENT TO MOVED EXPANSION JOINTS SEA WATER SURGE BASIN ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING 1 FOR 20” RAW ETHANE 1 FOR 6” PROPANE FIRST STREET 2 #s ROAD CROSSINGS FOR LAYING 1 FOR 20” RAW ETHANE 1 FOR 8” NATURAL GAS 1 FOR 6” PROPANE & 1 FOR 14”DESALINATED WATER 1FOR 8” POTABLE WATER AVENUE -D ROAD CROSSING TO INSTALL CULVERT FOR 1# 14” DESALINATED WATER CORNICHE ROAD / ROAD C AT GUP GATE NOTH Top TESTING OF FRESH CONCRETE ON SITE Top ROAD CROSSING TO INSTALL CULVERT FOR 1 # 14” DESALINATED WATER AVENUE ‘C’ ROAD GUP GATE EAST MAIN ENTRANCE Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 6 of ROAD CROSSING TO INSTALL CULVERT FOR 1 # 14” DESALINATED WATER AVENUE ‘C’ ROAD GUP GATE EAST MAIN ENTRANCE REPLACEMENT OF MISALIGNED ANCHOR BOLTS IN FOUNDATION 55-VV-906 USING RENDEROC LAX TRA BUILDINGS SCREEDS FOR VINYL AND EPOXY FLOOR FINISHES DIRECTIONAL BORING AT 3# LOCATIONS FOR 14”DESALINATED WATER PIPE CORNICHE ROAD NORTH OF GUP EPOXY SKIRTING ON DRY LINING ROAD CROSSING TO INSTALL CULVERT FOR 1 # 14” DESALINATED WATER AVENUE ‘C’ ROAD GUP GATE EAST MAIN ENTRANCE BUILDINGS SCREEDS FOR VINYL AND EPOXY FLOOR FINISHES REPLACEMENT OF MISALIGNED ANCHOR BOLTS IN FOUNDATION 55-VV-906 USING RENDEROC LAX TRA BUILDINGS SCREEDS FOR VINYL AND EPOXY FLOOR FINISHES DIRECTIONAL BORING AT 3# LOCATIONS FOR 14”DESALINATED WATER PIPE CORNICHE ROAD NORTH OF Operating Authority DIRECTIONAL BORING AT 3# LOCATIONS FOR 14”DESALINATED WATER PIPE CORNICHE ROAD NORTH OF GUP EPOXY SKIRTING ON DRY LINING REPAIR TO LIFT CLADDING PANEL ADMINISTRATION BUILDING ROAD CROSSING AT FIRE STATION- FIRST STREET FOR LAYING 2 # 100 mm SLEEVES FOR TELEPHONE CABLES ROAD CROSSINGS TO CONSTRUCT BOX CULVERTS OFH 2&3 CORNICHE ROAD ETHYLENE EXPORT ROOF & SIDE CLADDING – Plant AREA DIRECTIONAL BORING AT 3# LOCATIONS FOR 14”DESALINATED WATER PIPE CORNICHE ROAD NORTH OF Operating Authority EPOXY SKIRTING IN CENTRAL CONTROL BUILDING & SUB STATIONS ON DRY LINING ROAD SURFACE REINSTATEMENT OVER BOX CULVERT CROSSINGS FIXING SHEETING PANELS WALL & ROOF CLADDING SEA WATER SURGE BASIN CLOSING THE STRUCTURAL GAP ON THE ROOF, WALL & BASE SLAB Top FIXING SHEETING PANELS WALL & ROOF CLADDING HDPE PIPES BUTT FUSION ROAD CROSSINGS TO INSTALL CULVERTS OFH 4 & 5 CORNICHE ROAD ETHYLENE EXPORT MDPE DRINKING WATER LINE – NY LINES REINSTATEMENT TO ‘DAMAGE CAUSED FLARE PIPE RACK COLUMN MEMBER 01537’ AT GRID 19A REINSTATEMENT TO ‘DAMAGE CAUSED FLARE PIPE RACK COLUMN MEMBER 01537’ AT GRID 19A FOUNDATIONS ALONG FENCE BELOW ‘FERTIL OVER HEAD CONVEYOR’ FOR PIPE RACK LEADING TO SEA Maintenance Warehouse Overcoating To Epoxy Painted Surface With Mastertop Top Coat 44P Access to Corridors & Walkway Excavation for 200 pair Telecom Route (Direct Buried) parallel to Avenue D & 3rd street Manual Excavation 200 pair Telecom Road Crossing @ Access road to GASCO camp @ C / L, co-ordinate N 2666305 / avenue C Roads Bituminous Concrete Surfacing Roads Bituminous Concrete Surfacing Hand Excavation for 200 pair Telecom Route (Direct Buried) parallel to Avenue C 200 pair Telecom Road Crossing at Avenue D / 3rd Street Intersection along E 676976 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 7 of Manual Excavation 200 pair Telecom Road Crossing @ Access road to Operating Authority camp @ C / L, co-ordinate N 2666940 / avenue C REINFORCEMENT RECEIVAL & FABRICATION REMOVAL OF CONTAMINATED SOIL BLINDING CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT FORMWORK ERECTION CONCRETE TO PAVED AREAS EXCAVATION STRUCTURES & BACKFILL TO TELEPHONE CABLE TO SITE OFFICE ELECTRIC CABLE FROM RLIP SUBSTATION TO Civil Contractor CAMP WATER SUPPLY TO Civil Contractor CAMP ADMINISTRATION BUILDING SUBSTRUCTURE WASTE MANAGEMENT SEA WATER BASIN EXCAVATION FOR ETHANE & PROPANE GAS PIPELINE INTERCONNECTION GENERAL #1 Top Site Preparation & Earth Work Top Index Scope - Reference documents – Definitions – Responsibilities – Safety – Method – Equipment - Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence of activities for the site preparation works related to the Company Petrochemical project. The extent of these activities are defined upon the attached site plan (Not included with this statement). Refer to indicative google photos. Reference documents Specifications for: Site preparation,Excavation & backfill for underground installations,Fill, Grading and Paving,Testing Laboratory,Geotechnical Investigation Definitions GE PSM SE SO QM/QE IS ST PPE Geotechnical Engineer Project Site Manager Site Engineer Safety Officer Quaity Manager/Quality Engineer Infrastructure Superintendent Survey Team Personal Protective Equipment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 8 of Responsibilities It is an overall responsibility of the PSM to ensure that the site preparation activities are conducted according to the project specifications. PSM shall arrange all required resources. The IS shall ensure that the site preparation activities are conducted according to this method statement as well complying with all specifications. The GE shall ensure that the activities are conducted according to the project specifications and this method statement. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities, the workforce shall receive a toolbox talk on the project site as well as on general safety requirements. SO shall ensure that the persons being inducted on site are well aware of the safety procedure to be implemented on site for the activity concerned.All persons upon the site shall wear PPE issued to them. Where possible hazards may arise from excavation activities, the necessary safety measures shall be taken to prevent accident or injury at all times. This may include provision of signage, barriers, watchman and lighting.Where work upon existing services is required, the necessary authority, permits and safety equipment shall be attained prior to the activity commencing. Scanning of existing services shall be conducted by suitable methods. Method The survey team shall locate and mark all services that are present upon the site (This includes above ground services as well as buried services). These services, (Electric, telephone, gas, oil, chemical, water etc), shall be clearly marked using stakes and warning tapes, reflected upon a site drawing and the issues raised with the client. The survey team shall also mark upon the site plan all obstructions, structures and developments. Any obstruction encountered during excavation activities shall be plotted and recorded. Where hazardous material is encountered, it shall be identified and isolatedin compliance with the safety procedures under SO supervision. The client shall be informed & hazardous material be collected and removed to a licensed tipping place. The details of the material and tipping arrangements shall be documented for review by the client as appropriate. Refer to Method statement Removal of hazardous materials. Existing structures, fences and developments shall be demolished in a safe manner as sitestripping activities proceed. The necessary permits, approvals and permission shall be obtained from the concerned authorities prior to the commencement of the activity. The method of removal of these existing elements shall usually be conducted by dozer or breaker. Where necessary otherwise, discussions on site shall be made concerning alternate methods of removal when the full extent of these structures are exposed. The removal of the topsoil shall include all vegetation and rubbish material from the work site. Prior to the start of topsoil removal, the surveyor shall peg out the haul roads to be used by the construction equipment to execute all the site preparation activities. These roads shall be constructed by leveling of the existing terrain. Grade pegs shall be set to an agreed grid to Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 9 of indicate existing grade and reduced grade. Dependant upon the quality of the existing soil where the roads is to be built, suitable compactable fill may be imported or re-located from other parts of the site. The material shall be approved by the GE & QM/QE jointly. These roads shall be maintained as the work proceeds. Where required, water shall be spayed for dust control. For general removal of the topsoil activities using appropriate equipment, the areas concerned shall be excavated and graded to levels that ensure adequate surface water drainage. The GE/QM/QE shall monitor the activity to ensure that the topsoil material is removed. Sampling and testing of the resultant material shall be conducted for specification compliance & proper compaction. Upon completion of the topsoil removal activities where appropriate, the exposed surface shall be scarified, moistened and compacted to achieve the required density criteria. The areas shall be divided into manageable sections that be defined upon sketches. The GE shall monitor and test all sections. The results of the tests shall be recorded upon the relevant QC format. The number of tests conducted shall reflect the specification requirement. In excavation areas, the GE shall review the material to be excavated to ascertain its suitability for re-use as fill material. This excavated material shall be transported to areas that require filling. The material shall be deposited onto the areas to receive filling, leveled, moisture conditioned and compacted. If necessary, stockpiling may be required. The excavated areas shall be divided into manageable sections, which be defined upon sketches. The excavated areas shall be monitored by the GE to ensure that any unsuitable material does not appear. Where unsuitable material appears, it shall be removed. The excavated formation surface shall be treated by scarification, moistened and compacted according to the specification criteria. All areas shall be tested and the results recorded. Where areas are to receive fill, the material that has been excavated shall be transported to the fill area, tipped, leveled, moisture conditioned and compacted. The material shall be spread and leveled in 200mm layers. The areas to be filled shall be divided into manageable sections that be defined upon a sketch. The fill layer shall be moistened and compacted to achieve the required specification criteria. No further fill activity shall be conducted upon an area that has not been approved and released by the GE. Attention shall be observed at edges and slopes, to ensure that compaction criteria are achieved. Additional layers of fill material shall be placed similarly as described above until the desired elevation has been achieved. Production procedure. Verification exercise for fill activity had been conducted to establish the economical and effective method for the fill activity. Import and place fill to controlled areas of approximately 25m wide by 100 - 150m long. Spread and level the imported fill. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. A time gap of approximately two hours is allowed for the water to soak into the fill material. Vibrating drum rollers. Vibrating rollers shall now compact the fill layer in a logical sequence that compacts the fill layer uniformly. Excavators & Loaders. Grading and Paving. All these statements constitute management documents. The fill layer is mixed again with the grader leaving the fill level to the correct grade. Assume there was nothing prior to construction & whole site was filled for preparationworks. #2 Protection of existing services Top Index Scope . for the identification.. protection and / or removal / relocation of existing services upon the site.Reference documents – Definitions – Responsibilities – Safety – Method – Equipment - Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the procedure that can be implemented.(certain sections re to record services within the specifications) Definitions GE PSM SE SO QM/QE IS ST PPE Geotechnical Engineer Project Site Manager Site Engineer Safety Officer Quaity Manager/Quality Engineer Infrastructure Superintendent Survey Team Personal Protective Equipment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 10 of Add water to the fill layer by passing the water tanker over the fill layer. The water tanker should pass over the layer twice. Refer to indicative google photos as incuded as a facility. Testing of the layer shall be conducted according to specification requirements. The layer is now mixed with the grader until a uniform blend of moist material is achieved.. . A time period of approximately one-hour is allowed for this water to soak into the fill layer. Dumper trucks. Fill…. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Reference documents Specifications: Site preparation…. Additional water is added by passing the water tanker over the layer in a uniform sequence. Water tankers Attachment None. Equipment Dozers & Graders. The SE shall ensure that the excavation is rightly carried out. 2006 Page 11 of Responsibilities It is the overall responsibility of the PSM to ensure that the identification. A line of pegs shall be positioned to indicate the route of the existing services. The use or restriction of specific mechanical equipment whilst locating these services shall be implemented. The redundant service shall be removed under the supervision of the IS according to the agreed criteria of that relevant authority. protection and / or removal / rerouting to existing services are conducted in a safe methodical sequence as defined by this method statement as well as directed by the relevant authorities. All these statements constitute management documents. existing services shall be located and exposed by hand excavation. Method From the existing record drawings provided by the relevant authorities controlling Plant. The ST shall inform the IS about the exact location of the services relative to the warning flags. The necessary permits that may be required to work near these services shall be obtained. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities. Any special conditions imposed upon these permits shall be implemented. Should an existing service be disbanded or made redundant. The works were executed for major oil companies. the ST shall mark that location upon the ground using spray paint or small pegs. only manual excavation shall be carried out. small hand dug pits shall be excavated to expose live service to ensure its location. that shall be exposed to allow for the inspection as well as confirmation of its status by the authorities. On ten meters (10m) either side of the route of the existing live service shall be erected posts at suitable centres.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Where an existing live service remains working or serving during the site preparation activity such as the 33KVA electric cable. The ST shall accurately plot and record all existing services upon the site. The warning tape and / or nylon cord to indicate and protect the route of the service shall be provided. The ST shall check and accurately record these services. The IS through the EPC Contractor representative shall request the relevant authority to review the excavated service to confirm the status as well as instruct for necessary action required for removal or diversion. The SO shall ensure that excavations are safely carried out. Generally. where appropriate. Upon location of the live service. A nylon cord with warning tape streamers shall be strung between the posts to clearly indicate the service and its route. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . At necessary locations along the route of the existing live service indicated by the ST. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the workforce shall receive a safety induction talk on the project site safety requirements. The IS shall coordinate investigation of existing services with the Plant authorities. shall also be displayed at sufficient locations conveniently within the view along the route. Signboards that indicate what exactly the live service within the marked corridor is. that existing live service shall be protected in compliance with the regulations. excavation. #3 Re-routing of 33kv cables Top Index Scope. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. It is the overall responsibility of the PSM to ensure that the identification. The SE shall ensure that the excavation is rightly carried out. Nylon cord. re-routing. The Safety Officer shall periodically check the condition of the barriers where necessary refurbishment is conducted. testing and backfill. isolation.Responsibilities. Warning tape. Survey Equipment. All these statements constitute management documents. This method statement includes the location. Record Drawings Definitions GE PSM SE SO QM/QE IS ST PPE Geotechnical Engineer Project Site Manager Site Engineer Safety Officer Quaity Manager/Quality Engineer Infrastructure Superintendent Survey Team Personal Protective Equipment Responsibilities The EPC Contractor PSM shall ensure the required permits from Operating Authority are obtained prior to the commencement of this activity. .Equipment- Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the procedure that can be implemented for re-routing of the existing 33KV electric cable that crosses the project site.Method.Safety. 2006 Page 12 of Where temporary roads cross existing cables.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.Definitions. Attachment None. The works were executed for major oil companies. Reference documents Site drawing. Equipment Excavation Tools. sufficient suitable fill material shall be placed on top of the cables to afford adequate protection by distributing the axle loadings safely. Attachments depends on the available record drawings. jointing. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The IS shall coordinate investigation of existing services with the Plant authorities. Pegs. protection and / or removal / rerouting to existing services are conducted in a safe methodical sequence as defined by this method statement as well as directed by the relevant authorities.Reference documents. The ST shall accurately plot and record all existing services upon the site. marked & a barrier erected on either side clearly defining the route across the site. Method The existing route of the 33KV cable shall be identified. the same technique shall be adopted.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Generally. only manual excavation shall be carried out. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities. Route markers shall be placed with the splice joints surveyed and recorded. The trench shall be backfilled with approved material. Where joints occur to the cable either at the two termination points with the old cable or along the length of the new cable. The route proposed for the new 33KV cable on the AFC drawing shall be identified & marked with pegs by the ST. Approved jointing kits shall be utilized. . Only specifically approved mechanical equipment whilst locating these services shall be used. a cable tugger fitted with load cell control may be utilized. sufficient cable overlap to allow for the jointing shall be provided. where appropriate. The backfill activity shall continue until the trench is completely filled. 2006 Page 13 of The SO shall ensure that excavations are safely carried out & ensure that all safety issues are addressed as defined upon the work permits. The new cable shall be correctly placed to line and level upon the sand bed. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Cable tiles shall be placed on top of the sand above the new cable. Any special conditions imposed upon these permits shall be implemented. The cable shall be unwound from the cable drum by pulling. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. The new cable supplied by EPC Contractor shall be laid into the trench according to established methods and standards that would include placing of the cable drum on a cable trolley and rollers. The insulation value of the new cable shall be tested by 5KV motorized megger. Wherever joints occur. If required. the workforce shall receive a safety induction talk on the project site safety requirements. the cable shall be covered with dune sand to the required thickness evenly. The appropriate sand bed shall be placed within the trench. The manufacturers recommendations relating to the installation of these jointing kits shall be followed. All these statements constitute management documents. The necessary permits that may be required to work near these services shall be obtained. Excavation shall commence to the line and required level. An experienced cable jointer under the supervision of an electrical engineer shall conduct all the jointing. Upon the EPC Contractor Electrical Engineers approval. the entire length of the new cable shall be tested. The old cable shall be hand dug. The cable shall be subjected to a pressure test of 67KV DC for 15 minutes on the cable between each core and earth. The works were executed for major oil companies. cable tiles and backfill material. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Once the cables have been jointed. the Refinery Electrical engineer shall authorize the energizing of the new cable route. The necessary earthing and isolation to the cables shall be conducted prior to the commencement of jointing the old cable to the new. Equipment Excavator. Electrical engineer in coordination with the EPC Contractor engineer shall ensure that the old cables are identified and isolated under the supervision of the Refinery Supervisor within the appropriate substation. The disbanded cable route shall be excavated to expose the old cable.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.Cable rollers.Dump trucks. EPC Contractor method statement for conducting cable Diversion shall be complied with. 2006 Page 14 of Upon completion of the jointing of the new cable length. (Since this statement may be submitted by the Civil Works subcontractor on behalf of the EPC contractor. these shall be tested by mega test at 5KV and HV test at 53KVDC to establish its integrity and insulation.Cable drum trolley. The remaining cores shall be connected to earth. A program to be developed by all parties of power outage windows shall be produced for the tie-in activities of the cables. the necessary permits shall be obtained. Prior to the excavation at the points where the new cable is to be connected to existing 33KV cable. Upon completion of the cable testing activities. The cables shall be jointed in the same manner as described previously. . The engineer shall measure the leakage current. All these statements constitute management documents. An area sufficient to conduct the jointing of the cable shall be excavated. These drums shall be stored on site for EPC Contractor disposal. All readings shall be recorded upon the appropriate form.Cable tugger with load cell Attachment EPC Contractor standard method statement for cable diversion. the EPC standard method statement is required to be attached ) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The old cable shall be removed onto the surplus cable drums from which the new cable was coiled. The disbanded cable shall be removed from the new jointed cable by excavating and rolling the cable to allow the new cable route corridor to be covered with sand. The testing shall be witnessed by the EPC Contractor engineer. Allowing for the 1:1. The formation shall be watered and compacted with a plate compactor to achieve compaction Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Once the bulk excavation is completed. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements.. Excavation The trench shall be excavated to the correct width. the edges shall be fixed in such a way that full length of pipes are used avoiding unnecessary cutting.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Any adopted process that may have a particular Safety risk. The works were executed for major oil companies. The Construction Foreman shall actually execute the works controlling the workforce as necessary all according to the directions by the site engineer or the superintendant. jointing and testing of the concrete pipe culverts. Reference documents Specification…. length and formation by using a Hydraulic backhoe. Definitions GE PSM SE SO QM/QE IS ST PPE Geotechnical Engineer Project Site Manager Site Engineer Safety Officer Quaity Manager/Quality Engineer Infrastructure Superintendent Survey Team Personal Protective Equipment Responsibilities The CS shall Plan and Resource the concrete culvert laying activities to ensure that these are Carried out complying with the contract documents. . Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities. The center line and the actual trench width shall be set out by marking on ground. Method Setting Out The edge co-ordinates of the concrete pipe shall be calculated from the information on IFC drawing. shortcomings analysed and addressed accordingly meeting the operational requirement. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.Drawing No…. shall be assessed. All these statements constitute management documents.5 slope. 2006 Page 15 of Top Concrete Pipe Culverts Index Scope-Reference documents-Definitions-Responsibilities-Safety-Method-Equipment-Attachment Scope The purpose of this Statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the laying. wooden pegs with elevation marked on them shall be used for indication to complete the remaining excavation to accurate formation levels. The completed pipework shall be inspected and approved. The spigot shall then be drawn into the socket using a 5 tonTirfor. compacted. The concrete pipes shall be transported from the store to the location of the trench and gently lowered keeping the socket end upstream into the trenches with a crane using belt slings only. inspected and tested. Jointing shall be carried out. The bedding and surround material shall be placed in layers and watered and compacted until the bedding and surround material reaches 300mm above the top of the pipe. The works were executed for major oil companies. A list of Do’s and Don’t’s provided by the manufacturer is attached herewith. Upon completion of the Jointing operation. The top elevation of the pipe shall be checked to ensure that the pipe lebvel is accurate. The compacted formation shall be inspected and field tested prior to the commencement of the Bedding activity. Backfill Once the pipes are laid to the True gradient and alignment as described above. All these statements constitute management documents. 1 / PipefitterNos. The operation shall be repeated until all the pipes are laid. 2 / LabourersNos. Each joint shall be visually inspected from inside the pipe. Equipment Crane 20Ton 1 No / Flat Bed TrailorPart time / Excavator Backhoe1 No / Trifor 5 To 2Nos / Fork liftParttime / Plate Compactor1 No / Water Tanker Part time Labour ForemanNo. 2006 Page 16 of of 90% of MDD in accordance with specification documents. Top Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The spigot end of the pipes shall be cleaned using a cloth with special care taken to clean the recess which shall be lubricated with liquid soap following gasket placement in position. Excavated suitable material shall then be placed in 200mm layer. Bedding material shall be placed to a thickness of 150mm. Bedding Once the excavation is approved. watered and compacted in accordance with the specification. Pipe Work The socket positions shall be marked on the Bedding and Hand excavated to ensure that the barrel of the pipe rests firmly on the bedding with spigot ends remaining clean for installing the gaskets. The compacted surface shall be inspected & field samples tested for approval. Supports shall be placed at one end. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . The pipes shall be laid back to back to the correct orientation. Bedding Material shall be carefully placed along the sides and in between the pipes by means of a backhoe. the Bedding material shall be packed below the pipes so that the barrel rests firmly on the bedding keeping the pipe intact. The spigot shall be so placed that the gasket is in contact with the entry taper at the socket evenly all around. 4 Attachment Manufacture’s datasheet. The works were executed for major oil companies. Formwork system The basic formwork supporting system shall be as designed and supplied by M / s. Civil Contractor Site Engineer shall check and confirm the adequacy of the system. the whole form work shall then be checked by the supplier’s expert & the adequacy certified in as by third party. these shall be securely located. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Method The surveyor shall set out. check the line and levels to establish the correct positions. Definitions E PSM CM Engineer Project Site Manager. All these statements constitute management documents. Where service inserts (ducts pipes etc) are shown on IFC drawings. Drawing No. The vertical and horizontal reinforcement to the wall shall be installed according to the IFC drawings. If so required.installed as well as checked. The kicker to the base of the wall sections shall be planned to be cast along with the foundation. The supplier of formwork shall provide all design drawings for approval as well as for implementation. Formwork and Coating. Upon completion of the suspended slab formwork system particularly. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The wall starter bars shall be installed in place in accordance with the IFC drawings for the foundations. Reference documents Specification Concrete Construction. The continuity testing of the reinforcement for the cathodic protection requirement shall be conducted and witnessed by the QC department. The results shall be recorded. shall be added by the civil contractor. Surface forming materials such as plies & timber scantlings etc. Construction Manager. Giffin Scaffco. Connection bosses shall be fixed as detailed on the approved drawings. 2006 Page 17 of #5 Concreting to walls of Central control building / laboratory Super – structure activities Top Index Scope / Reference documents / Definitions / Formwork Design / Method Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the erection of formwork and placement of structural concrete to the wall sections of the CCB. Additional bracing and support props shall be added by Civil Contractor in compliance with the formwork design provided by the supplier. . Specification Concrete Buildings. This access shall allow the steel fixers. Attachment None. the structural concrete shall be poured by pumping. The wall height shall terminate near the underside of the roof slab. This access shall allow the steel fixers. Where applicable. The walls shall be prepared and cast in sections not exceeding 6. After all the inspections of the preparatory works. The works were executed for major oil companies. Curing shall be carried out according to the specification requirements. A safe means of access to a working platform as well as working platform shall be erected for this formwork.0m length where a construction and or contraction joint shall be formed using plywood. The surveyor shall check the alignment of the wall. carpenters and concrete crew a safe working area. The height and width of the wall section shall be agreed with EPC Contractor/ Engineer. Equipment Crane. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. The preparatory works shall be checked by the site engineer who then request the QC. #6 Concrete pipe culverts Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 18 of One side of the formwork shall be erected and braced.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Vibrators Hand Tools. where the remaining top part of the wall can be cast along with the roof slab. The remaining wall form shall be erected and braced. . The finished reinforcement and formwork configuration shall be inspected on an ongoing basis by the Civil Contractor QC department who in turn obtain concrete pouring permission from EPC Contractor. This concrete surface at joint location shall be scabbled prior to the next section is formed formed. the concrete pouring activity shall be carried out in lifts not more than 450 mm layers. All service openings shall be boxed for block outs / ducted onto the formwork. the laboratory portion outer wall form shall be erected with the profile strips prefixed to the formwork. A safe means of access to a working platform as well as working platform shall be erected for this formwork. carpenters and concrete crew a safe working area. Having obtained approval. Concrete Pump. The concrete pipes shall be transported from the store to the location of the trench and gently lowered into the trenches with a crane using belt slings only. Bedding material shall be placed to a thickness of 150mm. It shall also be ensured that spigot ends remain clean to the same standard as were while installing the gaskets. . The pipes shall be laid back to back to the correct orientation. Reference documents Specification Specification Drawing No. Pipe Work The socket positions shall be setout on the Bedding. to ensure that they are Constructed according to the Drawings and Specification. Manual excavation shall be carried out for socket portion to ensure that the barrel of the pipe rests firmly on the bedding. The compacted formation shall be inspected and field compaction tested prior to the commencement of the Bedding activity. tested and approved. Any process that may have a particular Safety risk. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities.5 slope & fixed in such a way that full length of pipes are used without pipe cutting. All these statements constitute management documents. directing the workforce as necessary. Method Setting Out The edge co-ordinates of the pipe shall be calculated from the information on the drawing as well as allowing for the 1:1. Bedding Once the excavation is completed & approved. wooden pegs shall be used showing the elevations marked on them to guide & complete the excavation to required formation levels. Construction Superintendent Responsibilities The CS shall Plan and Resource the concrete lining activities. Excavation The trench shall be excavated to the correct width. The formation shall be watered and compacted using a plate compactor to achieve compaction of 90% of MDD in accordance with specification. length and formation by using a Hydraulic backhoe. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The spigot Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The compacted surface shall be inspected. The socket end shall be placed upstream. watered and compacted in compliance with the specifications. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. shall be assessed and addressed as required in consultation with the safety engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Definitions E PSM CS Engineer Project Site Manager. jointing and testing of the concrete pipe culverts. Once the bulk excavation is completed. The Construction Foreman shall actually execute the works. 2006 Page 19 of Scope The purpose of this Method Statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the laying. The center line and the actual width shall be marked on ground. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The bedding and surround material shall be placed in layers. Part time 1 No. Part time No. Backfill Once the pipes have been laid to the True gradient and alignment as described above. watered and compacted until the surround material reaches 300mm above the top of the pipe. Supports shall be placed at one end. Each joint shall be visually inspected from inside the pipe if accessible. All these statements constitute management documents. 4 Attachment Manufacture’s datasheet. Part time 1 No. Upon completion of the Jointing operation. Excavated suitable material shall then be used in compacted layers of 200mm inspected and tested until the backfilling operations are completed. 1 Nos. Bedding Material shall be carefully placed along the sides and in between the pipes by means of a backhoe. #7 Culvert crossings to avenue e and main highway. 2006 Page 20 of end of the pipes shall be cleaned using a cloth with special care taken to clean the recess which be lubricated with liquid soap following which the gasket placed in position. The spigot shall be so placed that the gasket is in contact with the entry taper/bevel at the socket evenly on circumference. The completed pipework shall be inspected and approved. The top elevation of the pipe shall be checked to ensure that the laid pipe is accurately placed to the correct alignment and elevations.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Top Index Scope Reference documents Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. the Bedding material shall be packed below the pipes so that the barrel rests firmly on the bedding and the pipe doesn’t move. The works were executed for major oil companies. A list of Do’s and Don’t’s provided by the manufacturer is attached herewith. . 2 Nos. The spigot shall then be drawn into the socket using a 5 tonTirfor. Equipment Crane 20Ton Flat Bed Trailor Excavator Backhoe Trifor 5 Ton Fork lift Plate Compactor Water Tanker Labour Foreman Pipefitter Labourers 1 No. The operation shall be repeated until all the pipes are laid. 2 Nos. The excavated asphalt shall be deposited at the tip area in the pre-agreed location. placed within a PVC duct. shall be assessed and addressed as required.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Responsibilities The CM shall plan and resource the culvert construction operation. The ditch along the side of the diversion shall be barricaded with nylon rope bearing warning tape. All these statements constitute management documents. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the project site safety requirements. . Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities. The initial excavation shall commence at the drainage ditch to the west side of avenue E and extend across avenue E up to the fibre optic cable location. Material that is to be reused shall be stockpiled. placement of culvert pipes. backfill and reinstatement to the culvert crossings on avenue E and the main highway next to the retention pond. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The cable shall be supported across the excavation. directing the workforce as necessary. The trench shall be excavated using appropriate equipment while dump trucks collect the surplus excavated earth to be removed from site to the spoil area. The works were executed for major oil companies. Concrete barriers shall be placed at the head of the diversion. Construction Manager. Any process that may have a particular safety risk. The traffic diversion scheme wilth all signs installed shall be implemented according to the attachment and monitored regularly by the safety department to ensure a smooth traffic management. including the permissions required from all authorities concerned. wrapped with polythene & tied to the support. Method The route of the culvert trench shall be set-out by the surveyor. 2006 Page 21 of Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the excavation. The existing services such as the fibre optic cable shall be located and protected. Any damage to the existing asphalt shall be repaired during the reinstatement operation. Reference documents Drawing No: Drawing No: Definitions E PSM CM Engineer Project Site Manager. The Construction Foreman shall control and monitor these activities. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. compacted and tested as previously described. .2 m. The backfill shall be reinstated above the pipe surround up to existing ground level. The site test laboratory shall conduct the field density tests & reported accordingly. compacted and tested as previously described. When this activity is completed and approved by the security police. The works were executed for major oil companies. A banksman shall be provided to monitor the excavation machine operations. The concrete culvert pipes shall be placed correctly to the line and level as shown on the IFC drawing. The temporary security fence shall be erected to the agreement and requirements of the security police. The traffic management scheme shall be removed to allow the re-use of avenue E. No damaged pipes shall be placed. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The existing security fence shall be replaced. The pipes shall be inspected for damage prior to placement. A temporary security fence outside the existing RRD area shall be erected to allow the culvert construction to continue east towards the retention pond. Backfill around the pipes shall be placed. Pipe bedding shall be placed. A pair of nylon strap shall be used to lift the pipes using a 50 ton crane and place the pipes correctly in to the trench. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The bottom of the excavated trench shall be inspected by the EPC Contractor engineer prior to the compaction activity commences. Ladder shall be located every 8 m if so required depending on length of excavation. Backfill operations shall continue up to the existing road formation level. the existing security fence can be cut and rolled back sufficiently to allow the construction activities to be conducted. then surrounded with concrete. All unsuitable material shall be removed. All these statements constitute management documents. The existing fabric shall be re-erected onto the existing poles which shall be re concreted in position. asphalt repair to the existing highway shall be conducted & avenue E road construction shall be reinstated. The pipes shall be installed within the trench after inspection for transit damage is completed. Backfill material shall be placed around the pipes in layers of 150mm thickness duly compacted & tested by the laboratory. The temporary security fence shall be removed. 2006 Page 22 of The sides of the excavation shall be sloped where the excavation depth exceeds 1. Inspection and testing of the compaction shall be conducted by the site test laboratory. The trench formation shall be inspected. When the backfill activity is completed. A ladder shall be provided for ingress and egress of the excavation. The barbed wire shall be re placed using new material where required.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The surveyor shall monitor the line and level of the excavation regularly & provide level pins for the pipe bedding. Approved bedding material shall be placed and compacted to the required levels and density values. The fibre optic cable shall be left protected by the PVC duct and polythene sheet. Reinstatement of any existing services shall be done. The spigot head on the culvert pipe shall be on the up stream end of the pipe. The next section for the culvert trench shall be excavated taking care of where existing services have been exposed to be well protected. The field density test results shall be submitted for approval. compacted and tested. The site test laboratory shall conduct the field density testing. Responsibilities The CM shall plan and resource the concrete repair activities. The works were executed for major oil companies. directing the workforce as necessary. Attachment None. This procedure shall be similarly followed in principle for any other culvert crossings on avenue E. The placement of the pipes to the correct line and level shall be carried out. Equipment Excavators. Dump trucks. Compactors. The compaction and testing of the pipe bedding shall be carried out. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The backfilling of the pipe surround shall be conducted. 2006 Page 23 of The final section of the culvert trench shall be set-out and excavated in the same sequence as the previous sections. The inlet and outlet chambers of the crossing shall be constructed. to ensure that they are implemented according to this method statement.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The Construction Foreman shall monitor the concrete repair activities. All these statements constitute management documents. Reference documents Specification Definitions E PSM CM Engineer Project Site Manager. . The reinstatement of the backfill above the pipe surround material shall be conducted. #8 Placing concrete on service Water tank 58-tk-205 foundations Top Index Scope Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the placing of concrete on service water tank foundations. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Refer to the method statement for chambers. Construction Manager. Tower lights each with 4 X 1000 Watts bulbs. Proper vibration shall be effected. concrete trucks. 2 Nos. Accers platforms shall be provided all around the ground beam on the outside formwork. Care shall be taken to ensure that concrete is placed and compacted in its final position within the time permissible form the time of batching to the time it should be compacted in accordance with the concrete production specification that may be generally 1 to 2 hours. Equipment Concrete pump. Concrete shall be continually poured from the start to the concrete por finish. Stopend forms shall be placed at opposite locations across the full width and depth to establish construction joints. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on safety requirements with special care taken to ensure adequate lighting arrangements are made. 2006 Page 24 of Safety Prior to the commencement of the concrete pour.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. Method Preparatory works shall be carried out for the form works in circular profile for which due provisions shall be made for the specialist form. No cold jointshall be allowed to form. This form shall be well supported & anchored to resist ecpected forces during the our. proper method of curing shall be carried out & continued for specified number of days. The accers platform shall be provided with Hand Rails all around. . #9 Concrete repair Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety +Method Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. rebars shall be placed & fixed in the correct positions duly inspected. After the concrete is completed. The concrete shall be poured onto the section in one go 300 to 450 mm high around and compacted with suitable vibrators. All flash setting shall be avoided by keeping the rebars lower than the air temperature. vibrators. All tests for on site concreting shall be conducted by the RMC laboratory staff duly recorded. It is proposed to cast the Ring beam in two pours. Attachment None. Aluminium ladders shall be placed at opposite ends to reach the Accers platforms from the ground levels. As parallel activity. We propose to use 2 Nos. Concrete delivery shall be planned accordingly to quantity & duration of pour to enable a smooth concreting operation. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Pin holes / blow holes Where small defects to the concrete surface has occurred such as pin holes or holes smaller than 3mm in diameter or depth. directing the workforce as necessary. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular safety risk. Where this occurs. More significant defects as described in E – H shall be subject to joint inspection / agreement between Civil Contractor. 2006 Page 25 of Scope The purpose of this method statement.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the project site safety requirements. Method Upon removal of the formwork. any loose material shall be removed by stiff brushing and then repaired as described in A above. A. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities. These should be repaired by brushing dry cement powder directly into the cracks while the concrete is less than 3 days old and covering with damp hessian. Construction Manager. the surface shall be repaired using Nitomortar FC with an approved bonding agent. Reference documents Specification Definitions E PSM CM Engineer Project Site Manager. This surface repair shall be conducted as soon as the formwork is removed whilst the concrete is still green. the concrete surface shall be inspected by the Site engineer & foreman to check surface defects. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. shall be assessed and addressed as required. C. . EPC Contractor and Company. Minor defects as described in A – D below shall be repaired as soon as practical. the concrete surface shall be cured according to the relevant procedure. Where no surface imperfections have occurred. to ensure that they are implemented according to this method statement. The repair shall then be cured in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions or agreed procedures using water or curing agent as appropriate. is to define the criteria for the concrete repair to all structures. Sand runs / scouring Water movement inside the shutter can result in a streaky appearance giving loose sandy finish. Responsibilities The CM shall plan and resource the concrete repair activities. Plastic shrinkage cracks Cracking caused by plastic shrinkage due to inadequate curing and protection of horizontal surfaces usually results in a series of diagonal cracks. B. The Construction Foreman shall monitor the concrete repair activities. All these statements constitute management documents. should be ground back to provide a smooth transition between areas. Plastic settlement cracks Cracking caused by settlement of concrete usually in deep lifts or at changes in section can result in a series of cracks which mirror the reinforcement pattern in horizontal surfaces or appear to arch on vertical surfaces. All these statements constitute management documents. the repair shall be conducted in two layers providing a scratch coat on the first layer. (Note. horizontal surfaces can appear spongy and pourous. Minor misalignments (Typically Less than 2cm) Misalignments due to shutter movements etc. The surface should then be reinstated using Nitomortar as in A above. Pourous / spongy surface Where inadequate vibration and poor finishing techniques have caused excessive bleeding. The bonding agent shall not be allowed to dry. The repair area shall then be soaked. the surrounding concrete shall be chipped away to provide adequate space to place fresh concrete around the reinforcement including removal of all soft concrete. Following grinding.. Where reinforcement is exposed in a void. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. G. the depth of the repair exceed 15mm. Formwork shall be provided to retain the fresh concrete.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Honey combing / segregation / minor voids The repair shall be conducted as soon as the formwork is removed and the repair method agreed with EPC Contractor / Engineer. H. the surface should be reinstated as in A above. The mixed material shall be trowelled firmly into the repair area. The repair shall then be cured in accordance with the agreed procedure using water or curing compound as appropriate. Care should be taken to ensure that concrete cover is maintained per specifications at all times. The works were executed for major oil companies. It shall require chipping the repair area free of laitance and exposing any voids. Incase. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The materials shall be mixed using the bonding agent and not water. The surface finishes to the repair shall be as the same standard as the surrounding concrete. The chipped area shall be soaked in and primed with a bonding agent. E. The repair shall be water cured along with the parent concrete. Fresh concrete of the same grade as the surrounding concrete shall be used to fill in the void. an approved bonding agent applied followed by working on with an approved mortar such as Master Flow 544 before the area dries out. the ground profile length should be 2-3 times the size of the maximum misalignment.a distance of one and a half times the stone size must be allowed around all exposed reinforcement). 2006 Page 26 of D. Where occurring at joints between panels. . Any such cracks should be chased out to a depth of 1015mm and filled with an epoxy mortar such as Nitomortar FC as in A above. This type of defect often occurs with plastic settlement cracks which should be treated as In G above. In this case all affected surfaces should be ground back to good concrete usually only 2-3mm below the surface. Major voids (Typically Deeper than 5cm) This repair shall consist of chipping the affected area to remove any laitance and voids. F. #10 Construction of pipe rack bases Top Index Scope Reference Documents Definition Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the Construction of the pipes rack bare foundations . Attachment None. 2006 Page 27 of All repairs noted above shall be recorded on the post-pour inspection form (QCF). Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. to ensure that they are Constructed according to the Drawings and Specification . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Documents Specifications Drawing No: Definitions E PSM CM CS Engineer Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Responsibilties The CS shall plan and resource the Construction of Pipe Rack Bases activities. It is not necessary to raise a non-conformance report provided the repairs are carried out as indicated above and agreed with EPC Contractor where necessary. The works were executed for major oil companies. The Construction Foreman shall actually execute the works. directing the workforce as necessary. Any repairs not covered by the above procedure shall be dealt with on a case-by-case basis and agreed with EPC Contractor and Company before commencing repairs. . Equipment Hand Tools. All these statements constitute management documents. Curing shall be carried out for the blinding concrete for at least two days. Steel Formwork Steel Forms as shown in the attached sketch shall be used for casting the pipe rack base foundations. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular Safety risk. The base slab formwork shall have 100mm high suspended kicker. The forms should be easily struck as well placed in position.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 28 of Safety Prior to the commencement of any activites. sides trimmed to avoid caving in. The formation shall be compacted. 3 & 5 shall be a 100mm wide strip of steel plate across the width of the column steel Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Excavation The bases shall be excavated with excavator. inspected. Site Precast Yard for foundations A precast yard shall be constructed on site at the location indicated in the attached sketch. Method It is proposed to cast the pipe rack bases and the columns at actual locations at site. The template for anchor bolts for piperack base type1. field tested and approved prior to the commencement of the blinding. C20 PBFC grade concrete shall be placed to a minimum thickness of 50mm and the top surface smoothened by steel trowel. Prior to the placement of the precast pipe rack base on it. All these statements constitute management documents. . Fosroc reebol mould release oil shall be used. A wind shield fence 2m high shall be erected on the Northern boundary as indicated in the proposed location in accordance with clause ………………… of the specification.Pipe Rack Bases The center lines of the Anchor bolt group shall be set out and offset provided 2m on either side of the foundation as reference line for blinding using manual methods of setting out. The works were executed for major oil companies. The method of Construction of the pipe rack bases can be summarized in the following activities. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. mass concrete infill shall be placed as required in accordance with the drawings as necessary. Blinding Concrete The formation area to receive the blinding shal be prepared to the design levels & profiles. Setting Out Excavation Blinding Concrete Formwork Steel Reinforcement Concrete Construction Concrete Protection Construction of Columns with Anchor Bolts Backfilling Grouting Setting Out. Separate forms shall be used for the bases and columns . shall be assessed as required. shall be carried out. Inspection shall be conducted to the ITP requirement. Lifting recess plugs shall be installed in position with a Template. 2006 Page 29 of formwork at the top. the unit shall be moved to the correct position accurately. The template for piperack type 2. Reinforcement shall be timely fixed in place on the casting beds. The widths of the template shall be kept to the minimum to allow room for concrete vibrators. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. On location preparatory pf preceeding activities shall be completed prior to the transportation of the bases. The Base shall be poured and compacted with vibrators. the formwork shall be stripped after 36hrs and the concrete cured for a minimum period of 7 days . Once the column is cast. 6. The bases shall be transported to the actual location of installation. & 7 shall be similar in Construction type with 2 plates and a connecting piece. Anchor Bolts & Steel Reinforcement Steel Reinforcement cut and bent to the required shape and size shall be available on site. 4. The screed shall be cast accurately to the actual dimension of the bone of the pipe rack foundation. the polythene sheets and hessian shall be removed and the concrete faces allowed to dry for atleast 24hrs during which time minor repairs such as filling up of blow holes etc.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The surfaces shall be smoothened with steel trowel. The position of Anchor bolts shall be rechecked with a Theodalite and accuracy of the installation certified by a surveyor. Lifting. Using a jack of adequate capacity. Casting Concrete Formwork applied with a fresh coat of mould release oil shall be placed in position around the already assembled steel reinforcement. Formwork for the column shall be installed the following day. The crane shall be used to lift the pipe rack base from the Trailor down onto the screed surface. All supports shall be fixed in position. All these statements constitute management documents. vertical faces shall be painted as described above. Curing shall ne carried out. The plumb and alignment shall be checked and the anchor bolts with sleeves installed and held in position by the template . The faces shall be wiped clean with a wet sponge and surface prepared to receive the first coat of protective painting. Transportation and Installation After completion of the curing. Traceability The pipe rack bases shall be numbered and the date & time of casting marked on the concrete. . The column and the top sides of the boxes. Lifting Hooks Lifting hooks shall be inserted into the correct location & properly fastened so as not to be dislocated during concrete pouring. Back filling Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. certified cranes of required capacity shall be used to lift the pipe rack base from the casting bed to the flat low bed trailor. Protective Coatings Once the curing is completed as stated above. The bottom of the base slab shall be left without painting. Fosroc Nitocote ET 402 shall be mixed with a slow speed electric drill and spray applied with an airless sprayer equipment to the required thickness of 1mm as a single high build coat in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions. The works were executed for major oil companies. 1 No. 1 No. . Labour Casting Engineer Placing Engineer Casting Foreman Placing Foreman Carpenters Steel fixers Masons Laborers Attachment Manufacture’s datasheet. The fill material shall be pre mixed with water 3% more than the optimum moisture content for the daily requirement. 1 No. #11 Excavation in Operating Authority controlled areas Top Index Scope Reference Documents Definition Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the methodology that shall be implemented. 1 No. 20 Nos. 30 Nos. 1 No. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Backfilling with selected suitable fill material shall commence. The compacted surface shall be inspected. for construction activities that shall be conducted in areas under Operating Authority control. Layers of premixed fill material shall be placed to a thickness of 200 mm and compacted properly. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. These areas shall primarily be the easement areas. Anchor Bolts shall remain protected with PVC sleeves until completion of the Backfilling operations and only exposed at the time of installation / erection of steel works. Equipment Crane 50Ton Flat Bed Trailor 40 Ton Excavator Backhoe Plate Compactor Water Tanker 2 No. 40 Nos. field tested and these operations repeated until the Backfilling operations are completed. 1 No. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 30 of Once the pipe rack base is installed. 20 Nos. 1 No. All these statements constitute management documents. 1 No. All these statements constitute management documents. When the method statement has been agreed with EPC Contractor. The CF shall actually execute the construction activities. This method statement shall contain the procedure defined below. Any activity that is conducted that may have a particular Safety risk. The excavated material where possible shall be stockpiled in a controlled area location. The Engineer shall be responsible for producing a method statement for the activities to be carried out. the site shall be kept clean. to reflect the conditions imposed upon the “Permit to Work” system. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Where the existing service may cross the route of the proposed work activity. Where soil conditions dictate. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. The easement area shall be left graded. Where mechanical methods are accepted. directing the workforce as necessary. Equipment Cable scanner. During the duration of the work activities. These services shall be exposed by hand dug trenches along the route. a work permit covering the work activities within area of work shall be obtained from Operating Authority & duly registered into the work permit log. shall be assessed as required . The method of excavation for the work activity shall be defined upon the work permit. Any unsuitable material shall be removed from site to the spoil area immediately. The Work area shall be surveyed to establish existing services location using the Operating Authority easement drawings and the cable detector. adequate protection and warning of that existing service shall be provided.& tidy The Civil Contractor QC department shall conduct the required inspection and test regime required under the ITP. All applicable EPC Contractor project specifications. Responsibilities The CM shall plan and resource the construction activities. The works were executed for major oil companies. . all rubbish shall be removed from the work site. 2006 Page 31 of Documents All applicable Operating Authority easement drawings.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the sides of the trench shall be sloped. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Upon completion of the work activity. a banksman shall be deployed with all mechanical excavation equipment to check for any existing service and advise the operator of the excavation machine. Safety Prior to the commencement of any of the construction activities. All applicable EPC Contractor project Drawings. Definitions E PSM CM CF Engineer Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Foreman. Method The Construction Manager shall assign an Engineer and Construction Foreman to be responsible for the relevant activities. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Internal and External Insulation. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Compactors. directing the workforce as necessary. . Method This method statement details only the Structural Concrete works. All these statements constitute management documents. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular Safety risk shall be assessed as required. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Ladders. Galvanised Steel Mesh etc are not Included in this Method Statement. Attachment Checklist MS #12 Construction of main substation Top Index Scope Reference Documents Definition Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the Construction of the Main Substation. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 32 of Dump trucks Excavators as applicable. The works were executed for major oil companies. The Construction Foreman shall actually execute the works. Steel Sheet Roofs. Access Platforms. to ensure that they are Constructed according to the Drawings and Specification . Documents Specifications Definitions E PSM CM CS Engineer Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Responsibilities The CS shall plan and resource the Construction of Main Substation activities. Finishes. Stage 8. Parapet wall construction. . screed protection up to defined Elevation Stage 2. Stage 7. STAGE I Excavate whole area to Formation Level. Further excavate for transformer bay partition wall. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Stage 4 Transformer bay boundary wall including cast in sleeves for Fence Posts. Using grader and 12T Formation roller. Stage 4. Stage 5. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Stage 3. waterproofing. blinding. Transformer bay partition walls full height of 10m including cast in anchor plates for Roof truss. Foundations to required elevations. Create Access ramp at either short ends to allow Heavy equipment to get in and out. The works were executed for major oil companies. Footing pad construction and kicker 100mm above the top of footing including water stop bar for transformer bay partition wall and boundary wall footings. Scarify and compact formation to elevation + 20mm. All these statements constitute management documents. The Transformer Bays and the Foundation are to be constructed in the following sequence: Stage 1 Earthworks. Wall construction up to bottom of roof slab / roof beam elevation Stage 7.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Stage 2. Stage 3. Ground slab of HVAC room including anchor bolts for ladder / access platforms TOC Stage 5. Gravel Fill between foundations and walls. Transformer foundation bases including bases for Sump and Valve Pit. Footing pad construction including kicker up to 100mm above top of footing. The points shall be marked by a nail driven on top of wooden pegs driven into the ground and set in concrete. Setting Out Grid line (1) to (13) and (A) to (D) shall be offset 3m away from the edge of the walls. Roof slab construction including kicker for parapet wall. waterproofing. screed protection. Steel Roof Trusses and Roof. Stage 6. Stage 1: Earthworks. blinding. Floor slab for Main Building TOC (Top of Concrete) Stage 6. 2006 Page 33 of The Main Substation structure is to be constructed in the following stages. Stub columns / walls including anchor bolts for galvanised screen mesh up to underside of floor slab / ground beam – defined Elevation. . The distance from the corner shall not exceed 4. STAGE IV & V Install Formwork for floor beams and floor slab including 100mm Kicker for main walls. Timber shall be placed on top of the base formwork to act as kicker for Columns / Walls. Bases for wall foundations shall be cast as per sequence shown in attached sketch no. as described in this Method Statement. Place Formwork for Stub Columns and walls up to Floor Level. Use Timber reapers to construct edge forms and place blinding Concrete to Elevation 98. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Mark Grid lines with chalk powder. 3. 2006 Page 34 of Test for degree of Compaction and get approved. Steel Reinforcement shall be installed as required. STAGE VI External Formwork for vertical walls shall be placed in position. Cure the concrete according to specifications requirements. Cast in items such as Anchor plates for Roof truss shall be fixed in position. Timber reapers for Contraction Joints shall be fixed to the outer formwork face. 1.5m and the distance between intermediate ones shall not exceed 6m. Isolated footing bases shall be cast. The works were executed for major oil companies. Blast door frames. Place timber reapers on bothfaces of the formwork for Contraction Joint at location indicated in the attached sketch No. 2.50 200mm wider than required. STAGE III Place Reinforcement for Stub Columns and Walls up to Floor Level. 1. Vertical Construction Joints shall be located at same positions as indicated in the attached sketch No. Place Steel Reinforcement with Starter bars for Columns / Walls. Formwork height shall be the height of Footing Pad + 30mm for protection screed. 2. Use steel pins to be 2m away at outer edge of Concrete face. Install Reinforcement for floor beam and Floor slab. Apply waterproofing membranes in sections one day prior to fixing formwork for base pads. Set out grid lines (1) – (13) and (A) to (D). Penetration sleeves / ducts shall be boxed out for cables and utility services Cast Floor slab in alternate panels. aligned and supported. Cast Stub Columns and Walls up to underside of Floor Slab. Box outs for Bus duct penetration. Care would be taken to ensure that contraction joints in west wall would be hidden behind GRC Facia Care to be taken to ensure that waterbars are placed at the right position on the edge of Pad Concrete for Transformer Bay partition walls and East wall. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. rebates for Personnel and Equipment. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Air Conditioner openings and others shall be Boxed out. Horizontal Construction Joints shall be at locations shown in Drawing No. Construction Joints for floor slab shall be as shown in attached sketch No. STAGE II Place Formwork directly on Waterproof membrane. Construction Joints shall be located within the middle third point of slabs and beams as shown in the attached sketch No. Place steel channels and Box outs for openings in floor slab for switchgear control panels. A set of four cubes shall be taken for each pour. Capacity water tanks in elevated platforms shall be provided for round the clock curing operations. shall be wet cured with Hessian. 3. Sketch No. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 4. The Roof slab shall be cast.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Sketch No. wall. . Reinforcement shall be placed and concrete cast in the same manner as for main wall. 5000ltrs. 1: Showing locations of Contraction Joints. Suspended kickers shall be placed for parapet wall. floor or roof. 2nos. Approved Curing Compound shall be used in Roof Soffits. Scaffolding shall not be removed for 14days and until the full design strength of concrete is reached. Equipment Excavator / JCB Transit Mixer Crane 20 T Attachment Sketch No. Formwork design is similar to the ones used at Seawater surge basin. The rate of pour shall not exceed 2m vertical height / hr. All these statements constitute management documents. The wall section shall be cast. STAGE VIII Rainwater chutes shall be boxed out on parapet wall formwork. STAGE VII Roof Slab scaffolding shall commence even as the wall construction activity is in progress on completed sections of walls. Showing Concrete Pouring Sequence. Roof Slab Construction Joints are shown in the attached sketch. Design calculations included as attached. Sketch No. 2. #13 Removal of hazardous materials Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.14 and 28 day strength. The works were executed for major oil companies. Showing Construction Joints for Roof slab. Showing Construction Joints for floor slab. covered with polythene sheet and kept wet for a minimum period 14 days in accordance with the specification. CURING Every pour be it a footing. 2006 Page 35 of Inner Formwork not exceeding 6m lengths shall then be placed after inspection approval of rebars up to the bottom of Roof slab level. Cubes shall be crushed for 7. stub column. All these statements constitute management documents. Infrastructure Superintendent. Bechtel HSE Manual. The ST shall assist the GE and IS to establish the extent of contamination. An inventory of the items loaded into the truck shall be produced. for the investigation. resource and control the activities required for the orderly execution of the hazardous material disposal. 2006 Page 36 of Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. Where appropriate. The solid items of contaminated material shall be lifted by loader shovel into the rear of a tipper truck. A permission shall be obtained from the operating authority for the purpose of disposal of hazardous material waste into a designated area. for their approval of the hazardous material disposal. The GE and IS shall inspect the hazardous material visually and complete an inspection report. is to define the procedure that shall be implemented. The ST shall record these details upon a site sketch. . Samples of soil from these pits shall verify the content and absorption if any of the contaminant. a specific safety plan if required. quantification and disposal of the hazardous material upon the site. The PSM shall plan. in compliance with this procedure. the workforce shall receive a Tool Box Talk on the project site safety requirements. Any precautions that are not defined within this method statement but essential shall be taken up. Where elements such as barrels are part of the hazardous material. The truck covered with a dust preventive sheet shall transport the Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The IS shall monitor the activities.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Definitions PSM GE IS ST Project Site Manager Geotechnical Engineer. Trial pits may be dug to visually gauge the penetration of contamination. The ST shall record the details. Where such liquids have leaked into the soil. An accurate description of the material shall be provided. The works were executed for major oil companies. Responsibilities EPC Contractor shall coordinate with all concerned authorities. The GE shall ensure accurate reporting of the materials. PPE where appropriate shall be provided to those persons who shall come into contact with any hazardous materials. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. samples of the soil shall be taken to verify the amount of contamination. the identifying marks upon the barrel shall be checked. Method The hazardous material shall be located and identified upon the site. Upon receipt of the laboratory results that verify the analysis of the contaminant. samples shall be taken to verify the content. Reference documents Operating Authority regulations. Survey team. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities. shall be prepared for the safe handling of suspect material or soil. This process shall continue until all items of waste are removed from the site. Upon completion of the removal of the hazardous material. Grader. The stockpile of contaminated soil shall be lightly spread across the disposal area at levels above the water table. The existing soil material that is contaminated shall be clearly marked with pegs. This shall be achieved by using loader shovel and grader. A grader shall now mix this layer with the layer of uncontaminated material below. The GE shall satisfy himself that the layer thickness is minimal and the material is adequately mixed with the layer below. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. Attachment ITP No: QCF. Equipment Excavator. . This layer shall be mixed with the layer below as described previously. The truck shall be covered whilst transporting the soil to the mixing area where the soil be stockpiled. the material shall be excavated and loaded into a tipper truck. This process shall continue until all contaminated soil is removed to the satisfaction of the GE. Dump trucks. If required.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. a further layer of contaminated material shall be spread over this layer of material until the stockpile is depleted. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 37 of material to the approved Operating Authority waste disposal site in the industrial area. #14 Construction of control building Top Index Scope Reference Documents Definition Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment floor slab central Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. A normal layer of uncontaminated material shall be placed upon the top of this mixed material. A topping layer of uncontaminated material shall be placed on top of all mixed material. the GE shall prepare a report that identifies the material disposed as well as the areas of disposal. The contents shall be offloaded in accordance with the facility rules and regulations monitored by the EPC Contractor representative. Visual inspection Report. The layer thickness shall not exceed 150mm. This shall have the affect of dispersing the material. Using a loader shovel. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 38 of Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the Construction of the floor slab to the Central Control Building. Water Tanker 1 No. The surveyors shall be responsible for setting out the exact levels of fill and concrete up to designated drawings. The construction Foreman shall actually lead the execution operations by directing all Foreman and workforce as necessary. . The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. This portion is to be cast in panels to give the required joints as specified on the drawing. Safety Prior to the commencement of any of the required activities. The slab is divided into two main portions.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Method The slab on grade level shall be casted over compacted fill by using a separation Polyethylene Membrane. General Curing shall be carried out to the norms of the Project Specifications. Labour Casting Engineer 1 No. the Labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Flat Bed Trailor 40 Ton 1 No. The low level portion at EL shall have a smooth level finish in order to receive the bases of the access panel system. Equipment Crane 50Ton 2 No. All cable trenches and separating Wall shall be cast up to levels and dimensions specified on related drawings. Plate Compactor 1 No. The site test laboratory shall conduct and verify the compaction crireria. In Electro-Mechanical rooms the surface finish shall be smooth to receive the epoxy coating finish as specified. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Documents Grade Slab General Arrangement Grade Slab Sections Foundation Details Penetration Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent Responsibilties The CS shall plan and resource the Structrual Backfill activity to achieve the required compaction as per the specification. The high Level portion at EL shall be cast in panels according to the required joints shown on the drawings. The surface finish for this section shall be rough since Tiling and flooring systems are to be applied. Excavator Backhoe 1 No. Method Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Mortar for blockwork Top Index Scope Reference Documents Definition Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the production of mortar for use with the blockwork activities. 40 Nos. 1 No. 2006 Page 39 of Placing Engineer Casting Foreman Placing Foreman Carpenters Steel fixers Masons Laborers Attachment None. Safety Prior to the commencement of any of the required activities. 20 Nos. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. #15 1 No. The construction Foreman shall actually lead the execution operations by directing all the workforce as necessary. the Labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. All these statements constitute management documents. 20 Nos. The works were executed for major oil companies. 30 Nos. Documents Masonary Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent Responsibilties The CS shall plan and resource the blockwork activity. to achieve the required combination of workmanship and material quality. 1 No. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. it shall be taken to the workplace and used within specified setting time that is generally 2 hours of adding into the mixer. Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CB Camp Boss TM Transport Manager. Mortar shall be mixed mechanically on site using standard boxes for measuring sand for each batch. Potable water from the Operating Authority source shall be used for mixing sand and cement. Attachment None. The works were executed for major oil companies. Equipment Cement mixer Gauge boxes Hand tools. The ingredients shall be mixed thouoghly until a uniform mix is achieved. The sand aggregate for the mortar shall be submitted and approved by EPC Contractor. #16 Control of camp sewage system Top Index Scope Reference Documents Definition Responsibilities Safety Method Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to actions that shall be implemented to monitor and control the sewage holding tank status. . Storage of materials shall be on appropriate seggregated suitable areas adjacent to the work place with no possibility of contamination or deterioration of the materials. Documents Method statement Waste Management. 2006 Page 40 of The block supplier shall be submitted for approval to EPC Contractor. All these statements constitute management documents. The amount of water required shall also be defined depending on water cement ratio. Responsibilities The PSM shall be responsible for the implementation of the preventative measures. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Once the mortar is produced. Mix production quantiry in one batch shall be limited to a volume which can be consumed within the initial setting time of cement.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. so that overflow is avoided. The remixing of martar by adding additional water shall not be permitted. regular readings at specific times shall be recorded to establish water requirement trends. The site safety department shall monitor the sewage disposal areas.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The TM shall ensure the provision of the disposal tankers as and when required. that areas of water abuse are identified. In parallel to this water input recording. that holding tank emptying schedule established as well as formulating measures to conserve and re-cycle water wherever possible. The responsibility for compiling the information shall be with the camp boss who ensure that water consumption is regularly monitored. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 41 of The CB shall execute the required monitoring and record keeping of the investigation. Initial trucking capacity that is dedicated to the sewage disposal activity is ‘two trucks’. Attachment. For the next one month. Safety All relevant safety issues including hygiene precautions shall be implemented. Based on a float system. These trucks operate on both suction fill and pump fill systems. a survey of the sewage holding tanks filling trends shall be established. the rod shall raise up as the holding tank fills. shall help verify the water meter quantity to establish leakage’s. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Method A new water meter to record water usage shall be installed prior to the water storage tanks. The survey shall review and confirm the required trucking levels needed to service the holding tanks. Data obtained from the tanker drivers on number of loads discharged. The existing provision for the trucking of the sewage waste shall be monitored. monitored and maintained for this activity. N / A #17 Structural steel-piperacks Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The fleet capacity shall be increased as required based upon the results of the survey. . The works were executed for major oil companies. A review of the collected data shall be conducted after one month to supplement existing operational criteria as required. A tank volume indicator system shall be installed at every sewage holding tank. The information collected from this exercise shall help to understand the peak demand periods which also define the sewage disposal requirements. This visual system shall remind the CM to organise the emptying of the tank. This indicator system shall consist of a visible indicator rod. . All these statements constitute management documents. Erection Foreman. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Then all materials shall be properly stored and protected. All structural steel members shall be checked for quantity. The CS shall ensure that all safety requirements are implemented and explained to the erection workforce. shall be assessed and addressed as required. 2006 Page 42 of Method Equipment Scope The purpose of this Method Statement is to define the sequence and methodology that shall be implemented for the Erection of the steel structure piperacks.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The surface of the concrete foundation shall be prepared in accordance with the specification. to ensure that they are implemented according to this procedure. The CS shall control the day to day activities The EF shall control the workforce ensuring the full implementation of this method statement including all safety measures. the labour force shall receive a Toolbox Talk on the Project Site Safety Requirements. The use of cranes shall be assessed and all safety regulations enforced. Concrete Foundations. All concrete foundations on which the steel structures are to be erected shall be released by the QC department upon completion of the civil activity. Construction Superintendent . Reference Documents Specification Grouting Specification Steel Structure Fabrication Specification Painting Specification Galvanizing Specification Project Preservation and Export Packing Relevant IFC drawings. All tems shall be inspected to conduct a check of the delivery against necessary shipping documents. quality and identification. Definitions CM CS EF Construction Manager. with the correct equipment resources. Responsibilities The CM shall plan and resource the steel structure erection activities. Men working at height shall be equiped with the required personal safety equipment Method Materials Receivables. The works were executed for major oil companies.\\\\ Fasteners (Bolts. Nuts & Washers). All Structural steel material to be used for permanent works shall be received on site in the appropriate laydown area. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular Safety risk. to receive grout. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity. The assembly of Verticals and Horizontal members shall be in sections. a minimum of one sample (1bolt. 1 nut. fastened and tightened. Assembly Of Grid Frames Material for the necessary grids shall be placed near to the area of erection. The grid frames shall be installed leveled and plumbed on the foundation bases. On completion of each section with all bolts and nuts in place and tightened. Stay ropes shall be provided to maintain stability until such time when the horizontal members are connected. (Necessary tightening or torquing shall be done later after grouting). All these statements constitute management documents. The shim placed on the foundation shall be embedded in mortar bed such that the top of the shim is level in all planes. Equipment Crane 30Ton\ 50 Ton Flat Bed Trailor to transport fabricated members to the location at site Fork lift – for minor movement of steel members Guy ropes and tensioning equipment Man baskets whenever required Scaffolding (Movable & Non-movable Types) Air Compressor Impact Wrench Welding Generator( if required) Gas Cutting Equipment (if required) Portable Grinding Machines Portable Drilling Machines Exclusively written by PEng Suraj Singh Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 43 of Upon receipt on site of the fasteners. All bolts. The works were executed for major oil companies. washers and nuts shall be fitted.The grid frames for both rows (A&B) shall be assembled. Erection Of Columns \ Grid Frames.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.& 1 washer) shall be selected and tested by an independent laboratory to confirm specification conformance. Foundation bolts shall be only hand tightened. This shall be carried out using a suitable trailer & a 50 ton crane. The shim plates shall be retained in position permanently by surrounding with mortar to avoid shim displacement during the erection of the columns. the final level and alignment shall be checked and inspected. Grouting After the structural steel frame assemblies have been inspected by the QC department. . Stainless steel shim plates to the correct thickness of approx. the application of grouting shall be carried out according to the Specifications & manufacturer’s instructions. Horizontal members and the bracings that interconnect these grid frames shall be assembled and erected. 25mm shall be placed at the center of the foundation column between the holding down bolts. The stays shall be secured to purpose made anchor plates attached to adjacent foundations. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Method 1. The works were executed for major oil companies. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activites. FM shall control the work force ensuring the full implementation of the procedure. Make the fabricated forms ready. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular Safety risk. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Drill the holes on the marked locations on the forms ’2’ sides according to the attached sketch to receive inserts holding bolts. Place & fix the column reinforcement be in design locations. shall be assessed as required. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . CM shall ensure that all the Safety requirements are implemented and explained to the relevant work force and control the day to day activities. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. CS shall ensure the implementation of technicalities involved. 2. 2006 Page 44 of #18 Compressors’ structures RCC column plate inserts Top Index Scope Reference Documents Definition Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence and methodology that shall be implemented for the inclusion of RCC column plate inserts. 3.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. Documents Specification Drawing No: Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the required materials ensuring that these are implemented according to this procedure. Pins and Bolts. Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures. before striking the forms. 5. Later the holes left shall be filled with Galvanised threaded rod 15mm long. Attachment Sketches #19 4. Definitions PSM CM Project Site Manager Construction Manager Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. support. 2006 Page 45 of Fix the column inserts plates assembly on the fabricated forms and the bolts fastened as per sketch. Having the pour been over. All these statements constitute management documents. Erect the forms. Equipment Fabricated Plates with Threaded holes. Excavation for 132kv cable interconnection Top Comments incorporated Duct bank construction added Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation in preparation for laying of the 132 KV electric cable from the GUP power station through to the Company project site substation. Reference documents Specification . 7. . well secure and concrete pour be carried out.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the threaded bolts be taken out. 6. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. coordinate and supervise all the activities directing the Construction Foreman The Construction Foreman shall practically execute these activities. Any process to be adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required. The sides of the excavation shall be sloped. This backfill activity shall continue up to existing ground level & the site left tidy Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All existing services encountered. Wherever necessary. Cables or pipes that span the excavation shall be supported. The surveyor shall set out the proposed route of the electric cable trench per IFC drawings. The surveyor shall provide suitable level pins that indicate the correct elevation of the sand bedding required for the cables. The works were executed for major oil companies. The cables shall be placed correctly within the trench in line with the IFC drawings. direct the workforce as necessary and report to the CS for all day to day operational matters. Surplus material shall be removed to the tip area by dump trucks. EPC Contractor release the trench for the backfill and subsequent activities. Wherever. The surveyor shall monitor the lines and levels of the excavation activity. Wherever necessary or as defined on the work permit. Method Permits for the involved area excavation shall be obtained from the relevant authorities. the excavated trench shall be released for the next operation as indicated upon the activity ITP following which. . The sand bedding shall be laid and compacted in accordance with the specification. 2006 Page 46 of CS FM Construction Superintendant Foreman Responsibilities The CM shall plan and resource the trench excavation and backfilling activity. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities.e. Rigid ducts and trays shall be provided to protect and support these cables. adequate protection and warning shall be installed. The CS shall control.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. EPC Contractor shall control all the activities. All these statements constitute management documents. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk every day on the project site safety requirements. Cable tiles and warning tape shall be placed on top of the sand fill per approved drawing. Any existing services shown on these drawings or on the record drawings shall be located and identified by an EPC Contractor approved method (i. Suitable approved backfill material shall be placed in layers. The field compaction test report shall be submitted. trial pits shall be manually excavated to expose the existing services. manual hand excavation shall be carried out. The trench shall be excavated by a track excavator to the correct lines and levels. Barriers shall be placed to indicate an open excavation. The excavated material shall be stockpiled along the trench areas for re-use. compacted around the cable & field tested. Upon EPC Contractor inspection. in accordance with this method statement. the protection of the existing services are required. Cables shall be laid by the electrical department upon completion of which. shall be plotted by the surveyor on an as-built drawing. compaction of the formation level be carried out to the specified density. catscan). Construction Manager. 2006 Page 47 of For the construction of the duct banks. forms erected to the required profiles. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities. directing the workforce as necessary. (INTERCONNECTS UNDERGROUND LAYOUT DRAWING SHEET ‘ 5 ‘) Definitions PSM CM CS FM Project Site Manager. the duct pipes shall be laid according to the sectional design details with fixing arrangements. that shall cross existing roads at locations identified on the attached drawing part . Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures. is to define the sequence and methodology for the excavation and laying of PVC ducts . The works were executed for major oil companies. Attachment None #20 Road crossing Top Index for 132 kv route Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. the whole section be concreted to the defined level & finished accordingly. in accordance with this method statement. Compactors. Major Equipment Cable Markers. Excavation equipment. The concrete shall be poured at various intermediate locations in the first instance to create temporary downward anchor to counteract any possible duct uplift by the underducts fluid concrete upward pressure. . Construction Superintendant Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the trench excavation and backfilling activity. Dump trucks. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Reference documents Specification. When the arrangement is completed. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the project site safety requirements. warning signs. the second depicting diversion sign be located at 200 m and the third depicting men at work sign be located at 100 m on either way in the opposite directions. informatory signs. A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted as well as after every rainstorm. The road section shall be excavated to the correct level using mechanical means and removed from the site to stock pile area. 2006 Page 48 of EPC Contractor shall control the service laying activities. the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in . Barricades . reduced speed sign. If required . safety barriers. markers and the night lights etc. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. this bedding shall be compacted and tested for field density. The excavated material shall be removed to a stockpile area. The asphalt shall be cut using a mechanical cutter machine. Test results shall be reported. shall be arranged as required. Backfill around the service pipes shall be carried out with the appropriate approved material. All these statements constitute management documents. A traffic management scheme that has been presented herein as detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing which includes. Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. men at work sign. The cable ducts or service pipes shall be laid at the required levels and profile according to the drawings as well as the specifications and approved by the EPC Contractor’s Engineer. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm .The aforesaid traffic management scheme is described below Traffic Scheme Road Crossing Inter Connects Underground Layout Drg This proposed crossing is located on the road avenue C as shown on the attached sketch This is a 2 way road with a central verge and carrying 2 lanes on either way The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as lane L1 and L 2 on either side of the carriage way In the first instance the work shall be carried out on part L1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the part L2 as shown on the sketch In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part L2 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the completed road portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch The first reduce speed for traffic diversion informatory board depicting shall be located at 300 m from the point of the proposed crossing. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity.night lighting and road cleaning activities shall be implemented on site after review & approval by EPC Contractor prior to commencing the work. adequate means of exit such as ladder or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel. Any existing services shall be identified and protected. Appropriate bedding material shall be placed within the excavated trench to the correct service level. Wherever required. The first section of road crossing as per the attached sketch shall be marked by the surveyor on the actual road location. The works were executed for major oil companies. Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required. This service pipe surround material shall be compacted complying with the project specifications. temporary diverted roads sign. .. The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing has been cleaned of any debris or obstructions. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 49 of General fill up to the underside of road formation shall be placed in 150mm layers compacted mechanically complying with the specifications.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the earthworks activity during Night Shift. The works were executed for major oil companies. Sketch showing the location of the proposed crossing. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Compactors. Reference documents Specification Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor IS Infrastructure Superintendent. A concrete slab shall be cast up to the bottom of the finished asphalt level and the finishing done by using approved asphalt mix . . PSM Project Site Manager SO Safety Officer Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that adequate site management and supervision is available for night shift working. Dump trucks. Attachment Sketch showing the traffic diversion. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services Equipment Excavator .earthworks Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. #21 Night shift working . the Safety Officer shall be notified. All equipment that shall operate on the site shall be in full working order with appropriate lighting. spreading. First aid facilities shall be made available for night shift operations at the camp clinic. Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. These activities do not require any specific QC inspection coverage other than the supervisor surveillance. A banksman wearing a high visibility vest shall direct the stockpile area. The works were executed for major oil companies. (Refer to the safety plan for night shift working). The IS shall prepare the schedule define the work faces of the night shift activity prior to beginning. All these statements constitute management documents. The two banksmen shall be in communication with each other by two way communication facilities (mobile phones). stockpiling. watering and compaction. are fully aware of the safety obligations expected from them. The Safety Officer shall have the telephone number of the camp doctor who be summoned in the event of first aid requirements and emergencies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Equipment Excavators. he shall be notified. a banksman shall direct the excavation area. Safety The SO shall ensure all those persons who shall work on the night shift activities. 997 for Fire or civil defence 998 for an Ambulance. stopping the work if an unsafe situation arises. Upon an emergency arising. Method The activities that are schedules to be carried out during night shift comprise of excavation. The work faces shall be illuminated by using tower-mounted easily repositionable floodlights. Emergency Procedure. The Safety Officer shall immediately alert the relevant emergency services if so required. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. shall be made safe prior to work commencing. . investigation and reporting of the emergency shall be conducted in accordance with the site HSE plan. The earthwork supervisor and the SO shall patrol the entire site overseeing all activities. The necessary work permits shall be obtained prior to the start of the night shift activities. Similarly. First Aid. The emergency procedure for first aid shall be explained to every body. 999 for Police. The routes which the construction equipment shall use for hauling ‘the excavated materia’. and where necessary. leveling. Dump trucks. The area for stockpiling the material shall also be illuminated. The Safety Officer shall notify the Safety Manager of the emergency occurence. The Safety Manager shall attend the emergency and take control of the situation. The Safety Officer shall be responsible for coordinating the night shift emergency procedure. 2006 Page 50 of A dedicated SO shall patrol the site during the night shift activities. hauling. Should the camp doctor be required. The required notification. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Construction Superintendent . Responsibilities The CM shall plan and resource the Cementitious grout activities. . The CS shall control the day to day activities The FM shall control the workforce ensuring the full implementation of this method statement including all safety measures. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Reference Documents Specification Definitions PSM CM CS FM Project Site Manager Construction Manager. with the correct equipment resources. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular Safety risk. Safety glasses and gloves to be used Areas of Activity to be Barriered Off / No Unauthorized Entry. the suitably qualified labour force shall receive a Toolbox Talk on the Project Site Safety Requirements. All these statements constitute management documents. About the Chemical effect. 2006 Page 51 of None. Sufficient Lighting to be provided where necessary. Masks to be worn. Foreman. to ensure that they are implemented according to this procedure. The CS shall ensure that all safety requirements are implemented and explained to the erection workforce. (Revised) Additional manufacturer’s instructions for mixing incorporated Form details amended Manufacturer’s method statement attached #22 Grouting to pipe rack foundation bases Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Scope The purpose of this Method Statement is to grout the annular space between the foundation top and the structural steel base plates. The works were executed for major oil companies. shall be assessed and addressed as required. curing compounds etc and be soaked in with water for 24 hours prior to grouting to minimize the localized absorption as well as to assist the free flow of the grout.5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928 according to product datasheet. The bolt holes / pockets shall be waterfree prior to placement of grout. pouring in to the mixer the remaining 10 % water quantity during mixing which has to be kept on for at least 3 to 5 minutes until a uniform lump free consistency is achieved. The works were executed for major oil companies. The baseplates / bolts shall be clean and free of oil. All these statements constitute management documents. An electric drill fitted with a paddle shall be used for the grout mixing purpose using water @ 3.5 to 4. The grout thickness varies between 25 to 50 mm. Equipment Peddle Mixer Grout Flow Cone Attachment Sketch Masterflow Catalogue Masterflow Method Statement #23 Cementitious grouting to foundation bases Top Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The mixer shall be clean with no standing water. cover all exposed grout material with clean damp Hessian and be kept moist until grout is firm enough to accept a curing membrane The temperature range 4 to 32 degree C shall be maintained for the 3 post pour continuous days. paint. The forms as shown on the attached sketch shall be erected on the defined locations provided with chamfers. . The stainless steel shims 50x50x10 mm thick shall be in correct locations covered with mortar so as to allow at least 50 mm grout cover on shim sides. 2006 Page 52 of Method The surface to be grouted shall be chipped / scabbled without using mechanical bush hammer to expose the aggregate and remove the laitance. dust . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Let 90 % of the applicable quantity of water required to achieve the desired consistency to meet the batch volume per manufacturer’s datasheet be added to the mixer before adding the grout and the Masterflow be added gradually while simultaneously. dirt. The grout shall be poured continuously using the grout pour cone with a constant hydrostatic head of at least 15 cm Having poured the grout Masterflow 928 in place. grease and paint and correctly aligned according to the approved drawings. The finished surface shall be free from oil. The finished surface shall be free from oil. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. The mixer shall be clean with no standing water. dirt.5 to 4. The works were executed for major oil companies. . Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Method The surface to be grouted shall be chipped / scabbled without using mechanical bush hammer to expose the aggregate and remove the laitance.5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928 according to requirement. Let the grout be poured continuously using the grout pour cone with a constant hydrostatic head of at least 15 cm Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. The forms as shown on the attached sketch shall be erected on the required locations with chamfers.simultaneously pouring in the remaining 10 % water quantity during mixing . The pockets shall be waterfree prior to placement of grout. Reference Documents Specification Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. dust . grease and paint and correctly aligned in line with the approved drawings. The stainless steel shims 50x50x10 mm thick shall be in correct locations covered with mortar so as to allow at least 50 mm grout cover on shim sides.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. curing compounds etc and soaked with water for 24 hours prior to grouting to minimize the localized absorption as well as to assist the free flow of the grout. which has to be kept on for at least 3 to 5 minutes until a uniform lump free consistency is achieved. The baseplates shall be clean and free of oil. An electric drill fitted with a paddle shall be used for the grout mixing purpose using water @ 3. paint. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 53 of Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to grout the base plates of the stationary equipment / vessels foundation bases. Let 90 % of the measured quantity of water required to achieve the desired consistency according to the batch volume be added to the mixer before adding the grout and the Masterflow be added gradually . CS shall ensure the implementation of technicalities involved. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. cover all exposed grout with clean dampen Hessian and be kept moist until grout is firm enough to accept a curing membrane The temperature range 4 to 32 degree C shall be maintained for the 3 post pour continuous days The grout thickness varies between 25 to 50 mm. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. CM shall ensure that all the Safety requirements are implemented and explained to the relevant work force and control the day to day activities. Documents Specification Drawing No: Definitions CM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the required materials ensuring that these are implemented according to this procedure. Major Equipment Peddle Mixer Grout Flow Cone Attachment Sketch Masterflow Catalogue Masterflow Method Statement #24 Etylene compressor Massive foundation (concrete pour) Top Index Scope Reference Documents Definition Responsibilities Safety Method Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence and methodology that shall be implemented for the Concrete pour of the Ethylene Compressor Foundation. 2006 Page 54 of Having poured the grout Masterflow 928 in place . 24 – 2.12 Nos. shall be assessed as required.24m x 2m x 0.e.00 Hrs. The works were executed for major oil companies. 12. 7m³ each Delivery continuous @ 7minutes intervals.86 x 11.56 x 0. Equipment:  Vibrator – Pneumatic / Diesel Operated 3 Nos. . Pour Duration 6 to 7 hrs. Transit mixer 7 Nos. adding saturated Hessian. Time of Pour commencement 7. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activites. Curing-Thermal  Immediate Post Pour: By Curing Compound covered by Polythene membrane. All these statements constitute management documents. Slump 150 – 175mm Attachment 1 Sketches 2 Plan of Pour 3 Sectional Sequence details of pour layers. on other sites.  Masons .  Helper . 7. 2006 Page 55 of FM shall control the work force ensuring the full implementation of the procedure.1 No.  Post Pour Set concrete: By removing Polythene. Method 1. Water Supply: By tank. Pour Plan = In Strips Courses of each 11. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular Safety risk.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Full Time. Concrete Temperature 30°C.2892 approximately 2. 3. 8. 9. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. width wise (8. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements.in use and 1 Stand by) and 3 Nos.4m i.30 / 8. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. (2Nos. Batching Plant 1No. 5.12 Nos. 4. 6. Plants . recovering with Polythene membrane and filling clean sand 150mm except the column portion which shall be surrounded by small sand embarkments. / Stand by 1No. Manpower: Concrete Crew  Foreman .  Carpenters – 2 Nos.992 each). full tank ready on site with 50m water hose pipe.Concrete Pumps 1No. The sand shall be kept sprayed with water.84) 1. Pour Size = (14. Specifications High Slag blast furnace cement to BS 4246 with 70% replacement utilising 30% ASTM C150 Type II cement for use in massive concrete.7 = 280. 10.  Steel fixers – 2 Nos. Sequence of strips shown in attached details in numbers. 11. 833 approximately 2 Pour Plan = In Strips Courses of each 7.5 – 2 x 0. The works were executed for major oil companies. 4 Time of Pour commencement 7.30 / 8. Method: 1 Pour Size = (12. shall be assessed as required. 2006 Page 56 of #25 Propane compressor Massive foundation (concrete pour) Top Index Scope Reference Documents Definition Responsibilities Safety Method Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence and methodology that shall be implemented for the Concrete pour of the Ethylene Compressor Foundation.0 x 7.e. All these statements constitute management documents. . FM shall control the work force ensuring the full implementation of the procedure. CM shall ensure that all the Safety requirements are implemented and explained to the relevant work force and control the day to day activities.0m³ each). Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.7 = 151. 3 Sequence of strips shown in attached details in numbers. CS shall ensure the implementation of technicalities involved.44 x 0. width wise (6.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activites.00 Hrs. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.5 x 2 x 0. Documents Specification Drawing No: Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the required materials ensuring that these are implemented according to this procedure.4m i. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular Safety risk.78) 1. Full Time. Slump 150 – 175mm Attachment 1 Sketches 2 Plan of Pour 3 Sectional Sequence details of pour layers. iv. on other sites.12 Nos. 7 Equipment: a. 2006 Page 57 of 5 Plants . 8 Curing-Thermal a. All these statements constitute management documents. The sand shall be kept sprayed with water. Steel fixers – 2 Nos. 6 Pour Duration 5 to 6 hrs. full tank ready on site with 50m water hose pipe. / Stand by 1No. 10 Manpower: Concrete Crew i. 11 Specifications 12 High Slag blast furnace cement to BS 4246 with 70% replacement utilising 30% ASTM C150 Type II cement for use in massive concrete. Foreman . Transit mixer 7 Nos.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.Concrete Pumps 1No. ii. recovering with Polythene membrane and filling clean sand 150mm except the column portion which shall be surrounded by small sand embarkments. adding saturated Hessian. Post Pour Set concrete: By removing Polythene. . Vibrator – Pneumatic / Diesel Operated 3 Nos. (2Nos. #26 SeaWater Basin Baffle Walls (concrete pour) Top Index Scope Reference Documents Definition Responsibilities Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Batching Plant 1No. Masons . Helper . Carpenters – 2 Nos.in use and 1 Stand by) and 3 Nos.1 No. 13 Concrete Temperature 30°C. Immediate Post Pour: By Curing Compound covered by Polythene membrane. b. v. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 7m³ each Delivery continuous @ 7minutes intervals. iii.12 Nos. 9 Water Supply: By tank. The works were executed for major oil companies. FM shall control the work force ensuring the full implementation of the procedure. Since no provision of the starter rebars has been made for the slope portion at the ‘slab base level’ for the baffle walls to be connected with then to ensure the structural stability.14 upto the level 13. 2006 Page 58 of Safety Method Attachment Scope For pouring the baffle walls 9 #s located on the deeper end slope of section AA between the PCJ and the commencement of the falls as the width of the slope being 5. Stage 3: Pouring the remaining portion of the baffle walls from the level 7. All these statements constitute management documents. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activites. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Method Stage 1: Pouring the walls in full heights between the wall designated ‘M’ and the construction joints locations. Attachment None.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . CS shall ensure the implementation of technicalities involved. #27 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.35m. shall be assessed as required. Documents Drawing No: Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the required materials ensuring that these are implemented according to this procedure. Stage 2: Pouring the portion of the baffle walls between the construction joint and the wall end upto a level of 7. The works were executed for major oil companies.14m. CM shall ensure that all the Safety requirements are implemented and explained to the relevant work force and control the day to day activities.5 with a simple construction joint at the level of 7. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular Safety risk. we propose the following operational descriptions for the construction execution of these elements.14m from the slab base. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . Safety Prior to the commencement of any activites. CM shall ensure that all the Safety requirements are implemented and explained to the relevant work force and control the day to day activities. CS shall ensure the implementation of technicalities involved. Equipment ROADCRAFT model #. 5615 NEEDLE Scaler (Light version for removal of rust. steel and granolithic toppings) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. gloves.. etc. Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the required materials ensuring that these are implemented according to this procedure. shall be assessed as required. old paint etc.) Material Material Epoxy bonding agent MBT Concresive 1414 (permanent epoxy adhesive for internal or external bonding for renderings. 2006 Page 59 of SeaWater Basin Minor Concrete Repair at Kicker Face Top Index Scope Definition Responsibilities Safety Equipment Material Method Attachment Scope For minor concrete repair specially at kicker face Filling of Tie rod holes. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. The works were executed for major oil companies. shall be made. FM shall control the work force ensuring the full implementation of the procedure. mask. bonding concrete to concrete. concrete repairs. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. welding slag. Use of safety glasses. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular Safety risk. Reformation of grooves for sealant on floor slabs and walls. . Approved curing compound shall be applied immediately 5 A wooden strip 25mm wide X 20 mm deep shall be placed at the centre of the joint on the existing rebates in the floor slabs as well as walls and the space on either side be filled with MBT Master flow 544 to obtain a clear rebate of X-size 25mm x 20 mm followed by removal of the wooden strip within an hour of fill and the reformed surfaces be sprayed with approved curing compound.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. grouting and void filling such as concrete repairs. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2 Epoxy bonding agent MBT Concresive 1414 shall be applied by brush and allowed to cure. repairing. 3 MBT Master flow 544 shall be mixed with water in small pails by hand complying with manufacturer’s data sheet and trowelled onto the surface. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. all loose concrete and mortar drippings removed by using a single head scabbler and / or RODCRAFT model # 5615 NEEDLE scaler. Attachment Manufacturers Catalogue #28 Seawater basin (water tightness BS 8007: 1987) Top Index Scope Definition Responsibilities Safety Method / Procedures Equipment Attachment Scope To transport the Sea Water to the Sea Water Basin and Testing the basin Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the required materials and plants ensuring that these are implemented according to this procedure.) Method 1 The existing surface shall be scabbled. 4. filling tie bar holes etc. void filling between old and new concrete. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 60 of MBT Masterflow 544 (High strength. non shrink cementitious mortar ready to use product in powder form requiring only on site addition of water to produce a non–shrink mortar of predictable performance formulated for use at plastic consistency for bedding. ihp = 35 units The water flow velocity has been assumed to be 1.e. intake at sea and discharge to the basin respectively.1=123. It shall take 20 days to reach 20000 cum of water to the basin keeping round the clock pumping.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. sleeves shall be inserted by road cutting. The works were executed for major oil companies. A protection arrangement shall be made for the plants at the intake. CS shall ensure the implementation of technicalities involved. On the exposed pipe route the safety tags shall be installed with cones. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. 2006 Page 61 of CM shall ensure that all the Safety requirements are implemented and explained to the relevant work force and control the day to day activities. Refer to sketch point # 1 to # 8 i. filling and making good when the job is over Install a ‘round the clock’ generator to supply electricity to the pumps with the Distribution Board at point # 1 or to have electric connection through an alternative source. Install a timber clamping platform on the ditch at point # 4 Water Heads calculations indicative only At intake suction 1m At intake disposal 1m Vertical head loss 25 m At point Nos. Traffic directory signs for the ramp breakers on 3 nos road crossings shall be installed.5 / 2x 9.81x. . SEA WATER BASIN PLANNED PUMPING DAY # QTYPUMPED IN CUM 1 1008 2 1008 3 1008 4 1008 QTY CUMM CUM 1008 2016 3024 4032 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 8 loss 10 m Total vertical head loss 37 m Length of Pipe for friction loss 1800 m 4 f l v v / 2 g d = 4x.90 m Work done= 42000x160. All these statements constitute management documents. Otherwise. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.9 kgm. Constructing a concrete anchor at the sea to fix the intake pipe spout horizontally and vertically as well as to fix 2 # heavy duty centrifugal pumps at point #1 There are 3 nos road crossings en-route at points 2.9 / 270000= 25 units. 5 and 6 on which temporary 150 mm dia pipe sleeves are to be inserted in the form of the ramped speed breakers.5x1. Procedures involved Laying a 100 mm dia hose from the sea to the sea water approximately1800 m. bhp = 42000x160. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activites.9 = 160. FM shall control the work force ensuring the full implementation of the procedure. A full time attendant shall keep the watch and ward on the route.015x1800x1.Ref to the sketch.5 m / sec giving a discharge of 42 cum per hour.9m Total head loss = static loss + dynamic loss = 37 +123. Having the test been successful. upto 11. allowing absorption and the autogenous healing.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.5 m which should take 14 days and then be retained for a stabilising period of 7 days for a maximum design crack width of 0. 2006 Page 62 of 5 1008 5040 6 1008 6048 7 1008 7056 8 1008 8064 9 1008 9072 10 1008 10080 11 1008 11088 12 1008 12096 13 1008 13104 14 1008 14112 15 1008 15120 16 1008 16128 17 1008 17136 18 1008 18144 19 1008 19152 20 1008 20160 21 1008 21168 First phase Testing The tank completed with Protective Coatings as specified and sealant applied shall be cleaned and filled to the normal maximum level to meet the requirement of clause 9. . All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Total permissible drop in level allowing evaporation etc. should not be more than 1 / 500 of the average water depth of the full tank which limits to 10 mm or another specified or calculated amount.e another 7 days Stabilisation period Another 7 days (for absorption and autogeneous healing) Test period Another 7 days (level drop recording at an interval of 24 hours) Basin Filling and Testing Schedule S# Description of the operation Duration in Remark days 1 Ist phase water pumping 14 Pumping from sea 2 Retained water stabilisation to 7 allow absorption and autogeneous healing 3 Testing at 24 hour intervals and 7 Loss should not be more monitoring than 1 / 500 of average fullwater depth or 10 mm or other specified value Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.2 BS 8007 : 1987 Testing of structures i. Test period starts now for 7 days and the drop in level recording be made every 24 hours during this 7 days period.1 mm. the backfill shall be carried out Second phase Testing Let the tank be further filled upto 13 m level i. The works were executed for major oil companies.e. cracks or joints should. 2006 Page 63 of but excluding evaporation. Other General Arrangements Attachment Sketch showing the Hose Route #29 Road Crossing for 132 kV route Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2 Nos. be carried out from the liquid face. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. where practicable. 4 Backfilling testing after successful 14 7 7 7 Loss should not be more than 1 / 500 of average fullwater depth or 10 mm or other specified value but excluding evaporation Pumping from sea 5 II phase water pumping 6 Retained water stabilisation and autogeneus healing 7 Testing at 24 hours intervals 8 Water loss monitoring The code provides that notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of the test. Any necessary remedial treatment of the concrete. it should have adequate flexibility and have no reaction with the stored liquid. Pumps IHP 35. left for a further stabilising period followed by a further test of 7 days’ duration should then be undertaken in accordance with this clause. it should be refilled and if necessary.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. Equipment. Should the structure not satisfy the 7 days test then after the completion of the remedial work. When a remedial lining is applied to inhibit leakage at a crack. any evidence of seepage of the liquid to the outside faces of the liquid retaining walls should be assessed against the requirement of the specification. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. men at work sign.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. EPC Contractor shall control the service laying activities. reduced speed sign. directing the workforce as necessary.. Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required. adequate means of exit such as ladder or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel. If required. The traffic management scheme shall be reviewed and approved by EPC Contractor prior to commencing the work. that shall cross existing roads at locations identified on the attached drawing part. markers and the night-lights etc. (INTERCONNECTS UNDERGROUND LAYOUT ‘) Definitions PSM CM CS FM Project Site Manager. 2006 Page 64 of Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. . shall be arranged as required. the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in. Construction Manager. temporary diverted roads sign. The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities. The works were executed for major oil companies. Reference documents Specification. A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted as well as after every rainstorm. The aforesaid traffic management scheme shall be implemented as described below: Traffic Scheme Road Crossing Drawing reference Inter Connects Underground Layout Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Barricades. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm. safety barriers. All these statements constitute management documents. Construction Superintendant Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the trench excavation and backfilling activity. A traffic management scheme which includes. warning signs. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the project site safety requirements. night lighting and road cleaning activities has been presented herein that shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing. in accordance with this method statement. informatory signs. Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. is to define the sequence and methodology for the excavation and laying of PVC ducts. Drawing No. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity. Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures. Any existing services shall be identified and protected. A concrete slab shall be cast up to the bottom of the finished asphalt level and the finishing shall be done by using approved asphalt mix. Backfill around the service shall be conducted using the appropriate material. In the first instance the work shall be carried out on part L1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the part L2 as shown on the sketch. the specifications and approved by the EPC Contractor Engineer. #30 Administration building Stair landing extension at grid 4 j Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. this bedding shall be compacted and tested. The asphalt shall be cut using a mechanical cutter machine. the second depicting diversion signs be located at 200 m and the third depicting men at work sign be located at 100 m on either way in the opposite directions. The first reduce speed for traffic diversion informatory board depicting shall be located at 300 m from the point of the proposed crossing. The cable ducts or pipes service shall be laid at the required levels and profile complying with the drawings. The first section of road crossing as per the attached sketch shall be marked by the surveyor on the actual road location. The works were executed for major oil companies. Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services Equipment Excavator. The road section shall be excavated to the correct level using mechanical means and the excavated material removed from the site to stock pile area. Dump trucks. Sketch showing the location of the proposed crossing. Attachment Sketch showing the traffic diversion. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing has been cleared of any debris or obstructions. Compactors. In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part L2 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the completed road portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch. General fill up to the underside of road formation shall be placed in 200mm layers and compacted to 150mm using mechanical methods complying with the specification requirements. Test results shall be provided for the specification conformance verification. . Where required.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. This service surround material shall be compacted as per the project specification requirements. Appropriate bedding material shall be placed within the excavated trench to the correct service level. This is a 2 way road with a central verge and carrying 2 lanes on either way The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as lane L1 and L 2 on either side of the carriage way. 2006 Page 65 of This proposed crossing is located on the road avenue C as shown on the attached sketch. All these statements constitute management documents. Method The proposed method involves the following procedures: Extend the RCC landing from its existing line to the outside face of the column at grid 4 J.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. masks etc. Reference documents Definitions PSM CM CS FM Project Site Manager. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. directing the workforce as necessary. Construction Superintendant Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the trench excavation and backfilling activity. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. drilling and filling in wear safety glass. gloves. The person grinding the concrete. The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Provide a shear key at the connection as shown for the extension as well as at column face Maintain the flight width 1450 mm as designed keeping the column face flush with the waist line of the first flight. Safety Particular safety shall be taken to cover the drilling in concrete activity and the pouring in the resin into the holes. EPC Contractor shall control the service laying activities. in accordance with this method statement. Construction Manager. . 2006 Page 66 of Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The aim of this statement is to define the methodology how the extension to the existing part of the stair first flight landing at grid 4 J shall be effected to and connected to the existing RCC column as well as the correction to the proposed rebars to be placed in the portion of the first flight. The works were executed for major oil companies. Equipment Grinder. Hilti drill machine TE 75 with 22 mm dia drill bits and the Hilti pouring gun kit 2000 shall be used. Drill bits 22 mm dia. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. which continue across the column face also. The remaining procedures shall be the usual operations regarding the RCC. All these statements constitute management documents. .. A ground cut for the shear key shall be provided in the middle 1/3 portion 25 mm deep for the bondage according to the sketch shown on the revised drawing ……. drilled hole 240 mm long according to the manufacturer’s instructions (System already approved).. 2006 Page 67 of Arrange the rebars in the manner to be placed within the above dimensions according to the details on drawing no….HY 150 resin anchor system shall be used to dowel in the rebars for the extension portion into the existing RC landing using 16 T dia bars into 22 mm dia. Attachment Extract of Drawing #31 SeaWater Basin Minor Concrete Repair at Kicker Face Top Comments incorporated Material already approved Repairable depth shown on the sketch Preparation & application modified Curing method specified MINOR COMMENTS INCORPORATED Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. preparatory works shall be carried out as usual for the form fixing and reinforcement placement. Hilti HIT . Kit 2000. Material HIT HY 150 In Cartridges according to the requirement. To accomplish the above operations. The dowels shall be approved by the EPC Contractor engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Hilti drill TE 75. Safety The work personnel shall be given a Tool Box talk every day before the commencement of any activity relevant to the operational requirements according to the Project Safety Needs. 2006 Page 68 of This statement is aimed to describe the procedures to be used to carry out making good the existing concrete surfaces by rectifying the undulations formed during the slope pour through cut outs on the top side slope shutters by the application of a shrinkage compensated . all persons to work on the demolition breaker. Thoroughly the repairable surface shall be wetted in to provide a ‘saturated surface dry condition’. The repairable thickness is only 10 mm.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . Definitions PSM CM CS FM Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource all the activities in accordance with this method statement. The vertical edges shall be cut with a grinder. All these statements constitute management documents. The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities. loose and fractured aggregate or other contaminants that could impair adhesion between the repair mortar and the prepared concrete surface. high strength repair mortar reinforced with acrylic fibres The area to be repaired shall be marked on site A depth of 10 mm from the proposed top level of concrete surface on the effected areas shall be broken out to remove all substandard concrete using Hilti demolition breaker. free of all oil. high strength repair mortar reinforced with acrylic fibres on the broken and the prepared surface. and the proprietary products application shall wear gloves. masks safety glasses etc Equipment Hilti Demolition Breaker TE 905 complete Pointed mechanical chisel ( Bushing tool TP-SKHM 60 ) Material EMACO S88C T in bags 25 kg each Sodapcure WH curing compound METHOD A shrinkage compensated . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. EPC Contractor shall control the activities. The substrata shall be prepared to a rough surface having at least 5-mm amplitude at 20-mm frequency The prepared surface shall be sound. direct the workforce as necessary. Any standing water shall be removed prior to application of the mortar is commenced Priming of concrete Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. dense. The works were executed for major oil companies. In addition to the general safety measures to use personal safety Equipment. grease. until the required consistency is achieved and mixed for a further 1-minute. APPLICATION After mixing.wetted mixing drum. Water addition shall be between 3. EMACO S 88 C T . Attachment Manufacturer’s method statement Sketch showing section #32 Fencing Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.The mixing shall continue for 3 to 4 minutes after all the powder has been added until the mortar is homogeneous and lump free More water shall be added within the limits given. otherwise chilled water be utilised to prevent the mix temperature exceeding 32 degree C Substrata temperature should not be less than 5 degree C. the concrete shall be wetted out with potable water to give a saturated surface dry condition. The works were executed for major oil companies. the material shall be trowel applied by forcing into the prepared substrate ensuring intimate contact and good compaction The surface of the placed mortar shall be levelled using a wooden float. if necessary. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 69 of Prior to the application of EMACO S 88 CT . therefore. .5 to 4 litres of potable water per 25-kg bag. areas to be repaired shall be shaded to prevent from direct sunlight MIXING Hand mixing with trowel or similar of EMACO S 88 C T is not permitted according to the manufacturer’s instructions. The required quantity of water shall be poured into the pre. a low speed electric drill with paddle attachment with a forced action mixer shall be used. Final finishing mat is done with a steel trowel. No further bonding agent is required as per manufacturer’s instructions. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. CURING Curing shall be done by spraying the approved compound SODAPCURE WH A polythene membrane shall be used to protect the finished surface from the wind blown sand. and mixer started followed by the addition of EMACO S 88 C T powder rapidly and continuously. TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS EMACO S 88 CT shall be used when the ambient temperature is between +5 degree Celsius and 50 degree C. In hot weather. shall be drilled for the fence post foundations. stripping. The final grade level of the area shall be the commencement point for the fence construction. All these statements constitute management documents. Responsibilities The CS shall plan and resource the fencing activities. including post locations for all elements. directing the workforce as necessary. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.14 through 1.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the project site safety requirements. The casting beds shall be such that pouring. The fence fabric shall be strung and tensioned as per the drawing details and manufacturers recommendations attached items 1. curing and coating can be achieved easily. The works were executed for major oil companies. Reference documents Specification Standard Drawing Standard Drawing Site Fence Location drawing Definitions PSM CS Project Site Manager. The fence post foundation shall be placed in the drilled hole to the correct line and level. 2006 Page 70 of Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. Using a machine mounted auger. prior to removal to site. Dune sand shall be compacted around the foundation. 300 and 450mm diameter holes as appropriate. Construction Superintendent. A level survey shall demonstrate the accuracy of the site grading activity. A precast yard shall be established as shown on the attached sketch. shall be assessed and addressed as required.21 Using hand tools. The drilled holes shall be cleaned and bedded to the correct base level. The Construction Foreman shall monitor the precasting and erection activities. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activities. initial curing and coating. . Method Precast elements. Fence erection. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. A casting cycle of 4 days is anticipated for casting. is to define the sequence and methodology for the construction and erection of the site security fencing. Easily assembled and stripped steel prefabricated moulds shall be utilized for the fence foundation and ground beam. to ensure that they are constructed and erected according to the specifications. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular safety risk. a trench shall be excavated for the ground beam. The Survey Team shall set out the line and level of the fence. All these statements constitute management documents. Attachment Drwg no: Drwg no: Method statement for Link Middle East Ltd. Equipment Concrete Mixer truck. Fence manufacturer. Reference documents Drawing Nos. Plate compactor. QC procedures shall be closed out on an on-going basis. #33 Administration building Ceramic tiles flooring system Top Index Scope Definitions Responsibilities Safety Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to construct the ‘ceramic tiles flooring system’ which involves the laying of the bedding screed as well as the finishing layer with grouting the joints including movement joints. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The gap between the ground beams. Specifications UBC & general construction practice Definitions PSM CSM Project Site Manager Construction Manager Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 71 of The ground beam shall be placed to the correct line and level. The works were executed for major oil companies. Auger machine. The fence fabric tie staple shall be grouted in position once the fence fabric is tensioned. at the location of the fence post. Suitable fill material shall be used to compact around the ground beam. Wagon with hyab. . shall be concreted to form a continuous beam. For General Area ‘RAK GP 21 G’ and for wet areas Johnson ‘Athena’ Joint filling grout – Approved proprietary material with matching shade. The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by weight. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The total thickness of the ceramic tile flooring is 100 mm which includes 90 mm bedding screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) by weight and shall be applied as described below. mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required for the bed.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Only sufficient mortar shall be mixed and spread as can be covered with tiles before it attains its initial set. Materials Ceramic floor tiles 300 x 300 x 10mm. monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety The workers shall receive a Tool Box Talk according to the project requirement relevant to the operation concerned every day prior to commencement of the activity Proper illumination shall be provided in the dark area The area to be tiled shall be closed for the general movement except those working there and be opened only when the tiling has properly been completed with hardboard cover protection spread on the newly laid flooring. . The finishing layer shall be ceramic tiles 10 mm thick and be laid as described below. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed board. Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted A slurry of 1 part cement to 1 part sand by volume shall be poured over the surface of the semi – dry mix bedding and spread with a trowel until it is approximately 2 mm thick Dry tiles shall then be laid on the slurry and beaten firmly into position with a wooden beater ensuring a true surface contact between the tiles and bedding is formed. 2006 Page 72 of CS FM QC Construction Superintendent Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Method (Laying ceramic floor tiles by SEMI DRY method) The areas of concrete sub strata to be tiled shall be brush cleaned and dampened until absorption ceases followed by the finished floor level establishment by means of dots and rules. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. pipes and the like. Where a structural movement joint is provided in the base. Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted for the correct formation of joint alignment and the level profile The tiles shall be laid level or to 1. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.. The tolerance in the overall level shall not be more than 10 mm from required finishes. a movement joint of the same width in the bedded finish shall be positioned immediately above The movement joint cavities shall extend through the combined thickness of the finish and the bedding mortar. Localised variations in level for a nominally flat floor shall be a maximum of +. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. around outlets.2-mm under a 3-meter straight edge.5 mm for wall tiles and 3 mm for floor tiles) The tiles shall neatly and accurately be cut to a close fit where necessary at abutments. Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer Wheel barrows Mason’s tools in general Attachment None #34 Administration building Ceramic tiles flooring system Top Index Scope Definitions Responsibilities Safety Material Method Equipment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. machine bases etc. a 10 mm movement joint shall be formed at the perimeter of all the tiled floors and where the tiling meets structural features such as columns. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 73 of The tiles shall be correctly positioned in both directions the time these are placed forming joints using a proprietary tile spacer ( 1.% falls in ‘wet’ areas as may be required. . MOVEMENT JOINTS IN TILED FLOORS Unless otherwise indicated in the documents. Particular care shall be taken in ‘wet’ areas to prevent low spots that may promote water pooling. (Reef STQ ) Grouting of the joints shall be carried out within a period of not less than 24 hours after completion of laying of tiles so as to allow the grout attach itself firmly to the bedding. completely filled and sealed after grouting of the normal joints takes place. The works were executed for major oil companies. Method (Laying ceramic floor tiles by SEMI DRY method) A continuous procedure to lay tiles over the cement mortar screed The areas of concrete sub strata to be tiled shall be brush cleaned and dampened until absorption ceases followed by the finished floor level establishment by means of dots and rules. For General Area ‘RAK GP 21 G’ and for wet areas Johnson ‘Athena’ Joint filling grout – Approved proprietary material with matching shade. All these statements constitute management documents. The total thickness of the ceramic tile flooring is 100 mm which includes 90 mm bedding screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) by weight and shall be applied as described below. . 2006 Page 74 of Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to construct the ‘ceramic tiles flooring system’ which involves the laying of the bedding screed as well as the finishing layer with grouting the joints including movement joints. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Reference documents Drawing Nos. Materials Ceramic floor tiles 300 x 300 x 10mm. monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety The workers shall receive a Tool Box Talk according to the project requirement relevant to the operation concerned every day prior to commencement of the activity Proper illumination shall be provided in the dark area The area to be tiled shall be closed for the general movement except those working there and be opened only when the tiling has properly been completed with hardboard cover protection spread on the newly laid flooring. Specifications UBC & general construction practice Definitions PSM CSM CS FM QC Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. a movement joint of the same width in the bedded finish shall be positioned immediately above The movement joint cavities shall extend through the combined thickness of the finish and the bedding mortar. Localised variations in level for a nominally flat floor shall be a maximum of +.% falls in ‘wet’ areas as may be required. The tolerance in the overall level shall not be more than 10 mm from required finishes. The tiles shall be correctly positioned in both directions the time these are placed forming joints using a proprietary tile spacer ( 1..A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed board. Movement joints in tiled floors Unless otherwise indicated in the documents. Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted A slurry of 1 part cement to 1 part sand by volume shall be poured over the surface of the semi – dry mix bedding and spread with a trowel until it is approximately 2 mm thick Dry tiles shall then be laid on the slurry and beaten firmly into position with a wooden beater ensuring a true surface contact between the tiles and bedding is formed. All these statements constitute management documents. Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted for the correct formation of joint alignment and the level profile The tiles shall be laid level or to 1. Where a structural movement joint is provided in the base. machine bases etc. pipes and the like.5 mm for wall tiles and 3 mm for floor tiles) The tiles shall neatly and accurately be cut to a close fit where necessary at abutments. .2-mm under a 3-meter straight edge. a 10 mm movement joint shall be formed at the perimeter of all the tiled floors and where the tiling meets structural features such as columns. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Particular care shall be taken in ‘wet’ areas to prevent low spots that may promote water pooling. mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required for the bed. The works were executed for major oil companies. (Reef STQ Q) Grouting of the joints shall be carried out within a period of not less than 24 hours after completion of laying of tiles so as to allow the grout attach itself firmly to the bedding. completely filled and sealed after grouting of the normal joints takes place. Only sufficient mortar shall be mixed and spread as can be covered with tiles before it attains its initial set. 2006 Page 75 of The finishing layer shall be ceramic tiles 10 mm thick and be laid as described below. Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer Wheel barrows Mason’s tools in general Attachment None #35 Administration building Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. around outlets. The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by weight. The term ‘plastering’ herein is meant for the internal surfaces while ‘rendering’ for the external. In addition to that proper mason’s scaffolding arrangements shall be made for providing access to the required heights adopting all relevant safety measures. Method Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Table 1. (for Hydrated Lime) BS Code 890 Class B. stops and beads) BS 1369. Reference documents Drawing Nos. (For Sand) BS Code 1199. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk. (for preparation and application) UBC Definitions PSM CM CS FM Project Site Manager. directing the workforce as per Site requirements. The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Project specifications Nos. (for cement) ASTM C150. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 76 of Plastering and rendering Top Index Scope Definitions Responsibilities Safety Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be implemented for carrying out the plastering and rendering operations. Construction Superintendant Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and organise the Plastering and Rendering works in accordance with this Method Statement. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. (for galvanized metal lath. the labour force shall receive the tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. shall be assessed as required as per Site conditions and shall be taken care of. Safety Prior to the commencement of work. Construction Manager. the width shall be bridged completely for a distance of 150 mm on both sides. beam or slab dividing block panels. 2006 Page 77 of Preparation of backgrounds to be plastered or rendered All surfaces to be plastered and rendered shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust and loose particles. pipes and Ist stage fixtures have been installed and approved.g. . a concrete column. shall be fixed across the junction. suitable to receive water which at this stage be added in sufficient quantity to produce the mix stuff workable. uniform in colour and consistency. a strip of metal lath minimum 300 mm wide with an isolating membrane of polythene sheet or building paper behind. The metal lath shall be stretched out and fixed along each edge at 100 mm centres using stainless steel fasteners such as washers and shot fired pins. Profile dots shall be formed on the surfaces. Plastering shall not commence until all the mechanical and electrical services. conduits. Block work surfaces shall have the joints raked out as specified (Ref) during construction. 1 White Silica) as specified shall be applied on the surface by trowel and 1-day allowance given for the succeeding coat to commence with. the hydrated lime. Junctions of different background and the chases for the electrical conduits as well as other service pipes shall be treated by fixing 200mm wide metal lath. the screws fixed into plugs in predrilled holes if so required. Where small widths of one material less than 300 mm wide are involved e. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. nails or screws and lapped joints tied with galvanized wire. To improve the workability of the mix. A slurry coat consisting of 400 kg Cement (white) to 1 cum of sand (No. square and true to line with clout nails or plaster dabs at not more than 600 mm centres to each mesh wing. Where a rendering or plaster is to be continuous across backgrounds of different types. All these statements constitute management documents. Metal lath shall not be provided where drawing shows a groove in the rendering or the plaster. stops and the like shall be fixed plumb. Fixing beads and stops Beads.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Concrete surfaces shall be scabbled by mechanical means to remove all laitance exposing the aggregates to 3 mm depth Civil Contractor / EPC Contractor inspections shall be conducted for the approval of the prepared surfaces. sand and water may first be mixed in the required proportion with allowance to stand undisturbed for at least 16 hours before mixing Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. Civil Contractor / EPC Contractor inspection shall be conducted for the proposed profile approval. Preparation of mixes for plastering or rendering Slurry coat 400 kg cement: 1 cum sand Second and third coats 300 kg cement: 50 kg lime: 1 cum sand Plaster thickness 19 mm walls and 14 mm ceilings The hydrated lime shall first be thoroughly mixed with sand and then cement added keeping mixer on until the material is uniform in appearance. Corner / angle beads at all openings as well as plaster ground stops at terminals shall be installed by using stainless steel fasteners. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The whole of the batch shall be used within an hour of being mixed Application of the various plaster or render coats The work shall not start until the background has been prepared and all the services have been finished according to requirement and the relevant specifications as described earlier. Each coat shall finish free from cracks. when it is to receive a Tyrolean finish. level or plumb angles. First coat shall be trowel applied and scored to form a key for the second coat allowing at least one day before the start of the next coat. checks or other structural defects. All coats shall be applied with firm pressure to exclude air and to ensure a good bond. free from trowel marks. The finishing coat shall be steel trowel applied The finishing coat shall not be less than 5 mm or more than 10 mm thick and shall be laid on with a trowel and finished with a steel float. Before applying any coat. Plaster shall be rodded and straightened to uniform surfaces in true planes. Finish surfaces shall be flush with grounds / stop beads. External angles shall be pencil rounded Care shall be taken when rendering up to beads or stops to avoid excessive polishing at the arris and damage to the galvanizing. irregularities or blemishes with straight. other blemishes displaying straight arises and true angles. be combed with evenly spaced wavy horizontal lines approximately 20 mm apart and 5 mm deep (less in case of first coat on metal lathing). outlet boxes and similar details. taking care not to over work the surface. All renderings shall be protected by properly constructed hessian or similar screen during hot period Each coat shall be kept damp by means of a fog spray of water for a minimum of 3 days to allow before a subsequent coat is applied or in the case of a finish coat. Laps of one coat shall not occur over laps of preceding coat. All coats shall be prevented from drying out too quickly and the work be carried out in shade during hot period. as uniformly thick as possible and not less than 8 mm or more than 13 mm thick in any part. All these statements constitute management documents. Equipment Mixer Attachment. First undercoat applied to metal lathing shall be well worked into the lath to ensure that the material is completely embedded. true and free from waviness. however. Slurry coat shall be trowel applied allowing at least one day to start the succeeding coat Two render coat applications shall be carried out. the ingredients mix must be protected from drying out. If allowed to stand for a longer period. The surface shall not be scratched. . 2006 Page 78 of with cement. None #36 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. before the protective screens are removed The surface of the finish coat shall be smooth. the background or the preceding coat shall be brushed down to remove any loose particles and dampened sufficiently to ensure uniform absorption. corner beads. The undercoat shall be applied either by laying on with or throwing from a trowel or float. Inspections for the approval shall be conducted. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. The undercoat shall be left rough and open by the edge of the trowel after it has been long enough to set firm. 2006 Page 79 of Administration building Roofing system Top Index Scope Definitions Responsibilities Safety Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the procedures. the labour force shall receive the tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Construction practice Definitions PSM CM CS FM Project Site Manager. Safety Prior to the commencement of work. In Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. shall be assessed as required as per Site conditions and shall be taken care of. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. monitor and direct the Foreman regarding the operations as required The Construction Foreman and the supervisor of the specialist contractor shall execute the work according to the CS direction and direct the work personnel to carry out the operations as per Site requirements. . sequences of operations and all the other details that shall be worked on the proposed roofing system to be laid over the suspended roof slabs. All these statements constitute management documents. Construction Manager. The Construction superintendent shall control . Specifications.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. Construction Superintendant Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and organise the works to be carried out by the specialist contractor in accordance with this Method Statement. Reference documents Drawings Nos. All workers shall use masks and safety glasses in addition to other PPE. MGP. shall be constructed prior to commencing any roofing system operation. DERBIGUM UNIGUM. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.MAR 113 Dated 8. ROOF MASTER. PRECAST CONCRETE TILES 500 X500 X50 MM form part of MAR 046 were approved subject to the comments . H 14 mill finish Method The roofing system shall be carried out to the following operational sequences. parapet walls and upstands ready by fixing in positions all roof drains.This flashing membrane complements the main roof membrane and with this combination on vertical exposed areas the performance is guaranteed for the specified period. TERRAM 700. 2006 Page 80 of addition the work shall not be carried out during fast winds and dust storms. Preparing the proposed area over RCC slab. The insulation boards shall be protected from the excessive exposure to sunlight. All services drains or other necessary items required to be in place prior to the roofing starts shall be completed in all respects including grouting. shall be used for the reason that: It is not recommended to mix a self adhesive membrane with a torch applied membrane as both are not compatible From the experience in this climate it has been observed that the textured Aluminium faced membrane tends to delaminate after a few months if left exposed (due to the different co –efficient of expansion between the metal and the bitumen) For the aforesaid reasons the manufacturer recommend a mineral granules faced membrane as these special solar reflective granules are spread over the bitumen while still hot and form part of the roof membrane. Laying the Light Weight screed using foam concrete Constructing an angle fillet around Priming with DERBIT PASTA and applying DERBIGUM UNIGUM the water proofing membrane over the screed. The works were executed for major oil companies. Construction of all large foundation pads if any..A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The area shall be cleared and made dry. Specialist Contractor Materials DERBIT PASTA. The clarification on the DERBIGUM MGP – This is the membrane flashing from the same manufacturer of horizontal membrane and is a product finished with mineral granules to make it solar reflective as well as UV resistant.2000 It is confirmed that the proposed Aluminium Flashing for the roof upstands is a plain mill finish manufactured to BS 1470 / ASTM B 209 Alloy. prior to the commencement of the system laying. Applying flashing membrane MGP over the vertical exposed part of water proofing layer Water test for 72 hours Laying ROOF MASTER insulation boards 75 mm thick Laying in TERRAM 700 membrane Laying loose the precast concrete tiles 500 x 500 x 50 mm Installing Aluminium flashing as specified and approved On the existing RCC suspended slab all large foundations if any. Aluminium Flashing.2. All these statements constitute management documents. cleaning the roof etc. pad foundations and other upstands at a specified height from the slab level for tugging the water proofing membrane into the parapet with sealant applied over. A groove shall be formed around the periphery of the area. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . Before laying in water proofing membrane. a coat of DERBIT PASTA bituminous primer shall be applied to all the proposed surfaces. The foam concrete screed shall be laid in two layers to avoid settlement. UV resistant. Inspection shall be conducted by the manufacturer’s representative and all coordinations made. All small and light precast pedestals / foundations for the cable trays. The second layer shall be laid when the first has dried out followed by forming smooth finish to the required falls and cross-falls Inspection shall be conducted The completed screed shall be cured with fresh water for two days and thereafter. water shall be drained out and the membrane left for being dried out. if any. Inspection shall be conducted The surface shall be flooded with water for a period of 72 hours after plugging in all the roof drains After successful completion of the test.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. shall be loosely laid over the filter membrane. an aerator and a pump. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. The exposed vertical surface of the membrane shall be protected by applying 4 mm thick MGP flashing membrane 300 mm girth. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.2 Lit / cum The ingredients shall be mixed using a mechanical mixer. A warranty for the specified period of 10 years shall be issued by the specialist contractor and the Civil Contractor according to the contract requirement The concrete paviors in the form of pre cast concrete tiles 500mm x 500 mm x 50 mm shall be laid loose over the ITALPROFILI PVC TILE PADS to be provided at all the intersections and Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The dressing shall be carried out over the angle fillet and upstands properly terminating into the preformed grooves by tugging the membrane into the groove as well as rainwater outlets and around penetrations. The TERRAM 700-filter membrane with 100 mm overlaps shall be laid over top of the insulation boards. torched over main membrane and tugged into groove as aforesaid. mineral surface finished. left for one day to dry out. pipe supports etc. The surfaces to be laid with screed shall be formed using mortar dabs to the specified profiles to 1 % slope. 2006 Page 81 of Inspection shall be conducted. The lightweight screed using special foam concrete shall be laid in to the following mix design to produce a density of 650 to 750 Kgs / cum Sand / Cement: 1 / 1 Cement: 350 Kg / cum Sand: 350 Kg / cum Water: 210 Lit / cum Foaming agent: 1. The ROOF MASTER insulation boards with rebated edges 75 mm thick shall be laid over the dry membrane ensuring all areas are properly covered. Once dried. . laying in 4 mm DERBIGUM UNIGUM membrane shall be commenced with by full torching over the primed screed allowing 100 mm wide side and end overlaps. A cement sand angle fillet of 50 x 50 mm triangular cross section shall be formed at all directional changes.. 80 mm girth. Reference documents Drawings Nos. .90mm thick. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. gravels of nominal size 15 – 30 mm filling shall be carried out to create a good aesthetic. Major Equipment Mixer Aerator Pump Attachment #37 Buildings Roofing Top Index Scope Safety Material Method Equipment Attachment system Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the operations on the proposed roofing system over the suspended slabs on buildings. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 82 of at the corners as shown on the sketch.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Plain mill Aluminium flashing 0. At the borders where cut tiles may be required. All these statements constitute management documents. Specifications. Construction practice Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. cut and bent to the required profile shape shall be fixed with stainless steel screws above the groove covering and protecting the sealant all according to details. The membrane shall be tugged into the groove and sealed with JOINT SEAL bituminous Mastic. on the pad foundations and other upstands at a specified height from the slab level for tugging waterproofing membrane into the parapet with sealant applied over. the performance is guaranteed for the specified period. . Sharjah Materials DERBIT PASTA. This flashing membrane complements the main roof membrane and with this combination on vertical exposed areas. shall be constructed prior to commence any roofing system operation. shall be used for the reason that: It is not recommended to mix a self-adhesive membrane with a torch-applied membrane. On the existing RCC suspended slab all large foundations if any.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Specialist Contractor M / S Al Nahda Contracting and Trading Company Limited PO Box # 1053. The lightweight screed using special foam concrete shall be laid in to the following mix design to produce a density of 650 to 750 Kgs / cum Sand / Cement: 1 / 1 Cement: 350 Kg / cum Sand: 350 Kg / cum Water: 210 Lit / cum Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 83 of A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. TERRAM 700. H 14 mill finish Method The roofing system shall be carried out to the following operational sequences. All services drains or other necessary items required to be in place prior to the roofing commences.MAR It is confirmed that the proposed Aluminium Flashing for the roof upstands is a plain mill finish manufactured to BS 1470 / ASTM B 209 Alloy. as both are not compatible From the experience in this climate it has been observed that the textured Aluminium faced membrane tends to delaminate after a few months if left exposed (due to the different co – efficient of expansion between the metal and the bitumen) For the aforesaid reasons the manufacturer recommend a mineral granules faced membrane as these special solar reflective granules are spread over the bitumen while still hot and form part of the roof membrane. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. MGP. An Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted. PRECAST CONCRETE TILES 500 X500 X50 MM form part of MAR were approved subject to the comments. The area shall be cleared and made dry. shall be completed in all respects including grouting. ROOF MASTER. A groove shall be formed around the periphery of the area. Aluminium Flashing. The clarification on the DERBIGUM MGP – This is the membrane flashing from the same manufacturer of horizontal membrane and is a product finished with mineral granules to make it solar reflective as well as UV resistant. DERBIGUM UNIGUM. torched over main membrane and tugged into groove as aforesaid. The surfaces to be laid with screed shall be formed using mortar dabs to the specified profiles to 1 % slope. All these statements constitute management documents. . UV resistant.. if any. The membrane shall be tugged into the groove and sealed with JOINT SEAL bituminous Mastic. An inspection shall be conducted by the manufacturer’s representative and all coordination made. The second layer shall be laid when the first has dried out followed by forming smooth finish to the required falls and cross-falls An Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted The completed screed shall be cured with fresh water for two days and thereafter. The dressing shall be carried out over the angle fillet and upstands properly terminating into pre formed grooves by tugging the membrane into the groove as well as rainwater outlets and around penetrations.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 84 of Foaming agent: 1. mineral surface finished. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. A warranty for the specified period of 10 years shall be issued by the specialist contractor and the Civil Contractor according to the contract requirement Concrete paviors in the form of pre cast concrete tiles 500mm x 500 mm x 50 mm shall be laid loose over ITALPROFILI PVC TILE PADS to be provided at all the intersections and at the corners as shown on the sketch. The ‘foam concrete screed’ shall be laid in two layers to avoid settlement. a coat of DERBIT PASTA bituminous primer shall be applied to all the proposed surfaces.2 Lit / cum The ingredients shall be mixed using a mechanical mixer. Before laying water proofing membrane. The works were executed for major oil companies. ROOF MASTER insulation boards with rebated edges 75 mm thick shall be laid over the dry membrane ensuring all areas are properly covered. shall be loosely laid over the filter membrane. Once dried. pipe supports etc. A cement sand angle fillet of 50 x 50 mm triangular cross section shall be formed at all directional changes. gravel(nominal size 15 – 30 mm) filling shall be carried out to create a good aesthetic. an aerator and a pump. water shall be drained out and the membrane left to dry out. TERRAM 700-filter membrane with 100-mm overlaps shall be laid over top of the insulation boards. laying in 4 mm DERBIGUM UNIGUM membrane shall be commenced with by full torching over the primed screed allowing 100mm wide side and end overlaps. All small and light pre cast pedestals / foundations for the cable trays. Exposed vertical surface of the membrane shall be protected by applying 4 mm thick MGP flashing membrane 300 mm girth. left for one day to dry out. Application on the AC foundation & upstands shall be carried out according to the details shown on the sketch A Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted & ITP signed off Whole surface shall be flooded with water for a period of 72 hours after plugging in all roof drains After successful completion of the test. At the borders where cut tiles may be required. Construction practice Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. Reference documents Drawings Nos. cut and bent to the required profile. Major Equipment Mixer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . covering and protecting the sealant all according to details. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. All these statements constitute management documents. Aerator. The works were executed for major oil companies. Pump Attachment Sketch (Typical upstands and at AC Foundation) Sub Contractor’s method Statement Clarification regarding DERBIGUM MGP Clarification regarding Aluminium Flashing Clarification regarding 10 years guarantee Clarification regarding 72 hours water test #38 Buildings Roofing system Top Index Scope Safety Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the operations on the proposed roofing system over the suspended slabs on buildings.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 85 of Plain mill Aluminium flashing 1 mm thick. shall be fastened with stainless steel screws above the groove. Specifications. 80 mm girth. Aluminium Flashing. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Sharjah Materials DERBIT PASTA. This flashing membrane complements the main roof membrane and with this combination on vertical exposed areas. A groove shall be formed around the periphery of the area. All these statements constitute management documents. The clarification on the DERBIGUM MGP – This is the membrane flashing from the same manufacturer of horizontal membrane and is a product finished with mineral granules to make it solar reflective as well as UV resistant. shall be used for the reason that: It is not recommended to mix a self-adhesive membrane with a torch-applied membrane. TERRAM 700. the performance is guaranteed for the specified period. shall be constructed prior to commence any roofing system operation. PRECAST CONCRETE TILES 500 X500 X50 MM form part of MAR 046 were approved subject to the comments. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Specialist Contractor M / S Al Nahda Contracting and Trading Company Limited PO Box # 1053. DERBIGUM UNIGUM. 2006 Page 86 of A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. ROOF MASTER. as both are not compatible From the experience in this climate it has been observed that the textured Aluminium faced membrane tends to delaminate after a few months if left exposed (due to the different co – efficient of expansion between the metal and the bitumen) For the aforesaid reasons the manufacturer recommend a mineral granules faced membrane as these special solar reflective granules are spread over the bitumen while still hot and form part of the roof membrane.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All services drains or other necessary items required to be in place prior to the roofing commences. The area shall be cleared and made dry. shall be completed in all respects including grouting. MGP. The works were executed for major oil companies. A Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted.2 Lit / cum Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.MAR It is confirmed that the proposed Aluminium Flashing for the roof upstands is a plain mill finish manufactured to BS 1470 / ASTM B 209 Alloy. The lightweight screed using special foam concrete shall be laid in to the following mix design to produce a density of 650 to 750 Kgs / cum Sand / Cement: 1 / 1 Cement: 350 Kg / cum Sand: 350 Kg / cum Water: 210 Lit / cum Foaming agent: 1. on the pad foundations and other upstands at a specified height from the slab level for tugging waterproofing membrane into the parapet with sealant applied over. H 14 mill finish Method The roofing system shall be carried out to the following operational sequences. On the existing RCC suspended slab all large foundations if any. 80 mm girth.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The dressing shall be carried out over the angle fillet and upstands properly terminating into pre formed grooves by tugging the membrane into the groove as well as rainwater outlets and around penetrations. . ROOF MASTER insulation boards with rebated edges 75 mm thick shall be laid over the dry membrane ensuring all areas are properly covered. pipe supports etc. a coat of DERBIT PASTA bituminous primer shall be applied to all the proposed surfaces. The works were executed for major oil companies. The surfaces to be laid with screed shall be formed using mortar dabs to the specified profiles to 1 % slope. Exposed vertical surface of the membrane shall be protected by applying 4 mm thick MGP flashing membrane 300 mm girth. torched over main membrane and tugged into groove as aforesaid. All small and light pre cast pedestals / foundations for the cable trays. if any. mineral surface finished. water shall be drained out and the membrane left to dry out. At the borders where cut tiles may be required. An inspection shall be conducted by the manufacturer’s representative and all coordination made. A warranty for the specified period of 10 years shall be issued by the specialist contractor and the Civil Contractor according to the contract requirement Concrete paviors in the form of pre cast concrete tiles 500mm x 500 mm x 50 mm shall be laid loose over ITALPROFILI PVC TILE PADS to be provided at all the intersections and at the corners as shown on the sketch. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The ‘foam concrete screed’ shall be laid in two layers to avoid settlement. Once dried. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Plain mill Aluminium flashing 1 mm thick. laying in 4 mm DERBIGUM UNIGUM membrane shall be commenced with by full torching over the primed screed allowing 100mm wide side and end overlaps. The second layer shall be laid when the first has dried out followed by forming smooth finish to the required falls and cross-falls A Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted The completed screed shall be cured with fresh water for two days and thereafter. UV resistant. TERRAM 700-filter membrane with 100-mm overlaps shall be laid over top of the insulation boards. shall be fastened with stainless steel screws above the groove. The membrane shall be tugged into the groove and sealed with JOINT SEAL bituminous Mastic. covering and protecting the sealant all according to details. Application on the AC foundation & upstands shall be carried out according to the details shown on the sketch A Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted & ITP signed off Whole surface shall be flooded with water for a period of 72 hours after plugging in all roof drains After successful completion of the test. shall be loosely laid over the filter membrane.. an aerator and a pump. A cement sand angle fillet of 50 x 50 mm triangular cross section shall be formed at all directional changes. left for one day to dry out. gravel(nominal size 15 – 30 mm) filling shall be carried out to create a good aesthetic. 2006 Page 87 of The ingredients shall be mixed using a mechanical mixer. All these statements constitute management documents. Before laying water proofing membrane. cut and bent to the required profile. . Aerator. 2006 Page 88 of Major Equipment Mixer. the labour force shall receive the tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. Pump Attachment Sketch (Typical upstands and at AC Foundation) Sub Contractor’s method Statement Clarification regarding DERBIGUM MGP Clarification regarding Aluminium Flashing Clarification regarding 10 years guarantee Clarification regarding 72 hours water test #39 Cracked gas compressor table top concrete pour Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to pour the Table Top of the framed beam structure. References Drawing nos. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk. Specifications and Rev D Safety Prior to the commencement of work. In addition proper scaffolding according to the project requirements shall be erected around the area to be poured along with providing complete access system such as stepped stairs and the working platforms with top and the bottom guardrails. transit mixers water tank etc. shall be assessed as required as per Site conditions and shall be taken care of. The works were executed for major oil companies. . and the provision of the night lights shall be made for curing Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The area shall be cleared on ground allowing free access to the concrete pumps. the Table Top shall be poured one time monolithically without formation of any construction joint. 2006 Page 89 of Materials The gross volume of the pour is 173 cum The volume of the steel plates inserts is 1.08 cum The applicable volume of the pour is 170 cum approximately. Erecting preparatory works vertical forms in positions Aligning all forms. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The overall procedures that shall be carried out have been given as follows Erection for the preparatory works horizontal forms for the complete pour based on the properitory details from SGB drawings Placing the insert plates on the horizontal forms and if required some tangs be welded or tied by binding wires to the rebars by link rebars Placing the holding down bolts sleeves in the proper locations as shown on the drawings Placing and binding all the design rebars to the drawings’ details. According to the specification the pour pertains to the definition of massive structure. Remaining 16 Pours ‘ B’ sections shown to be concreted after 14 days of the Pour ‘A’ completion. all shown to be concreted prior to Pour ‘B’. All these statements constitute management documents. Inspection and approvals. (Details of the calculations attached). bur lap sheets / hessians and water shall be available according to the requirement Plants and Equipment Batching plant 1 # and 1 standby Concrete pump 1 # and 1 stand by Transit mixers 6# Vibrator 2 # and 2 standby Water tanker 1# Manpower Masons 6# Carpenters 3# Steel fixers 3# Scaffolder 3# Helpers 7# Method The drawing shows the above pour to be carried out into 13 sections by forming 16 construction joints. A total of 5 pours ‘A’ sections. The quantitities involved have been detailed in the attachment.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . The works were executed for major oil companies. But according to the decision vide STQ . Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. the insert plates and the bolt sleeves from the shown ’ centre line of Turbine Exhaust axis’ to be used as a reference line. polythene sheets. Pour sequences are described as Pour ‘A’ and Pour’B’. hence C 30 high slag blast furnace cement to BS 4246 with 70 % replacement utilising 30 % ASTM C 150 Type II cement shall be utilised for the batching according to the specified design mix with the placing temperature not more than 24 degree Celcius Curing materials such as curing compound. Placing and fixing the vertical and the top plates on the vertical forms. . the saturated hessian spread and the polythene relaid. Attachment Q. 2006 Page 90 of Pouring details The pour shall commence from East End and be accomplished in 4 layers according to the attached sequences details proportioned in 12 sections. Immediately after pouring is finished. A layer of insulation material 100 mm thick shall be laid over the polythene. Procedures Pour sequence plan Pour quantities Insert plates volume #40 Water tightness tests for the collection sumps according to BS 8007:1987 section 9 Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures(Typical) that shall be adopted to conduct the water tightness tests for the following water retaining structures. and thereafter. The works were executed for major oil companies. covered with ply sheets to keep the insulation material intact / in place for 72 hours for thermal curing. Lator within 2 hours polythene shall temporarily be lifted. All these statements constitute management documents. The concrete temperature shall not be more than 24 degree Celcius as specified for the massive structures.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.A. The differential thermometers shall be used to record the temperature variations. the routine curing shall continue for the specified period. curing compound shall be sprayed and the surface be covered with polythene membrane. Collection sump Utilities East Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. . monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work. The safety barricades shall be erected around the sumps.Corrotech Civil Contractor QC Inspection and the approval of the membrane Structural Backfilling around the tank to the required level with compaction tests Cleaning the surface of the structure by using waterjetting Application of the floor screed as specified The following operations shall be required to conduct the water tightness test A graduated stick shall be provided on wall top to show the water levels to a’ mm’ count Filling the structure with potable water to the maximum supply level Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk. Polybit. The works were executed for major oil companies. Night hazard indicator light illuminaries shall be installed on the necessary locations. No unauthorised persons shall be allowed to enter the test area. 2006 Page 91 of Collection sump Ethylene Collection sump Utilities East Collection sump Utilities South References Definitions PSM CSM CS FM QC Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. the labour force shall receive the toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Materials Water requirements For 70-TB-201 For 70-TB-202 For 70-TB-203 For 70-TB-205 370 cum and 5 237cum and 5 166cum and 5 191cum and 5 % for stabilisation period % for stabilisation period % for stabilisation period % for stabilisation period Method This test requires the following operational sequences to be completed prior to conductance such as Complete RCC construction of the structure Complete filling of the tie rod holes with MBT Master Flow 544 External Protection to the concrete surfaces with Bitustick XL. All these statements constitute management documents. . Monitoring the seepage and marking the locations. 2006 Page 92 of After water filling.Recording level losses After the test completion. Recording the water losses at 24 hours intervals by simple measurements or by float indicator. pumping the water out and transporting off the site. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Inspection of the applied coating by Civil Contractor QC followed by EPC Contractor approval Details 70-TB-201 / 202 / 203 Inlet pipes 600 mm dia and for 205 inlet pipes 450 and 400 mm dia to be in place according to the levels shown on the drawings as reflected on the schedule as the Inverted level for maximum supply level. The internal surfaces shall be inspected by Civil Contractor QC followed by EPC Contractor approval Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted before the test commences EPC Contractor approval shall be obtained. Water tightness test shall be conducted according to the BS 8007 : 1987 Section 9. All these statements constitute management documents.. Test to be conducted for 7 days for a design crack width of 0. Polybit Inspection of the applied membrane by Civil Contractor QC followed by EPC Contractor approval Structural backfilling shall be carried out according to the project specifications Necessary fileld density tests shall be conducted by Civil Contractor and laboratory All the aforesaid operations shall be completed prior to the commencement of the water tightness test The structure to be tested shall be cleaned to the requirement by using waterjetting on the entire surface of concrete removing all loose spalls.1 applicable to liquid retaining structures Potable water shall be filled into the respective sump pit structures at a rate 2 m per 24 hours for which the attached filling scheduled quantities shall apply. The structure to be tested shall be completed of all RCC constructions according to the specified and agreed procedures. Post water tightness test MBT shall produce a representative sample for approval prior to the coating is applied Approval of the sample by EPC Contractor / Client Applying the concrete protection approved coating material according to the representative sample on the internal surfaces of the structure as specified.1 mm.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. 7 days allowance to stabilise for absorption and autogeneous healing. The tie rod holes shall be filled with Master Builder Technology MBT Masterflow 544 according to the instructions The external surfaces of the structure shall be prepared for the specified application Inspection of the prepared surface by Civil Contractor QC followed by EPC Contractor approval The external surfaces of the concrete around shall be applied with the specified protective system Bitustick XL. dust dirt etc. The records of the test shall be documented on the attached sample form QCF 61 STRUCTURE LEAK TEST form and the judgement on the test shall be made accordingly SCHEDULE PLANNED FOR THE PROPOSED TEST Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The application of the internal protective specified coating shall be carried out to the manufacturer’s instructions Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval Remedial Work if required In case of unsatisfactory performance of the water tightness test and upon the agreement with EPC Contractor. Should the structure not satisfy the 7 days test then after the completion of the remedial work it should be refilled and if necessary left for a further stabilising period. a further test of 7 days’ duration should then be undertaken in accordance with this clause. (Visual inspection) To the other structure for test 6 7 The potable water shall be filled by the water tankers to the above schedule upto the maximum level. All these statements constitute management documents. A 7 days stabilisation period shall be allowed for water absorption and autogenous healing for the requirement for a maximum design crack width 0.The water level shall be maintained by filling in further water for stabilisation. the water shall be pumped out either to the other structure for testing should that be ready to receive it or if not. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 93 of S # 1 2 3 4 5 NUMBER OF DAYS Filling potable water in sump pit 1m 1 deep below the base level of the catch pit and 1 m depth above the base slab to make a total depth 2 m Filling potable water another 2 m depth 1 to make 4 m Filling potable water the remaining 1 depth to maximum supply level Stabilisation period to allow for 7 absorption and autogenous healing Testing period to record the water loss 7 by seepage and by evaporation every 24 hours Pumping the filled water out offsite Total period of water Test 1 18 Days DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION REMARK By tankers filled at a uniform Rate not greater than 2 m in 24 hours By tankers By tankers Additional water to be filled if required Monitoring regarding seepage loss and the provision of 1 / 500 of average depth or 10mm. The works were executed for major oil companies. monitoring for the water loss excluding the evaporation shall be conducted every 24 hours either employing the level floats or manometers or by simple daily measurements. After the stabilisation period.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. .1 mm . injection grouting method shall be adopted to seal the seepage routes. the other construction areas for curing or any other purpose as agreed leaving the pit empty. After the test is successfully completed. The observations shall be recorded on the form QCF 61 Structure Leak Test for documentation During this 7 days period the total permissible loss in level shall not exceed 1 / 500 of the average water depth of the full tank or 10 mm. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. sweep blasting package etc. All these statements constitute management documents. Crack Control Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 94 of Equipment Water Tanker Pump.. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Graduated stick Attachment Water quantity schedule Documentation form QCF for structural leak test Sketch Sub Contractor’s method Statement Clarification regarding DERBIGUM MGP Clarification regarding Aluminium Flashing Clarification regarding 10 years guarantee Clarification regarding 72 hours water test #41 Water tightness tests for the collection sumps according to BS 8007:1987 section 9 Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures (Typical) that shall be adopted to conduct the water tightness tests for the following water retaining structures. The works were executed for major oil companies. Clause 7.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . Collection sump 70-TB-201 Utilities East Collection sump 70-TB-202 Ethylene Collection sump 70-TB-203 Utilities East Collection sump 70-TB-205 Utilities South References Specification.0. . Observations regarding water level drops shall be recorded every 24 hours by visual measurements on mm scale Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. water shall be added to maintain the maximum test level in case it is lost during this period. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Polybit Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted for the approval of the membrane Structural backfilling shall be carried out externally to the project specifications & necessary field density tests conducted to the requirement Application of the floor screed as specified shall be carried out The entire surfaces of structure to be tested shall be sweep blasted removing all loose spalls. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Complete filling of the tie rod holes with MBT Master Flow 544 shall be carried out according to the manufacturer’s instructions 70-TB-201 / 202 / 203 Inlet pipes 600 mm dia and for 70-TB-205 inlet pipes 450 and 400 mm dia shall be laid in place to the levels shown on the drawings as reflected on the water quantity schedule i. The prepared internal surfaces shall be inspected by Civil Contractor QC for approval The following operations shall be involved to conduct the water tightness test according to the BS 8007 : 1987 Section 9.1 mm according to specification requirement. All these statements constitute management documents. The external surfaces of the structure shall be prepared & applied with the specified protective system Bitustick XL.1 applicable to liquid retaining structures A graduated stick shall be provided on wall top to show the water levels to a’ mm’ count Potable water shall be filled into the respective sump pit structure at a rate 2 m per 24 hours for which the attached ‘filling scheduled quantities ‘shall apply. dust dirt etc. it shall be allowed to stay for a period of 7 days for stabilisation. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. absorption and autogeneous healing. Test shall commence from 8th day and continue for 7 days for a design crack width of 0. 2006 Page 95 of Safety Prior to commence any activity. If so required.e the Invert levels at maximum supply elevations.. After water is filled in to the required level. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Water requirements For 70-TB-201 370 cum and 5 % for stabilisation period For 70-TB-202 237cum and 5 % for stabilisation period For 70-TB-203 166cum and 5 % for stabilisation period For 70-TB-205 191cum and 5 % for stabilisation period Method The structure to be tested shall be completed of all RCC constructions according to the specified and agreed procedures. Pump. water shall be pumped out either to the other structure for testing should that be ready to receive it or if not.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 96 of The test records shall be documented on the attached form QCF ‘ STRUCTURE LEAK TEST ‘and the judgement on the test made accordingly During this 7 days period the total permissible loss in level shall not exceed 1 / 500 of the average water depth of the full tank or 10 mm. injection grouting method may be adopted to seal the seepage routes. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. SCHEDULE PLANNED FOR THE PROPOSED TEST S DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION NUMBER # OF DAYS 1 Filling potable water in sump pit 1m 1 deep below the base level of the catch pit and 1 m depth above the base slab to make a total depth 2 m 2 Filling potable water another 2 m depth 1 to make 4 m 3 Filling potable water the remaining 1 depth to maximum supply level 4 Stabilisation period to allow for 7 absorption and autogenous healing 5 Testing period to record the water loss 7 by seepage and by evaporation every 24 hours 6 7 Pumping the filled water out offsite Total period of water Test 1 18 Days REMARK By tankers filled at a uniform Rate not greater than 2 m in 24 hours By tankers By tankers Additional water to be filled if required Monitoring regarding seepage loss and the provision of 1 / 500 of average depth or 10mm. (Visual inspection) To the other structure for test Post water tightness test MBT shall produce a representative Masterseal 550 coating sample for approval by EPC Contractor and the client. After the test is successfully completed. a further test of 7 days’ duration should then be undertaken in accordance with this clause. to the other construction areas for curing or any other purpose as agreed leaving the pit empty. .. The internal surfaces shall be coated according to the approved sample Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve the applied coating Equipment Water Tanker. sweep blasting package etc. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Should the structure not satisfy the 7 days test then after the completion of the remedial work it should be refilled and if necessary left for a further stabilising period. Remedial Work if required In case of unsatisfactory performance of the water tightness test and upon the agreement with EPC Contractor. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. FF lobby & stairs MAR Dated 12. . FM shall explain in full in the Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.4. FF Reception. 2006 Page 97 of Graduated stick Attachment Water quantity schedule #42 Administration building Marble flooring Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out marble flooring on the various room areas. All these statements constitute management documents.3.2000 Approved 4. monitor and direct the SE. The works were executed for major oil companies.2000 Approved 30.4. Lobby.3. STQ MAR Dated 2.2000 Blue Pearl marble for Worktop and Toilet Counters Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.2000 Perlato Royal marble for Administration Building Reception. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the stair case steps & landing References Drawing EPC Contractor UBC & General Construction Practice. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. mixed semidry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required for the bed. . Reception Area + Lobby First Floor. Only industrial cable / wires shall be used for the grinding machine with earthing arrangement to avoid any shock or mishap The personnel working around the grinding machine shall use eyeglasses and all other Personal Protective Equipment Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during the inspection shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Marble tiles 300x600x20mm (Directly placeable) and also Kitchen Work tops & toilet Counters. Only sufficient mortar shall be mixed and spread as can be covered with tiles before it attains its initial set. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed board.Perlato Royal (Placeable according to the supplier’s details) (Al Ain Cement and Marble Product Co) Proprietary Grout Method (Laying Marble Floor Tiles by SEMI DRY method) The following activities are involved to carry out the marble flooring system The areas of the concrete sub strata to be laid with marble shall be brush cleaned and dampened until absorption ceases followed by the finished floor level establishment by means of dots and rules Total thickness for the marble flooring is 100 mm including 80 mm bedding screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) by weight and shall be applied as described below The finishing layer shall be marble tiles 20 mm thick and be laid as described below Details The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by weight. 2006 Page 98 of language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety The workers shall receive a ToolBox Talk according to the project requirement relevant to the operation concerned every day prior to commencement of the activity Proper illumination shall be provided in the dark area The area to be laid with marble flooring system shall be closed for the general movement except those working there and be opened only when the work has properly been completed with hardboard cover protection spread on the newly laid finishes. a 10-mm movement joint shall be formed at the perimeter of all the tiled floors and where the tiling meets structural features such as columns. completely filled and sealed after grouting of the normal joints takes place. All these statements constitute management documents. pipes and the like. The floor finishing shall be carried out using an electrically operated rotary grinding machine fixed with a carborundum stone of varying grades for the uneven edges or the protrusions as well as the fine range for the even areas to attain a smooth surface texture allowing water lubrication. 2006 Page 99 of A slurry of 1 part cement to 1 part sand by volume shall be poured over the surface of the semi – dry mix bedding and spread with a trowel until it is approximately 2 mm thick Dry marble tiles / flags shall then be laid on the slurry and beaten firmly into position with a wooden beater ensuring a true surface contact between the tiles and bedding is formed. All the water shall be washed away after the grinding is completed. machine bases etc. MOVEMENT JOINTS IN TILED FLOORS Unless otherwise indicated in the documents. Where a structural movement joint is provided in the base. The marble tiles / flags shall be correctly positioned in both directions the time these are placed The tiles shall neatly and accurately be cut to a close fit where necessary at abutments. the arrangement to protect the finished areas be made by overlaying hardboards and closing the entry in general. worktops and the counters shall be cut to the exact site dimensions with the wash basins and the sink blocks taken out. a movement joint of the same width in the bedded finish shall be positioned immediately above The movement joint cavities shall extend through the combined thickness of the finish and the bedding mortar.% falls in ‘wet’ areas as may be required.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted for the correct formation of joint alignment and the level profile followed by EPC Contractor approval During grinding any portion damaged or effected badly shall be replaced to the specification requirement. around outlets. . Other standard items such as treads. The grinding runs shall depend on the finishing profile formed. Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted for the correct formation of joint alignment and the level profile followed by EPC Contractor approval The tiles shall be laid level or tops to 1. More varying profile shall be applied with additional grinding rotation till the acceptable one is achieved. The works were executed for major oil companies. risers. These preformed items shall be supplied completed in all respects and fixed to the supplier’s details Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer Wheel barrows Mason’s tools in general Grinding Machine with varying carborundum stone grades attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Plenty of water shall be used for this purpose. Minor blown up or damaged tile shall be grouted with the proprietary compatible colour to match the marble texture A seal coat shall be applied on the ground surface with an approved proprietary polishing material according to the manufacturer’s instructions after which the finished surface be cleaned. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. Specifications Safety Prior to the commencement of work. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. References Drawing No. C 30 high slag blast furnace cement to BS 4246 with 70 % replacement utilising 30 % ASTM C 150 Type II cement shall be utilised for the batching according to the specified design mix with the placing temperature not more than 24 degree Celcius. The area shall be cleared on ground allowing free access to the concrete pumps. Proper scaffolding according to the project requirements shall be erected around the area to be poured along with providing complete access system such as stepped stairs and the working platforms with top and the bottom guard rails.. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk. the labour force shall receive the tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. and the provision of the night lights shall be made for curing Materials The gross volume of the pour is 81 cum The volume of the steel plates inserts is 0. According to the specification the pour pertains to the definition of massive structure .35 cum The applicable volume of the pour is 80 cum apprx. shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. All these statements constitute management documents.. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. hence. . transit mixers water tank etc. (Details of the calculations attached). 2006 Page 100 of Attachment #43 Ethylene gas compressor Table top pour Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Material Method Equipment Manpower Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to pour the Table Top of the framed beam structure.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. stand by Transit mixers 6 Nos. all shown to be concreted prior to Pour ‘B’. The quantitities involved have been detailed in the attachment. the routine curing shall continue for the specified period. Plants and Equipment Batching plant 1 and 1 No. The works were executed for major oil companies. curing compound shall be sprayed and the surface be covered with polythene membrane. Lator within 2 hours polythene shall temporarily be lifted. Steel fixers 3 Nos. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. covered with ply sheets to keep the insulation material intact / in place for 72 hours for thermal curing. Inspection and approvals. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Erection for the preparatory works horizontal forms for the complete pour based on the properitory details from SGB drawings Placing the insert plates on the horizontal forms and if required some tangs be welded or tied by binding wires to the rebars by link rebars Placing the holding down bolts sleeves in the proper locations as shown on the drawings Placing and binding all the design rebars to the drawings’ details. A layer of insulation material 100 mm thick shall be laid over the polythene. Erecting preparatory works vertical forms in positions Aligning all forms. The differential thermometers shall be used to record the temperature variations. Manpower Masons 6 Nos. Immediately after pouring is finished. polythene sheets. Carpenters 3 Nos. 2006 Page 101 of Curing materials such as curing compound. Vibrator 2 and 2 Nos. bur lap sheets / hessians and water shall be available according to the requirement Method The drawing shows the above pour to be carried out into 7 sections by forming 8 construction joints. the insert plates and the bolt sleeves from the shown ’ centre line of Turbine Exhaust axis’ to be used as a reference line. A total of 3 pours ‘A’ sections. The overall procedures that shall be carried out have been given as follows. and thereafter. Remaining 4 Pours ‘ B’ sections shown to be concreted after 14 days of the Pour ‘A’ completion. All these statements constitute management documents. the saturated hessian spread and the polythene relaid. Placing and fixing the vertical and the top plates on the vertical forms. Pour sequences are described as Pour ‘A’ and Pour’B’. standby Water tanker 1 No. But according to the decision vide STQ. the Table Top shall be poured one time monolithically without formation of any construction joint. The concrete temperature shall not be more than 24 degree Celcius as specified for the massive structures. . Pouring details The pour shall commence from East End and be accomplished in 4 layers according to the attached sequences details proportioned in 7 sections. stand by Concrete pump 1 and 1 No. and the provision of the night lights shall be made for curing. (Details of the calculations attached). Helpers 7 Nos. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk. transit mixers water tank etc.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 102 of Scaffolder 3 Nos. shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. The works were executed for major oil companies. .. All these statements constitute management documents.75 cum The applicable volume of the pour is 58 cum apprx. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Attachment QA Procedures Pour sequence plan Pour quantities Insert plates volume #44 Propane gas compressor table top pour Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Material Method Equipment Manpower Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to pour the Table Top of the framed beam structure. the labour force shall receive the tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. The area shall be cleared on ground allowing free access to the concrete pumps. References Drawing nos Specifications Safety Prior to the commencement of work. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Proper scaffolding according to the project requirements shall be erected around the area to be poured along with providing complete access system such as stepped stairs and the working platforms with top and the bottom guard rails. Materials The gross volume of the pour is 60 cum The volume of the steel plates inserts is 0. standby Water tanker 1 No. The overall procedures that shall be carried out have been given as follows Erection for the preparatory works horizontal forms for the complete pour based on the properitory details from SGB drawings Placing the insert plates on the horizontal forms and if required some tangs be welded or tied by binding wires to the rebars by link rebars Placing the holding down bolts sleeves in the proper locations as shown on the drawings Placing and binding all the design rebars to the drawings’ details . . The quantitities involved have been detailed in the attachment. hence. The differential thermometers shall be used to record the temperature variations. A total of 3 pours ‘A’ sections. Lator within 2 hours polythene shall temporarily be lifted. The concrete temperature shall not be more than 24 degree Celcius as specified for the massive structures. curing compound shall be sprayed and the surface be covered with polythene membrane. all shown to be concreted prior to Pour ‘B’. Remaining 4 Pours ‘ B’ sections shown to be concreted after 14 days of the Pour ‘A’ completion. Vibrator 2 and 2 Nos. Inspection and approvals.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Pour sequences are described as Pour ‘A’ and Pour’B’. 2006 Page 103 of According to the specification the pour pertains to the definition of massive structure . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Immediately after pouring is finished . C 30 high slag blast furnace cement to BS 4246 with 70 % replacement utilising 30 % ASTM C 150 Type II cement shall be utilised for the batching according to the specified design mix with the placing temperature not more than 24 degree Celcius Curing materials such as curing compound. covered with ply sheets to keep the insulation material intact / in place for 72 hours for thermal curing. the Table Top shall be poured one time monolithically without formation of any construction joint. The works were executed for major oil companies. stand by Transit mixers 6 Nos. bur lap sheets / hessians and water shall be available according to the requirement. Placing and fixing the vertical and the top plates on the vertical forms. Plants and Equipment Batching plant 1 and 1 No. stand by Concrete pump 1 and 1 No. But according to the decision vide STQ. Erecting preparatory works vertical forms in positions Aligning all forms . All these statements constitute management documents. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. and thereafter. Pouring details The pour shall commence from East End and be accomplished in 4 layers according to the attached sequences details proportioned in 5 sections.the insert plates and the bolt sleeves from the shown ’ centre line of Turbine Exhaust axis’ to be used as a reference line. the saturated hessian spread and the polythene relaid. polythene sheets. Method The drawing shows the above pour to be carried out into 7 sections by forming 8 construction joints. the routine curing shall continue for the specified period. A layer of insulation material 100 mm thick shall be laid over the polythene. The works were executed for major oil companies. The personnel working on this activity shall wear masks. gloves. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk. References Drawing nos Safety Prior to the commencement of work. 3 Nos. Preparing and filling the joints with Bitumastic Details The size of the proposed joints to be filled / sealed is 15 mm wide x 15 mm deep Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Expansion joints in ditches Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to seal the Expansion joints in the ditches.. the labour force shall receive the tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. 3 Nos.A. 2006 Page 104 of Manpower Masons Carpenters Steel fixers Scaffolder Helpers Attachment Q. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 3 Nos. Procedures Pour sequence plan Pour quantities Insert plates volume #45 6 Nos. safety glasses. shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. . Cleaning of the joint surfaces. 7 Nos. Method To seal the expansion joints the following operations shall be carried out. etc.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. It shall take 4-6 weeks post application normally to a full cure at a stage when the solvent evaporation is completed. After application. the sealant shall be smoothened and compressed into the joint using a spatula or a putty knife moistened with cleaning solvent. Masking tape shall be used to confine the joint borders keeping the adjoining concrete surfaces clean.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. In case of the vertical joints. 2006 Page 105 of Application procedure The surface shall be cleaned of all dirt. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Over painting if so required. The Bitumastic shall be applied to the prepared and masked portions.. The contents of the Can shall be removed by a Trowel or a Spatula. All grease and oil contamination shall be removed using hard small brushes. shall be carried out only after the full cure has taken place. . Attachment None #46 Expansion joints in ditches Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to seal the Expansion Joints in the ditches. All these statements constitute management documents. Masking tape shall be removed immediately after the application has been over to keep the concrete surface clean. compressed air etc. The works were executed for major oil companies. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. bottom to top application sequence shall be followed ensuring that the entire volume of the joint is filled in using a spatula or a trowel to effect a total contact with joint surfaces. The fibre board shall be removed to the required depth.5 kg of Bitumastic per linear metre Equipment Trowel Spatula Knife etc. dust and loosely adhering materials. Coverage Coverage for joint depth 10 mm and width 15mm 6. All these statements constitute management documents. The contents of the Can shall be removed by a Trowel or a Spatula. the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements.. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The Bitumastic shall be applied to the prepared and masked portions. Specs: BITUMASTIC. In case of the vertical joints. A full cure (a stage when the solvent evaporation is completed) shall normally consume 4 to 6 weeks post application of the sealant Painting over concrete surface if so required. Eye protection. compressed air etc. Under normal circumstances priming is not required Masking tape shall be used to confine the joint borders keeping the adjoining concrete surfaces clean. The works were executed for major oil companies. Method Size of the proposed joints to be filled / sealed is 15 mm wide x 15 mm deep The surface shall be cleaned of all dirt.Polybit Safety Prior to the commencement of work. The fibreboard shall be removed to the required depth. shall be followed ensuring that the entire volume of the joint is filled in to effect a total contact with joint surfaces. etc. Manufacturer . After application. the sealant shall be smoothened and compressed into the joint using a spatula or a putty knife moistened with cleaning solvent. All grease and oil contamination shall be removed using hard small brushes.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Attachment Manufacturer Datasheet #47 Concrete coating Using master seal 550 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. dust and loosely adhering materials.. 2006 Page 106 of References Drawing nos. Necessary measures shall be applied for any process involving particular safety risk Personnel working on this activity shall wear masks. Masking tape shall be removed immediately after the application is completed to keep the concrete surface clean. shall be carried out only after full cure has taken place. Equipment Trowel Spatula Knife etc. bottom to top application sequence using a spatula or a trowel. gloves. . the labour force shall receive the tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk. . 2006 Page 107 of Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures that shall be adopted to apply the specialist material for concrete protection on the internal surfaces as specified. Scaffolding shall be erected to afford access to the working personnel according to the project requirements.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Hand rails ladders and the toe boards shall be fitted and inspected prior to use. monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work. References Collection sump 70-TB-201 Collection sump 70-TB-202 Collection sump 70-TB-203 Collection sump 70-TB-205 Utilities East Ethylene Utilities East Utilities South Drawings Specifications Master seal 550-product data sheet Definitions PSM CSM CS FM QC Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. All these statements constitute management documents. shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. The works were executed for major oil companies. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. dust. goggles. residual curing compound. All these statements constitute management documents. Simply applied by stiff brush. allowed to dry and later roughened by hand wire brush on the small areas and gently water jetted on the larger areas. personnel protective equipment shall be used i. voids. 2006 Page 108 of During mixing and application of master seal 550. Method The method involves the following sequences in general. The mix quantity shall be such that it could be consumed in one hour during application without allowing any retempering with water.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. which could impair adhesion. The prepared and the saturated surface shall be inspected by Civil Contractor QC followed by EPC Contractor approval The mixed material shall be applied while the surface is visibly damp without standing water using short stiff brush or roller. masonry and most other construction materials. spalls etc. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.8 Kg / sqm at 1 mm thickness The coating shall be 1 mm thick applied in one coat In hot weather the surface to be coated shall be shaded from direct sunlight. Masterseal 550 Master seal 550 is a two component acrylic modified cementitious coating that requires only site mixing to form an ideal product to waterproof and resurface concrete.scraped lightly into the surface. All the holes. Application Coverage 1. The powder shall be slowly added to the liquid component and agitated / mixed for 2 minutes by using a slow speed hand power drill fitted with a suitable paddle attachment. gloves (to avoid material contact to eyes. roller or trowel it forms a waterproof. overalls. shall be removed from the surface by degreasing and washing. The whole surface to be coated shall be cleaned using water jetting and visually inspected to ensure that the roughness does not exceed grade 80 sandpaper. until a homogeneous lump free consistency is obtained. (Roller shall be used in major / large areas) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Materials Coating. The works were executed for major oil companies. The filled areas shall be visually inspected to ensure that the correct mechanical key is achieved. mouth and skin) Material storage / disposal of used containers / waste material Materials shall be stored out of direct sunlight clear of ground and protected from rainfall. .e.. Mixing Master seal is supplied in the pre measured units and shall be mixed on site using clean containers. oil. depressions. flexible coating providing an effective barrier to waterborne salts and atmospheric gases. shall be filled with Masterseal 550 mixed to a trowel consistency . Used containers shall be collected and disposed off as per project requirements. The areas to be coated shall be saturated with fresh and clean water. mould release agent or other contaminants. Surface preparation Mixing Application Details All grease. Construction Manager.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. dry and free of inflowing water References Specifications Water Control / Dewatering Plan . Definitions PSM CM CS Project Site Manager. Equipment Water tanker with water jetting arrangement Hard brushes for minor areas Clean container Slow speed drill with paddle attachment Stiff brush / Roller Attachment Masterseal 550 Data sheet and statement #48 Dewatering for the 84” GRE parallel to Corniche road east west Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment pair line Scope The statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to keep the proceeding excavations. 2006 Page 109 of The evenness and the thickness of the applied coating shall be regularly checked during application while the material is still wet. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. for the route respecting pair of 84 “ GRE pipe lines to be laid in. Construction Superintendent Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Dewatering and Drainage Excavation Safety Plan Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures. The materials shall be allowed to dry and visually inspected Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval Any missed areas shall be saturated and then touched up. . . for the purpose of laying out hoses over used plies to be routed in to reach the proposed sumps for the pumped water disposal. The water logged area shall not be allowed for the workers in general to acceed crossing the existing fence except. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.4 m . dewatering shall be carried out accordingly by the standard Well Point System to be installed on both sides of the proposed route at a depth of minimum 3 m from the existing ground levels at the locations shown on the sketch / drawing and disposed off through the hoses into the proposed sumps to be located at varying distances from 100 to 200 m off Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.4 m depth is required to be excavated . Round the clock watch and ward shall be maintained for the plants and the Equipment Safety standard barriers posted with warning tags shall be installed on both the sides of the excavations covering the well point systems also Night indicator lights shall be provided according to the provisions of safety Access ladders shall be provided every 8 m intervals The safety inspector shall visit the site every day in the morning and the after noon to check whether the safety systems work to the requirement or else the corrective measures be applied.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.8 m average lower than the road level and the water is available at 2 m from the road level but fluctuates rapidly depending on the tides.e East and West as shown on the attached sketch as locations marked A to H for the exposed inspection pits The existing uneven ground level on the proposed area is 1. METHOD Ref Attached Drawing and Sketches The North South excavation has already been carried out to the intersection of the proposed line and the Corniche Road as indicated by point at ‘S’ On the proposed route of the lines i. if so required . Safety Appropriate means regarding safety shall be provided to the requirements . The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities directing the workforce as necessary. 2006 Page 110 of FM Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the trench excavation and backfilling activity. water has to be bailed out upto 0-0 level requiring a 2m massive dewatering along the entire route commencing from the intersection at point ‘S‘ to the terminal point at ‘T’. a 2. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. The existing services shall be protected by the necessary measures according to the statutory regulations and the specifications prior to the excavation commencement for which an inquiry be conducted with the relevant Statutory Organizations / Client Since this massive earth work is to be carried out in full to cover a length of 1200 m or more . while water level is shown at 2.e on the North of the road exist various services at a distance 4 m to 8 m at a depth of 2 to 3 m from the existing road level running along eitherside of the intersection i. The GRE pipe 2200 mm dia pair shall be laid at a bedding of not less than 4000 mm to 4500 mm from the road surface .Since the drawing shows the natural ground level 3. EPC Contractor shall control the activities. in accordance with this method statement.15m level. On the south of the embankment side the existing levels are low lying. For the route part besides the box culvert (under construction) leading to the pipelines West end after running beneath the overhead conveyors.bedding. The sump pits to receive the disposed water shall be filled with 75 mm clean aggregate prior to the disposal is commenced The Well Points on both sides shall be installed in sections of 100 m average for each Sykes Pump catchment and the disposal be effected to as shown by boosting. The works were executed for major oil companies. The sumps shall be located as shown on the drawing / sketch near the embankment north / south side . A total of 8 to 10 sumps shall be needed be formed. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. laying pipes and the backfill. .the system / s have to be kept working till these operations are over . whatever course be feasible. Equipment / plants Well point system Plants and equipment requirement S# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ITEM DESCRIPTION Length of the proposed route Length of the well point system 150mm dia Headers average 5 m or so long 50 mm dia Well points 3 m long 50 mm dia Well points / Headers Flexible connections Sykes / Miller pumps with suction and delivery heads Intermediate water tanks (open top) 3 cum capacity Booster pumps 5 bhp with compatible fittings for tanks connections 150 mm dia hose pipe to suit the pump inlets and outlets with suction and disposal / delivery heads 75 mm dia disposal hose to suit the water tank outlets UNIT m m each each each each each each m m QUANTITY 2400 2400 480 2880 2880 24 6 6 500 1500 REMARK 2 x 1200 m 2 x 1200 m 6 points in each Filterable 6 connections each header 1 pump / 100 well points 1 tank for 4 Sykes pumps 1 booster pump for 4 Sykes pumps Delivery upto the open water tanks Disposal from open water tanks to the proposed sumps Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. the disposal may be made into the culvert manholes as being done by M / S ARCHIRODIN CONSTRUCTION OVERSEAS for that the matter was casually discussed with the supervisor on site Mr BADRI who expressed no concern should the water be discharged that way. so as not to allow the disposed water to flow back into the well point systems. 2006 Page 111 of the road berm by the use of booster pumps installed next to the intermediate water tanks. All these statements constitute management documents. Anyway should this option does not work. the disposal shall be carried on to the proposed sumps as shown since in the vicinity of the Sulpha Plant Building area further sumps to form may not be allowed. for south after jumping over the bund.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. It shall take a duration of around 60 days to carry out the excavation. All these statements constitute management documents. uniformly as thick as possible and not less than 8 mm or more than 13 mm References Specification Safety The work force shall receive every day prior to the commencement of any activity a Tool Box talk regarding operational safety according to the project requirements in addition to the use of personal protective equipment. 2006 Page 112 of 11 12 13 150 mm steel sleeve pipe for under m ground use Drilling Rig with adjustable Auger each attachment for 50 mm dia Well Points All other compatible fittings and miscellaneous items for the whole assembly not covered in above 50 1 To be installed for the incoming crossings For drilling well point bores ATTACHMENT Drawing showing the well point system installation layouts and section Typical details of the system indicative only #49 Ceramic wall tiles fixing Top (INTERNAL) Administration building Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment SCOPE This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to fix the Ceramic wall tiles by bedding with an approved adhesive on one coat plaster applied according to the specification with the pre spatterdash treatment except on metal lathing where 2 coats are permitted with wood float finish. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose..A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . The works were executed for major oil companies. Specifically the personnel engaged on the tiling items shall use masks to prevent inhale the grout or the adhesive smell. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.g.. .. the trueness of the plaster shall be such that when tested with a 3 m straight edge no gap exceeds 3 mm Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. The work area shall be closed to general workers on other parts and opened only after the tiles have been finally cleaned as well the space cleared of electrical fittings.the distribution board and the other fixtures etc. In hot weather standing upright fans shall be provided at the work areas. Definitions PSM CSM CS FM QC Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 113 of In the rooms where proper ventilation or the sunlight is not available. light weight concrete block of all types Examination The strata to receive the tiles shall be examined closely to ascertain that the moisture content are within limits to allow the fixing operation Where the tiling is to be bedded in a thin bed adhesive.e. All these statements constitute management documents. monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Material Glazed Tile size specified 108 x 108 mm Setting material (ultra set polyurethane adhesive ) recommended by manufacturer Cushion edges Rounded external corners Head Jamb and Cill trim shapes Wain scot cap Surface bullnose or bull nose cap External corners Bullnose shapes or as specified Internal corners Field butted square Grouting material Water proof epoxy tiling grout with antifungicide additive (Commercial white sanded latex portland cement type) Method Mesh reinforcement shall be incorporated in the plaster where 1 The structure is out of line and the thickness of the plaster exceeds 13 mm 2 The plaster is to be applied over different structural materials 3 The surfaces of the structural wall shall be subject to excessive movement . electric lights shall be provided with due care regarding protection from the electric wires . The finished surface of the tile shall be firm and true such that when checked with a 3 m straight edge. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . The tiles shall be fixed in position prior to the adhesive gets dried for that it shall be prepared and applied on a small area not exceeding 1m x 1m at a time with a trowel to dry plaster surface in a manner recommended by the manufacturer followed by the tiles pressed firmly into with a twisting / sliding action tapping firmly and cleaned as soon as the bedding be completed. 2006 Page 114 of Where the gap lies between 3 and 6 mm. Glazed edge tiles shall be used at the exposed edges. overlap the tiles. edges or / and corners keeping the on going pattern or joint alignment. with horizontal joints aligning in walls that adjoin or be adjacent The tiles shall be neatly and accurately cut to close fit where necessary at abutments and around outlets. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose..A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. partially filled with an approved joint filler and finished flush with an approved sealant recommended by the manufacturer for the relevant situations. if the walls are out of plumb by not more than 6 mm. The works were executed for major oil companies. The grout haze shall be removed according to the manufacturer’s instructions for the use of acid and chemical cleaners The tile work shall be rinsed thoroughly with clean water prior to and post using chemical cleaners followed by polishing with soft cloth. All these statements constitute management documents. a thick bed adhesive shall be applied in preferance to cutting the defective areas and making good Deviation from true vertical or plumb in the surface of plastering exceeding 6 mm shall be made good Thin bed adhesive shall not be used for fixing tiles with backs incorporating deep keys or frogs for which thick .bed adhesives must be used Civil Contractor inspection followed by EPC Contractor approval The tiles shall be set out before the work commences so that cut tiles be kept to a minimum and where they do occur be as large as possible Joints shall be horizontal and vertical. pipes and the like The tiles shall be extended into recesses. no gap exceeds 3 mm Civil Contractor inspection followed by EPC Contractor approval The joints shall be grouted well to completely fill in as well as appear flush after the adhesive has set and not less than 48 hours post fixing. covers etc. Surplus grout shall be cleaned off from the tiles surfaces as neatly as possible as the work proceeds using a damp cloth and the joints tooled smooth. Movement joints not less than 6 mm shall be provided: At all internal vertical corners At all angles with structural walls and ceilings To form bays not greater than 3000x4500 mm Over all structural movement joints: The joints shall be carried through the plastering to the structural wall. under equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions as well as terminated neatly at obstructions. collars. The tiles shall fit closely to the electrical outlets and fixtures allowing plates. EPC Contractor shall control the service laying activities. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 115 of Civil Contractor inspection followed by EPC Contractor approval Equipment Tile cutter Attachment Approved ITP Form #50 Bedding and gravel filling beneath 60 “ dia pipe cooling water pipe Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted for the execution of bedding and the sub strata gravel filling with the provision to prohibit the fine soil particles to migrate to the bedding beneath the pipe where the water table is met at the bedding level making the compaction and the density test unsustainable Reference documents Drawing Specification. Construction Manager.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . Construction Superintendent Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the trench excavation and backfilling activity. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. Definitions PSM CM CS FM Project Site Manager. Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures. The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities. in accordance with this method statement. directing the workforce as necessary. The Geotextile TERRAM membrane shall be laid on the prepared substrata as shown. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.. the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in. All these statements constitute management documents. 60 “ dia pipe shall be laid according to the requirement Equipment Excavator Compactor Attachment Sketch #51 External concrete protection Administration building Top Index Scope Reference documents Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. After these operations are over and the inspection done. The Geotextile TERRAM membrane shall be continued over the prepared crushed gravel filled formation level surface making gravels wrapped fully allowing no fine soil particles enter the strata. If required. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the project site safety requirements. The works were executed for major oil companies. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. A well packed 200 mm thick crushed gravel filling shall be carried out on apprx.3000 mm wide base. 2006 Page 116 of Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity. Over this wrapped strata a 150 mm thick sand bedding shall be carried out duly compacted according to the requirement of the specifications. A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted as well as after every rainstorm. Barricades. Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required. The excavation shall be carried out upto the formation level plus another 200 mm for crushed gravel filling as shown . shall be arranged as required. Safety Method COOLING WATER PIPE LINE 60 “ DIA PIPE BEDDING AND GRAVEL FILLING The attached sketch shows the proposed bedding and sub strata gravel filling wrapped by Geotextile. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm. adequate means of exit such as ladders or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel. markers and the night lights etc. 2006 Page 117 of Definitions Responsibilities Safety Storage Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to form a protection coating on the external concrete surface to be cladded with the Glass Reinforced Concrete elements. References Drawing Specification above ground concrete protection. gloves eye protection glasses. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . Plenty of clean water shall be available all the time.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity.. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The personnel shall use protective clothing. masks etc. The use shall be made in well-ventilated area and avoid inhalation. Medical attention shall be available all time to treat the adverse effects. for to avoid skin contact.shall be used for the work at heights according to safety requirements. All these statements constitute management documents. Definitions PSM CSM CS FM QC Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. The works were executed for major oil companies. Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required. Only tagged scaffolding comprising all the guard rails foot rails etc.. Transportation shall be available to move the effected personnel to the hospital should the circumstances so require. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. primer system Masterseal 300 H filler Method This application involves the following sequences Cleaning and making up the surface Priming the surface Coating the surface Details Preparation All surfaces shall be free from oil. The works were executed for major oil companies. The coating shall be applied when the humidity is less than 90 % The coating shall not be applied in the dusty weather conditions No post application curing is required The areas to be coated shall be protected from direct sunlight by shading in the hot weather conditions and the ambient temperature be more than 5 degree Celsius. anti-carbonation and waterproof protective coating designed for the protection of concrete structures against carbonation and chloride ingress. . Product shelf life is 12 months subject to proper storage Care shall be taken during use and storage to avoid contact with eyes. 2006 Page 118 of Storage The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from temperature extremes. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.8 litre per sqm surface coverage to achieve a continuous coating The continuous coating may be achieved in 1 or 2 coats of application The coating shall be protected from the rain and humidity for 24 hours / until it dries out using polythene sheets keeping off the area. Material Master Builder Technology Product Masterseal 300H . The surfaces shall be cleaned from dust / sand using compressed air. mouth. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Immediate medical attention shall be called for in case of any adverse effect to the personnel handling the product Damaged tins shall be disposed off according to the state regulations. The primed surface shall be allowed to dry tack free for a minimum duration of 2 hours before applying Masterseal 300H coating. elastomeric decorative. grease. Application Masterseal 300 H shall be applied directly from the containers using a brush or roller @ 0. flexible. Equipment Brush Roller Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.an acrylic based. The surfaces shall be brush primed with Masterkure 181S and subsequently Masterseal 300H mixed with Masterseal 300 H filler applied as a scrape coat over blow holes and depressions. skin and foodstuffs. friable matters and curing compound. The containers shall be resealed after use. Masterseal 181S. Arrises shall be rounded off and the protrusions ground so that the resulting surfaces appear smooth. flexible. All these statements constitute management documents. gloves. foot rails etc. elastomeric decorative. anti-carbonation and waterproof protective coating designed for the protection of concrete structures against carbonation and chloride ingress. masks etc . .to avoid skin contact. shall be used to afford access to high locations.an acrylic based. Masterseal 181S. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Personnel shall use protective clothing. eye protection. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Material shall be used in well-ventilated area and inhalation avoided. References Specification above ground concrete protection. Necessary measures shall be applied to any activity involving safety risk. Plenty of clean water shall be made available. shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Master Builder Technology Product Masterseal 300H .primer system Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Only tagged scaffolding with guardrails. 2006 Page 119 of Attachment MBT Statement #52 Above ground concrete protection Using masterseal 300 h Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to apply protection coating on above ground concrete surfaces. STARRT Card shall be used. MAR -Material Approval for 181 S and 300H Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity.. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Arrises shall be rounded off and the protrusions ground so that the resulting surfaces appear smooth. Application Masterseal 300 H shall be applied directly from the containers using a brush or roller @ a minimum of 0. Sweep blasting shall be used when necessary to obtain an acceptable surface for coating otherwise the surfaces shall be cleaned from dust / sand using compressed air. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.8 litre per sqm surface coverage to achieve a continuous coating Continuous coating may be achieved in 1 or 2 coats of application The coating shall not be applied in the dusty weather conditions No post application curing is required Equipment Brush Roller Attachment MBT Statement #53 Above ground concrete protection Using masterseal 300 h Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Primer The surfaces shall be brush primed with Masterkure 181S and allowed to dry for 2 hours Subsequently Masterseal 300H mixed with Masterseal 300 H filler applied as a scrape coat over blowholes and depressions and allowed to dry. . grease. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The containers shall be resealed after use. Damaged tins shall be disposed off according to the state regulations. 2006 Page 120 of Masterseal 300 H filler Storage The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from temperature extremes. friable matters and curing compound. Method Surface Preparation All surfaces shall be free from oil. friable matters and curing compound. Damaged tins shall be disposed off according to the state regulations. Plenty of clean water shall be made available.an acrylic based. shall be used to afford access to high locations. flexible.primer system Masterseal 300 H filler Storage The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from temperature extremes.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Material shall be used in well-ventilated area and inhalation avoided. Primer The surfaces shall be brush primed with Masterkure 181S and allowed to dry for 2 hours Subsequently Masterseal 300H mixed with Masterseal 300 H filler applied as a scrape coat and allowed to dry. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. foot rails etc. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Method The system shall only be applied to surfaces that have been passed as being ready to receive them. The works were executed for major oil companies.. Masterseal 181S. Necessary measures shall be applied to any activity involving safety risk. 2006 Page 121 of Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to apply protection coating on above ground concrete surfaces. Personnel shall use protective clothing. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. gloves. . masks etc . All surfaces shall be free from oil. Only tagged scaffolding with guardrails. STARRT Card shall be used. The containers shall be resealed after use. All necessary repairs to the concrete surface shall have been carried out and relevant QC documentation completed. Any snag observed during his visit. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Sweep blasting shall be used to obtain an acceptable surface for coating and the surfaces shall be cleaned from dust / sand using compressed air. All these statements constitute management documents. References Specification above ground concrete protection. MAR -Material Approval for 181 S and 300H Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity.to avoid skin contact. eye protection. anti-carbonation and waterproof protective coating designed for the protection of concrete structures against carbonation and chloride ingress. shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Master Builder Technology Product Masterseal 300H . grease. elastomeric decorative. The works were executed for major oil companies. References Drawing Nos.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Specification. 2006 Page 122 of Application Masterseal 300 H shall be applied directly from the containers using a brush or roller @ a minimum of 0. All these statements constitute management documents. 4 “ dia PVC ducts for telecommunication cables over the existing ducts between box No. Construction Superintendent Foreman Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures.8 litre per sqm surface coverage to achieve a continuous coating Continuous coating may be achieved in 2 coats of application (minimum) The coating shall not be applied in the dusty weather conditions No post application curing is required Equipment Brush Roller Attachment MBT Statement #54 Hand excavation to install Telephone ducts between box no. 20 to telecom centre. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 20 to telecom centre Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the laying in 2 No. Construction Manager. Definitions PSM CM CS FM Project Site Manager. 141 m is running under the police station car park and the access road. 2 to the internal Telecom Vault is also running beneath the interlocking blocks paving after crossing under the fence wall Method The work shall involve the following operational procedures. the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in. shall be arranged as required. Remove the interlocking blocks Road cutting at the police station entrance across 500 mm wide or as required Bridge the gap at the road cut using steel plates to facilitate the smooth traffic plying Manual excavation of the trench in the entire 141 m length Sand bedding 75 mm Install 2 nos. in accordance with this method statement. 3 to no. 3 and No. Additional / spare 2 nos. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the project site safety requirements.. 2 i. The main portion of the line in the middle as shown is access road and the parking facility for the police station The internal portion of the line from man hole no. PVC ducts 4 “ dia are to be provided above the existing ducts The access road to the police station is wearing asphalt course From manhole no. The works were executed for major oil companies. manholes MH2 and MH3 exist The manholes centre-to-centre distance is 141 m. 2006 Page 123 of Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the trench excavation and backfilling activity. Barricades. 100 mm dia pipe ducts Sand filling over the ducts 75 mm Backfilling as specified Refixing the interlocking tiles Making good the access road Removing the steel plates Between the manhole No. 2. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. The proposed section to be excavated is 500mm wide and 1000 mm deep. Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2 and the internal telecom vault Removing the interlocking blocks Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm. EPC Contractor shall control the activities. If required. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity. The Construction superintendent shall control and monitor the operations directing the construction Foreman The Construction Foreman shall execute these activities directing the workforce as necessary. A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted as well as after every rainstorm. Status The site is located at the police station where 2 no. .e. adequate means of exit such as ladders or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel. Between man hole No. markers and the night-lights etc. The works were executed for major oil companies.2 to the internal vault crossing below the fence wall Sand filling 75 mm thick below the proposed duct Laying ducts Filling 75 mm thick sand over the laid ducts Entering cable way Making good the entry Backfilling as specified Refixing the interlocking blocks to the pattern Clearing the site Details External The existing interlocking paving tiles shall be removed to a safer location from the required work area and stacked properly The access road shall be cut across to the required level exposing the existing ducts and the bridging steel plates be laid over completely to facilitate the car access The manual excavation shall be carried out in the entire length of 141 m to the given sectional dimensions upto the existing ducts as shown After the excavation to the required depth is completed. All these statements constitute management documents. 4 “ dia new ducts which be placed and further covered with another 75 mm thick sand layer After the sand is filled in.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the effected access road shall be made good by asphalt laying on concrete base Internal The interlocking blocks shall be removed from the proposed marked route and stacked well and safe to be reused The excavation shall be carried out on the entire length from the fence to the existing vault The excavation shall be carried out from the manhole nos. the interlocking blocks shall be refixed to the same location or the pattern. . The backfilling shall be done in the road cut part upto the concrete bottom and asphalt laid over After the whole backfilling is over. the backfilling shall be carried out according to the project specifications upto the bottom of the interlocking blocks to be refixed After the backfilling is completed. a 75 mm thick layer of sand shall be filled in on the existing ducts to receive 2 nos. 2006 Page 124 of Manual excavation of the trench to the existing ducts from the manhole No. which existed before these were removed. the interlocking blocks shall be refixed to the existing pattern and the effected wall portion be repaired to the extent of damage if any Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2 to the inside of the wall penetrating beneath The whole route of the existing ducts shall be exposed Sand shall be filled in 75 mm thickness over the existing ducts Spare ducts 2 nos shall be laid over the sand filling over the existing ducts Further sand filling 75 mm thick shall be carried out to cover the new ducts and the backfilling be commenced to the bottom of the existing interlocking pavement according to the specifications After the backfilling is over. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. CM Construction Manager.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the activities in accordance with this method statement. Definitions PSM Project Site Manager. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Foreman shall execute and assist monitor these activities directing the workforce necessary. References Drawing The revised IFC drawing was received after the completion of the blinding concrete and Rebar binding works. The Construction Superintendent shall control and monitor the operations directing construction Foreman. EPC Contractor shall control the activities. the the the as Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 125 of The external portion from the wall to the manhole shall also be sand filled and backfilled according to the details The whole work shall be approved Equipment Jackhammer Compressor Attachment Sketch #55 Backfilling of the west side of the quench tower foundation – (rib) Top Index Scope Reference documents Existing Windows Section as per drawing Reasons for Proposal Details of New proposal and Location change in Placement Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted for the construction of west direction extended part of the design foundation / Cantilever rib. . propping etc.. After the completion of the pour and the sequential curing and a lapse of 14 days. . Application of the membrane to the underside / soffit of the slab. The concrete shall be poured to the preparatory works carried out on site. centering and shuttering of form work. Method The extended part shall be constructed to the following sequences. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. and all the relevant activities have been carried out to the design requirement per previous revision and according to the project specifications. the forms shall be struck from the underside of the slab / soffit The formed surface shall be applied with the protective concrete membrane as specified and shown on the sketch The space left between the soffit and the prepared ground shall be prepared for the concrete filling by erecting the formwork in the letter box style The forms shall be fabricated according to the following descriptions Bottom panel of 600 mm height shall be erected around Top panel of 200 mm shall be prepared in letter box style to allow the pour of the concrete The top panel post pour shutters shall be made ready before the commencement of the concrete Immediately after the pour reaches to the brims / soffit level The top panels shall be placed in position to close all the external surface and supported to the requirement The forms shall be struck as per the project specification Equipment Concrete Pump Concrete Transit Mixers Attachment Sketch #56 Excavation Cooling water outfall chamber Top Index Scope Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 126 of Safety The workforce shall receive every day before the commencement of any activity a Tool Box talk relevant to the operation according to the project requirements. All the safety measures shall be arranged according to the operational requirement. The deshuttering shall be done after 14 days. the concrete shall be poured to the works done. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Backfilling the underside space by the lean mix PBFC 20 grade concrete. Details Since all the preparatory works such as the bending and binding of the reinforcement. Barricades. Definitions PSM Project Site Manager. The Construction Superintendent shall control and superintend and monitor the operations directing the Foreman as required. All these statements constitute management documents. References Drawing Specification Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures.3 m level from RGL +10. shall be arranged as required. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 127 of Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation for the foundation in respect of the Cooling Water Outfall Chamber.e a depth of 7. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the project site safety requirements. deploying the workforce on the job as necessary. the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in. The works were executed for major oil companies. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm. adequate means of exit such as ladders or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel. If required. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.2 m The excavation has to be carried out to the +2. Design Status The centre lines of the proposed structure and the coordinates meet at N (Typ) and E (Typ) The plan size of the chamber is 10. markers and the night-lights etc.025 m x 7. EPC Contractor shall do surveillance on the operations. The Construction Foreman shall execute these activities. CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the excavation activity in accordance with this method statement..8 m shall be excavated Method The excavation shall be carried out to the following sequences Setting out the lines Barricading the area Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed according to the project safety requirements.500 i. A competent inspector shall inspect the excavated area daily as well as after every rainstorm to assess the safety measures adopted. CM Construction Manager. Reference Documents Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The excavation shall be carried out to the details shown on the sketch in 5 steps of size 750 mm tread and 1500mm riser and the bottom step of 675 mm riser.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. The excavated earth shall be transported to the stockpiles immediately keeping the site tidy. the excavation lines shall be marked 4750 mm away from the proposed external faces of the structure as shown on the sketch. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. The excavation shall be carried out in strips of 750 mm depth until the whole earth mass is taken out. The size of the lowest level excavation shall be 120025 x 9200 mm and that of the top 19525 x 16700 mm. 2006 Page 128 of Excavation in stages as shown on sketch Details Attached sketch To start with. The excavation shall be started from one end and the top 750 mm deep be completed The access shall be ramped for the equipment to enter. a surveyor shall set out the site for the excavation to the exact lines and coordinates references. Equipment Excavator Dumper Attachment Sketch #57 Drilling of holes on Pipe rack & structures on site Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Scope The purpose of this Method Statement is to define the sequence and methodology that shall be implemented for the drilling of holes on structural steel members that have been erected and which requires the drilling of holes due to manufacturing error in location or design change after the beams have been primed or finished coated. After the setting out. All these statements constitute management documents. Allow about 4 Hours for drying. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity. burrs removed and edges rounded off. Using a drilling machine. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The Construction Supertindent shall monitor these activities. The bare surfaces is made dust free and cold galvanizing applied as a coat with ‘Jotun Barrier 86” .13 Safety Requirements for Steel Erection Relevant Drawings Definitions CM CS FM Construction Manager. Construction Superintendent Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource the drilling of holes. These holes shall be subsequently drilled to the specified diameter. a pilot hole of size 8mm or 10mm diameter shall be initially drilled. directing the workforce as necessary. . preferably a magnetic base drilling machine. a two pack zinc-rich epoxy primer .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required. Men working at heights shall be equipped with the required personal safety equipment. Make necessary touch-ups using the same grade. The area around the holes shall be cleaned. colour which were used to paint the structure-prime coat and the top coat if necessary. The Erection Foreman shall control the workforce ensuring the full implementation of this method statement including safety measures. This shall be effected by either using emery paper or grinding wheel. Equipment Drilling machine Man lift Scaffolding if required Grinding machine #58 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the project site safety requirements. Method The new location of the hole centres on the specific member item shall be marked as per the details on the drawing or drawing revision. in accordance with this method statement. The works were executed for major oil companies. The use of cranes or man lifts shall be assessed and all safety regulations enforced. 2006 Page 129 of Specification Steel Structure Fabrication Specification Painting Specification Galvanizing Specification Structural Steel Erection ANSI A 10. Method The site shall be graded and compacted to the levels indicated upon the approved grading drawings. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor . IS Infrastructure Superintendent. All these statements constitute management documents. ST Survey team. shall be set out. using approved drawings. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. water. for the drainage. A record drawing of the final grades shall be produced. Reference documents Approved Site office layout and details drawings. electric and fire water. . The works were executed for major oil companies. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure the establishment of the site office complex is in accordance with the drawings and agreed specifications. The Construction Superintendent shall coordinate and supervise the day to day activities. The ST shall check the final grades. 2006 Page 130 of Site office establishment Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. The ST. shall set out the relevant issues such as service trenches and foundations. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the establishment of the site office. advising and implementing all safety procedures. along with the Foremen and Survey Team. Services: Service trenches relating to the site office complex. PSM Project Site Manager. CS Construction Superintendent. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor the daily activities. shall be off loaded from the delivery wagon. Power Supply: The relevant pre-engineered sections shall be sealed. The drainage pipes shall be installed to grade. The precast concrete foundation blocks. Attachment ITP No: Temporary Building Checklist QCF08. a mechanical excavator shall excavate the trenches. Footpaths around the site office shall be constructed as per drawing. Where any services shall cross an area that shall be trafficked. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. shall be utilized for the setting out. The appropriate electrical power supply and distribution network shall be provided and commissioned as per approved drawings and schematics. Equipment Excavator. the service shall be ducted or / and protected with concrete surround as appropriate. Drainage ditches for stormwater shall be graded according to the site office layout drawing. 2006 Page 131 of Working to levels. the foundation layout drawing that indicates the precast concrete block foundation locations. Surplus material shall be removed from site. Draw pits and chambers for cabling shall be located in a similar manner. shall be constructed including covered shelters where appropriate. Foundations: For the pre-engineered office units.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The services may share common trenches where appropriate. Etisalet shall provide the service to the designate locations within the building. shall be placed upon the pre graded ground. The works were executed for major oil companies. The appropriate checklist shall be utilized. #59 Welding of Earthing Lugs on Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. direct onto these blocks. The relevant utilities that require connection shall be connected. The pre-engineered office units. Crane. Shim plates shall be used between the precast concrete block and the unit chassis where necessary. Excavated material shall be re-used for backfilling when the services have been installed. Sewage holding tanks shall be located as per drawing. plus warning tape for cabling shall be provided. . Telephone Service. All service trenches shall receive appropriate sand bedding and surround. All these statements constitute management documents. A steel tank shall be utilized for water storage. The tank shall be backfilled as appropriate. Parking areas as indicated on the site office layout drawing. Manholes shall be placed at locations indicated upon the site office complex drainage drawings. Infra structure: Access roads to the site office shall be constructed according to the layout drawing. The internal distribution system shall be installed as per approved scheme. Dump trucks. in accordance with this method statement.Attached for Reference Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CM Construction Manager.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Welding shall be done according to the approved WPS using duly qualified welders. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The Lug shall be initially tack welded to the column and then fully welded to the required fillet size. CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource this activity. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Method The location of the Earthing Lugs on the respective columns shall be marked off. The fillet weld shall be cleaned and free of defects. The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities. The works were executed for major oil companies. Approximate 30mm of the surrounding area shall be cleaned to remove the primer and galvanising. directing the workforce as necessary. The QC inspector shall ensure that the necessary visual inspection is carried out. Reference Documents Specification Steel Structure Fabrication Specification Painting Specification Galvanizing Specification Structural Steel Erection Drawing No. Safety Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required. (Also Refer E-Mail of 6\11\99) . . 2006 Page 132 of East West Piperack (SR0099A &B) Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this Method Statement is to define the sequence and methodology that shall be implemented for the welding of Earthing Lugs on the columns of the East West Piperack steel structure. QP-010 WPS No. CS Construction Superintendent Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Allow about 4 Hours for drying. a two pack zinc-rich epoxy primer. 2006 Page 133 of Visual inspection to be done prior to surface finish. The bare surfaces is made dust free and cold galvanizing applied as a coat with ‘Jotun Barrier 86”. QW-009 WPS No. Reference Documents Specification PSM Project Site Manager CM Construction Manager. Copy of E-Mail (indicating location of Earthing Lug) PQR No. QW-010 #60 Filling around all the pipes within the plant area Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted for the filling around the GRP pipes within the Plant Area. colour which were used to paint the structure-prime coat and the top coat if necessary.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The surface shall be inspected prior to cold galvanizing and painting. Equipment Welding Machine Grinding Machine Attachment Drawing N0. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Make necessary touch-ups using the same grade. QP-009 PQR No. . The works were executed for major oil companies. The sand shall be placed in the first layer portion to replace the filled material circumferencially. Equipment Compactor Attachment Sketch showing various stages of filling #61 Precasting man holes Catch basin and Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 134 of FM QC Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities CM shall plan and resource this activity in accordance with this method statement. Safety Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed according to Project requirement. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The Construction Foreman shall execute these activities deploying the workforce as necessary. The field density test shall be conducted for 95 % compaction. monitor and direct these activities. A portion of the compacted material 150 mm radially shall be removed to replace with sand circumferentially . . compacted to 150 mm. The sand shall be placed in the second layer portion to replace the filled material circumferentially. The remaining strata upto the ground level / required level shall be filled in with fill material in 200 mm approximately compacted to 150 mm thick layers according to specifications. The QC inspector shall ensure that the necessary inspection and test are carried out. CS shall control. Method The following activities shall be involved to fill around the pipes laid within the plant area To fill the sand in 150 mm thickness around the laid pipes To fill the approved Red fill material in layers in the remaining trench space 150 mm compacted Details The first layer shall be filled 200 mm apprx. The works were executed for major oil companies. Again a portion of the compacted material 150 mm radially shall be removed to replace with sand circumferentially. The structural fill material for the second layer shall be placed in 200 mm thick compacted to 150 mm for 95 % field density and tested according to the specifications.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. Similarly the succeeding layers of fill material shall be placed in 200mm thickness approximately compacted to 150 mm according to the specifications and replaced by the sand filling as aforesaid until the apex level of the pipe is covered with sand. CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. Reference Documents Drg Drg Drg Drg Drg Drg Drg Drg Man Holes Man Holes Man Holes Man Holes Catch Basins Catch Basins Catch Basins Typical Details Specifications Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CM Construction Manager.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. . monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 135 of Valve chambers Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to precast the manholes. catch basins and fire water main valve box (wherever so required to be used precast) chambers and install in specified prepared locations. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 136 of Safety Every day prior to the commencement of any activity. . The works were executed for major oil companies. the work personnel shall receive a Tool Box talk relevant to the operation according to the project safety requirements. A safety inspector shall inspect the operation daily and direct the Foreman and superintendent address the snags if any Method The following activities shall be involved: To prepare a precasting yard on site To fabricate the form works according to design details To fabricate the box outs to be used in forms To fabricate the reinforcement To place the rebars and the non critical cathodic protection To cast bases with a kicker and shear key as shown in the first stage and cure To scabble the kicker to roughen the construction joint surface To cast walls with pipes inlet and outlet boxes formed in the second stage with the lifting hooks To cure the cast units To cast the cover slabs in the third stage and cure Excavation of the relevant area / s Blinding and membrane Transportation of the completed open units to the locations Installation of the units on the correct alignment and levels Inspections by Civil Contractor QC and EPC Contractor approval To prepare the cover slab bearing mortar bed as specified To provide the box out sleeves for steps insertion Pipe laying by others To install the seals around the pipes and the box out concrete To cast the surrounding concrete 150 mm thick as specified To apply 1 mm thick coal tar epoxy on the external surfaces as specified To bench the invert levels between the pipe flows where specified Inspections by Civil Contractor QC and EPC Contractor approval To plug the pipe spigot ends To place the covers Details A precast yard having a capacity of about 20 units as shown on the attached sketch shall be used for the precasting operations The yard shall have convenience for the vehicles to freely move for various activities Strong platforms of 100 mm thick concrete shall be used as the casting bases / floors In one go about 10 units shall be made ready for the bottom slab pouring The overlap shall be provided from the top of the kicker as specified and if so convenient the rebars shall be fabricated continuously The formwork for the base slabs with kickers to be cast monolithically shall be prepared according to the typical sketch attached Required rebars shall be placed in the correct locations with 75 mm covers / spacers Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 137 of Shear key forms shall be erected according to the details and well clamped in Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval The concrete shall be poured through a chute The curing shall be carried out by spraying compound and later by saturated hessian and polythene cover The wall formwork shall be fabricated on site using marine ply The internal forms shall be fixed first to the correct dimensions The box outs shall be fixed to the required locations on the fixed forms The rebars for the walls as well as the trimming around box outs shall be placed in position The external forms shall be fixed around well supported. specified seals shall be placed in with the surrounding concrete as well as the box out void forms erected followed by concrete pouring into the box out voids and the plug(concrete surround) The benching wherever specified shall be formed according to the channel flows and the details The bedding of the joint 20 mm thick shall be carried out on site as specified After the levels and the alignment are ensured. the cover slab shall be correctly placed in followed by the formation of the concrete block work pad to suit the cover elevation The cover shall be set in on the block work pad using cement sand mortar The mass concrete shall be laid around the cover as specified The external surfaces shall be applied with 1 mm dry film thickness non solvented coal tar epoxy in accordance with project specifications Civil Contractor QC inspection followed by EPC Contractor approval Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. . in plumb and correct dimensions The lifting lugs shall be placed in the required locations in the walls using 16 mm dia rebar according to the detailed sketch attached A binding wire length shall be tied to the horizontal rebars in continuity connected to the boss fixed near wall top for the cathodic non critical arrangement / connection Civil Contractor QC inspection followed by EPC Contractor approval Pouring concrete into wall forms with wood float top surface finish and curing by compound and later by hessian and polythene cover for the specified period Forming cover slab shutters according to the specified details Forming the cover box out shutters into the required position Placing the rebars into the correct positions Fixing the cover lifting hooks according to details attached Civil Contractor QC inspection followed by EPC Contractor approval Pouring concrete and curing as aforesaid Inserting the steps shall be carried out by fixing the pieces into the preformed holes in the concrete walls as created by box sleeves with approved grout at a stage when the concrete has gained sufficient strength The excavation shall be carried out to the specified level and alignment followed by blinding and water proofing The open precast chambers shall be crane lifted and transported by a trailor to the relevant locations followed by offloading into the correct alignment The pipes shall be laid by others After the pipes are laid. All these statements constitute management documents. References STQ . MAR Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . 2006 Page 138 of The whole levels and the alignment details shall be documented according to requirement Equipment Crane Concrete Transit mixer Trailer Vibrator Attachment Yard layout Kicker details Sketch showing lifting hooks for unit walls and base Sketch showing lifting hooks for cover slab #62 Termination detail to protective membrane around rcc columns supporting the structural steel Columns for pipe racks CASE (1) WITH ALUMINIUM BEAD CASE (2) WITH REBATE CASE (3) GRAVEL FILL CASE (4) PAVING Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures that shall be adopted to clampin the waterproofing membrane termination using Aluminium Beads around the column sides to substitute the formation of the conventional rebate partly for the pipe racks foundations and for the other areas such as hard / soft landscapes. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. Industrial cleaner shall be used followed by washing with soap and water. 2006 Page 139 of Definitions PSM CSM CS SE FM QC Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Site Engineer Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. monitor and direct the SE. The personnel shall use the PPE.Polyurethane-Gun Grade Cold seal 200PF for horizontal usage on Aluminium strip (Manufacturer BCR) (Emirates Specialities) or equivalent Method The following operational sequences shall be involved Case 1 To cut the Aluminium beads to the exact dimensions according to the column size requirement. masks. Storage The material including the sealant shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures. eyeglasses etc. To avoid skin contact. gloves. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. use of barrier cream to protect from the adverse effect of sealant application shall also be made. Material safety data shall be referred to for disposal and any further information. All the manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for the purpose. . FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the toolbox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work. A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who shall immediately implement the instructions accordingly.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Materials Aluminium Bead lengths to the Sectional dimensions 30 mm x 2 mm Drilling and fixing screws 3 mm dia Sealant. The works were executed for major oil companies. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements relevant to the activity involved Any process adopted which may involve a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. All these statements constitute management documents. the sealant shall be applied on to the space left in the groove after the application of the water proofing membrane termination has been trimmed . All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The mixing and application equipment shall be cured immediately Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval Case 2 Where the conventional groove is to be provided. Case 3 Where the area comprises soft landscape such as gravel or soil fill Case 4 Where the area comprises hard landscape such as paving Details Case 1 Application of the waterproofing membrane according to the specifications to the defined levels keeping the top 200 mm or variable dimension according to the drawing above the finished ground level Marking shall be made to the exact line and level to obtain the profile as per drawing Required lengths to the exact site dimensions shall be cut to suit a close fit between the bead ends Every bead shall be provided 3 # minimum screws to be drilled and fixed into the bead and the concrete penetrating the membrane The screws shall be fixed using an electrical operated Drill and Screw After the screws have been fixed into and the beads are in proper alignment / the location. the waterproofing membrane shall be tacked in with the sealant applied according to the specifications and the manufacturer’s instructions. approved sealant shall be applied to the top of the bead keeping about 5 mm above the bead with an overlap on the down ward on the bead as follows Application of sealant The material shall be applied using a sealant gun fitted with conical nozzles adjustable to suit the width The sealant shall be gunned into the junction using an even trigger pressure. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. No Aluminium bead shall be used for this case. A smaller timber spatula soaked in soapy water shall be used to compact the sealant into the joint for a smooth polish finish formation.The sealant shall be applied around and formed continuous according to the manufacturer’s instructions Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . cleaning the nozzle occasionally to avoid contamination. 2006 Page 140 of To provide every column 4 # beads by drilling and fixing using Hilty equipment To connect the bead to the column side keeping the membrane tacked in by drilling and fixing screws 3 # each side To apply sealant a few mm above on the top of the bead covering the bead / column surface junction and a portion few mm downwards well finished to a smooth profile Case 2 Where the grooves have already been chased. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. All other details shall remain Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval as in case 1 if no rebate be chased Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval Case 4 In the paved area the membrane shall continue upto the termination level but the protection board cease at 20 mm below the paving level filled with mastic on top keeping all other details as in case 1 if not chased for rebate Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval Equipment Electrical operated drill Sealant applying gun Attachment Sketches as in STQ Case wise description #63 Termination detail to protective membrane around rcc columns supporting the structural steel Columns for pipe racks CASE (1) WITH ALUMINIUM BEAD CASE (2) WITH REBATE CASE (3) GRAVEL FILL CASE (4) PAVING Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 141 of Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval Case 3 In gravel or soil area the membrane shall be terminated at a level 150mm plus below the footing top keeping the Aluminium bead strip details typical.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. ) Use of barrier cream to protect skin from the adverse effect of sealant shall also be made. A smaller timber spatula soaked in soapy water shall be used to compact the sealant into the joint / junction for a smooth polish finish formation. other structures and for the other areas such as hard / soft landscapes. Material safety data shall be referred to for disposal and any further information. References MAR (Site fixed sample approved) Safety Prior to the commencement of work. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. eyeglasses etc. . The mixing and application equipment shall be cleaned immediately after use Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & the relevant ITP signed off Case 2 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 142 of Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to clampin the waterproofing membrane termination using Aluminium Beads around the column sides to substitute the formation of the conventional rebate partly for the pipe racks foundations.Polyurethane-Gun Grade Cold seal 200PF for horizontal usage on Aluminium strip (Manufacturer BCR) (Emirates Specialities) or equivalent Method The following operational sequences shall be involved Case 1 Concrete surface shall be cleaned of all dirt & dust using a brush Application of the waterproofing membrane according to the specifications to the defined levels keeping the top 200 mm or variable dimension according to the drawing above the finished ground level Lines shall be marked on all sides to correct level as per drawing Bead Lengths to exact site dimensions shall be cut to suit a close fit between the ends Every bead shall be provided with a minimum 3 # screws to be drilled and fastened into the concrete penetrating the membrane using an electrical operated Drill After the screws have been fastened and the beads are in proper alignment.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. approved sealant shall be applied to top of the bead keeping about 5 mm above the bead with a down ward lap as follows Sealant shall be applied using a gun fitted with conical nozzles adjustable to suit the width into the corner using an even trigger pressure & cleaning the nozzle occasionally to avoid contamination. masks. A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is noticed who must immediately implement the instructions Materials Aluminium Bead lengths to the Sectional dimensions 30 mm x 2 mm Screws 3 mm dia Sealant. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox talk on the relevant activity to the Project Site Safety requirements Necessary measures shall be applied to address any risk involved on any process The personnel shall use the PPE (gloves. All other details shall remain as in ‘case 1’ if no rebate has been chased Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & the relevant ITP signed off Case 4 In the paved area. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. . 2006 Page 143 of Where grooves have already been chased. The works were executed for major oil companies. membrane shall continue upto the termination level but the protection board cease at 20 mm below the paving level filled with mastic on top keeping all other details as in case 1 if not chased for rebate Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & the relevant ITP signed off Equipment Electrical operated drill Sealant applying gun Attachment Sketches Case wise description #64 Road crossing for laying 2 pipes 1 for 20” raw ethane & 1 for 6” propane First street Operating Authority entry Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at the road crossing to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane at location identified on the attached drawing to the following references Reference documents Specification. the waterproofing membrane shall be tacked in & sealant applied to the space left in the groove according to specifications and the manufacturer’s instructions. Drawing No. Sealant shall be applied around bead continuously Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & the relevant ITP signed off Case 3 In gravel or soil area. No Aluminium bead shall be used in this case. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures. membrane shall be terminated at a level ‘150mm plus’ below the footing top level keeping Aluminium bead details typical. a representative from the authority shall be involved to witness and sign the instruction imparted with the workers prior to the commencement of the operations to make a record. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS Any mishap on the excavation operation shall immediately be notified to the CS and the CM for the immediate action if so required for any possible remedy or record or the authority review whatsoever. In the present case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. monitor and direct the SE. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. No oil spillage shall be allowed. All these statements constitute management documents. markers and the night-lights. Only English literate Foreman shall be employed to work on the excavation execution. Any process is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark.cones. shall be arranged as required for a complete safety. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be resorted to effect a full safety standard.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all the relevant persons involved on the crossing Traffic Management-Sign boards keep up-All the personnel shall be briefed about the safe keep up of the boards Barricades. flood lights etc. 2006 Page 144 of Easement Systems 1 ST Street Piping Interconnection Drawings. First Street Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly and be overall responsible for the excavation operation CS shall control. ToolBox TalksWhile conducting ToolBox Talks. . Excavation Work Permit. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.the case may be FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. The sides of the excavation shall be sloped with the barriers placed to indicate the excavation work in progress Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The traffic management scheme shall be reviewed and approved by EPC Contractor prior to commencing the work. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators shall be explicitly explained and instructed about the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics cable is discovered. the excavation shall be ceased to be continued until the decision to hydrojetting is taken up and the authority are involved. The truck driver shall also be instructed similarly. men at work sign. in addition to the traffic sign boards. This is a 2-way road with a central verge and carrying 1 lane on either way Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out. . Plants preservation The live plants and the trees arboricultured shall be deplanted integrally with the roots and preserved to the specialist requirement so that these remain live till the replantation is carried out all to the satisfaction of the specialist Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Jack Hammer. Banksman shall be engaged while the equipment operate. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Deep Trenches If required. A traffic management scheme has been presented herein and shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing which includes. All these statements constitute management documents. Adequate means of exit such as Aluminium ladder or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel. The compressor shall be place within the barricade limits Access to trench. temporary diverted roads sign. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm. night lighting and road cleaning activities.The worker engaged on operating this equipment shall use protective glass and work in phases with pause intervals. Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. safety barriers. informatory signs. warning signs. The compressor air pressure shall be monitored from time to time so that the hammer works smoothly. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. a flagman shall be engaged to operate full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by waving the flag for all the vehicles passing by Hand Excavation.Excavation required to be by hand shall only be carried out manually. 2006 Page 145 of Flagman-On both the direction. The works were executed for major oil companies. The aforesaid traffic management scheme shall be implemented as described below: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEME ROAD CROSSING – First Street Drawing reference – This proposed crossing is located on the road 1 st Street between the following co-ordinates as shown on the referred drawing. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. reduced speed sign. electric pole.on the left and right directions respectively. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The asphalt shall be cut using jack hammers. Reference to the marked note ‘B’ on the Easement Systems Drawing To produce the Traffic Management Scheme To divert the minor irrigation. A Flagman shall be engaged full time on both the directions to guide the traffic about the ongoing excavation operations in addition to the conventional signboards The following activities are involved. The first section of road crossing on both sides as per the attached sketch shall be marked by the surveyor on the actual location. the cables to be covered with split PVC pipes by others To continue the excavation mechanically according to the authority directions / and as agreed To excavate the remaining portion by the excavator machine To have authority inspection The pipes to be laid by others To fill the bedding material according to the specification requirement To reinstate the diverted services To reinstate the central verge to the existing state Details The Traffic Management Scheme shall be executed as explained in the foregoing and to the traffic manual directions. . temporarily as required. In addition to the aforesaid tiny plants are arboricultured. On the West Side. On the East Side one irrigation pipe is disconnected.5m) deep by hand tools To seam the area with the detectors to ascertain the existing cables. The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as lane L1 and L 2 on either side of the carriageway In the first instance the work shall be carried out on L1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on L2 as shown on the sketch. All these statements constitute management documents. one irrigation pipe is in service.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. In the second instance the work shall be carried out on L2 diverting the traffic to the road portion on L1 as shown on the sketch. The works were executed for major oil companies. On the central verge 4 minor irrigation pipes are in service. To excavate by hand and expose all the underground facilities (5. The proposed crossing is just situated at the access road to Operating Authority gate. The road x-ing lies on the branch road hence one directory sign shall be fixed on both east and west side of the 1st street road at 200m from the location to indicate the work ahead .24KV cables are available) Trial pit to be excavated in size (5mx2mx1. On the central verge one electric pole is in service. 2006 Page 146 of Both ends of the crossing are existing earthen ramp. The first board depicting ‘reduce speed’ for traffic diversion informatory shall be located at 100 m from the point of the proposed crossing and the second depicting ‘men at work’ sign be located at 100 m on either way in the opposite directions.5KV / 0. To expose the cable fully and to be inspected by the authorities / Operating Authority After the exposure & diversion. plants etc. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The potable and the Desalinated water pipes shall be laid by others. The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing has been cleaned of any debris or obstructions. The service pipes surrounding material shall be compacted as per the project specification requirements. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Compressor. General fill up to the underside of road formation shall be placed in 150mm compacted layers using mechanical methods to the specification requirements. shall be reinstated accordingly. The plants shall be taken off the site for preservation After the exposure of the cables. The existing electrical pole shall be diverted accordingly. All these statements constitute management documents. the Operating Authority authorities shall inspect and the cables be diverted accordingly following which the remaining machine excavation be carried out to the specified levels The excavated material shall be removed from the site to stockpile area. The excavated trench shall be inspected by the authorities as required. Test results shall be provided for the specification conformance verification. Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme Drawings including the traffic diversion #65 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Appropriate bedding material shall be placed within the excavated trench to the correct service level.Compactors. The existing services shall be reinstated accordingly. The plants or trees if removed and so required. Backfill around the service pipes shall be carried using the appropriate material.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Where required. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 147 of The road section shall be excavated to expose the existing cables manually for which the trial pit may be made prior the full manual excavation is proceeded with.Dump trucks. this bedding shall be compacted and tested. The finishing shall be carried out using approved asphalt mix. A concrete slab shall be cast up to the bottom of the finished asphalt level. Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services Major Equipment Excavator. The minor irrigation lines shall be diverted according to the Officials instructions. . Jack Hammer. No oil spillage shall be allowed. . Flagman-On both directions. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect a full safety standard. Access to trench. and floodlights etc. cones. 2006 Page 148 of Road crossing for laying 2 pipes 1 for 20” raw ethane & 1 for 6” propane First street Operating Authority entry Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at the road crossing to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane at location identified on the attached drawing to the following references Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. Excavation Work Permit. further excavation shall be ceased and hydrojetting applied.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out. All these statements constitute management documents. in addition to the traffic sign boards. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. markers. a flagman shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by flag signal Hand Excavation. The works were executed for major oil companies.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all the persons involved on the crossing Barricades. the night-lights. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered.Excavation to expose the services be carried out manually. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 149 of The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. A traffic management scheme shall be produced as detailed on the attached sketch Drawing reference Piping Interconnections First Street’: Existing Services One lighting pole is located on the central verge adjacent to the proposed excavation The minor irrigation / hoses exist to irrigate the central verge plantation Some minor trees and plants are also growing on the central verge. Compactors. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. Compressor.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. This shall be subsequently broken out and replaced by asphalt when the asphalt plant is next in operation The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions. Banksman shall be engaged while the equipment operates. The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as L1 and L 2 In the first instance the work shall be carried out on part L1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the part L2 In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part L2 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the completed road portion on the part L1 Instance 1 The asphalt shall be removed Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & other services by seaming the area with detectors After the exposure. Dumper trucks. Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #66 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine Preparation of the trench to lay RCC pipe sleeves shall be carried out Bedding material shall be laid to receive the pipe sleeves Pipe sleeves with dia 8 “ more than the specified respective pipes dia shall be laid to the design alignment and levels Filling over the pipe sleeves shall be carried out to specifications The diverted services shall be reinstated Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out to specifications The above operations shall be repeated for Instance 2 The central verge shall be made good & the diverted services reinstated A 70 mm thick layer of concrete shall be laid in place of the asphalt concrete. . Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services Major Equipment Excavator. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. All these statements constitute management documents. Jack Hammer. . shall be installed as required at the pits for a complete safety.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. and floodlights etc. All these statements constitute management documents. Excavation Work PermitA copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site at the location shown on the sketch to be noticeable to all the persons involved A copy shall also be transmitted to EPC Contractor Barricades. Method The necessary permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. The works were executed for major oil companies. the night-lights. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect a full safety standard. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. 2006 Page 150 of Directional boring For laying sleeves for 2 pipes 1 # 20” raw ethane & 1 # 6” propane Operating Authority Plant refinery entry Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the directional boring under the road to facilitate to lay the sleeves for pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane at location identified on the attached drawing to the following reference Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections First Street: Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. markers. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. cones. Refer to the attached sketches based on the Ditch Witch guidelines Bentonite is pure clay to be used as a fluid / slurry formed by mixing water.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. Crane. 2006 Page 151 of The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained 2 # trial pits shall be made manually on both ends of the proposed boring to ascertain the availability of the existing services and protect these from any damage and shall also be used for the bentonite trial at the receiving end On site. .excavation Method which does not allow collapsing of the ground surface M / S Ditch Witch shall carry out the Directional Boring employing Jet Trac Directional Boring equipment according to their method statement attached. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. boring machine shall be positioned in the trench at about 3 m from the berm The boring shall be carried out in stages. It shall be used to cool the drill bit and to lubricate the drill area The material displaced by the head / sleeves shall be discharged at the receiving end in the receiving pit and removed from the site All fully trained operators shall be used on the job Major Equipment Jet Track Unit (complete package). Compactor Attachment Plan of the area indicating trial pits etc Ditch Witch Method Statement Cross-Section Sketches showing the indicative procedures #67 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. sufficient excavated space is available to lower the sleeve in to pull into the bore On Eastern end. no de watering shall be carried out Excavation shall be carried out according to the requirement On East End missing the berm. some electric cable is existing 2 # 24” pipe lines are also existing adjacent to the proposed route Minor trees on both ends may be effected in the roots The excavated trench does not show any sign of water therefore. Second stageThe sleeve is partly pulled in and the reamer partly withdrawn Third stageThe sleeve further pulled and the reamer withdrawn accordingly Fourth stageFull portion of the sleeve is underground in the bore and the reamer out The excavated trenches on both ends shall be backfilled by Civil Contractor according to the specification requirement and the required tests carried out The reinstatement of the effected services shall be carried out after the directional boring is completed Directional Boring – A non. First stageThe sleeve is in the trench on the West end and the reamer fully underground. markers. cones. shall be installed as required at the pits for a complete safety. The works were executed for major oil companies. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Non Excavation Method Necessary drive and receiving pits shall be excavated by Civil Contractor according the approved procedures M / S Ditch Witch shall carry out the Thrust Boring employing Jet Trac Directional Boring according to the brief procedures given below The Jet Track unit shall be anchored to the ground surface using hydraulically operated anchor stakes The directional boring / Angled bit shall be drilled into the ground using fluid assistance to operate.Necessary traffic signs at the pits shall be provided Hand Excavation. All these statements constitute management documents. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. and floodlights etc. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained.Excavation to ascertain the routes of the existing services encountered during Thrust Boring in case not shown on the record drawings shall be carried out manually. Traffic Signs. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Excavation Work Permit. Method The necessary permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect a full safety standard.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all the persons involved Barricades. . the night-lights. 2006 Page 152 of Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the thrust boring under the road to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane at location identified on the attached drawing to the following reference Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections First Street Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 153 of Bentonite and water shall be used to form a fluid to be sprayed at low pressure ejected out of the drill head to lubricate the drill procedure as well as to cool electronic tracking components in the drill head An electronic receiver shall be used to track the head from the ground surface and when the directional control is required.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. the head shall be pushed by the drill unit without rotation until the drill head angle is reached Head shall be steered to the ground surface when it reaches the destination end Then Drill head shall be removed from the drill pipe and a backreamer with a pipe puller attached alongwith the pipe / s to be installed underground During backreaming. . The works were executed for major oil companies. the drill fluid shall assist the backreamer lubricate and form slurried area for the installable pipe Backreaming and pipe pulling simultaneously shall allow the pipe to be installed underground without excavation and continue until the backreamer and pipe reach the launch end of the Directional bore accomplishing boring complete Necessary tests shall be carried out by EPC Contractor Major Equipment Jet Track Unit complete package Attachment Ditch Witch Method Statement Sketches showing the indicative procedures #68 2 #s road crossings For laying 1 for 14” desalinated water 1 for 8”potable water & 1 for 20” raw ethane 1 for 8” natural gas 1 for 6” propane Avenue ‘c’ At fire station Top Index Scope Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. night-lights. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed. cones. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. . flagmen shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the ‘excavation work in progress’ by ‘flag signal’ Hand Excavation. 8” Potable water and 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to have ‘ full safety standard’ effect. 8” Natural Gas and 6” Propane at locations identified on the attached drawing pertaining to avenue C at existing Fire Station Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. and floodlights etc. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. No oil spillage shall be allowed.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. 2006 Page 154 of Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at the road crossings to construct culverts to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 14” Desalinated water. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. Flagman-On all directions. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. markers. in addition to the traffic sign boards. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 155 of In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. Banksman shall be engaged during equipment operation. covers.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out of the trench. All these statements constitute management documents. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe & well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culverts shall be carried out The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culverts including the laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels. fixing steps etc. The road shall be excavated in one instance by diverting the traffic on both sides as shown Procedures Backfilling shall be carried out to the existing excavated cross trenches on both end of the proposed crossings up to the natural ground level to provide effective traffic ‘divertion routes’ from the road carriageways according to the traffic management scheme attached Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively Existing services from the central verge shall be diverted or protected as required and directed by the competent concerned authority The asphalt and the central verge pertaining to the crossings portion shall be removed Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services by seaming the area with detectors After the exposure. covers and sleepers are heavy in load. A traffic management scheme shall be produced as detailed on the attached sketch Drawing reference – Piping Interconnections Road Avenue ‘C’: N Existing Services One serving electric pole is located away from the crossing towards North The minor irrigation / hoses exist to irrigate the central verge plantation Street light electric cables exist & Some minor plants also growing on the central verge. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. proper care has to be exercised during raising & downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert units. The works were executed for major oil companies. one access boxout on both ends shall be provided to design details The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.shall be carried out according to the drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members In addition. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. . . 8” Potable water and Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 156 of The central verge shall be made good & the diverted services reinstated The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions. Jack Hammer. Road Rollers Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #69 2 #s road crossings For laying 1 for 14” desalinated water 1 for 8”potable water & 1 for 20” raw ethane 1 for 8” natural gas 1 for 6” propane Avenue ‘c’ At fire station Top Index Scope Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at the road crossings to construct culverts to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 14” Desalinated water.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 75 mm dia holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled with concrete Access boxout shall be closed with concrete after the pipes are laid Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services 8 mm galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details Major Equipment Excavator. Dumper trucks. Compressor. Asphalt finisher. All these statements constitute management documents. Compactors. The works were executed for major oil companies. Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. 8” Natural Gas and 6” Propane at locations identified on the attached drawing pertaining to avenue C / First Street Road Crossing at existing Fire Station Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. and floodlights etc. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. cones. markers. to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. flagmen shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the ‘excavation work in progress’ by ‘flag signal’ Hand Excavation.the workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out of the trench. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. No oil spillage shall be allowed.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed. in addition to the traffic sign boards. night-lights. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. 2006 Page 157 of 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to have ‘ full safety standard’ effect. . The works were executed for major oil companies. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Banksman shall be engaged during equipment operation. Flagman-On all directions.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe & well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culverts shall be carried out The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culverts including the laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels. covers and sleepers are heavy in load.shall be carried out according to the drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members In addition. covers. one access boxout at the end shall be provided to design details The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt Instance 2 The aforesaid activities shall be repeated for this instance for the crossing portion Stage-2 The central verge shall be made good & the diverted services reinstated The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. fixing steps etc. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 158 of Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert units. All these statements constitute management documents. proper care has to be exercised during raising & downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. . The road shall be excavated in two instances by diverting the traffic on either lane completing one after the other as shown on the traffic management scheme Procedures Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively Existing services from the central verge shall be diverted or protected as required and directed by the competent concerned authority Instance 1 The asphalt and the central verge pertaining to the crossing portion Stage-1 shall be removed Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. 75-mm dia holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled with concrete Access boxout shall be closed with concrete after the pipes are laid Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. A traffic management scheme shall be produced as detailed on the attached sketch Drawing reference Piping Interconnections Road Avenue ‘C’: Existing Services One serving electric pole is located away from the crossing towards North The minor irrigation / hoses exist to irrigate the central verge plantation Street light electric cables exist & Some minor plants also growing on the central verge. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Jack Hammer. The works were executed for major oil companies. parapet and horizontal bands ( locations where there are no projected beams and also where the projected beams exist). Reference documents Drawings.ELEVATIONS FIBREX Shop Drawings and Statement Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. Dumper trucks. . Compressor. Compactors. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Asphalt finisher. 2006 Page 159 of 8 mm galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details. Road Rollers Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #70 Administration building GRC Panel fixing Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the fixing of preformed GRC panels to columns. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details Major Equipment Excavator. The upper panel C1S shall be located and aligned to the final level and position The panel shall be fixed to the bracket with M10 S / S bolt The foregoing sequence shall be repeated for the other column panels The panel joints shall be filled with Polyurethane sealant Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval Fixing Parapet Panels The bottom level of the panel and the location of the steel box brackets shall be marked according to the details on the FIBREX shop drawings The steel box brackets shall be fixed to walls according to the details on the drawings The horizontal 70x60x6 mm U channels shall be fixed to the box bracket at 3 levels as marked on the drawing 16 mm holes shall be drilled on U channels corresponding to the panel fixing points using template Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. FIBREX Drawing Ref The inverted S / S upper restraint bracket shall be fixed with over sized hole at the C1S panel top cast in sockets and the panel fixed to the bracket with M10 S / S bolt. . Any process is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. W. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the work force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. 2006 Page 160 of CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. The bottom fixing level shall be marked using a template corresponding to the GRC bottom panel situation. The works were executed for major oil companies. Adequate scaffolding shall be provided for the safe access to the work location Safety harness shall be provided for the personnel working at heights Method The work of the GRC manufacturing and fixing shall be carried out by the Fibrex Co.L PO Box # All the metal hanger sub frames exposed surfaces shall be painted to specifications Fixing Column Panels The floor finish level shall be marked and the bottom defined.L. 2 #s Stainless Steel bracket 75x75x6 mm shall be fixed with 10 mm S / S Parabolt pins drilled on the wall The bottom panels C1 shall be located to the final true position with slotted holes in GRC panels prefilled with Polyurethane mastic prior to placing Stainless Steel double side pin bracket 75x75x6mm shall be fixed on the top of the bottom panels to have a pin penetration at least 25 mm inside the slot at bottom panel to act as a lateral restraint with 25mm protrusion beyond top( panel top) level. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 161 of 75x75x6xmm steel brackets shall be fixed with over sized holes to the wall locations corresponding to the cast in sockets in the GRC panels. (Ref drg) GRC panels shall be located and aligned to the final level and position The panel cast in socket shall be fixed to the bottom bracket with 10 mm S / S bolt with washer 2 # S / S brackets shall be fixed on the concrete parapet corresponding to the cast in socket on the top level of the panel and the panel be fixed with the bracket with M 10 threaded bar, nuts and washers The top GRP cover shall be fixed and screwed in to the GRC panel on one side and parapet on the other as shown on the shop drawing All the slots / exposed fixings locations shall be closed with GRC closing pieces The foregoing sequence shall be repeated for the other panels also The panel joints shall be filled with Polyurethane sealant Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval Fixing Horizontal Bands Fixing at locations where there is no projected beams The level and the fixing locations shall be marked on the wall according to the details on the shop drawings 2 # 75x75x6mm S / S brackets shall be fixed with pin on the marked locations 2 # 75x75x6mm S / S brackets shall be fixed with hole at higher level as shown on the shop drawing The panel shall be located and aligned to final level and position. Slotted holes in GRC panels shall be prefilled with Polyurethane mastic prior to placing The panel shall be fixed to the top brackets with S / S M 10 bolts The top fixing slot shall be closed with GRC closing pieces The foregoing sequence shall be repeated for the other panels also The panel joints shall be filled with Polyurethane sealant Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval Fixing at locations where there is projected beams The level and fixing locations shall be marked on the wall as shown on the shop drawing 12 mm dia holes shall be drilled on the wall fixing locations M10 threaded bars shall be fixed to the panels ‘cast in sockets 4 #’ in the panel 4# holes on the wall shall be filled with chemical (Upat chemical anchors) The panel shall be located and aligned to final level and position The panel shall be held until the chemical dries The foregoing sequence shall be repeated for the other panels also The panel joints shall be filled with Polyurethane sealant Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval Major Equipment Attachment Fibrex Statement Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 162 of #71 Painting Administration building Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures that shall be adopted to apply the Painting System on the above building on various surfaces according to the specifications and the material system approved. References Specifications DG MAR # Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control, monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned to the Project Site Safety requirements. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 163 of Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. The personnel shall use the PPE, gloves, masks, eyeglasses etc and to avoid skin contact. use of barrier cream shall also be made. Material safety data shall be referred to for disposal and any further information. Adequate arrangement shall be made to provide access to the top of the wall. Adequate scaffolding with proper netshade shall be provided wherever required The personnel shall use the waist safety belt / harness while working on height. Immediate medical care shall be provided in case the eyes of any personnel are effected due to the paint splashes or any other reason Proper ventilation shall be provided to let the workers respirate properly A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. Storage The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures. Shelf life 12 months between 5 deg and 35 Celsius Materials Berger Paint systems MAR # Table 1 S # Sub Strata 1 2 3 Galvanised steelExterior,Polyurethane Mild steel-Exterior, Polyurethane Concrete SurfaceExterior, Polyurethane textured Galvanised SteelInterior, Alkyd Galvanised SteelInterior, Primed ferrous metal Alkyd Plaster and GypsumGypsum wall board and plaster, Acrylic Surface preparation Mechanical cleaning loose deposits Blasting to Sa 2.5 to Operating temperature remove Upto 100 deg C Upto 100 deg C Cleaning with sand stone to Upto 100 deg C smoothen the surface free from all dirt etc Mechanical cleaning to remove Upto 60 deg C loose deposits Mechanical cleaning to St 2 to Upto 60 deg C remove loose rust, scales Cleaning with fine emery paper to Upto 50 deg C remove dirt etc. 4 5 6 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 164 of System # 1, Exterior Surfaces –Galvanised Steel, Polyurethane Table 2 Coats Generic # of Solids DFT Colour Applicat Type coat volume Microns ion s % Primer Surface 1 82 100 Alumini Brush / tolerant um Spray high build epoxy Finish Gloss 1 50 50 White / Brush / Polyurethan Colours Spray e 2 150 System # 2, Exterior Surfaces –Ferrous Metal, Polyurethane Table 3 Berger Product Epimast ic 5100 Al Robbiat hane Coats Primer Generic Type Interme diate Finish High epoxy polyamide primer High build 1 epoxy polyamide Gloss 1 Polyurethan e 3 # of coat s build 1 Solids volume % 57 DFT Microns Colour Red Applicat Berger ion Product Brush / Spray Epilux 78 Epilux 218HS Robbiat hane 75 68 50 100 50 225 Grey Brush / Spray White / Brush Colours / Spray Touch up if required with Epilux 78 after power tool cleaning on spots Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 165 of System # 3, Exterior Surfaces –Concrete Masonry, Polyurethane Textured Table 4 Coats Primer Generic Type Epoxy Concrete # of coat s 1 Solids volume % 45 DFT Microns Colour White Applicat Berger ion Product Brush / Epilux Spray / Concret Roller e Primer Hopper Luxatile Gun Epoxy Spray Compo und Roller / Robbiat Spray athane 50 Interme diate Finish Epoxy 1 spray compound in textured finish Gloss / 1 Semi Gloss Polyurethan e 68 1000 White 50 50 White / Colours 1100 The textured pattern is unpressed and the DFT could vary from 700 to 1000 micron or more as manually applied by hopper gun System # 4, Interior Surfaces –Galvanised Steel, Alkyd Table 5 Coats Etch Primer(T o be used in surface preparati on instead of blasting) Primer Coat Generic Type # of Solids coat volume s % 8.5 DFT Microns Colour Greenish Yellow Applicat Berger ion Product Brush Spray / Luxaprim e 1500 Two Pack 1 washer primer 5 Anticorrosive 1 rust inhibitive 55 55 Red Brush Spray / Luxaprim e 1500 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 166 of Primer Intermedi Alkyd ate Coat Undercoat Finish Alkyd Enamel Coat 1 1 55 48 55 48 White Brush Spray White / Brush Colours Spray / Luxole 1000 / Luxole 5000 4 155 Luxaprime 1000 has to be applied on the same day of Luxaprime 1500 System # 5, Interior Surfaces –Primed Ferrous Metal, Alkyd Table 6 Coats Primer Coat(If required) Generic Type # of Solids DFT coat volume % Microns s 50 50 Colour Red Grey White Applicat Berger ion Product / Brush Spray / Luxaprim e 1400 / Luxol 1000 / Luxol 5000 High build 1 alkyd zinc phosphate primer Intermedi Alkyd 1 ate Coat undercoat Finish Alkyd Enamel 1 Coat Note3 Primer need not be applied if already primed 55 50 50 50 150 Brush Spray White / Brush Colours Spray Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 167 of System # 6, Interior Surfaces –Gypsum Wallboard and plaster, Acrylic Table 7 Coats Primer Coat Filler Coat Generic Type Premium quality alkali resisting primer High quality acrylic based wall filler # of Solids coat volume s % 1 25 DFT Microns 25 Colour White Applicat Berger ion Product Brush Roller / Brolac Acrylic AR Primer Spatula Berger Super Wall Filler Intermedi High ate Coat acrylic emulsion Finish Semi gloss 1 Coat acrylic emulsion 3 1(to seal & smo othe n the surf ace) quality 1 81 To White smoothe n the surface 35 35 50 50 White / Roller Colours White / Roller Colours Bergerco at Acrylic Emulsion Brolac Semi Gloss Emulsion >100 Method GENERAL Marking of containers Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers clearly labelled with the following information. Manufacturer’s name, initials or recognised trade mark Title and specification number Whether primer or undercoat, finishing coat Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 168 of Whether for internal or external use where appropriate Colour reference from BS 4800 Method of application Batch number and date of manufacture and re – test No paint shall be used after 18 months of manufacture or re test Coating materials other than spray paints, bituminous pants and fine textured masonry paint shall be in containers not exceeding 5 litres capacity Samples Sample panel of 1 sqm in area shall be prepared for each type and colour of coating material to be used in the work for the approval Sample material of each paper / fibre material minimum size 500 x 500 mm showing at least the pattern repeat where applicable shall be submitted for approval Part 2 Materials Preparatory Materials Paint removers, abrasive papers and blocks, cleaning agents, etching solutions, stopping, knotting, fillers and other commodities shall be of the types recommended by the manufacturer of the coating to be applied White spirit shall comply with BS 245 Knotting shall comply with BS 1336 Stopping and filler for woodwork shall be approved proprietary Leadless oil based type recommended for internal or external work as appropriate. Stopping for woodwork to receive a coat finish shall be tinted to match with the surrounding work Filler for plaster or rendering shall be approved proprietary type The following operational sequences shall be involved Priming Coat Filler Coat to the requirement Intermediate Coat Finishing Coat All according to the approved system as aforesaid detailed for reference. Application PREPARATION OF THE GALVANIZED SURFACES Dirt and other adherent contaminating matter / loose deposits shall be removed from galvanised surfaces by mechanical means using Berger tool cleaner. Cleaning shall not damage the galvanising. Oil or grease shall be removed from galvanised surfaces by the application of an emulsion cleaner. Any zinc corrosion products remaining shall be removed by washing with sweet water and scrubbing with hard bristle brushes After being cleaned and degreased, all galvanised surfaces shall be etched with T-wash as described in BS 5493. If any surface fails to turn black as cleaning, greasing and etching processes shall be repeated. APPLICATION OF PAINT GENERALLY All paints shall be prepared and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Priming paints shall be applied by brush. Spray application shall only be used for painting of epoxy resin base Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 169 of Exposure of intermediate coats of paint for periods in excess of a few days shall not be permitted except in case of work delivered to site in a primed condition The dried films shall be free from bloom, shrinkage, sheeringness, wrinkling, sagging, curtailing, discoloration and extraneous matter No exterior or exposed paint work shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions, during rain, mist, sandstorms nor when the relative humidity exceeds 80% Painting shall insofar as is practicable be shaded from direct sunlight by netting to prevent wrinkling and bristling. Whenever possible exterior painting shall be so programmed during the day so as to be carried out in shadow Painting of surfaces shall not be carried out when condensation is present on such surfaces or the application and / or drying of the paints is likely to be affected Surfaces to be painted shall receive as first coat of paint as quickly as possible after the e preparation has been completed In case of metal surfaces this shall preferably be within one hour but always before the metal temperature drops to less than 3 deg C above dew point and before any rusting METHOD OF COATING Each coat shall be applied uniformly over the entire surface. Skips, runs, sags and drips shall be avoided. When these occur they shall be brushed out immediately or the materials removed and the surface recoated. On beams and irregular surfaces, edges shall be strip coated first and at extra pass made later. Each coat shall be allowed to dry for the time specified by the manufacturer before application of any succeeding coat Any primer coat exposed to freezing, excess humidity, rain, dust etc., before drying, shall be removed, surface again prepared and primed The time interval between application of coats shall not exceed that specified for optimum results by the manufacturer All coatings shall be cleaned as specified by the manufacturer before the next coat is applied All areas not specifically mentioned in the painting specification shall be finished to conform to the adjacent comparable areas All fixtures and surfaces not to be painted shall be properly protected during application and upon completion of the work all paint and varnish removed from glass, fixtures, covering, etc., Moveable parts shall not to be painted. All parts such as pipe supports, seatings and cleats, back to back sections which shall become inaccessible after fabrication shall be treated on both surfaces with the full paint system prior to final assembly, thus ensuring adequate protection. SPRAY APPLICATION All equipment for spray application shall be inspected and approved before any application begins. Spray guns, hoses and pumps shall be cleaned before new material is added. An adequate moisture and oil trap shall be installed between the air supply to each application unit. Suitable pressure regulators and gauges shall be provided for the air supply to the application units. Spray equipment and operating pressures shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Coating materials containing heavy pigments that have a tendency to settle shall be kept in suspension during the application by the power driven, continuous agitator Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. Calibration for the thickness range to be checked at least twice a day When dry film thickness are less than those specified. voids. dust. any damage to the previous coating shall be repaired with the specified material. No extending handles shall be used on brushes. care shall be taken to prevent lifting of previous coats. BRUSH APPLICATION Brushes shall be of a style and quality that permit proper application of the material Flat brushes shall not be more than 100 mm wide. Vacuum removal of dust and sand shall be employed and contamination removed. FILM THICKNESS Specified film thickness for coating materials shall be strictly observed which be checked with an appropriate film thickness gauge. Prior to the application of a coating. Where dirt or dust has been trapped in the painted surface it shall be Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 170 of The spray gun shall be held at right angles to the surface and each pass overlap the previous one by approximately 50%. Upon completion of the fabrication any damage to the coating system shall be repaired TEST EQUIPMENT Svensk photographic standard SIS 05 59 00 Coating thickness meter such as Elcometer ‘Minitector” Model 150 Wet fill thickness combs Hygrometer Maximum and minimum thermometer Flow cup type B # 4 and timer Surface profile meter such as Elcometer’Roughness detector’ Bolted site connections other than faying surfaces of Grip Bolt connections shall be brought together ‘wet’ EPOXY COATING WORK GENERALLY In addition to the general requirements the following conditions shall apply wherever epoxycoating work is being carried out Forced draught ventilation shall be used wherever required for the needs of the personnel or for drying out surfaces Operatives shall work in pairs Samples areas on substrate shall be prepared and coated for approval There shall be strict control of surface cleanliness between primer and epoxy coating / and between coats of the same. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Brushing shall be done so that a smooth coat as nearly uniform in thickness as possible is obtained without any deep or detrimental marks Paints shall be worked into all corners and crevices. All materials contained herein may be applied by airless spray. additional coats shall be applied as required. . Particular attention shall be paid to full film thickness on edges In hot weather such additional precautions as are necessary shall be taken to ensure that the specified dry film thickness on priming or finish coats is obtained COATING QUALITY Coatings shall be free from pinholes. foreign inclusions and other holidays and any such defect shall be repaired. When applying solvent type coating. bubbles.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. the surfaces shall be abraded followed by the area touched in with not less than 2 # thick applications to restore the coating integrity to the specified thickness. A high voltage pinhole detector shall also be used to determine the integrity of the coats The manufacturer of the coating shall stipulate primer and epoxy recoat interval for all curing temperatures likely to be encountered and these be adopted with a maximum tolerance of +4 hours. The resulting test specimens shall show no indication of poor adhesion to the substrate. 2006 Page 171 of removed with suitable abrasive paper.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Where this is exceeded. less than 3 by brush Each coat shall be distinctly different in colour from the primer or previous coat. residual laitance or intercoat adhesion weakness. Any thick runs or collections of paint shall be removed before these harden Not less than 2 coats shall be applied over the primer by airless spray. The surface being painted shall be free of visible moisture throughout these operations The paint shall be applied only to the clean dry primed or previously coated surfaces. . the surfaces to be recoated shall first be suitably abraded to remove gloss and provide a key Wet thickness gauges shall be used by the coating operators continually to check that sufficient paint is being applied to achieve the desired dry film thickness EPOXY COATING FOR CONCRETE AND RENDERED SURFACES No priming shall commence until the moisture content of the cementitious surface is less than 5% measured by Wetcheck Moisture meter or other instrument Similarly moisture measurements over the primer or any epoxy intercoat shall not exceed 1 % on the concrete scale of the instrument when the probe tips are held against such painted surfaces just prior to recoating The priming shall be applied by suitable Nylon bristle brush or spray over the whole area to be coated at such thickness that it may then be squeezed into the pores of the concrete. The following instrument shall be used 1 Adhesion Tester 0 to 35 kg / cm2 1 DC high voltage holiday detector # 105 One paint inspection gauge PIG 1 wet check moisture meter #72 Painting Administration building Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Any excess shall be removed by the most suitable means before application of the high build epoxy The total DFT of the paint layer shall have a minimum specified value Whenever the paint inspection gauge has been used and wherever the coating has been otherwise damaged for 50 mm around such damage. Adhesion tests shall be carried out on the cured coating surface using the test equipment supplied in accordance with the best practice. The colour of the final coat shall be as approved. Each coat shall be seen to have completely covered the proceeding without ‘ misses’ or pinholes or any areas visibly low in thickness. All these statements constitute management documents. eyeglasses etc and to avoid skin contact. monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work. 2006 Page 172 of Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures that shall be adopted to apply the Painting System on the above building on various surfaces according to the specifications and the material system approved. masks. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. References Specifications MAR # Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. gloves. . Material safety data shall be referred to for disposal and any further information. Adequate arrangement shall be made to provide access to the top of the wall. the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned to the Project Site Safety requirements. The works were executed for major oil companies. use of barrier cream shall also be made. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Adequate scaffolding with proper netshade shall be provided wherever required The personnel shall use the waist safety belt / harness while working on height. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The personnel shall use the PPE. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 173 of Immediate medical care shall be provided in case the eyes of any personnel are effected due to the paint splashes or any other reason Proper ventilation shall be provided to let the workers respirate properly A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. The works were executed for major oil companies. Acrylic Surface preparation Mechanical cleaning loose deposits Blasting to Sa 2. scales Cleaning with fine emery paper to Upto 50 deg C remove dirt etc. 4 5 6 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Primed ferrous metal Alkyd Plaster and GypsumGypsum wall board and plaster. Polyurethane Concrete SurfaceExterior. Shelf life 12 months between 5 deg and 35 Celsius Materials Berger Paint systems MAR # Table 8 S # Sub Strata 1 2 3 Galvanised steelExterior. Polyurethane textured Galvanised SteelInterior. Alkyd Galvanised SteelInterior. . Storage The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.Polyurethane Mild steel-Exterior.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.5 to Operating temperature remove Upto 100 deg C Upto 100 deg C Cleaning with sand stone to Upto 100 deg C smoothen the surface free from all dirt etc Mechanical cleaning to remove Upto 60 deg C loose deposits Mechanical cleaning to St 2 to Upto 60 deg C remove loose rust. All these statements constitute management documents. Exterior Surfaces –Galvanised Steel. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Polyurethane Table 9 Coats Generic # of Solids DFT Colour Applicat Type coat volume Microns ion s % Primer Surface 1 82 100 Alumini Brush / tolerant um Spray high build epoxy Finish Gloss 1 50 50 White / Brush / Polyurethan Colours Spray e 2 150 System # 2. The works were executed for major oil companies. Polyurethane Table 10 Berger Product Epimast ic 5100 Al Robbiat hane Coats Primer Generic Type Interme diate Finish High epoxy polyamide primer High build 1 epoxy polyamide Gloss 1 Polyurethan e 3 # of coat s build 1 Solids volume % 57 DFT Microns Colour Red Applicat Berger ion Product Brush / Spray Epilux 78 Epilux 218HS Robbiat hane 75 68 50 100 50 225 Grey Brush / Spray White / Brush Colours / Spray Touch up if required with Epilux 78 after power tool cleaning on spots Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 174 of System # 1. . Exterior Surfaces –Ferrous Metal. Interior Surfaces –Galvanised Steel. Polyurethane Textured Table 11 Coats Primer Generic Type Epoxy Concrete # of coat s 1 Solids volume % 45 DFT Microns Colour White Applicat Berger ion Product Brush / Epilux Spray / Concret Roller e Primer Hopper Luxatile Gun Epoxy Spray Compo und Roller / Robbiat Spray athane 50 Interme diate Finish Epoxy 1 spray compound in textured finish Gloss / 1 Semi Gloss Polyurethan e 68 1000 White 50 50 White / Colours 1100 The textured pattern is unpressed and the DFT could vary from 700 to 1000 micron or more as manually applied by hopper gun System # 4. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 175 of System # 3.5 DFT Microns Colour Greenish Yellow Applicat Berger ion Product Brush Spray / Luxaprim e 1500 Two Pack 1 washer primer 5 Anticorrosive 1 55 55 Red Brush / Luxaprim Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. . Alkyd Table 12 Coats Etch Primer(T o be used in surface preparati on instead of blasting) Primer Generic Type # of Solids coat volume s % 8. Exterior Surfaces –Concrete Masonry.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . 2006 Page 176 of Coat rust inhibitive Primer Intermedi Alkyd 1 ate Coat Undercoat Finish Alkyd Enamel 1 Coat 4 Spray 55 48 55 48 155 White Brush Spray White / Brush Colours Spray e 1500 / Luxole 1000 / Luxole 5000 Luxaprime 1000 has to be applied on the same day of Luxaprime 1500 System # 5. All these statements constitute management documents. Alkyd Table 13 Coats Primer Coat(If required) Generic Type # of Solids DFT coat volume % Microns s 50 50 Colour Red Grey White Applicat Berger ion Product / Brush Spray / Luxaprim e 1400 / Luxol 1000 / Luxol 5000 High build 1 alkyd zinc phosphate primer Intermedi Alkyd 1 ate Coat undercoat Finish Alkyd Enamel 1 Coat Note3 Primer need not be applied if already primed 55 50 50 50 150 Brush Spray White / Brush Colours Spray Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. Interior Surfaces –Primed Ferrous Metal. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. bituminous pants and fine textured masonry paint shall be in containers not exceeding 5 litres capacity Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Acrylic Table 14 Coats Primer Coat Filler Coat Generic Type Premium quality alkali resisting primer High quality acrylic based wall filler # of Solids coat volume s % 1 25 DFT Microns 25 Colour White Applicat Berger ion Product Brush Roller / Brolac Acrylic AR Primer Spatula Berger Super Wall Filler Intermedi High ate Coat acrylic emulsion Finish Semi gloss 1 Coat acrylic emulsion 3 1(to seal & smo othe n the surf ace) quality 1 81 To White smoothe n the surface 35 35 50 50 White / Roller Colours White / Roller Colours Bergerco at Acrylic Emulsion Brolac Semi Gloss Emulsion >100 Method GENERAL Marking of containers Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers clearly labelled with the following information. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Interior Surfaces –Gypsum Wallboard and plaster. 2006 Page 177 of System # 6. All these statements constitute management documents. . The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Manufacturer’s name. initials or recognised trade mark Title and specification number Whether primer or undercoat. finishing coat Whether for internal or external use where appropriate Colour reference from BS 4800 Method of application Batch number and date of manufacture and re – test No paint shall be used after 18 months of manufacture or re test Coating materials other than spray paints. shrinkage. Cleaning shall not damage the galvanising. If any surface fails to turn black as cleaning. Spray application shall only be used for painting of epoxy resin base Exposure of intermediate coats of paint for periods in excess of a few days shall not be permitted except in case of work delivered to site in a primed condition The dried films shall be free from bloom. wrinkling. sheeringness.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. fillers and other commodities shall be of the types recommended by the manufacturer of the coating to be applied White spirit shall comply with BS 245 Knotting shall comply with BS 1336 Stopping and filler for woodwork shall be approved proprietary Leadless oil based type recommended for internal or external work as appropriate. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. during rain. sandstorms nor when the relative humidity exceeds 80% Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. stopping. discoloration and extraneous matter No exterior or exposed paint work shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions. 2006 Page 178 of Samples Sample panel of 1 sqm in area shall be prepared for each type and colour of coating material to be used in the work for the approval Sample material of each paper / fibre material minimum size 500 x 500 mm showing at least the pattern repeat where applicable shall be submitted for approval Part 2 Materials Preparatory Materials Paint removers. sagging. abrasive papers and blocks. knotting. Stopping for woodwork to receive a coat finish shall be tinted to match with the surrounding work Filler for plaster or rendering shall be approved proprietary type The following operational sequences shall be involved Priming Coat Filler Coat to the requirement Intermediate Coat Finishing Coat All according to the approved system as aforesaid detailed for reference. The works were executed for major oil companies. etching solutions. Any zinc corrosion products remaining shall be removed by washing with sweet water and scrubbing with hard bristle brushes After being cleaned and degreased. APPLICATION OF PAINT GENERALLY All paints shall be prepared and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. . cleaning agents. Application PREPARATION OF THE GALVANIZED SURFACES Dirt and other adherent contaminating matter / loose deposits shall be removed from galvanised surfaces by mechanical means using Berger tool cleaner. all galvanised surfaces shall be etched with T-wash as described in BS 5493. Priming paints shall be applied by brush. mist. Oil or grease shall be removed from galvanised surfaces by the application of an emulsion cleaner. curtailing. greasing and etching processes shall be repeated. Whenever possible exterior painting shall be so programmed during the day so as to be carried out in shadow Painting of surfaces shall not be carried out when condensation is present on such surfaces or the application and / or drying of the paints is likely to be affected Surfaces to be painted shall receive as first coat of paint as quickly as possible after the e preparation has been completed In case of metal surfaces this shall preferably be within one hour but always before the metal temperature drops to less than 3 deg C above dew point and before any rusting METHOD OF COATING Each coat shall be applied uniformly over the entire surface. . Spray guns. etc. All parts such as pipe supports. Suitable pressure regulators and gauges shall be provided for the air supply to the application units. hoses and pumps shall be cleaned before new material is added. surface again prepared and primed The time interval between application of coats shall not exceed that specified for optimum results by the manufacturer All coatings shall be cleaned as specified by the manufacturer before the next coat is applied All areas not specifically mentioned in the painting specification shall be finished to conform to the adjacent comparable areas All fixtures and surfaces not to be painted shall be properly protected during application and upon completion of the work all paint and varnish removed from glass. Spray equipment and operating pressures shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations. rain. covering. fixtures. seatings and cleats. shall be removed. before drying. All materials contained herein may be applied by airless spray.. BRUSH APPLICATION Brushes shall be of a style and quality that permit proper application of the material Flat brushes shall not be more than 100 mm wide. excess humidity. Coating materials containing heavy pigments that have a tendency to settle shall be kept in suspension during the application by the power driven. On beams and irregular surfaces. continuous agitator The spray gun shall be held at right angles to the surface and each pass overlap the previous one by approximately 50%. An adequate moisture and oil trap shall be installed between the air supply to each application unit. dust etc. sags and drips shall be avoided. No extending handles shall be used on brushes. runs. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Moveable parts shall not to be painted. 2006 Page 179 of Painting shall insofar as is practicable be shaded from direct sunlight by netting to prevent wrinkling and bristling. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Skips. back to back sections which shall become inaccessible after fabrication shall be treated on both surfaces with the full paint system prior to final assembly. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. SPRAY APPLICATION All equipment for spray application shall be inspected and approved before any application begins. When these occur they shall be brushed out immediately or the materials removed and the surface recoated. thus ensuring adequate protection.. edges shall be strip coated first and at extra pass made later. Each coat shall be allowed to dry for the time specified by the manufacturer before application of any succeeding coat Any primer coat exposed to freezing. All these statements constitute management documents. bubbles. additional coats shall be applied as required. foreign inclusions and other holidays and any such defect shall be repaired. FILM THICKNESS Specified film thickness for coating materials shall be strictly observed which be checked with an appropriate film thickness gauge. any damage to the previous coating shall be repaired with the specified material. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The surface being painted shall be free of visible moisture throughout these operations The paint shall be applied only to the clean dry primed or previously coated surfaces. less than 3 by brush Each coat shall be distinctly different in colour from the primer or previous coat. 2006 Page 180 of Brushing shall be done so that a smooth coat as nearly uniform in thickness as possible is obtained without any deep or detrimental marks Paints shall be worked into all corners and crevices. The works were executed for major oil companies. Any thick runs or collections of paint shall be removed before these harden Not less than 2 coats shall be applied over the primer by airless spray. Calibration for the thickness range to be checked at least twice a day When dry film thickness are less than those specified. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Vacuum removal of dust and sand shall be employed and contamination removed. All these statements constitute management documents. When applying solvent type coating. Each coat shall be seen to have completely covered the Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Prior to the application of a coating. dust. care shall be taken to prevent lifting of previous coats. The colour of the final coat shall be as approved. Upon completion of the fabrication any damage to the coating system shall be repaired TEST EQUIPMENT Svensk photographic standard SIS 05 59 00 Coating thickness meter such as Elcometer ‘Minitector” Model 150 Wet fill thickness combs Hygrometer Maximum and minimum thermometer Flow cup type B # 4 and timer Surface profile meter such as Elcometer’Roughness detector’ Bolted site connections other than faying surfaces of Grip Bolt connections shall be brought together ‘wet’ EPOXY COATING WORK GENERALLY In addition to the general requirements the following conditions shall apply wherever epoxycoating work is being carried out Forced draught ventilation shall be used wherever required for the needs of the personnel or for drying out surfaces Operatives shall work in pairs Samples areas on substrate shall be prepared and coated for approval There shall be strict control of surface cleanliness between primer and epoxy coating / and between coats of the same. voids. Particular attention shall be paid to full film thickness on edges In hot weather such additional precautions as are necessary shall be taken to ensure that the specified dry film thickness on priming or finish coats is obtained COATING QUALITY Coatings shall be free from pinholes. Where dirt or dust has been trapped in the painted surface it shall be removed with suitable abrasive paper. The works were executed for major oil companies. Where this is exceeded. Any excess shall be removed by the most suitable means before application of the high build epoxy The total DFT of the paint layer shall have a minimum specified value Whenever the paint inspection gauge has been used and wherever the coating has been otherwise damaged for 50 mm around such damage. Adhesion tests shall be carried out on the cured coating surface using the test equipment supplied in accordance with the best practice. residual laitance or intercoat adhesion weakness. . the surfaces shall be abraded followed by the area touched in with not less than 2 # thick applications to restore the coating integrity to the specified thickness. The resulting test specimens shall show no indication of poor adhesion to the substrate. 2006 Page 181 of proceeding without ‘ misses’ or pinholes or any areas visibly low in thickness. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The following instrument shall be used 1 Adhesion Tester 0 to 35 kg / cm2 1 DC high voltage holiday detector # 105 One paint inspection gauge PIG 1 wet check moisture meter #73 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. A high voltage pinhole detector shall also be used to determine the integrity of the coats The manufacturer of the coating shall stipulate primer and epoxy recoat interval for all curing temperatures likely to be encountered and these be adopted with a maximum tolerance of +4 hours.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the surfaces to be recoated shall first be suitably abraded to remove gloss and provide a key Wet thickness gauges shall be used by the coating operators continually to check that sufficient paint is being applied to achieve the desired dry film thickness EPOXY COATING FOR CONCRETE AND RENDERED SURFACES No priming shall commence until the moisture content of the cementitious surface is less than 5% measured by Wetcheck Moisture meter or other instrument Similarly moisture measurements over the primer or any epoxy intercoat shall not exceed 1 % on the concrete scale of the instrument when the probe tips are held against such painted surfaces just prior to recoating The priming shall be applied by suitable Nylon bristle brush or spray over the whole area to be coated at such thickness that it may then be squeezed into the pores of the concrete. monitor and direct the SE. FM and workforce for the operations Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Easement Systems Avenue “C” Piping Interconnection Drawings. The works were executed for major oil companies. Drawing No. 2006 Page 182 of Road crossing for laying 2 pipes 1 for 20” raw ethane & 1 for 6”propane Avenue ‘c’ Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at the road crossing to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane at locations identified on the attached drawing to the following references Reference documents Specification Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures. Avenue ‘C’ Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly and be overall responsible for the excavation operation CS shall control. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. . No oil spillage shall be allowed. a flagman shall be engaged to operate full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by waving the flag for all the vehicles passing by Hand Excavation.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all the relevant persons involved on the crossing Traffic Management-Sign boards keep up-All the personnel shall be briefed about the safe keep up of the boards Barricades.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.The worker engaged on operating this equipment shall use protective glass and work in phases with pause intervals. Jack Hammer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out. markers and the night-lights. Excavation Work Permit.the case may be FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. ToolBox TalksWhile conducting ToolBox Talks. in addition to the traffic sign boards. The compressor air pressure shall be monitored from time to time so that the hammer works smoothly. The works were executed for major oil companies. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics cable is discovered. Any process is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. Only English literate Foreman shall be employed to work on the excavation execution.cones. the excavation shall be ceased to be continued until the decision to hydrojetting is taken up and the authority are involved. The sides of the excavation shall be sloped with the barriers placed to indicate the excavation work in progress Flagman-On both the direction. All these statements constitute management documents. flood lights etc. a representative from the authority shall be involved to witness and sign the instruction imparted with the workers prior to the commencement of the operations to make a record. In the present case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. shall be arranged as required for a complete safety. The compressor shall be place within the barricade limits Access to trench.Excavation required to be by hand shall only be carried out manually. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be resorted to effect a full safety standard. 2006 Page 183 of SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS Any mishap on the excavation operation shall immediately be notified to the CS and the CM for the immediate action if so required for any possible remedy or record or the authority review whatsoever. . . This is a 2-way road with a central verge and carrying 2 lanes on either way The proposed crossing is located about 160 m from 1 st street road towards North One serving electric pole is located away from the x-ing The minor irrigation / hoses are serving on the central verge Some minor trees and plants are arboricultured on the central verge. In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part L2 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the completed road portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch. The works were executed for major oil companies. night lighting and road cleaning activities etc. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the second Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. reduced speed sign. The traffic management scheme shall be reviewed and approved by EPC Contractor prior to commencing the work. warning signs. The directory signboards shall also be placed on the 1 st street road East West on both ways to indicate the work at the crossing For the traffic North to South the first reduce speed for traffic diversion informatory board depicting shall be located at 300 m from the point of the proposed crossing. Banksman shall be engaged while the equipment operate. In the first instance the work shall be carried out on part L1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the part L2 as shown on the sketch. safety barriers. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm. Adequate means of exit such as Aluminium ladder or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel. The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as lane L1 and L 2 on either side of the carriageway. Plants preservation The live plants and the trees arboricultured shall be deplanted integrally with the roots and preserved to the specialist requirement so that these remain live till the replantation is carried out all to the satisfaction of the specialist Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Deep Trenches If required. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. informatory signs. men at work sign. Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. 2006 Page 184 of The operators shall be explicitly explained and instructed about the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. temporary diverted roads sign. The truck driver shall also be instructed similarly. the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in. The aforesaid traffic management scheme shall be implemented as described below: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEME ROAD CROSSING – First Street / Avenue ‘C’ Drawing reference –24168-P40-310-00005 Rev O This proposed crossing is located on the Road Avenue ‘C’ between the following Co-ordinates as shown on the referred drawing. A traffic management scheme has been presented herein and shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing which includes. . Backfill around the service pipes shall be carried using the appropriate material. The excavated trench shall be inspected by the authorities as required. After the exposure of the cables. one sign shall be placed to direct for the diversion. all the cables to be covered with split PVC pipe to continue the excavation mechanically according to the authority directions and as agreed To excavate the remaining portion by the excavator machine To have authority inspection The pipes to be laid by others To fill the bedding material according to the specification requirement To reinstate the diverted services To reinstate the central verge to the existing state Details The Traffic Management Scheme shall be executed as explained in the foregoing and to the traffic manual directions. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The potable and the Desalinated water pipes shall be laid by others.24KV cables are available Trial pits to be excavated in size 5mx2mx1. to slow down and the men at work ahead A Flagman shall be engaged full time on both the directions to guide the traffic about the ongoing excavation operations in addition to the conventional signboards The following activities are involved. For the traffic South to North past crossing.5KV / 0. The service pipes surrounding material shall be compacted as per the project specification requirements. Test results shall be provided for the specification conformance verification. this bedding shall be compacted and tested.5m deep by hand tools To seam the area with the detectors to ascertain the access to the cable To expose the cable fully and to be inspected by the authorities / Operating Authority After the exposure. Where required. Any existing services shall be identified from the Record drawings and measures to protect resorted to according to the regulations. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The asphalt shall be cut using jackhammers The road section shall be excavated to the existing cables manually for which the trial pit may be made prior to the full manual excavation is proceeded and after ascertaining the safe procedures the exposures be completed. the Operating Authority authorities shall inspect and the cables be diverted accordingly following which the remaining machine excavation be carried out to the specified levels The excavated material shall be removed from the site to stockpile area. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. The first section of the proposed road crossing as per the attached sketch shall be marked by the surveyor on the actual location. Reference to the marked note ‘B’ on the Easement Systems Drawing To produce the Traffic Diversion Management Scheme To excavate by hand and expose all the underground facilities 5. The existing services shall be reinstated accordingly. Appropriate bedding material shall be placed within the excavated trench to the correct service level. 2006 Page 185 of depicting diversion signs be located at 200 m and the third depicting men at work sign be located at 100 m on either way in the opposite directions.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Reference documents Method statement. The works were executed for major oil companies. ST Survey team. Jack Hammer.Compactors. Compressor. Specification Site Preparation. General fill up to the underside of road formation shall be placed in 150mm compacted layers using mechanical methods to the specification requirements. IS Infrastructure Superintendent. . Site Preparation & Earthworks. PSM Project Site Manager. The finishing shall be carried out using approved asphalt mix. Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services Major Equipment Excavator. All these statements constitute management documents. The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing has been cleaned of any debris or obstructions. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. shall be reinstated accordingly. QM Quality Manager. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the control of the site earthwork activities. RFI Request for Inspection.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 186 of The plants or trees if removed and so required. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor .Dump trucks. A concrete slab shall be cast up to the bottom of the finished asphalt level. Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme Drawings including the traffic diversion #74 Earthworks survey system Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. A copy of this survey shall be transmitted to the EPC Contractor Engineer. prior to the commencement of the machine activities shall provide a sketch of the area defining the outer Northings and Eastings of the area. Should a grubbing level stake or fill stake be damaged or moved. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. moisturized and compacted according to the earthworks method statement. Method Where areas are to be grubbed. Upon completion of the “cut” activity. All these statements constitute management documents. the ST shall produce a survey of finished ground levels. Should the EPC Contractor Engineer have any comments or observations about the area. Upon completion of the grubbing activity. the ST shall produce a ground level survey of the cut area. Each fill layer shall be placed. The IS shall coordinate with the ST to establish fill stakes. This survey shall be forwarded to the QM for record purposes. the IS shall inform the QM. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor the daily earthworks activities. that shall indicate the layer levels. The ST. The IS shall coordinate and supervise the implementation of this method statement by the ST on a day to day basis. The RFI system shall document the comments and observations of an activity by the EPC Contractor engineer. Equipment Total station distomat. Where the area requires to be “cut”’ the ST shall establish pegs to indicate the correct cut level. within the area to be grubbed. advising and implementing all safety procedures. the IS shall notify the QM. The EPC Contractor Engineer shall review the proposed grubbing area. who shall inspect the area and complete the appropriate RFI. and comment if appropriate. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The QM shall transmit a copy of the survey report to the EPC Contractor Engineer. at 50m centers. This survey shall be forwarded to the QM for record. The QM shall notify the EPC Contractor Engineer of the proposed grubbing activity by using the RFI notification system. Upon completion of the establishment of the survey grid stakes and the site sketch. The works were executed for major oil companies. The appropriate actions shall be conducted. the formation level shall be moisturized and compacted as defined within the earthworks method statement. Where the area requires a “fill” activity. The EPC Contractor Engineer shall review the area with the QM and Geotechnical Engineer. 2006 Page 187 of Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure the implementation of this method statement upon the earthworks activities. Upon completion of all the fill layers to the area. The QM shall inspect the area to verify the correct establishment of the survey grid stakes. The cut activity shall be conducted.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the IS shall direct the ST to establish grid stakes. he shall inform the QM and / or IS of these observations. the ST shall re establish the stake correctly. . #75 Road crossing for laying 84”GRE pair seawater Cooling lines At Avenue ‘d’ / corniche Junction Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at the road to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # pair 84” GRE Sea Water Cooling supply lines at Avenue’D’ and ‘Cornice Road’ junction identified on the attached drawing to the following references Reference documents Specification. All these statements constitute management documents. Marker tape. 2006 Page 188 of Stakes. . Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. Attachment None. The works were executed for major oil companies. Drawing No. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures. Piping Interconnection Drawings. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’.SeaWater Cooling Supply Lines Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. cones. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Method Corniche Road / Avenue ‘D Junction’ Avenue ‘D’ is a 2-way road carrying single lane on either way Corniche Street is a 2-way road with a central verge. . 2006 Page 189 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. carrying 2 lanes on either way on the West direction and without a central verge but single lane on the Eastern direction. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation. the night-lights. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. No oil spillage shall be allowed. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. A traffic management scheme has been presented herein and shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. and floodlights etc. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out of the trench. Flagman-On all directions. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. The works were executed for major oil companies. The essential permit to work shall be obtained from the Refinery Division.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. markers. a flagmen shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the ‘excavation work in progress’ by ‘flag signal’ Hand Excavation. The record drawings pertaining to the existing services shall be obtained. in addition to the traffic sign boards. The second instance shall commence only when the first is completed allowing the traffic to ply. Corniche street sign board. . compacted and tested. First Instance The first section covering the length of one pipe to be connected to the existing pipeline at South of the proposed road crossing shall be marked on the actual location. The finishing shall be carried out using approved asphalt mix. The work shall be carried out on part 1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on part 2 and on the existing natural ground at South as shown on the sketch.Dump trucks. the Operating Authority authorities shall be invited to inspect and the cables diverted accordingly The cables shall be protected by PVC split pipe and covered. Kerb stones” The road shall be divided in 2 parts on either side of the carriageway. The excavated trench shall be inspected by EPC Contractor The GRE pipes shall be laid & the line tested by EPC Contractor. hydro jetting (depending on necessity) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.Compactors. Backfill around the service pipes shall be carried out using the appropriate material. The asphalt shall be cut using jackhammers The road section shall be excavated to the existing cables manually and the existence of the cables confirmed by the use of seaming. Either side of the road X-ing shall be provided with relevant markers to indicate the services Major Equipment Excavator. Jack Hammer. the island partly. The machine excavation shall be carried out to the final levels. All the aforesaid operations shall be repeated for the 2 nd instance allowing the traffic on the completed Instance 1 The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris or obstructions.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. After the exposure of the cables. guard rail fully about 30 m with channels. Compressor. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 190 of Pumping out water shall be carried out continuously in case it is necessary Existing Services 2 # serving electric poles are located one at the curve and the other in the Northern central verge which shall be effected by the proposed trench as the excavation line is expected to pass through the verge and the general impacts shall be to the extent of. Appropriate bedding material shall be placed within the excavated trench to the correct service level. General fill up to the underside of road formation shall be carried out in 150mm compacted layers using mechanical methods to the specification conformance. supported well temporarily. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Second Instance In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part 2 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the completed part 1. The works were executed for major oil companies. “The central verge partly. The excavated material shall be removed from the site to stockpile area. and compacted to the project specification requirement with the test results provided confirming the conformance The existing services shall be reinstated accordingly. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Piping Interconnection Drawings. Drawing No. . All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies.SeaWater Cooling Supply Lines Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 191 of Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #76 Road crossing for laying 84”GRE pair seawater Cooling lines At Avenue ‘d’ / corniche Junction Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at the road to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # PAIR 84” GRE SEA WATER COOLING SUPPLY LINES at Avenue’D’ and ‘Corniche Road’ junction identified on the attached drawing to the following references Reference documents Specification Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures. a representative from the authority shall be involved to witness and sign the instruction imparted with the workers prior to the commencement of the operations to make a record. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. flood lights etc. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all the relevant persons involved on the crossing Traffic Management-Sign boards keep up-All the personnel shall be briefed about the safe keep up of the boards Barricades. The works were executed for major oil companies. in addition to the traffic sign boards. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS Any mishap on the excavation operation shall immediately be notified to the CS and the CM for the immediate action if so required for any possible remedy or record or the authority review whatsoever. Any process is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics cable is discovered. In the present case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. a flagman shall be engaged to operate full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by waving the flag for all the vehicles passing by Hand Excavation. No oil spillage shall be allowed. 2006 Page 192 of FM QC Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly and be overall responsible for the excavation operation CS shall control.Excavation required to be by hand shall only be carried out manually. the excavation shall be ceased to be continued until the decision to hydrojetting is taken up and the authority are involved. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be resorted to effect a full safety standard. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.the case may be FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. Only English literate Foreman shall be employed to work on the excavation execution. Excavation Work Permit. The sides of the excavation shall be sloped with the barriers placed to indicate the excavation work in progress Flagman-On all the direction. shall be arranged as required for a complete safety.cones. markers and the night-lights. monitor and direct the SE. ToolBox Talks While conducting ToolBox Talks. . A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 193 of Jack Hammer- The worker engaged on operating this equipment shall use protective glass and work in phases with pause intervals. The compressor air pressure shall be monitored from time to time so that the hammer works smoothly. The compressor shall be place within the barricade limits Access to trench- The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators shall be explicitly explained and instructed about the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. The truck driver shall also be instructed similarly. Banksman shall be engaged while the equipment operate. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Deep Trenches Since the proposed excavation is wide and deep all the safety measures shall be resorted to and If required, the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in. The trench depth being more than 1200 mm.adequate means of exit such as Aluminium ladder or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel. Existing Services 2 # electric poles and the other various categories of about 8 to 10 # running services ducts and the cables etc shall be properly diverted according to the regulatory requirement and preserved until reinstated Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. A traffic management scheme has been presented herein and shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing which includes, reduced speed sign, temporary diverted roads sign, men at work sign, warning signs, informatory signs, safety barriers, night lighting and road cleaning activities etc. The traffic management scheme shall be reviewed and approved by EPC Contractor prior to commencing the work. The aforesaid traffic management scheme shall be implemented as described below: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEME ROAD CROSSING – Corniche Road / Avenue ‘D Junction’ Drawing reference This proposed crossing is located on the Road Avenue ‘D’ between the following Co-ordinates as shown on the referred drawing. Avenue ‘D’ is a 2-way road carrying single lane on either way Corniche Road is a 2-way road with a central verge, carrying 2 lanes on either way on the West direction and without a central verge but single lane on the Eastern direction. 2 # serving electric pole are located 1 at the curve and the other in the Northern central verge which shall be effected by the proposed excavation because of encroachment on the verge. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 194 of The central verge partly, the island partly, guard rail fully about 30 m with channels, Corniche street sign board, Kerb stones shall all be effected by the construction of the proposed road crossing The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as L1 and L 2 on either side of the carriageway. In the first instance the work shall be carried out on part L1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the part L2 as shown on the sketch. In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part L2 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the completed road portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch. The second instant shall be commenced only when the first has been completed and the traffic can ply. The directory signboards shall also be placed on the 1 st street road East West on both ways to indicate the work at the crossing For the traffic on both roads at’ 3’ locations bothways, the first reduce speed for traffic diversion informatory board depicting shall be located at 300 m from the point of the proposed crossing, the second depicting diversion signs be located at 200 m and the third depicting men at work sign be located at 100 m on either way in the opposite directions. A Flagman shall be engaged full time on both the directions to guide the traffic about the ongoing excavation operations in addition to the conventional signboards The following activities are involved to produce the Traffic Diversion Management Scheme To excavate by hand and expose all the underground facilities Various types of electrical, telecom and other services are running below and near the proposed crossing Trial pits to be excavated in size 5mx2mx1.5m deep by hand tools To seam the area with the detectors to ascertain the access to the cable To expose the cable fully and to be inspected by the authorities / Operating Authority After the exposure, all the cables to be covered with split PVC pipe to continue the excavation mechanically according to the authority directions and as agreed To excavate the remaining portion by the excavator machine To have authority inspection The pipes to be laid by others To fill the bedding material according to the specification requirement To reinstate the diverted services To reinstate the central verge to the existing state To reinstate the CORNICHE ROAD board and the metallic rail guard Details The Traffic Management Scheme shall be executed as explained in the foregoing and to the traffic manual directions. The first section of the proposed road crossing as per the attached sketch shall be marked by the surveyor on the actual location. All the existing services shall be identified from the Record drawings as well as by digging and measures to protect or divert temporarily resorted to according to the regulations. The asphalt shall be cut using jackhammers Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 195 of The road section shall be excavated to the existing cables manually for which the trial pit may be made prior to the full manual excavation is proceeded and after ascertaining the safe procedures the exposures be completed. After the exposure of the cables, the Operating Authority authorities shall inspect and the cables be diverted accordingly following which the remaining machine excavation be carried out to the specified levels The excavated material shall be removed from the site to stockpile area. Appropriate bedding material shall be placed within the excavated trench to the correct service level. Where required, this bedding shall be compacted and tested. The excavated trench shall be inspected by the authorities as required. The GRE pipes shall be laid by others. Backfill around the service pipes shall be carried using the appropriate material. The service pipes surrounding material shall be compacted as per the project specification requirements. Test results shall be provided for the specification conformance verification. The existing services shall be reinstated accordingly. General fill up to the underside of road formation shall be placed in 150mm compacted layers using mechanical methods to the specification requirements. A concrete slab shall be cast up to the bottom of the finished asphalt level. The finishing shall be carried out using approved asphalt mix. The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing has been cleaned of any debris or obstructions. Either side of the road X-ing shall be provided with markers to indicate the services Major Equipment Excavator.Dump trucks.Compactors. Jack Hammer, Compressor, hydro jetting (depending on necessity) Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme Drawings including the traffic diversion #77 Tennis courts surfacing Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 196 of Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the Surfacing on 2 #s Tennis Courts located in the Camp Reference documents Drawing No. Definitions PSM CSM CS SE FM QC Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Site Engineer Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control, monitor and direct the SE, FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Any process adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. The workers shall take all the precautions to avoid the skin and the eye contacts by using the safety glasses, hand gloves, the uniform, gun shoes all according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Immediate medical attention shall be provide when required Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during the inspection shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Storage The bags shall be stored in a cool shaded area prior to use Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 197 of Material MBT proprietary material Concresive 1414 MasterTop 512 Concresive 1414 is a 2 parts epoxy bonding agent Mastertop 512 is a ready to use non-metallic and non oxidising synthetic mineral aggregate and cementitious product applied as a topping onto the existing new concrete slab as a hard durable wearing course. 10 to 12 mm thick. Total surface area of the Tennis Courts 2 # 930 m2 Method The following operations are involved to carry out the surfacing Substrata preparation Priming and Bonding Mixing and Application Curing Details The area shall be closed to all persons except the workers and other personnel The surface of concrete shall be cleaned of all contamination such as oil, grease or fat which be removed before the preparations are commenced with High pressure water jetting shall be used to prepare the concrete surface to a coarse texture ensuring all weak or friable concrete be removed along with the contaminants The concrete is already more than 28 days Oil free Compressed air shall be used to remove dust making the surface clean & dry The surface shall be primed with Concresive 1414 ensuring total coverage of the surface A forced action Mixall mixer shall be used to mix Mastertop 512 according to the manufacturer’s instructions The content of the bag shall be poured into the mixer followed by blending for about 30 seconds, thereafter slowly adding 2.3 to 2.4 litres of water per 25 kg bag allowing to mix for 3 minutes In hot weather chilled clean water shall be used for mixing The primed surface shall be prepared to be guided for the proposed profile formation by using timber / wooden straightedge battens 10 mm thick The mixed mortar shall have a plastic consistency exhibiting low slump which be evenly spread over the primed surface already prepared as expressed in the foregoing A straightedge shall be used to systematically tampen and level the Mastertop 512. The floating material shall be pressed firmly on the primed surface using a wooden float to produce the material evenly spread and compacted A steel trowel shall be used to carry out the finishing. Curing The curing shall be carried out immediately after the final trowelling operation has been completed by either covering with polythene sheets or by the application of Masterkure 181 applied at a rate of 1 litre per 5 m2 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 198 of All the surfaces shall be protected from traffic until hardened( for light traffic the limit is 24 hours and for heavy 72 to 96 hours ) Major Equipment Compressor, Mixer, Air Blower Jack Hammer, Compressor, hydro jetting (depending on necessity) Attachment MBT Method Statement #78 Precasting lighting poles foundations Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the pre casting, transporting and installing on exact site locations the street lighting poles foundation bases 319 # Reference documents Drawing No. Specification Definitions PSM CSM CS SE FM QC Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Site Engineer Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control, monitor and direct the SE, FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. FM shall explain in full in the Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 199 of language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Any process adopted involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. All the safety precautions required to be adhered to while working on the excavations, blinding, forms, rebars, concrete pouring, waterproofing etc.all according to the acceptable standards shall be adopted on the operations concerned Adequate safety shall be observed during lifting and offloading the precast foundations to the relevant locations to avoid any mishap BY OBSERVING THE REGULATORY CRANE FITNESS REQUIREMENT AND VALIDITY OF PERMIT. Only competent personnel shall be engaged to carry out the operation The crane and the trailer operators shall adhere to all the traffic rules while carrying out the operations and if so required, a banksman be engaged to direct the movement The crane shall not be operated during the inclement weather conditions with dust storms Immediate medical attention shall be provide as and when required Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during the inspection shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Concrete, Rebars / Lifting Lugs, Anchor Bolts, 100 mm dia 350 internal radius PVC Cable Duct etc. Method Pre casting Area-The existing yard being used for the pre casting of manholes, catch basins etc. shall be employed for this purpose also The following operations are involved to carry out the production of the light poles foundation bases Pre installation operations To fabricate and erect the side forms 4 #s to the specified dimensions To fabricate the rebars according to the specified details To provide the non critical cathodic protection To provide the PVC cable duct To provide the bolt assesmbly to the requirement and location To provide the lifting lugs to carry a gravity load of at least 3 tonnes + handling stresses To pour the concrete To cure the concrete immediately after pouring Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 200 of Post casting operations To cure for the specified period To excavate the location to the required formation level To blind the area to be founded with concrete To waterproof the blinding as specified To keep the area ready in all respects well oriented & aligned to receive the foundation directly to be offloaded To apply the water proofing membrane around as specified To provide the protection board as specified To back fill the surrounding space to the relevant grade level Details The typical size of the foundation is 1000x1000mm in plan and 1100mm deep According to the drawing 319 # are specified to be constructed for a quantity 351 m3 A possible of 10 units shall be produced by pre casting every day on an average The forms to the exact size with the preformed chamfers shall be prepared and erected The steel rebars shall be cut, bent to the required shape, placed and the cage prepared holding 75mm concrete spacers, be positioned into the forms. 1 # 350 mm internal radius 100 mm dia PVC cable duct formed to the dimensions shall be anchored by binding wires to the exact locations shown on the drawing keeping the upper end flush with the concrete top The Lifting lugs as shown on the sketch shall be fixed in to the correct locations The forms for the block outs for the lifting lugs shall be fixed in to the correct locations as shown without clashing with the duct or the rebars allowing a protrusion of the hook The bolt assembly shall be fixed in exact position according to the design details The non-critical cathodic protection shall be arranged using a metallic continuous binding wire connecting all the horizontal rebars terminating into a boss fixed at one location near the top in the middle of the side opposite the duct carrying portion All the supports and the dimensions shall be checked and the plumb monitored Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor inspection The concrete shall be poured to all the prepared units in 3 layers in vertical sequence The appropriate vibrator shall be used for the compaction of the concrete During concreting, care shall be taken to keep the anchor bolts’ position undisturbed and the intermittent checks be continuously made to monitor the spacing / centres between the bolts After the concrete is poured in full & well compacted, the surface shall be levelled using a wooden float followed by light steel trowel Immediately after the concrete starts setting, approved curing compound shall be sprayed on the surface forming a continuous membrane which be covered over with a polythene sheet according to the specifications After 2 hours, the polythene sheet shall be temporarily removed to spread over the concrete surface the saturated burlap cloth or hessian, and recovered immediately The side forms shall be removed within the specified period The vertical concrete surfaces shall be spread with the curing compound immediately after striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet according to requirement The curing shall be continued for the specified period Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 201 of The relevant locations shall be made ready to receive the precast units by completing the excavation, blinding, the horizontal waterproofing and forming the correct alignment Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the’location to receive followed by EPC Contractor approval The unit shall be lifted by a mobile crane, loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the location for offloading on to the prepared ‘location to receive’ the unit The unit shall be installed on the marked location according to the correct orientation to the lighting layout drawing Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval The protruding lifting lug eyes shall be cut to 60 mm inside the block out, the void filled with concrete by first scabbling the internal surface followed by cement slurry grouting and pouring concrete The external surfaces of the foundation shall be applied with the concrete protective membrane according to the specifications Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval The membrane protection board shall be provided covering the surface to the specified details The back filling shall be carried out according to the specification upto the required levels in layers and upto the required ground grade or the pavement The points to locate the cathodic protection shall be provided with a marker to trace the boss The sequence shall be repeated for all the lighting poles foundations Major Equipment Compressor, Mobile Crane, Trailer Concrete Pump, Transit mixer Attachment Lifting arrangement sketch #79 Lighting poles foundations Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the pre casting, transporting and installing on exact site locations the street lighting poles foundation bases 319 # Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. Anchor Bolts. The works were executed for major oil companies. Bitustick XL. a banksman shall be engaged to direct the movement The crane shall not be operated during the inclement weather conditions with dust storms Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Specification Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. 2006 Page 202 of Reference documents Drawing No. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk All safety precautions necessary during working on excavations. . placed and the cage prepared holding 75mm concrete spacers. concrete protection etc. rebars. Rebars / Lifting Lugs. 100 mm dia 350 internal radius PVC Cable Duct.the existing yard being used to pre cast manholes. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Concrete. shall be employed for this purpose also The following operations are involved to carry out the production of the lighting poles foundation bases Pre installation operations The typical size of the foundation is 1000x1000mm in plan and 1100mm deep According to drawing 319 # are specified to be constructed (quantity 351 m3) On an average 10 units shall be produced by pre casting every day The forms to the exact size with the preformed chamfers shall be prepared and erected The steel rebars shall be cut. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. bent to the required shape. shall be applied to acceptable standards Adequate safety measures shall be adhered to during lifting and offloading precast foundations to relevant locations avoiding any mishap BY OBSERVING THE REGULATORY CRANE FITNESS REQUIREMENT AND VALIDITY OF PERMIT. concrete pouring. forms. blinding. and positioned into the forms.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 1 # 350 mm internal radius 100 mm dia PVC cable duct formed to the dimensions shall be anchored by binding wires to the exact locations shown on the drawing keeping the upper end flush with the concrete top The Lifting lugs as shown on the sketch shall be fixed in at the correct locations The forms for the block outs for the lifting lugs shall be fixed in at the correct locations as shown without clashing with the duct or rebars allowing a protrusion of the hook Bolt assembly shall be fixed in at exact position according to the design details Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. catch basins etc. Only competent personnel shall be engaged to carry out the operation Crane and trailer operators shall abide by all traffic rules while carrying out operations and if so required. Masterseal 300H Method Pre casting Area. the polythene sheet shall be removed followed by immediate covering the surface with saturated( soaked with mix quality water) hessian and recovered with polythene sheet to prevent evaporation from the hessian. the hessian shall be maintained in a permanent wet condition using mix quality water The side forms shall be removed after the specified period of 24 to 36 hours as agreed The vertical concrete surfaces shall be draped with the saturated hessian immediately after striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet held firmly in place along all edges & kept continuously wet for duration of curing The curing shall be continued for the specified period An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Installation operations The relevant locations shall be made ready to receive the precast units by completing the excavation. 2006 Page 203 of Non-critical cathodic protection shall be arranged using a metallic continuous binding wire connecting all the horizontal rebars terminating into a boss fixed at one location near the top in the middle of the side opposite the duct carrying portion All the supports and dimensions shall be checked. corrected if required and the plumb monitored An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted at regular intervals throughout the operations The concrete shall be poured to all the prepared units in 3 layers in vertical sequence The appropriate vibrator shall be used for the compaction of the concrete During concreting. the surface shall be levelled using a wooden float followed by light steel trowel Curing Immediately after the concrete is finished. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the concrete protection and forming the correct alignment AN Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the'location to receive' & ITP signed off The unit shall be lifted by a mobile crane. the void filled with concrete by first scabbling the internal surface followed by cement slurry grouting and pouring concrete Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . care shall be taken to keep the anchor bolts’ position undisturbed and the intermittent checks be continuously made to monitor the spacing / centres between the bolts An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted prior to concrete pour & ITP signed off After the concrete is poured in full & well compacted. the surface shall be covered with polythene sheet with the edge lapped or tied down to exclude air circulation without permitting the membrane to be in touch with concrete surface according to the specifications After the concrete has stiffened but no longer than 2 hours. loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the relevant area to offload on to the prepared ‘location to receive’ The unit shall be installed on the marked location according to the correct orientation to the lighting layout drawing AN Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted The protruding lifting lug eyes shall be cut to 60 mm inside the block out. Throughout the curing period. The works were executed for major oil companies. blinding. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Mobile Crane. 2006 Page 204 of The below ground surfaces of the foundation shall be applied with concrete protective membrane according to the specifications AN Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted The membrane protection board shall be provided covering the surface to the specified details. The works were executed for major oil companies. Transit mixer Attachment Lifting arrangement sketch #80 Sea water surge basin Concrete protection master seal 550 Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to apply the specialist protection coating material on the internal concrete surfaces (shown on the drawings by cross hatching) of the sea water surge Basin according to the specifications. . Trailer Concrete Pump. All these statements constitute management documents. References Drawings Specifications Master seal 550-product data sheet Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Top surface of the foundation shall be applied with above ground concrete protection as specified EPC Contractor surveillance / inspection / approval shall be according to the approved ITPs Major Equipment Compressor. The backfilling shall be carried out in layers according to the specification upto the required levels The points to locate the cathodic protection shall be provided with a marker to trace the boss. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. resurface concrete. The contents of the bag shall be applied on this area only Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. roller or trowel it forms a waterproof and flexible coating providing an effective barrier to waterborne salts and atmospheric gases. All these statements constitute management documents. During mixing and application of master seal 550. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. Scaffolding shall be erected to afford access to the working personnel according to the project requirements. overalls. The works were executed for major oil companies. Simply applied by stiff brush. 2006 Page 205 of -Protection to concrete Surfaces Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Medical attention shall immediately be made available as and when required Materials Coating. Surface preparation Mixing Application To keep up the exact coverage to form 1 mm thick coating an area of 11 m2 shall be marked on the concrete surface. Any process adopted which may involve a particular Safety risk. monitor and direct the SE. personnel protective equipment shall be used i. . FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the toolbox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work. Hand rails ladders and the toe boards shall be fitted and inspected prior to use. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements.e. Used containers shall be collected and disposed off according to the state regulations. mouth and skin) Material storage / disposal of used containers / waste material Materials shall be stored out of direct sunlight clear of ground and protected from rainfall. goggles. Method The method involves the following sequences in general. Masterseal 550 Master seal 550 is a two component acrylic modified cementitious coating that requires only site mixing to form an ideal product to waterproof. masonry and most other construction materials. gloves (to avoid material contact to eyes. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. scraped lightly into the surface. The coverage of 11-m2 surface shall be the evidence for the actual formation of 1-mm thick coating. No curing shall be carried out Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. depressions. The powder shall be slowly added to the liquid component and agitated / mixed for 2 minutes using a slow speed hand power drill fitted with a suitable paddle attachment until a homogeneous lump free consistency is obtained. The prepared surface area to be coated shall be saturated with fresh and clean water Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval The material shall in no case be applied on the dry surface The mixed material shall be applied while the surface is visibly damp without standing water using short stiff brush or roller with short hair. The mix quantity shall be such that it could be consumed in one hour during application without allowing any retempering with water. mould release agent or other contaminants which could impair adhesion shall be removed from the surface by degreasing and washing. spalls etc. 2006 Page 206 of At Joints The material coating shall terminate at the joints (Refer to the attached sketch) which are to be treated with sealant. All the holes. voids. Arrises shall be rounded off and the surface protrusions ground down to ensure smooth substrata The whole surface to be coated shall be cleaned using water jetting from a distance of 2 to 3 m from the panel surface and visually inspected to ensure that the required degree of roughness has been achieved which be evident at a stage when the aggregate be exposed on the surface. Application Coverage 1. oil. The filled areas shall be visually inspected to ensure that the correct mechanical key is formed.8 Kg / sqm at 1 mm thickness The material shall be 1 mm thick applied in one coat In hot weather the surface to be coated shall be shaded from direct sunlight. All these statements constitute management documents. Mixing Master seal supplied in the pre-measured units shall be mixed on site using clean containers. allowed to dry and later roughened by hand wire brush on the small areas and gently water jetted on the larger areas. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. (Roller shall be used in major / large areas) The evenness and the thickness of the applied coating shall be regularly ascertained by the consumed quantity to the applicable ratio of 11 m2 each container during application while the material is still wet. The part of the coating that has to be embedded into the joint sealant shall be applied first followed by the major area on the panel be coated thereafter Details All grease. dust. residual curing compound. The material shall be allowed to dry and visually inspected Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval Any missed areas shall be saturated and then touched up. shall be filled with Masterseal 550 mixed to a trowel consistency. safety glasses and masks Used containers shall be collected and disposed off according to the state regulations. shall wear overalls. 2006 Page 207 of Equipment Water tanker with water jetting arrangement Hard brushes for minor areas Clean container Slow speed drill with paddle attachment Stiff brush / Roller Attachment Masterseal 550 Data sheet and statement Typical sketch for joint for guidance purpose #81 Concrete coating masterseal 550 Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Material Method Equipment Attachment of structures using Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to apply the specialist protection coating material on those concrete surfaces requiring special protection e. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The interior of Sea water Surge basin & Collection Sumps References Specifications Master seal 550-product data sheet Protection to concrete Surfaces Safety Prior to the commencement of work. gloves. All these statements constitute management documents. . The works were executed for major oil companies.g. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the labour force shall receive a STARRT card / Tool box talk relevant to the operation concerned on the Project Site Safety requirements.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Necessary measures shall be applied to address any risk involved on any process Tagged scaffolding shall be erected to afford access to the working personnel Personnel working on sand blasting & mixing and application of master seal 550. All holes. An area of 11 m2 shall be marked on Concrete surface to consume 1 bag content to produce 1 mm thick coating. Mixing Master seal supplied in the pre-measured units shall be mixed on site using clean containers. The mix quantity shall be consumed in one hour during application without allowing any retempering with water. allowed to dry and later roughened by hand wire brush on small areas and lightly sand blasted on larger areas. The powder shall be slowly added to the liquid component and agitated / mixed for 2 minutes using a slow speed hand power drill fitted with a suitable paddle attachment until a homogeneous lump free consistency is obtained. (Roller shall be used in major / large areas) Evenness and the thickness of the applied coating shall be regularly monitored relating the consumed quantity @ 11 sqm / bag during application while the material is still wet. voids.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. scraped lightly into the surface. Applied material shall be allowed to dry and visually inspected Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted and the ITP signed off Any missed areas shall be saturated and then touched up. 2006 Page 208 of Method Joints . No curing shall be carried out Field samples shall be taken to confirm 1mm thick coating has been applied Equipment Sand blasting package Compressors Clean container Slow speed drill with paddle attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Prepared surface area to be coated shall be saturated with fresh and clean water Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted Material shall in no case be applied on the dry surface Mixed material shall be applied on the visibly damp surface without standing water using short stiff brush or roller with short hair. Application Coverage 1.The material coating shall terminate at the joints to be treated with sealant. spalls etc. depressions.8 Kg / sqm at 1 mm thickness One coat application shall be 1 mm thick In hot weather the surface to be coated shall be shaded from direct sunlight. The filled areas shall be visually inspected to ensure that the correct mechanical key is formed. shall be filled with Masterseal 550 mixed to a trowel consistency. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. As shown on the attached sketch The part of the coating to be embedded into the joint shall be applied first to permit sealant application followed by the major area on the panel to be coated thereafter Surface preparation Arrises shall be rounded off and protrusions ground down to ensure smooth substrata The whole surface to be coated shall be lightly sand blasted & visually inspected to ensure that the required degree of roughness has been achieved. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 209 of Hard brushes for minor areas Stiff brush / Roller Attachment Masterseal 550 Data sheet and statement Typical sketch for joint (for guidance) #82 Above ground concrete protection Seawater surge basin Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Storage Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to form a protection coating on the above ground RCC walls’ external faces as well as on the internal surface areas other than those where Masterseal 550 shall be applied References Drawing Specifications Master seal 300 H-product data sheet Master seal 181 S-product data sheet Protection to concrete Surfaces MAR for Masterseal300 H MAR for Masterkure 181 Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Scaffolding with the hand rails. anti-carbonation and waterproof protective coating designed for the protection of concrete structures against carbonation and chloride ingress. monitor and direct the SE. Plenty of clean water shall be available all the time. elastomeric decorative. The works were executed for major oil companies. The containers shall be resealed after use. mouth. protected from rainfall as well as temperature extremes. flexible. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the toolbox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work. masks etc. Immediate medical attention shall be called for in case of any adverse effect to the personnel handling the product Damaged tins shall be disposed off according to the state regulations. All these statements constitute management documents. Only tagged scaffolding comprising all the guard rails foot rails etc. for to avoid skin contact. the ladders and the toe boards fitted and inspected prior to use shall be erected to provide access to the working personnel according to the project requirements. Material storage / disposal of used containers / waste material The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight clear of ground. shall be used for the work at heights according to safety requirements. Medical attention shall be available all time to treat the adverse effects. Masterseal 181S. Any process adopted which may involve a particular Safety risk. Product shelf life is 12 months subject to proper storage Care shall be taken during use and storage to avoid contact with eyes. Transportation shall be available to move the effected personnel to the hospital should the circumstances so require. shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. gloves eye protection glasses. The personnel shall use protective clothing.an acrylic based.. . Material Master Builder Technology Product Masterseal 300H .primer system Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 210 of Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. skin and foodstuffs. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Application Masterseal 300 H shall be applied directly from the containers using a brush or roller @ 0. Equipment Brush Roller Attachment MBT datasheet & Statement #83 Sea water surge basin joint seal Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. grease.8 litre per sqm surface coverage to achieve a continuous coating The continuous coating may be achieved in 1 or 2 coats of application The coating shall be protected from the rain and humidity for 24 hours / until it dries out using polythene sheets keeping off the area. friable matters and curing compound. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. The coating shall be applied when the humidity is less than 90 % The coating shall not be applied in the dusty weather conditions No post application curing is required The areas to be coated shall be protected from direct sunlight by net shading in the hot weather conditions and the ambient temperature be more than 5 degree Celsius. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The surfaces shall be brush primed with Masterkure 181S and subsequently Masterseal 300H mixed with Masterseal 300 H filler applied as a scrape coat over blowholes and depressions. 2006 Page 211 of Masterseal 300 H filler Method This application involves the following sequences Cleaning and making up the surface Priming the surface Coating the surface Details Preparation All surfaces shall be free from oil. Arrises shall be rounded off and the protrusions ground so that the resulting surfaces appear smooth. The primed surface shall be allowed to dry tack free for a minimum duration of 2 hours before applying Masterseal 300H coating. The surfaces shall be cleaned from dust / sand using compressed air. . A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . monitor and direct the SE. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the toolbox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work. All these statements constitute management documents. This statement shall be construed in conjunction with Method Statement # approved / IFC vide Transmittal site-including an alternative to this document. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 212 of Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures that shall be adopted to apply the sealant to fill the joints formed in the walls and the base. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Any of the 2 methods may be used for the joint treatment according to the convenience on site References Specifications Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Any process adopted which may involve a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 213 of Scaffolding with the hand rails. Storage The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures. masks. The product has the capability to withstand repeated cycles of compression and extension over a wide range of tempertaure range and has excellent adhesion properties to all materials employed in buildings Supplied in pouring and gun grade for horizontal and vertical joints respectively Masterflex Primer # 1 is meant for porous surfaces such as concrete and masonry Coverage Joint depth 25 mm. A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. Only tagged scaffolding comprising all the guard rails foot rails etc. Material storage / disposal of used containers / waste material Materials shall be stored out of direct sunlight clear of ground and protected from rainfall. Material safety data shall be referred to for disposal and any further information. Shelf life 12 months between 5 deg and 35 Celsius Materials De-bonding tape (to be applied before priming) Sealant Masterflex 700 (High performance. eyeglasses etc. width 25 mm. Hands shall be cleaned by Industrial cleaner followed by washing with soap and water. The works were executed for major oil companies. the ladders. shall be used for the work at heights according to safety requirements. Medical attention shall immediately be made available as and when required The personnel shall use the PPE. elastomeric joint sealant) Masterflex Primer # 1 Masterflex 700 is a high grade. Used containers shall be collected and disposed off as per project requirements. All these statements constitute management documents. ultra violet light and attack by chemicals present in industrial atmospheres. the toe boards fitted and inspected prior to use shall be erected to provide access to the working personnel according to the project requirements.6 m per litre Packages 3 litres sealed containers Method This following operational sequences shall be involved Pre application activity The corner area to be embedded into the sealant to be made ready with Master seal 550 Refer to Method Statement # 93 Application Preparation of the surface required to be sealed Taking the filler board to the required depth Cleaning the surface and applying the de-bonding tape Priming the surfaces Application of the sealant up to the profile shown Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. use of barrier cream shall also be made. . synthetic rubber sealant possessing outstanding resistance to deterioration due to weathering.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. and to avoid skin contact. gloves. ozone. Filling length 1. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 214 of Details The joint area shall be prepared according to the sketch and the site conditions. Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted The debonding tape shall be fixed as shown on the sketch The surface shall be primed using brush according to the instructions given on the primer tins The primer shall be allowed to dry to a tack free state before Masterflex 700 is applied within 3 hours maximum to avoid repriming Mixing One complete unit shall be mixed at one time without subdivision Mixing shall be carried out for 5 to 10 minutes using a paddle fitted 500 rpm electric drill A palette knife shall be used to scrap the container surface intermittently to ensure that all curing agent be completely blended with the base compound. The material shall immediately be used after mixing Application The material shall be applied using a sealant gun fitted with conical nozzles adjustable to suit the joint width by cutting The sealant shall be gunned into the joint using an even trigger pressure and cleaning the nozzle occasionally to avoid contamination. The mixing and application equipment shall be cured immediately Equipment Paddle mixer Sealant gun Attachment Manufacturer’s statement #84 Painting Sub stations Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Deep joints shall be filled in 2 runs to prevent air entrapment A smaller timber spatula soaked in soapy water shall be used to compact the sealant into the joint for a smooth polish finish formation. The filler shall be trimmed the the specified depth All surfaces shall be cleaned of dust and contaminants using wire brush and made dry. . High Build Washable Acrylic Emulsion Ceilings. Galvanised surfaces.Polyurethane Galvanised external.Polyurethane References Notes on the Drawings & the Finishing Schedule Specifications MAR # Berger Paint Systems Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control.Textured Epoxy Coating Column Faces Features –50mm projection from general wall face with central vertical rebateSmooth Epoxy coating & finished Face-horizontal band finish-50mm projection beyond wall face.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents.Textured Epoxy Coating Equipment Enclosure External Concrete Walls at grade level. . Dry wall partition and the plastered surfaces according to the specifications and the material system approved. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 215 of Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures that shall be adopted to apply the Painting System on the above building on RCC surfaces. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. A brief regarding the proposed surfaces has been mentioned below Concrete General Wall Surfaces. monitor and direct the SE.High Build Emulsion Steel doors external.Metal surfaces.Smooth epoxy coating & finished Electrical Equipment / HVAC / Battery / Air LockWalls. Top horizontal edge to be splayed at 45 degree-Smooth epoxy coating & finished Vertical ribs fair face concrete face. Appropriate arrangement adjustment shall be made for the Textured and the smooth surface applications to the manufacturer’s specifications / instructions Column head –50-mm epoxy coating shall be separately stated Table 15 S # Sub Strata Surface preparation Operating temperature 1 Galvanised steel.Mechanical cleaning to remove Upto 60 deg C Interior. Blasting to Sa 2. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. Alkyd loose deposits Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned to the Project Site Safety requirements.Polyurethane loose deposits 2 Mild steel-Exterior. . Adequate scaffolding with proper netshade shall be provided wherever required The personnel shall use the waist safety belt / harness while working on height. Shelf life 12 months between 5 deg and 35 Celsius Materials Specified: Texotile from Jotun or Equivalent Approved: Berger Paint systems MAR # dated 27. The personnel shall use the PPE. use of barrier cream shall also be made.Mechanical cleaning to remove Upto 100 deg C Exterior.Cleaning with sand stone to Upto 100 deg C Exterior. All these statements constitute management documents. gloves. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. smoothen the surface free from all Polyurethane dirt etc textured 4 Galvanised Steel. Material safety data shall be referred to for disposal and any further information. The works were executed for major oil companies. Immediate medical care shall be provided in case the eyes of any personnel are effected due to the paint splashes or any other reason Proper ventilation shall be provided to let the workers respirate properly A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. eyeglasses etc and to avoid skin contact.5 Upto 100 deg C Polyurethane 3 Concrete Surface. masks. Adequate arrangement shall be made to provide access to the top of the wall.1 The following table provides the details of the approved systems but the appropriate relevant system shall be followed according to the scope of the work. 2006 Page 216 of EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work. Storage The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures. . Acrylic Mechanical cleaning to Sa 2 to Upto 60 deg C remove loose rust. Exterior Surfaces –Galvanised Steel. scales Cleaning with fine emery paper to Upto 50 deg C remove dirt etc.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. System # 1. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 217 of 5 6 Galvanised SteelInterior. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Primed ferrous metal Alkyd Plaster and GypsumGypsum wall board and plaster. Polyurethane Table 16 Coats Generic # of Solids DFT Colour Applica Type coa volume Microns tion ts % Primer Surface 1 82 100 Alumini Brush / tolerant um Spray high build epoxy Finish Gloss 1 50 50 White / Brush / Polyurethan Colours Spray e 2 150 Berger Product Epimast ic 5100 Al Robbiat hane Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. . Exterior Surfaces –Ferrous Metal.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 218 of System # 2. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Polyurethane Table 17 Coats Primer Generic Type Interme diate Finish High epoxy polyamide primer High build 1 epoxy polyamide Gloss 1 Polyurethan e 3 # of coa ts build 1 Solids volume % 57 DFT Microns Colour Red Applica tion Brush / Spray Berger Product Epilux 78 Epilux 218HS Robbiat hane 75 68 50 100 50 225 Grey Brush / Spray White / Brush Colours / Spray Touch up if required with Epilux 78 after power tool cleaning on spots Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 219 of System # 3. . All these statements constitute management documents. Exterior Surfaces –Concrete Masonry. Appropriate instruction to apply the smooth coat shall be followed according to the manufacturer’s manual System # 4. Interior Surfaces –Galvanised Steel. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Polyurethane Textured Table 18 Coats Primer Generic Type Epoxy Concrete # of coa ts 1 Solids volume % 45 DFT Microns Colour White Applica tion Berger Product 50 Interme diate Finish Epoxy 1 spray compound in textured finish Gloss / 1 Semi Gloss Polyurethan e 68 1000 White 50 50 White / Colours Brush / Epilux Spray / Concret Roller e Primer Hopper Luxatile Gun Epoxy Spray Compo und Roller / Robbiat Spray athane 1100 The textured pattern is unpressed and the DFT could vary from 700 to 1000 micron or more as manually applied by hopper gun. The works were executed for major oil companies. Alkyd Table 19 Coats Generic Type # of Solids coa volume ts % 8.5 DFT Microns Colour Greenish Yellow Applica tion Brush Spray Berger Product / Luxaprim e 1500 Etch Two Pack 1 Primer(T washer o be primer used in surface preparati on instead of 5 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . Alkyd Table 20 Coats Primer Coat(If required) Generic Type # of Solids coa volume ts % 50 DFT Microns 50 Colour Red Grey White Applica tion / Brush Spray Berger Product / Luxaprim e 1400 / Luxol 1000 / Luxol 5000 High build 1 alkyd zinc phosphate primer Intermedi Alkyd 1 ate Coat undercoat Finish Alkyd Enamel 1 Coat Note3 Primer need not be applied if already primed 55 50 50 50 150 Brush Spray White / Brush Colours Spray Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 220 of blasting) Coats Primer Coat Generic Type # of Solids coa volume ts % 55 55 48 DFT Microns Colour Red White Applica tion Brush Spray Berger Product / Luxaprim e 1500 / Luxole 1000 / Luxole 5000 Anticorrosive 1 rust inhibitive Primer Intermedi Alkyd 1 ate Coat Undercoat Finish Alkyd Enamel 1 Coat 4 55 55 48 155 Brush Spray White / Brush Colours Spray Luxaprime 1000 has to be applied on the same day of Luxaprime 1500 System # 5. Interior Surfaces –Primed Ferrous Metal. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. bituminous pants and fine textured masonry paint shall be in containers not exceeding 5 litres capacity Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 221 of System # 6. The works were executed for major oil companies. . initials or recognised trade mark Title and specification number Whether primer or undercoat. finishing coat Whether for internal or external use where appropriate Colour reference from BS 4800 Method of application Batch number and date of manufacture and re – test No paint shall be used after 18 months of manufacture or re test Coating materials other than spray paints. Manufacturer’s name. Acrylic Table 21 Coats Primer Coat Filler Coat Generic Type Premium quality alkali resisting primer High quality acrylic based wall filler # of Solids coa volume ts % 1 25 DFT Microns 25 Colour White Applica tion Brush Roller Berger Product Intermedi High ate Coat acrylic emulsion Finish Semi gloss 1 Coat acrylic emulsion 3 1(to seal & smo othe n the surf ace) quality 1 81 To White smoothe n the surface / Brolac Acrylic AR Primer Spatula Berger Super Wall Filler 35 35 50 50 White / Roller Colours White / Roller Colours Bergerco at Acrylic Emulsion Brolac Semi Gloss Emulsion >100 Method GENERAL Marking of containers Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers clearly labelled with the following information. Interior Surfaces –Gypsum Wallboard and plaster.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. sheeringness. . greasing and etching processes shall be repeated. mist. Cleaning shall not damage the galvanising. APPLICATION OF PAINT GENERALLY All paints shall be prepared and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Spray application shall only be used for painting of epoxy resin base Exposure of intermediate coats of paint for periods in excess of a few days shall not be permitted except in case of work delivered to site in a primed condition The dried films shall be free from bloom. all galvanised surfaces shall be etched with T-wash as described in BS 5493. etching solutions. If any surface fails to turn black as cleaning. stopping. shrinkage. Any zinc corrosion products remaining shall be removed by washing with sweet water and scrubbing with hard bristle brushes After being cleaned and degreased.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Application PREPARATION OF THE GALVANIZED SURFACES Dirt and other adherent contaminating matter / loose deposits shall be removed from galvanised surfaces by mechanical means using Berger tool cleaner. knotting. discoloration and extraneous matter No exterior or exposed paint work shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions. abrasive papers and blocks. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Oil or grease shall be removed from galvanised surfaces by the application of an emulsion cleaner. sandstorms nor when the relative humidity exceeds 80% Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. Stopping for woodwork to receive a coat finish shall be tinted to match with the surrounding work Filler for plaster or rendering shall be approved proprietary type The following operational sequences shall be involved Priming Coat Filler Coat to the requirement Intermediate Coat Finishing Coat All according to the approved system as aforesaid detailed for reference. wrinkling. during rain. fillers and other commodities shall be of the types recommended by the manufacturer of the coating to be applied White spirit shall comply with BS 245 Knotting shall comply with BS 1336 Stopping and filler for woodwork shall be approved proprietary Leadless oil based type recommended for internal or external work as appropriate. cleaning agents. curtailing. 2006 Page 222 of Samples Sample panel of 1 sqm in area shall be prepared for each type and colour of coating material to be used in the work for the approval Sample material of each paper / fibre material minimum size 500 x 500 mm showing at least the pattern repeat where applicable shall be submitted for approval Part 2 Materials Preparatory Materials Paint removers. Priming paints shall be applied by brush. sagging. dust etc. On beams and irregular surfaces. Suitable pressure regulators and gauges shall be provided for the air supply to the application units. fixtures.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. runs. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. surface again prepared and primed The time interval between application of coats shall not exceed that specified for optimum results by the manufacturer All coatings shall be cleaned as specified by the manufacturer before the next coat is applied All areas not specifically mentioned in the painting specification shall be finished to conform to the adjacent comparable areas All fixtures and surfaces not to be painted shall be properly protected during application and upon completion of the work all paint and varnish removed from glass. . seatings and cleats.. Each coat shall be allowed to dry for the time specified by the manufacturer before application of any succeeding coat Any primer coat exposed to freezing. All parts such as pipe supports. prior to the proceeding and at the final coat completion followed by EPC Contractor approval all according to the ITP documents attached METHOD OF COATING Each coat shall be applied uniformly over the entire surface. before drying. Spray guns. continuous agitator The spray gun shall be held at right angles to the surface and each pass overlap the previous one by approximately 50%. Moveable parts shall not to be painted. SPRAY APPLICATION All equipment for spray application shall be inspected and approved before any application begins. The works were executed for major oil companies. post application of the coat. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. sags and drips shall be avoided. excess humidity. etc. All these statements constitute management documents. An adequate moisture and oil trap shall be installed between the air supply to each application unit.. shall be removed. back to back sections which shall become inaccessible after fabrication shall be treated on both surfaces with the full paint system prior to final assembly. hoses and pumps shall be cleaned before new material is added. Whenever possible exterior painting shall be so programmed during the day so as to be carried out in shadow Painting of surfaces shall not be carried out when condensation is present on such surfaces or the application and / or drying of the paints is likely to be affected Surfaces to be painted shall receive as first coat of paint as quickly as possible after the e preparation has been completed In case of metal surfaces this shall preferably be within one hour but always before the metal temperature drops to less than 3 deg C above dew point and before any rusting Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted at every stage of surface preparation . Skips. 2006 Page 223 of Painting shall insofar as is practicable be shaded from direct sunlight by netting to prevent wrinkling and bristling. rain. covering. Spray equipment and operating pressures shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations. When these occur they shall be brushed out immediately or the materials removed and the surface recoated. Coating materials containing heavy pigments that have a tendency to settle shall be kept in suspension during the application by the power driven. edges shall be strip coated first and at extra pass made later. thus ensuring adequate protection. All materials contained herein may be applied by airless spray. No extending handles shall be used on brushes. foreign inclusions and other holidays and any such defect shall be repaired. Vacuum removal of dust and sand shall be employed and contamination removed. dust. additional coats shall be applied as required. FILM THICKNESS Specified film thickness for coating materials shall be strictly observed which be checked with an appropriate film thickness gauge. Prior to the application of a coating. The surface being painted shall be free of visible moisture throughout these operations Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. When applying solvent type coating. Particular attention shall be paid to full film thickness on edges In hot weather such additional precautions as are necessary shall be taken to ensure that the specified dry film thickness on priming or finish coats is obtained COATING QUALITY Coatings shall be free from pinholes. voids. . any damage to the previous coating shall be repaired with the specified material. Upon completion of the fabrication any damage to the coating system shall be repaired TEST EQUIPMENT Svensk photographic standard SIS 05 59 00 Coating thickness meter such as Elcometer ‘Minitector” Model 150 Wet fill thickness combs Hygrometer Maximum and minimum thermometer Flow cup type B # 4 and timer Surface profile meter such as Elcometer’Roughness detector’ Bolted site connections other than faying surfaces of Grip Bolt connections shall be brought together ‘wet’ EPOXY COATING WORK GENERALLY In addition to the general requirements the following conditions shall apply wherever epoxycoating work is being carried out Forced draught ventilation shall be used wherever required for the needs of the personnel or for drying out surfaces Operatives shall work in pairs Samples areas on substrate shall be prepared and coated for approval There shall be strict control of surface cleanliness between primer and epoxy coating / and between coats of the same. bubbles. The works were executed for major oil companies. Where dirt or dust has been trapped in the painted surface it shall be removed with suitable abrasive paper. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. care shall be taken to prevent lifting of previous coats. 2006 Page 224 of BRUSH APPLICATION Brushes shall be of a style and quality that permit proper application of the material Flat brushes shall not be more than 100 mm wide. Calibration for the thickness range to be checked at least twice a day When dry film thickness are less than those specified. Brushing shall be done so that a smooth coat as nearly uniform in thickness as possible is obtained without any deep or detrimental marks Paints shall be worked into all corners and crevices. The colour of the final coat shall be as approved. Each coat shall be seen to have completely covered the proceeding without ‘ misses’ or pinholes or any areas visibly low in thickness. residual laitance or intercoat adhesion weakness. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Any thick runs or collections of paint shall be removed before these harden Not less than 2 coats shall be applied over the primer by airless spray. A high voltage pinhole detector shall also be used to determine the integrity of the coats The manufacturer of the coating shall stipulate primer and epoxy recoat interval for all curing temperatures likely to be encountered and these be adopted with a maximum tolerance of +4 hours. . 2006 Page 225 of The paint shall be applied only to the clean dry primed or previously coated surfaces. the surfaces to be recoated shall first be suitably abraded to remove gloss and provide a key Wet thickness gauges shall be used by the coating operators continually to check that sufficient paint is being applied to achieve the desired dry film thickness EPOXY COATING FOR CONCRETE AND RENDERED SURFACES No priming shall commence until the moisture content of the cementitious surface is less than 5% measured by Wetcheck Moisture meter or other instrument Similarly moisture measurements over the primer or any epoxy intercoat shall not exceed 1 % on the concrete scale of the instrument when the probe tips are held against such painted surfaces just prior to recoating The priming shall be applied by suitable Nylon bristle brush or spray over the whole area to be coated at such thickness that it may then be squeezed into the pores of the concrete. The resulting test specimens shall show no indication of poor adhesion to the substrate. Adhesion tests shall be carried out on the cured coating surface using the test equipment supplied in accordance with the best practice. less than 3 by brush Each coat shall be distinctly different in colour from the primer or previous coat. All these statements constitute management documents. The following instrument shall be used 1 Adhesion Tester 0 to 35 kg / cm2 1 DC high voltage holiday detector # 105 One paint inspection gauge PIG 1 wet check moisture meter Equipment Spray appliance Brushes Rollers Attachment ITP-Doc: QCF Rev B Concrete paint system checklist ITP-Doc :QCF Rev B Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. the surfaces shall be abraded followed by the area touched in with not less than 2 # thick applications to restore the coating integrity to the specified thickness. Where this is exceeded. Any excess shall be removed by the most suitable means before application of the high build epoxy The total DFT of the paint layer shall have a minimum specified value Whenever the paint inspection gauge has been used and wherever the coating has been otherwise damaged for 50 mm around such damage. . FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. monitor and direct the SE. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications Safety Prior to the commencement of work. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 226 of Internal painting check list #85 Painting Sub stations Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the procedures to be adopted to apply the Painting System on the various surfaces of all the Sub Station buildings according to the following specifications and the drawing references References Specifications Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox talk regarding the painting system operation concerned to the Project Site Safety requirements. The works were executed for major oil companies. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Materials Specified: Texotile from Jotun or Equivalent Approved: Berger Paint systems MAR dated 27.Mechanical cleaning to remove Upto 60 deg C Interior. Storage The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.Cleaning with fine emery paper to Upto 50 deg C Gypsum wall board remove dirt etc. The following table provides the details of the approved systems Table 22 S # Sub Strata Surface preparation Operating temperature 1 Galvanised steel. Immediate medical care shall be provided in case the eyes of any personnel are effected due to the paint splashes or any other reason Proper ventilation shall be provided to breathe properly A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. In this case all the adverse effects of the epoxy paint shall be informed and the safety measures to be adopted instructed.Polyurethane loose deposits –Cleaning with Berger Cleaner-Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations 2 Mild steel-Exterior. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.Cleaning with Berger Cleaner -Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations 5 MS / Ferrous Metal. use of barrier cream shall also be made.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents.Cleaning with sand stone to Upto 100 deg C Exterior. Tagged scaffolding with proper netshade shall be provided wherever required The personnel shall use the waist safety belt / harness while working height. gloves. . The works were executed for major oil companies. remove loose rust. eyeglasses etc and to avoid skin contact. The personnel shall use the PPE. Adequate arrangement shall be made to provide access up to the top of the wall. Material safety data shall be referred to for disposal and any further information. masks.1. smoothen the surface free from all Polyurethane dirt etc textured 4 Galvanised Steel. scales Primed ferrous metal Alkyd 6 Plaster and Gypsum.Mechanical cleaning to remove Upto 100 deg C Exterior.5 Upto 100 deg C Polyurethane 3 Concrete Surface.Mechanical cleaning to Sa 2 to Upto 60 deg C Interior. Blasting to Sa 2. Alkyd loose deposits . 2006 Page 227 of Any process involving a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Polyurethane Table 23 Coats Generic # of Solids DFT Colour Applica Microns Type coa volume tion ts % Primer Surface 1 82 100 Alumini Brush / tolerant um Spray high build epoxy Finish Gloss 1 50 50 White / Brush / Polyurethan Colours Spray e 2 150 System # 2. All these statements constitute management documents. Exterior Surfaces –Galvanised Steel. Acrylic System # 1. Exterior Surfaces –Ferrous Metal. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Polyurethane Table 24 Berger Product Epimast ic 5100 Al Robbiat hane Coats Primer Generic Type Interme diate Finish High epoxy polyamide primer High build 1 epoxy polyamide Gloss 1 Polyurethan e 3 # of coa ts build 1 Solids volume % 57 DFT Microns Colour Red Applica tion Brush / Spray Berger Product Epilux 78 Epilux 218HS Robbiat hane 75 68 50 100 50 225 Grey Brush / Spray White / Brush Colours / Spray Touch up shall be carried out with ‘Epilux 78’ after cleaning the effected area using power tool Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 228 of and plaster. The works were executed for major oil companies. . A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. The smooth surface shall be produced by following the relevant manufacturer’s instruction System # 4. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Exterior Surfaces –Concrete Surface / Masonry. Polyurethane Textured Table 25 Coats Primer Generic Type Epoxy Concrete # of coa ts 1 Solids volume % 45 DFT Microns Colour White Applica tion Berger Product 50 Interme diate Finish Epoxy 1 spray compound in textured finish Gloss / 1 Semi Gloss Polyurethan e 3 68 1000 White 50 50 White / Colours Brush / Epilux Spray / Concret Roller e Primer Hopper Luxatile Gun Epoxy Spray Compo und Roller / Robbiat Spray athane 1100 Because the textured pattern is unpressed the DFT may vary from 700 to 1000 micron or more as manually applied by hopper gun. 2006 Page 229 of System # 3.5 DFT Microns Colour Greenish Yellow Applica tion Brush Spray Berger Product / Luxaprim e 1500 Etch Two Pack 1 Primer(To wash be used in primer surface preparation instead of blasting) 5 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. Alkyd Table 26 Coats Generic Type # of Solids coa volume ts % 8. Interior Surfaces –Galvanised Steel. . A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Interior Surfaces –Primed Ferrous Metal. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 230 of Coats Primer Coat Generic Type # of Solids coa volume ts % 55 DFT Microns Colour Red Applica tion Brush Spray Berger Product / Luxaprim e 1500 / Luxole 1000 / Luxole 5000 Intermediat e Coat Finish Coat Anticorrosi 1 ve rust inhibitive Primer Alkyd 1 Undercoat Alkyd 1 Enamel 4 50 55 48 50 50 155 White Brush Spray White / Brush Colours Spray Luxaprime 1000 primer coat shall be applied the same day when the surface is prepared by etching using Luxaprime 1500 System # 5. Alkyd Table 27 Coats Primer Coat(If required) Generic Type # of Solids coa volume ts % 50 DFT Microns 50 Colour Red Grey White Applica tion / Brush Spray Berger Product / Luxaprim e 1400 / Luxol 1000 / Luxol 5000 High build 1 alkyd zinc phosphate primer Intermedi Alkyd 1 ate Coat undercoat Finish Alkyd Enamel 1 Coat Note3 Primer need not be applied if already shop primed 55 50 50 50 150 Brush Spray White / Brush Colours Spray Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. finishing coat Whether for internal or external use where appropriate Colour reference from BS 4800 Method of application Batch number and date of manufacture Samples Sample panel of 1 sqm in area shall be prepared for each type of coating for approval on any of the surfaces to be applied with that paint The following operational sequences shall be involved Priming Coat Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Interior Surfaces –Gypsum Wallboard and plaster. . Acrylic Table 28 Coats Primer Coat Filler Coat Generic Type Premium quality alkali resisting primer High quality acrylic based wall filler # of Solids coa volume ts % 1 25 DFT Microns 25 Colour White Applica tion Brush Roller Berger Product Intermedi High ate Coat acrylic emulsion Finish Semi gloss 1 Coat acrylic emulsion 3 1(to seal & smo othe n the surf ace) quality 1 81 To White smoothe n the surface / Brolac Acrylic AR Primer Spatula Berger Super Wall Filler 35 35 50 50 White / Roller Colours White / Roller Colours Bergerco at Acrylic Emulsion Brolac Semi Gloss Emulsion >100 Method GENERAL Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers clearly labelled with the following information. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 231 of System # 6. The works were executed for major oil companies. Manufacturer’s name or recognised trade mark Title and specification number Whether primer or undercoat.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Skips. . they shall be brushed out immediately or the materials removed and the surface recoated. All these statements constitute management documents. during neither sandstorms nor when the relative humidity exceeds 80% Painting shall insofar as is practicable be shaded from direct sunlight by netting to prevent wrinkling and bristling. 2006 Page 232 of Filler Coat to the requirement Intermediate Coat Finishing Coat All according to the approved system as aforesaid Application PREPARATION OF THE GALVANIZED SURFACES Dirt and other adherent contaminating matter / loose deposits shall be removed from galvanised surfaces by mechanical means using Berger tool cleaner. covering. When these do occur. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. excessive humidity.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. runs. curtailing.e. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. this shall preferably be within one hour but always before the metal temperature drops to less than 3 deg C above dew point and before any rusting Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted at every stage of surface preparation.. post application of the coat. Exposure of intermediate coats of paint for periods in excess of specified time shall not be permitted except in case of work delivered to site in a primed condition The dried films shall be free from all defects such as bloom. sags and drips shall be avoided. etc. Moveable parts shall not to be painted. shrinkage. discoloration and extraneous matter No exterior or exposed paintwork shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions i. back to back sections which shall become inaccessible after fabrication shall be treated on both surfaces with the full paint system prior to final assembly. sagging. prior to the proceeding coat and at the final coat completion. sheerings. shall be removed. wrinkling. APPLICATION OF PAINT (GENERAL) All paints shall be prepared and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. thus ensuring adequate protection. edges shall be strip coated first and an extra pass made later. All parts such as pipe supports. Each coat shall be allowed to dry for the time specified by the manufacturer before application of any succeeding coat Any primer coat exposed to. Cleaning shall not damage the galvanising. The works were executed for major oil companies. before drying. dust etc.. all according to the ITP documents attached METHOD OF COATING Each coat shall be applied uniformly over the entire surface.. On beams and irregular surfaces. seatings and cleats. Painting of surfaces shall not be carried out when condensation is present on such surfaces or the coating application on drying is likely to be affected Surfaces to be painted shall receive the first coat of paint as quickly as possible after the preparation has been completed In case of metal surfaces. and the surface again prepared and primed All coatings shall be cleaned as specified by the manufacturer before the next coat is applied All fixtures and surfaces not to be painted shall be properly protected during application and upon completion of the work all paint and varnish removed from glass. fixtures. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 233 of SPRAY APPLICATION All equipment for spray application shall be inspected and approved before any application begins. Spray guns, hoses and pumps shall be cleaned before new material is added. An adequate moisture and oil trap shall be installed between the air supply to each application unit. Suitable pressure regulators and gauges shall be provided for the air supply to the application units. Spray equipment and operating pressures shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Coating materials containing heavy pigments that have a tendency to settle shall be kept in suspension during the application by the power driven, continuous agitator The spray gun shall be held at right angles to the surface and each pass overlap the previous one by approximately 50%. All materials contained herein may be applied by airless spray. BRUSH APPLICATION Brushes shall be of a style and quality that permit proper application of the material No extending handles shall be used on brushes. Brushing shall be done so that a smooth coat as nearly uniform in thickness as possible is achieved without any deep or detrimental marks Paints shall be worked into all corners and crevices. FILM THICKNESS Specified film thickness for coating materials shall be strictly observed which is checked with an appropriate ‘film thickness gauge’. When dry film thickness is less than that specified, additional coats shall be applied as required. Particular attention shall be paid to full film thickness on edges In hot weather such additional precautions as are necessary shall be taken to ensure that the specified dry film thickness on priming or finishing coats is achieved by monitoring the wet film thickness using the appropriate gauge. Additional coats shall be applied on the deficient area COATING QUALITY Coatings shall be free from pinholes, voids, bubbles, dust, foreign inclusions and other holidays and all such defects shall be repaired. Prior to the application of a coating, any damage to the previous coating shall be repaired with the specified material. TEST EQUIPMENT Coating thickness meter such as Elcometer ‘Minitector” Model 150 or equivalent Wet fill thickness combs Hygrometer Maximum and minimum thermometer Surface profile meter such as Elcometer’Roughness detector’ EPOXY COATING WORK (GENERAL) In addition to the general requirements the following conditions shall apply wherever epoxycoating work is being carried out Forced draught ventilation shall be used wherever required for the needs of the personnel or for drying out surfaces Operatives shall work in pairs Sample on substrate shall be prepared and coated for approval Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 234 of There shall be strict control of surface cleanliness between primer and epoxy coating / and between coats of the same application. Vacuum removal of dust and sand shall be employed and contamination removed. Where dirt or dust has been trapped in the painted surface, it shall be removed with suitable abrasive paper. The surface being painted shall be free of visible moisture throughout these operations The paint shall be applied only to the clean & dry primed or previously coated surfaces. Any thick runs or collections of paint shall be removed before these harden Each coat shall be distinctly different in colour from the primer or previous coat. The colour of the final coat shall be as approved. Each coat shall be seen to have completely covered the proceeding without ‘ misses’ or pinholes or any areas ‘visibly low’ in thickness. A high voltage pinhole detector shall also be used to determine the integrity of the coats “The manufacturer of the coating shall stipulate primer and epoxy recoat interval for all curing temperatures likely to be encountered and these be adopted with a maximum tolerance of +4 hours”. Where this is exceeded, the surfaces to be recoated shall first be suitably abraded to remove gloss and provide a key Wet thickness gauges shall be used by the coating operators continually to check that sufficient paint is being applied to achieve the desired dry film thickness EPOXY COATING FOR CONCRETE AND RENDERED SURFACES No priming shall commence until the moisture content of the cementitious surface is less than 5% measured by Wetcheck Moisture meter or other instrument Similarly moisture measurements over the primer or any epoxy intercoat shall not exceed 1 % on the concrete scale of the instrument when the probe tips are held against such painted surfaces just prior to recoating The priming shall be applied by suitable Nylon bristle brush or spray over the whole area to be coated at such thickness that it may then be squeezed into the pores of the concrete. Any excess shall be removed by the most suitable means before application of the high build epoxy The total DFT of the paint layer shall have a minimum specified value Whenever the paint inspection gauge has been used and wherever the coating has been otherwise damaged, the surfaces shall be abraded 50 mm around and the area touched in with not less than 2 # thick applications to restore the coating integrity to the specified thickness. Adhesion tests shall be carried out on the cured coating surface using the test equipment supplied in accordance with the best practice. The resulting test specimens shall show no indication of poor adhesion to the substrate, residual laitance or intercoat adhesion weakness. The following instrument shall be used 1 Adhesion Tester 0 to 35 kg / cm2 1 DC high voltage holiday detector # 105 One paint inspection gauge PIG 1 wet check moisture meter Equipment Spray appliance Brushes Rollers Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 235 of Attachment ITP-Doc: QCF Rev B Concrete paint system checklist ITP-Doc :QCF Rev B Internal painting check list #86 Electrical & instrumentation trenches Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of the proposed Electrical and Instrumentation trenches to the following specified details Cable trench X-ing with U / G pipe Cable trench X-ing with U / G pipe with closed drain pipe trench Pipe X-ing direct buried cables only Typical elctrical layout at pumps Typical corner details for walled trench Direct buried trench X-ing under Dummy Trench Trench with dummy Trench X-ing under direct buried cable trench Dummy + walled trench section References paving & Under Ground services Electrical and Instrumentation Trench and Duct Bank details Specifications Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 236 of FM QC Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control, monitor and direct the SE, FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned to the Project Site Safety requirements. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. The personnel shall use the PPE, gloves, masks (for gas leak in area), eyeglasses (during dusty winds) etc Adequate arrangement shall be made to provide access to the top of the wall. A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. Materials Mass Concrete for strip foundation beam, Concrete blocks, precast covers, oil resistant sealant Method GENERAL-Dummy and walled trench section The following operational sequences shall be involved To set out the exact alignment of the trenches to the specified co-ordinates To barricade the involved area to the safety requirement To excavate the trenches to the specified levels To dress the formations and compact To prepare the sides for the mass concrete 100mm thick To pour the mass concrete To set out the block walls alignment To carry out 150mm thick block work to the specified levels upto the paving down beam level To carry out the down standing paving portion & extend to the block wall top To fill the trench with the excavated earth back according to specifications To place the precast coloured concrete covers 1m or 3m lengths on the compacted ground To Seal the paving and cover joint Where the dummy trench runs over the duct bank (Typical Trench Duct Bank Detail) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 237 of The duct bank with the uPVC sleeves in for the crossing portion below the underground pipe should be ready formed with the mass concrete the size of which shall vary according to the number of crossing pipes The following operational sequences shall be involved To excavate down to the top of the duct concrete in case backfilling has been completed To clean the concrete surface To set out the trench alignment To set out the block wall alignment keeping maximum 50 mm overhang To construct the block walls to paving down beam level To carry out the down standing paving portion & extend to the block wall top To fill the trench with the excavated earth back according to specifications To place the precast coloured concrete covers 1m or 3m lengths on the compacted ground To Seal the paving and cover joint Additionally, in case the underground pipe runs X-ing the Trench, to lay the specified pipe prior to the block work operation by others To provide a flat crossing size equal (Duct Bank length + 300x2) The formation level of the duct bank and the dummy trench shall be the same at the exact crossing location Where the dummy trench and the direct buried trench run parallel The following operational sequences shall be involved To repeat all the sequences as in general in the aforesaid To follow the profile of the dummy trench while constructing the buried trench for ease To form the down slope profile at the crossings as shown on the drawing The slope grade shall be 1 in 2 Where the cable trench crossing the closed drain pipe trench The following additional operational sequences to the general trench construction for the dummy or the direct buried shall be required To provide the profile of the direct buried trench same as that of the cable duct trench To provide the transition of levels between the dummy trench and the flat below X-ing by a slope grade 1 in 2 as specified on the drawing To provide a duct bank of size depending on the dimension of the closed drain trench to pass above by providing a width (closed drain trench width + 100mmx2) To provide a total flat width below the crossing equal (duct bank length + 300x2). To provide the uPVC sleeves in the duct bank prior to the mass concreting To allow a clear void of 100mm minimum between soffit of closed drain trench base and the duct bank top To provide cable tiles under trench crossing in direct buried cable trenches only(By others) To allow the closed drain trench isolate from the paving Where direct buried trench crossing under dummy trench The following additional operational sequences to the general trench construction for the dummy or the direct buried shall be required To provide a level difference of 350 mm between the dummy trench elevation and the compacted surface below the crossing maintaining a transition slope grade 1 in 2 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 238 of To allow the cables running in dummy trench to be protected by the cable tiles installed at 75 mm above the top of cables where no paving is shown (By others) To allow to provide the cable protection tiles above the cables where these pass in the walled trench to cross under the dummy trench (By others) To form the walled trench corner detail according to the corner splay internal size 8485 mm Where dummy Trench crossing under direct buried cable trench The following additional operational sequences to the general trench construction for the dummy or the direct buried shall be required To provide a flat surface below the X-ing at the bottom of the duct bank of size equal (duct bank length + 300x2) with a slope grade transition 1 in 2 To provide a level difference of 100 mm between soffit of the direct burried cable trench and the duct bank top Where direct buried cable trench crossing under direct buried cable trench The following additional operational sequences to the general trench construction for the dummy or the direct buried shall be required To maintain a level difference 700 mm between direct buried trench and the crossing formation level To provide a transition grade 1 in 2 To provide a cable tiles in unpaved areas only and at trench crossing (By others) To provide the formation crossing width equal (direct buried cable trench width + 400x2) Electric Trench Layout at Pumps The following additional operational sequences to the general trench construction for the dummy or the direct buried shall be required To form the trench termination into an integral chamber of internal dimensions as (Pump base length / 2+trench internal width) x (Pump base width +300+500) Details in general The surveyor shall setout the alignment of the trench concerned according to the details given on the paving and underground services layouts to the reference co-ordinates Civil Contractor QC shall conduct the inspection followed by EPC Contractor approval The required safety arrangement shall be discussed with the safety department and implemented accordingly to control the trench excavation, to provide barricades night-lights etc, to divert the traffic if so required and to adopt any other unforeseen measures. The excavation shall be carried out by an excavator to the lines and the surveyor monitor various stages during the operation to maintain the required profile The excavated material shall be transported immediately after being taken out using a dumper, to the earth stockpiles temporarily The formation levels after the excavation is over shall be well dressed and compacted to the specification requirement The forms of width 350mm and depth 100 mm shall be readily available to be fixed on the prepared compacted formation duly aligned Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval The mass concrete shall be poured to the marked levels and tamped by wooden float The curing shall be carried out according to approved procedures Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 239 of The alignment of the block walls 150 mm thick shall be set out, the block work carried out in courses in a straight line and plumb The whole number of courses shall be laid, the fraction remained to be completed for the wall height shall be covered by pouring during the paving down beam concrete The connecting integrated / pouring area including the down beam shall be carried out to the specified details according to the procedures Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval The backfilling shall commence and the trench filled according to the specifications The precast covers of 1m or 3 m standard length already precast shall be placed on the formed trench internal surface to the specified levels The concrete shall be coloured to the specification requirement Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval Option If so required and felt convenient for certain standard equal depth reaches, precast concrete members of 100 mm thick sections may be utilised to substitute 150 mm thick walls directly resting on the prepared formation Equipment Excavator Dumper truck Compactor Attachment None #87 Electrical & instrumentation trenches Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of the Electrical and Instrumentation Trenches to the typical details. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 240 of References Drg Paving & Under Ground services Electrical and Instrumentation Trench and Duct Bank details Specifications Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control, monitor and direct the SE, FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications Safety Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a STARRT card / Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned to the Project Site Safety requirements. Any process involving a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. The personnel shall use the PPE, gloves, masks (for gas leak in area), eyeglasses (during dusty winds) etc A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. Materials Mass Concrete for strip foundation beam, Concrete blocks, Precast trench covers, oil resistant joint sealant Method GENERAL Dummy / walled trench section (Detail 5 on the reference drawing) The following operational sequences in brief are involved Setting out to the exact alignment the route of the trench to the specified co-ordinates Barricading the involved area to the safety department direction and requirement Excavating the trench to the specified levels and sectional details Preparing the formation to the required levels and dimensions Form work for the sides of the mass concrete strip beams Pouring the mass concrete to the strip beam forms Setting out the alignment for the trench block walls Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 241 of Block work 150mm thick in walls to the specified levels upto the pavement downstand beam soffit level Preparation and concreting the pavement portion monolithic with the downstand beam extended upto the top of the block wall Backfilling the trench with the excavated earth to the specifications Placing the precast coloured concrete covers in 1m or 3m standard lengths on the relevant compacted area Sealing the joint between the pavement and the trench cover Details about the above operations in general The surveyor shall set out the alignment of the trench concerned according to the relevant details given on the paving and underground services location plans to the reference Co-ordinates Civil Contractor QC shall conduct the inspection The safety arrangement shall be discussed with the safety department and implemented accordingly to control the trench excavation, to provide barricades, night-lights, to divert the traffic if so required, and to adopt any other necessary measure. The excavation shall be carried out by an excavator to the lines and the levels. The surveyor shall monitor all stages of excavation to achieve the required profile The excavated material shall be transported immediately by a dump truck to the earth stockpiles temporarily After the excavation is over, the formation levels shall be well dressed and compacted to the specification requirement The forms shall be fabricated for the mass concrete section The fabricated forms of width 350mm and depth 100 mm shall be erected / fixed on the prepared compacted formation duly aligned and levelled Civil Contractor QC shall conduct the inspection throughout the stages of construction The mass concrete shall be poured to the marked levels and tamped by wooden float The forms shall be struck after the specified period The curing of the mass concrete shall be carried out according to approved procedures and for the specified period The alignment of the block walls 150 mm thick shall be set out and the block work carried out in courses in a straight line and plumb The whole number of courses shall be laid. The fractional block course if so remained to make up the required wall height, shall be constructed as a part of the pavement down beam concrete by extending the bottom to the top of the block walls The pavement / down beam monolithic pouring shall be carried out to the specified details according to the procedures Civil Contractor QC shall conduct the inspection throughout the stages of construction The backfilling shall commence and the trench filled according to the specifications The precast covers of 1m or 3 m standard length shall be placed on the filled trench internal surface to the specified levels The concrete shall be coloured to the specification requirement Civil Contractor QC shall conduct the inspection throughout the stages of construction Where the dummy trench runs over the duct bank (Ref drawing Detail 4, Sec A) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. the profile of the dummy trench shall dictate the profile of the buried trench Sloping profile to a grade 1 in 2 shall be formed as shown on the drawing Where the cable trench crossing with the closed drain pipe trench (Ref drg Detail 6 sec C) All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities The profile of the cable duct trench shall dictate the profile of the direct buried trench The transition of the formations between the trenches and the crossing shall be in grade 1 in 2 as shown on the drawing The length of the duct bank shall be equal to the value given by the equation Width of the closed drain trench in mm + 2x100 The crossing flat width shall be the duct bank length + 2x300 A gap of 100mm shall be kept between the duct bank top and the closed drain bottom surfaces The duct bank shall be constructed according to the details Cable tiles under the closed drain trench shall be provided in the direct buried trench only A joint shall be provided between the pavement and the closed drain trench wall Where direct buried trench crossing under dummy trench (Ref Drg Detail) Sec G & H) All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities A level difference of 350mm shall be kept between the elevations of the crossing formation and the dummy trench The level transition shall be established by grading 1 in 2 The cables passing under the dummy trench shall be protected by cable tiles (By others) The trench corner wall shall be constructed to the details showing the corner length on the trench internal face 8485mm Where trench with dummy Trench crossing under direct buried cable trench (Ref Drg Detail 3 Sec E) All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.sec B) All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities While constructing the buried trench. 2006 Page 242 of All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities Excavation shall be carried out to the top of the duct concrete only The walls shall be started from the duct top level Additionally. the specified pipe shall be laid prior to the block work is commenced or openings shall be formed in the walls (Pipe laying operation by others) Flat width of the crossing shall be in size equal to the value given by the equation “Duct Bank length + 300x2 “ Where the dummy trench and the direct buried trench run parallel (Ref Drg Detail 4.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . where the underground pipe runs X-ing the Trench. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. precast concrete units 100 mm thick may be utilised to substitute 150 mm thick walls directly resting on the prepared formation Equipment Excavator Dumper truck Compactor Attachment None #88 Pull pits Top Index Scope Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . 2006 Page 243 of The profile of the cable duct trench shall dictate the profile of the direct buried trench The transition of the formations between the trenches and the crossing shall be in grade 1 in 2 as shown on the drawing The length of the duct bank shall be equal to the value given by the equation Width of the direct buried cable trench in mm + 2x100 The crossing flat width shall be the duct bank length + 2x300 A gap of 100mm shall be kept between the duct bank top and the closed drain bottom surfaces The duct bank shall be constructed according to the details Cable tiles under the closed drain trench shall be provided in the direct buried trench only Where direct buried trench crossing under direct buried cable trench (Ref Drg Detail 7 Section D) All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities A level difference 700 mm shall be kept between direct buried trench and the crossing formation level The crossing formation width shall be equal to the value from the equation in mm (direct buried cable trench width + 400x2) The transition of the formations between the trenches and the crossing shall be to grade 1 in 2 as shown on the drawing Cable tiles shall be provided in unpaved areas and at trench crossing (By others) Electric Trench Layout at Pumps (Ref Drg Detail 13) All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities The pump base shall be constructed to the details The trench walls shall be continued to the shape as shown Option If so required and felt convenient for certain uniform section reaches. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. forms. monitor and direct the SE. All the safety precautions required to be adhered to while working on the excavations. 2006 Page 244 of Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of the Pull Pits References Specifications Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. shall be adopted on the operations concerned Adequate safety shall be observed during lifting and offloading the precast concrete covers to the relevant locations to avoid any mishap BY OBSERVING THE REGULATORY CRANE FITNESS REQUIREMENT AND VALIDITY OF PERMIT. rebars. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. . FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. mass concrete. concrete pouring etc all according to the acceptable standards. a banksman be engaged to direct the movement The crane shall not be operated during the inclement weather conditions with dust storms Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Only competent personnel shall be engaged to carry out the operation The crane and the trailer operators shall adhere to all the traffic rules while carrying out the operations and if so required. P1 and P2 Rebars placement to the details shown for Pit type 1 and 2 i.post laying of Cable ducts Setting out Excavation of the pit manually in case of the ducts are not encased in concrete Mass concrete base on formation according to the details Concrete protection according to specifications Block work in walls according to specifications Uncompacted sand fill only for pit Type 1 Compacted backfill only for pit Type 1 Placing the precast covers 300 mm deep sand backfill over the laid ducts not encased in concrete As dug compacted backfill above to the specifications Pre casting Area-The existing yard being used for the pre casting of manholes. The works were executed for major oil companies. placed with 75mm concrete spacers and positioned into the forms. Structural concrete of specified grade. Any snag observed during the inspection shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Mass Concrete of specified grade. P1 and P2 Lifting lugs fixing to the details on the sketches attached Pouring concrete & finishing by a steel float Curing according to specified procedures Lifting & loading by a crane to a trailer for transportation On site operations. Rebars all according to requirement Method The following operations are involved (Brief description) ( Details on the following page) Operations in prcasting Yard Form work to the details shown for Pit type 1 and 2 i.e. catch basins and lighting poles foundations etc. All these statements constitute management documents. The Lifting lugs as shown on the sketch shall be fixed in to the correct locations All the supports and the dimensions shall be checked and corrected if required Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations The concrete shall be poured to all the prepared units in 1 layers The appropriate vibrator shall be used for the compaction of the concrete After the concrete is poured in full & well compacted.e. the surface shall be levelled using a wooden float followed by light steel trowel Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 245 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. shall be employed for this purpose also Details about operations in the pre-casting yard The typical size of the Pit type 1 cover is 1990x500mm in plan and 200mm deep The typical size of the Pit type 2 cover is 2990x500mm in plan and 200mm deep According to the schedule 71 #s for type 1 and 81#s for type 2 are specified to be constructed On an average 5 units shall be produced by pre casting every day The forms to the exact size with the pre -formed chamfers shall be prepared and erected The steel rebars shall be cut. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . 16 mm dia GI Lifting Lugs. Blocks. bent to the required shape. shall be carried out accordingly The form work for the mass concrete 500mm wide and 150mm thick shall be prepared and erected to the settings Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Concrete shall be poured to the exact levels. block walls. saturated hessian shall be spread over the finished surface covered with polythene sheet according to the specifications The side forms shall be removed after the specified period The vertical concrete surfaces shall be draped with the saturated hessian immediately after striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet according to specifications The curing shall be continued for the specified period Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations The relevant locations shall be made ready to receive the precast units by completing the excavation. loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the location for offloading on to the prepared ‘location to receive’ the unit The unit shall be installed on the marked location according to the correct orientation to the lighting layout drawing Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Details about operations on site The area around the excavation coverage shall be barricaded to the site requirement based on the direction of the safety incharge The setting out shall be carried out by the surveyor to the required coordinates Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Excavation shall be carried out (manually if the ducts are not encased in concrete) to the specified formation levels i.e. 2006 Page 246 of Immediately after the concrete starts setting. 1300 mm from the finished grade monitored by surveyor Compaction and the tests if so required. mass concrete.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. finished properly and cured to the specified procedures Concrete protection shall be applied to the mass concrete top to the details & specifications Block work shall be carried out in 200 mm width as shown on the drawings to the required levels so that the cover placing level is 1050mm from the top of mass concrete including the thickness of the levelling mortar. compacted and levelled to receive the precast covers in case of pit type 1 The top of the block walls shall be given a cement mortar bearing in the form of a levelling course about 20mm thick allowed to be fully set in prior to the precast cover is placed on Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. the horizontal concrete protection. opening shall be left in the wall Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Uncompacted sand shall be filled as shown on the drawing in case of pit type 1 The remaining portion shall be backfilled and compacted to the specification requirement in case of pit type 1 The top surface shall be well prepared. In case of the ducts are not laid in. backfill and forming the correct alignment The unit shall be lifted by a mobile crane. All these statements constitute management documents. all safety precautions to be strictly adhered to as STARRT Card / ToolBox talks every day and ascertain that these are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. through the medium of language they understand. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the work force & Instruct. The covers shall be properly spaced and levelled to the details shown on the drawing #89 Pull pits Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of the Pull Pits References Specifications Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. monitor and direct the SE. 2006 Page 247 of The covers shall be offloaded by a crane from a trailer as transported from the precasting yard to the relevant locations. The works were executed for major oil companies. bent to the required shape.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Structural concrete of specified grade. shall be employed for this purpose also Form work The typical size of the Pit type 1 cover is 1900x500mm in plan and 200mm deep The typical size of the Pit type 2 cover is 2900x500mm in plan and 200mm deep According to the schedule 71x 6 #s each=426 #s Type 1 and 81x 6 #s each=486 #s Type 2 covers are quantified to be constructed On an average. a banksman be engaged to direct the movement The crane shall not be operated during the inclement weather conditions with dust storms Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Blocks. The safety precautions required while working on the excavations. 20 units shall be produced by pre casting every day The wooden forms to the exact dimensions with pre -formed chamfers shall be prepared and erected Rebars placement The steel rebars shall be cut. concrete pouring etc all according to the acceptable standards. Any snag observed during the inspection shall be notified to the supervisor present who must immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Mass Concrete of specified grade. Rebars all according to requirement Method The following operations are involved Operations in Precasting Yard Pre casting Area The existing yard being used for the pre casting of manholes. catch basins and lighting poles foundations etc. 16 mm dia GI Lifting Lugs. . mass concrete. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 248 of Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed to raise the measures to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. placed with 75mm concrete spacers and positioned into the forms according to the details shown for type P1 & P2 Lifting lugs fixing The Lifting lugs as shown on the attached sketch shall be fixed in to the correct locations All supports and dimensions shall be checked and corrected if required Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted before pouring concrete and signatures appended to ITPs Pouring concrete & finishing The concrete shall be poured into all the approved preparatory works in 1 layer by directly delivering from the concrete truck / transit mixer through the chute Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Only competent personnel shall be engaged to carry out the operation The crane and the trailer operators shall abide by all traffic rules while carrying out the operations and if so required. forms. All these statements constitute management documents. rebars. shall be strictly adhered to on the operations concerned Adequate safety shall be observed during lifting and offloading the precast concrete covers to the relevant locations to avoid any mishap BY OBSERVING THE REGULATORY CRANE FITNESS REQUIREMENT AND VALIDITY OF PERMIT. loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the area concerned to offload on to the prepared ‘location to receive’ On site operations. . shall be carried out accordingly Mass concrete base The form work for the mass concrete 500mm wide and 150mm deep shall be prepared and erected to the settings Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations and concrete pour ITPs signed off Concrete shall be poured to the exact levels.e. The works were executed for major oil companies. the surface shall be levelled using a wooden float followed by light steel trowel Curing Immediately after the concrete is finished. All these statements constitute management documents. 1300 mm (varying from area to area) from the finished grade monitored by surveyor Compaction and the tests if so required. loading & transportation The covers shall be lifted by a mobile crane. the polythene sheet shall be removed followed by immediate covering the surface with saturated( soaked with mix quality water ) hessian and recovered with polythene sheet to prevent evaporation from the hessian. finished properly and cured to the specified procedures Concrete protection Concrete protection shall be applied to the mass concrete to the details & specifications Block work in walls Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.post laying of Cable ducts The area around the excavation coverage shall be barricaded to the site requirement based on the direction of the Construction Superintendent Setting out The setting out shall be carried out by the surveyor to the required co-ordinates Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the operation and ITP for the survey check signed off Excavation Excavation shall be carried out (manually if the ducts are not encased in concrete) to the specified formation levels i. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Throughout the curing period the hessian shall be maintained in a permanent wet condition using mix quality water The side forms shall be removed after the specified period of 24 to 36 hours as agreed The vertical concrete surfaces shall be draped with the saturated hessian immediately after striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet held firmly in place along all edges & kept continuously wet for duration of curing The curing shall be continued for the specified period of 14 days Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Lifting.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 249 of 1 # ¾” needle vibrator shall be used to compact the concrete and 1 # reserved standby After the concrete is poured in full & well compacted. the surface shall be covered with polythene sheet with the edge lapped or tied down to exclude air circulation without permitting the membrane to be in touch with concrete surface according to the specifications After the concrete has stiffened but no longer than 2 hours. 2006 Page 250 of 200mm Block work shall be carried out as shown on the drawings to the required levels so that the cover top level is 100mm from the finished grade / ground level.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. compacted and levelled to receive precast covers Placing the precast covers The covers shall be offloaded by a crane from a trailer as transported from the precasting yard to the relevant locations. . The works were executed for major oil companies. The covers shall be properly spaced and levelled to the details shown on the drawing Sand fill 300mm deep sand backfill shall be carried out over the laid ducts not encased in concrete Backfill As dug compacted backfill shall be carried out above the sandfill to the specifications Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations with the relevant ITPs signed off Lugs Fill The sand shall be filled in the lifting lugs recess Concrete Protection The exposed concrete surface is a part of pavement and therefore no protection shall be applied Equipment Transit mixer. In case the ducts are not laid in. Attachment 3 # Sketch -showing the lifting lugs arrangement #89 Pull pits Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Trailor. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Vibrator. All these statements constitute management documents. opening shall be provided in the wall Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Uncompacted sand fill Uncompacted sand shall be filled as shown on the drawing & in accordance with the specifications Compacted backfill The remaining portion shall be backfilled and compacted to the specification requirement The top surface shall be well prepared. Crane. 16 mm dia GI Lifting Lugs (Exposed portion only). The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. mass concrete. Structural concrete of specified grade. shall be employed for this purpose also Form work The typical size of the Pit type 1 cover is 1900x500mm in plan and 200mm deep The typical size of the Pit type 2 cover is 2900x500mm in plan and 200mm deep According to the schedule 71x 6 #s each=426 #s Type 1 and 81x 6 #s each=486 #s Type 2 covers are quantified to be constructed On an average. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed to raise the measures to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. 2006 Page 251 of Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of the Pull Pits References Specifications Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Blocks. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . All these statements constitute management documents. catch basins and lighting poles foundations etc. concrete pouring etc all according to the acceptable standards. 20 units shall be produced by pre casting every day The wooden forms to the exact dimensions with pre -formed chamfers shall be prepared and erected Rebars placement Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The safety precautions required while working on the excavations. shall be strictly adhered to on the operations concerned Adequate safety shall be observed during lifting and offloading the precast concrete covers to the relevant locations to avoid any mishap BY OBSERVING THE REGULATORY CRANE FITNESS REQUIREMENT AND VALIDITY OF PERMIT. a banksman be engaged to direct the movement The crane shall not be operated during the inclement weather conditions with dust storms Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. rebars. Only competent personnel shall be engaged to carry out the operation The crane and the trailer operators shall abide by all traffic rules while carrying out the operations and if so required. Any snag observed during the inspection shall be notified to the supervisor present who must immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Mass Concrete of specified grade. forms. Rebars all according to requirement Method The following operations are involved Operations in Precasting Yard Pre casting Area The existing yard being used for the pre casting of manholes. the surface shall be levelled using a wooden float followed by light steel trowel Curing Immediately after the concrete is finished.post laying of Cable ducts The area around the excavation coverage shall be barricaded to the site requirement based on the direction of the Construction Superintendent Setting out The setting out shall be carried out by the surveyor to the required co-ordinates Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the operation and ITP for the survey check signed off Excavation Excavation shall be carried out (manually if the ducts are not encased in concrete) to the specified formation levels i. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 1300 mm (varying from area to area) from the finished grade monitored by surveyor Compaction and the tests if so required. loading & transportation The covers shall be lifted by a mobile crane. The works were executed for major oil companies.e. Throughout the curing period the hessian shall be maintained in a permanent wet condition using mix quality water The side forms shall be removed after the specified period of 24 to 36 hours as agreed The vertical concrete surfaces shall be draped with the saturated hessian immediately after striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet held firmly in place along all edges & kept continuously wet for duration of curing The curing shall be continued for the specified period of 14 days Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Lifting.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. . loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the area concerned to offload on to the prepared ‘location to receive’ On site operations. shall be carried out accordingly Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. placed with 75mm concrete spacers and positioned into the forms according to the details shown for type P1 & P2 Lifting lugs fixing The Lifting lugs as shown on the attached sketch shall be fixed in to the correct locations All supports and dimensions shall be checked and corrected if required Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted before pouring concrete and signatures appended to ITPs Pouring concrete & finishing The concrete shall be poured into all the approved preparatory works in 1 layer by directly delivering from the concrete truck / transit mixer through the chute 1 # ¾” needle vibrator shall be used to compact the concrete and 1 # reserved standby After the concrete is poured in full & well compacted. bent to the required shape. the polythene sheet shall be removed followed by immediate covering the surface with saturated( soaked with mix quality water ) hessian and recovered with polythene sheet to prevent evaporation from the hessian. the surface shall be covered with polythene sheet with the edge lapped or tied down to exclude air circulation without permitting the membrane to be in touch with concrete surface according to the specifications After the concrete has stiffened but no longer than 2 hours. 2006 Page 252 of The steel rebars shall be cut. opening shall be provided in the wall Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Uncompacted sand fill Uncompacted sand shall be filled as shown on the drawing & in accordance with the specifications Compacted backfill The remaining portion shall be backfilled and compacted to the specification requirement The top surface shall be well prepared. Trailor. . The covers shall be properly spaced and levelled to the details shown on the drawing Sand fill 300mm deep sand backfill shall be carried out over the laid ducts not encased in concrete Backfill As dug compacted backfill shall be carried out above the sandfill to the specifications Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations with the relevant ITPs signed off Lugs Fill The sand shall be filled in the lifting lugs recess Concrete Protection The exposed concrete surface is a part of pavement and therefore no protection shall be applied Equipment Transit mixer. In case the ducts are not laid in. Attachment 3 # Sketch -showing the lifting lugs arrangement #90 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Vibrator. finished properly and cured to the specified procedures Concrete protection Concrete protection shall be applied to the mass concrete to the details & specifications Block work in walls 200mm Block work shall be carried out as shown on the drawings to the required levels so that the cover top level is 100mm from the finished grade / ground level. spread over. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 253 of Mass concrete base The form work for the mass concrete 500mm wide and 150mm deep shall be prepared and erected to the settings Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations and concrete pour ITPs signed off Concrete shall be poured to the exact levels. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. compacted and levelled to receive precast covers Placing the precast covers The covers shall be offloaded by a crane from a trailer as transported from the precasting yard to the relevant locations ready with one layer 0.25mm thick polythene sheet with laps 300mm. The works were executed for major oil companies. Crane. The pipe lines 1 # each 14” Desalinated water and 8” Potable water at locations identified on attached drawing for this X-ing were completed to the following references Reference documents Specification. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 254 of Road crossing to make good Wearing course over completed 1# for 14” desalinated water & 1# for 8”potable water Avenue ‘c’ Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out to make good the wearing course over the completed road crossing to facilitate the smooth traffic plying. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . Avenue ‘C’ Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures. -Easement Systems Avenue “C” Piping Interconnection Drawings.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Drawing No. The compressor air pressure shall be monitored from time to time so that the hammer works smoothly.The workers if engaged on operating this equipment shall use protective glass and work in phases with pause intervals. The works were executed for major oil companies. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS Any mishap on the excavation operation shall immediately be notified to the CS and the CM for the immediate action if so required for any possible remedy or record or the authority review whatsoever. Excavation Work Permit. shall be arranged as required for a complete safety. The compressor shall be place within the barricade limits Machine Excavation The operators shall be explicitly explained and instructed about the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. The truck driver shall also be instructed similarly. Banksman shall be engaged while the equipment operate. The barriers shall be placed to indicate the excavation work in progress Flagman-On both the direction. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. markers and the night-lights. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. a flagman shall be engaged to operate full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by waving the flag for all the vehicles passing by Jack Hammer. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be resorted to effect a full safety standard. In the present case the minor debris removal / excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. . every precautionary measure to be adopted shall be explained expressely to all the personnel and translated to the language understood by them Only English literate Foreman shall be employed to work on the critical execution. No oil spillage shall be allowed. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. monitor and direct the SE.All the personnel shall be briefed about the safe keep up of the boards Barricades. flood lights etc.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. ToolBox TalksWhile conducting ToolBox Talks. in addition to the traffic sign boards.cones.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all the relevant persons involved on the crossing Traffic Management-Sign boards keep up. All these statements constitute management documents. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Safety Supervision Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 255 of CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly and be overall responsible for the excavation operation CS shall control.the case may be FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. safety barriers. temporary diverted roads sign. A traffic management scheme has been presented herein and shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing which includes. In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part L2 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the completed road portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. reduced speed sign. The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as lane L1 and L 2 on either side of the carriageway. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The aforesaid traffic management scheme shall be implemented as described below: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEME ROAD CROSSING – First Street / Avenue ‘C’ Drawing reference – This completed crossing is located on the Road Avenue ‘C’ between the following Co-ordinates as shown on the referred drawing. This is a 2-way road with a central verge and carrying 2 lanes on either way The proposed crossing is located about 60 m from 1 st street road towards North One serving electric pole is located away from the x-ing to North The minor irrigation / hoses are lying disconnected Some minor trees and plants are arboricultured on the central verge. men at work sign. Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. For the traffic South to North past crossing. one sign shall be placed to direct for the diversion. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. warning signs. Reference to the marked note ‘B’ on the Easement Systems Drawing To produce the Traffic Diversion Management Scheme To excavate mechaniclly the loose wearing portion to a depth so that a total concrete thickness of 70 mm is poured To have authority inspection To pour the concrete To reinstate the central verge to the existing state Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. to slow down and the men at work ahead A Flagman shall be engaged full time on both the directions to guide the traffic about the ongoing excavation operations in addition to the conventional signboards The following activities are involved. The directory signboards shall also be placed on the 1 st street road East West on both ways to indicate the work at the crossing For the traffic North to South the first reduce speed for traffic diversion informatory board depicting shall be located at 300 m from the point of the proposed crossing. 2006 Page 256 of A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted. the second depicting diversion signs be located at 200 m and the third depicting men at work sign be located at 100 m on either way in the opposite directions. night lighting and road cleaning activities. . informatory signs. The traffic management scheme shall be reviewed and approved by EPC Contractor prior to commencing the work. In the first instance the work shall be carried out on part L1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the part L2 as shown on the sketch. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing has been cleaned of any debris or obstructions.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #91 Road crossing to make good Wearing course over completed 132 kv electric cable Avenue ‘c’ Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out to make good the wearing course over the completed road crossing to facilitate smooth traffic plying. A concrete slab shall be cast up to the bottom of the finished asphalt level.Dump trucks. Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services Major Equipment Grader.Compactors. 2006 Page 257 of Details The Traffic Management Scheme shall be executed as explained in the foregoing and to the traffic manual directions. Compressor. Laying of 132 KV electric cable at location identified on the reference drawing for this X-ing has been completed Reference documents Specification. Excavation Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The first section of the proposed road crossing as per the attached sketch shall be marked by the surveyor on the actual location. The debris / asphalt shall be cut using jackhammers or grader to the require levels so that a final concrete thickness 70mm be poured The excavated material shall be removed from the site to stockpile area.Excavator. Jack Hammer. . The excavated trench shall be inspected by the authorities as required. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. markers and the night-lights. In this case the minor debris removal / excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. cones. a flagman shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by means of flag signal to all vehicles passing by Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . every precautionary measure to be adopted shall be explicitly instructed to all personnel to abide by through the medium of language they understand A Foreman who also understands English shall be employed to work on the critical execution. for any possible remedy or record or the relevant authority review whatsoever the case may be FM shall execute the operations deploying the work force .and instruct in full in the medium of language the work persons understand about all the required measures and the STARRT / ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications & ITP requirement Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. All these statements constitute management documents. in addition to the traffic sign boards. 2006 Page 258 of Drawing No. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. -Easement Systems Avenue “C” Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly and be overall responsible for the excavation operation CS shall control. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. Excavation Work Permit A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all the relevant persons involved on the crossing Barricades. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS Any mishap on the crossing operation shall immediately be notified to the CS and the CM for the immediate action if so required. therefore all the regulated precautionary measures shall be strictly adhered to ToolBox Talks While conducting ToolBox Talks. The barriers shall be placed to indicate the excavation work in progress Flagman-On both the direction.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. monitor and direct the SE. shall be arranged as required for a complete safety. flood lights etc. The workers if engaged on operating this equipment shall use protective glass and work in phases with pause intervals. warning signs. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. reduced speed sign. The traffic management scheme shall be reviewed and approved by EPC Contractor prior to commencing the work. In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part L2 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the completed portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch. safety barriers. night lighting and road cleaning activities. The directory signboards shall also be placed on the 1 st street road East West on both ways to indicate the work at the crossing For the traffic North to South. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. ‘slow down’ and ‘the men at work ahead’ Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The compressor air pressure shall be monitored from time to time so that the hammer works smoothly. For the traffic South to North past crossing. Banksman shall be engaged while the equipment operate. temporary diverted roads sign. The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as lane L1 and L 2 on either side of the carriageway. A traffic management scheme has been presented herein and shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing which includes. men at work sign. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed No oil spillage shall be allowed Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall inspect the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. The compressor shall be place within the barricade limits Machine Excavation The operators shall be explicitly instructed about the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the second depicting ‘diversion’ signs be located at 200 m and the third depicting ‘men at work ‘sign be located at 100 m on either way in the opposite directions. This is a 2-lane dual carriageway road with a central verge This crossing is located about 60 m from 1st street road towards North One serving electric pole is located away from the crossing to North The minor irrigation / hoses are lying disconnected Some minor trees and plants are growing on the central verge. In the first instance the work shall be carried out on part L1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the part L2 as shown on the sketch. . Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. The truck driver shall also be instructed similarly. the first informatory board for traffic depicting ‘reduce speed’ shall be located at 300 m from the point of the proposed crossing. 2006 Page 259 of Jack Hammer. one signboard shall be located to depict ‘diversion’. The aforesaid traffic management scheme shall be implemented as described below: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEME ROAD CROSSING – First Street / Avenue ‘C’ Drawing reference – This completed crossing is located on the Road Avenue ‘C’ between the following Co-ordinates as shown on the referred drawing. Trailor. Compressor.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. after the completion of the proposed pipe laying operations (For which the methodology is included separately. Vibrator. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.Compactors. 2006 Page 260 of A Flagman shall be engaged full time on both the directions to guide the traffic about the ongoing excavation operations in addition to the conventional signboards The following activities are involved. Attachment 4 #92 # Sketch -showing the lifting lugs arrangement Road crossing To make good (temporarily) Wearing course over completed Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. Jack Hammer. ref. The debris / asphalt shall be cut using jackhammers or grader to the required level so that a final concrete thickness 70mm can be poured The excavated material shall be removed from the site to stockpile area. Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations The sand shall be filled in the lifting lugs recess The exposed concrete surface is a part of pavement and therefore no protection shall be applied Equipment Transit mixer. Crane. The Traffic Diversion Management Scheme shall be executed as explained in the foregoing and to the traffic manual requirement reflected on the attached sketch The first section of the crossing shall be marked by the surveyor on the actual location. Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to the ITP requirement Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services In future. Concrete wearing slab 70mm thick shall be cast up to the finished asphalt level These activities shall be repeated for the second section after the first is completed The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing has been cleared of all debris or obstructions. method statement # 86).Dump trucks. .Excavator. an approved asphalt wearing course shall be laid to the requirement to replace 70mm concrete paving Major Equipment Grader. All these statements constitute management documents. cones. Laying of 132 KV electric cable at location identified on the reference drawing for this X-ing has been completed Reference documents Specification.The workers if engaged on operating this equipment shall use protective glass and work in phases with pause intervals. Excavation Work Permit A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all the relevant persons involved on the crossing Barricades. therefore all the regulated precautionary measures shall be strictly adhered to ToolBox Talks While conducting ToolBox Talks. The compressor air pressure shall be monitored from time to time so that the hammer works smoothly. every precautionary measure to be adopted shall be explicitly instructed to all personnel to abide by through the medium of language they understand A Foreman who also understands English shall be employed to work on the critical execution. In this case the minor debris removal / excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. The barriers shall be placed to indicate the excavation work in progress Flagman-On both the direction. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. in addition to the traffic sign boards. . Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. markers and the night-lights. shall be arranged as required for a complete safety. a flagman shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by means of flag signal to all vehicles passing by Jack Hammer. flood lights etc.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The compressor shall be place within the barricade limits Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. Excavation Drawing No. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark. 2006 Page 261 of 132 kv electric cable Avenue ‘c’ Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out to make good the wearing course over the completed road crossing to facilitate smooth traffic plying. warning signs. Signboards shall be positioned as shown on the sketch A Flagman shall be engaged full time on both the directions to guide the traffic about the ongoing excavation operations in addition to the conventional signboards The temporary stone surface on lane L1 shall be excavated to a depth of 70mm and replaced by mass concrete to level with the adjacent asphalt. . In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part L2 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the completed portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch. Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. The aforesaid traffic management scheme shall be implemented as described below: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEME ROAD CROSSING – First Street / Avenue C’ This crossing is located about 83 m from center line of 1st street road towards North The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as lane L1 and L 2 on either side of the carriageway. The works were executed for major oil companies.Compactors. Traffic shall be allowed on to the concrete after 2 days and the operation shall be repeated for lanes L2 All excavated material shall be removed to an approved tipping area. 2006 Page 262 of Machine Excavation The operators shall be explicitly instructed about the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. Compressor. temporary diverted roads sign. reduced speed sign.Excavator. Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #93 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. safety barriers. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed No oil spillage shall be allowed Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall inspect the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.Dump trucks. A traffic management scheme has been presented herein and shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing which includes. All these statements constitute management documents. night lighting and road cleaning activities.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. men at work sign. Jack Hammer. The traffic management scheme shall be reviewed and approved by EPC Contractor prior to commencing the work and agreed with Plant Refinery Division. Banksman shall be engaged while the equipment operate. In the first instance the work shall be carried out on part L1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on the part L2 as shown on the sketch. The concrete surface shall be replaced by asphalt to the same specification as the existing construction at the earliest opportunity Major Equipment Grader. The truck driver shall also be instructed similarly. All these statements constitute management documents. The pipe trench shall be excavated to a depth of 500mm. Responsibilities The Civil Contractor PSM shall ensure this method statement is implementation for the connection and laying of the drinking water pipeline. . The works were executed for major oil companies. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor the daily activities. Reference documents Excavation permit. EPC Contractor Civil Contractor . which shall be reviewed and approved by Operating Authority. a sleeve pipe shall be incorporated to protect the water pipe from damage. Where the pipeline passes beneath a roadway. All stones and hard materials from the bottom of the trench shall be removed. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the connection and laying of the pipeline. All trenching activities shall be excavated by hand. The laying and connection of the pipes shall be conducted by experienced people. The pipe shall be located within the trench. Selected backfill shall be placed around the pipe. to the Civil Contractor camp. PSM Project Site Manager. The trench shall be backfilled with the excavated material. from the Operating Authority supply pit No 21. Definitions Operating Authority Abu Dhabi National Oil Company. The excavated material shall be stockpiled for re-use as fill material. advising and implementing all safety procedures. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Method The proposed drinking water connection location and route of the pipeline. The approved pipeline route drawing shall define the materials and fitting locations. Any surplus material shall be removed from site. Testing of the pipes shall be conducted to ensure that leakage does not occur. shall be defined upon a drawing. 2006 Page 263 of Drinking water connection Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. Equipment Hand tools. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Drawing Site Sketch #94 Protection to transformer foundation sides in sub stations with aluminium bead termination for below ground and masterseal 300h for above ground in gravel fill area Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to protect the vertical surfaces of the transformer bases concrete using Aluminium Beads to clampin the waterproofing membrane termination around the foundation sides and apply concrete protection coating on the surfaces above ground References Main Substation Drawing Transformer Foundations Sec A & D and the relevant drawings for all other sub stations SpecificationsDefinitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. Attachment Work permit. Pipe jointing and cutting tools.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . 2006 Page 264 of Marker posts to indicate a buried service shall be installed upon completion of backfilling and clearing of the site. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the toolbox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work. The containers shall be resealed after use. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents.Polyurethane-Gun Grade Cold seal 200PF for horizontal usage on Aluminium strip (Manufacturer BCR) (Emirates Specialities) or equivalent MAR Masterseal 300H MBT MAR 059 Masterseal 181S Primer system Masterseal 300H filler Storage The manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for this purpose. Immediate medical attention shall be called for in case of any adverse effect to the personnel handling the product Damaged tins shall be disposed off according to the state regulations. masks. gloves. The works were executed for major oil companies. Care shall be taken during use and storage to avoid contact with eyes. Industrial cleaner shall be used followed by washing with soap and water. monitor and direct the SE.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 265 of Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. . use of barrier cream to protect from the adverse effect of sealant and other chemicals application shall also be made. skin and foodstuffs. A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. The personnel shall use the PPE. mouth. Material safety data shall also be referred to for disposal and any further information. eyeglasses etc. the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements relevant to the application of below ground and above ground concrete surface protection operations Any process which may involve a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. Materials Bitustick XL Polybit MAR 003 Aluminium Bead lengths to the Sectional dimensions 30 mm x 2 mm Fixing screws 3 mm dia Joint filler Alpex Joint Fill BCR MAR 008 Sealant. To avoid skin contact. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 8 litre per sqm surface coverage to achieve a continuous coating The continuous coating shall be achieved in 1 or 2 coats of application The coating shall be protected from the humidity for 24 hours / or until it dries out using polythene sheets keeping off the area. compressed fibre shall be installed as protection over the Bitustick XL membrane as specified Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval The vertical surface above the bead as well as a 50mm wide strip around the top periphery of the foundation shall be prepared for the above ground concrete protection and Master seal 300 H be applied to the manufacturer’s instructions This application involves the following sequences Cleaning and making up the surface Priming the surface Coating the surface Preparation All surfaces shall be free from oil. Method Waterproofing membrane shall be applied according to the specifications to the defined levels keeping the top 50 mm above the gravel fill Marking shall be made to the exact line and level as per drawing Required lengths to the exact site dimensions shall be cut to suit a close fit between the bead ends Every bead shall be fixed with screws @ 400mm centres drilled and tightened to the concrete penetrating the membrane The screws shall be drilled and fixed using an electrical operated equipment After the screws are drilled in with the beads in proper alignment / location. All these statements constitute management documents. Application The areas to be coated shall be protected from direct sunlight by shading in the hot weather conditions.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The primed surface shall be allowed to dry tack free for a minimum duration of 2 hours before applying Masterseal 300H coating. friable matters and curing compound. grease. No post application curing is required Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . The surfaces shall be brush primed with Masterkure 181S and subsequently Masterseal 300H mixed with Masterseal 300 H filler applied as a scrape coat over blow holes and depressions. The surfaces shall be cleaned from dust / sand using compressed air. 2006 Page 266 of The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from temperature extremes. Arrises shall be rounded off and the protrusions ground so that the resulting surfaces appear smooth. At the time of coating application the ambient temperature shall be more than 5 degree Celsius with humidity less than 90 % and no dusty weather Masterseal 300 H shall be applied directly from the containers using a brush or roller @ 0. All these statements constitute management documents. A smaller timber spatula soaked in soapy water shall be used to compact the sealant into the joint for a smooth polish finish formation. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The nozzle shall be cleaned occasionally to avoid contamination. The mixing and application equipment shall be cleaned immediately after use Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval Equipment Electrical operated drill Sealant applying gun Brush and roller Attachment None #95 Timber doors fixing Administration building Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to carry out the fixing of the workshop / factory builtin wooden doors to the exact locations on the prepared openings left in the walls Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 267 of Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval Application of sealant after 24 hours The material shall be applied using a sealant gun fitted with conical nozzles adjustable to suit the width The sealant shall be gunned into the junction using an even trigger pressure.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . The personnel shall use the PPE. The works were executed for major oil companies. Materials Material from Aldiar UAE 1 hour fire rated. eyeglasses (during dusty winds) etc Adequate arrangement shall be made to provide access to the top of the wall. . 2006 Page 268 of References Specifications MAR Teak Wood Definitions PSM CSM CS SE FM QC Project Site Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Site Engineer Foreman Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. ½ hour fire rated Method The following operations are involved Equipment Attachment None #96 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. masks (for gas leak in area). gloves. All these statements constitute management documents. the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned to the Project Site Safety requirements. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. monitor and direct the SE. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance Safety Prior to the commencement of work. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 269 of Grouting to steel tanks bearings on ring beams Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to grout the space between the top of the ring beams and the steel tank base plate(acting as bearing) according to the following drawings and the specifications. Reference Documents. All these statements constitute management documents. Drgs Demineralised Water Tank Drgs Spent Caustic Storage Tank Drgs Fire Water Storage Tank Drgs Fire Water Storage Tank Drgs Caustic Storage Tank Drgs Neutralisation Tank Water Tank Specification Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . monitor and direct the SE. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the toolbox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Method Refer to the sketch attached The space to be grouted shall be cleaned to remove all dirt and loose particles using compressed air The surrounding area shall be shaded to avoid the effects of temperature extremes The grouting operation shall be carried out in pieces on the tank circumference The surface shall be soaked in water for 24 hours prior to conmmence the operations Sandfilling shall be carried out into the spaces leaving a clear portion 200 mm wide for the grouting purpose. . All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. A backing rod 25 mm dia shall be provided as shown on the sketch The space to be filled in various locations shall be prepared by form strips of the size equal to the thickness of the grout circumferentially and radially. Care shall be taken during use and storage to avoid contact with eyes. The containers shall be resealed after use. Using water @ 3.5 to 4.The remaining 10 % water quantity shall be poued during mixing. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements relevant to the application of Masterflow 928T MBT grouthing material according to the manufacturer’ s instruction and the filling the sand into minutely narrow spaces The personnel shall use the PPE. skin and foodstuffs. gloves. A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. shall be closed An electric drill fitted with a paddle mixer shall be used for the grout mixing purpose. Immediate medical attention shall be called for in case of any adverse effect to the personnel handling the product Material safety data shall be referred to for disposal and any further information. the mixing shall be carried out as follows 90 % of the measured quantity of water required to achieve the desired consistency according to the batch volume shall be added to the mixer followed by the grout material Masterflow 928 T added gradually. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Industrial cleaner shall be used followed by washing with soap and water. The pouring end shall be kept open and after the pouring is completed in the prepared area. To avoid skin contact. use of barrier cream to protect from the adverse effect of grouting material shall also be made. The mixer shall be cleaned with no standing water. eyeglasses etc. mouth. masks. which has to be kept continued for at least 3 to 5 minutes until a uniform lump free consistency is achieved. Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to the ITP requirement The grout shall be poured continuously using the pour cone with a constant hydrostatic head of at least 15 cm Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to the ITP requirement Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 270 of Safety Prior to the commencement of work.5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928T according to the requirement. Major Equipment Peddle Mixer Grout Flow Cone Attachment Sketch #97 Grouting to steel tanks bearings on ring beams Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to grout the space between the top of the ring beams and the steel tank base plate(acting as bearing) according to the following drawings and the specifications. Reference Documents. Drgs Demineralised Water Tank Drgs Spent Caustic Storage Tank Drgs Fire Water Storage Tank Drgs E Fire Water Storage Tank Drgs Caustic Storage Tank Drgs Neutralisation Tank Water Tank Specification Safety Prior to the commencement of work. All these statements constitute management documents. . the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements relevant to the application of Masterflow 928T MBT grouting material according to the manufacturer’ s instruction and the filling the sand into minutely narrow spaces Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 271 of After pouring the grout Masterflow 928 in place.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. all the exposed surfaces shall be covered with clean and damp Hessian to keep the applied material moist until it is firm enough to accept a curing membrane The specified temperature range(4 to 32 degree C) shall be maintained for the 3 post pour continuous days The grout thickness varies between 25 to 35 mm. Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to the ITP requirement The grout shall be poured continuously using the pour cone with a constant hydrostatic head of at least 15 cm Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to the ITP requirement After pouring the grout Masterflow 928 in place. All these statements constitute management documents. the mixing shall be carried out as follows 90 % of the measured quantity of water required to achieve the desired consistency according to the batch volume shall be added to the mixer followed by the grout material Masterflow 928 T added gradually. Immediate medical attention shall be called for in case of any adverse effect to the personnel handling the product Material safety data shall be referred to for disposal and any further information. all the exposed surfaces shall be covered with clean and damp Hessian to keep the applied material moist until it is firm enough to accept a curing membrane The grout thickness varies between 25 to 35 mm. use of barrier cream to protect from the adverse effect of grouting material shall also be made. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. shall be closed An electric drill fitted with a paddle mixer shall be used for the grout mixing purpose. The pouring end shall be kept open and after the pouring is completed in the prepared area. Using water @ 3. To avoid skin contact.5 to 4. Care shall be taken during use and storage to avoid contact with eyes.5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928T according to the requirement. 2006 Page 272 of The personnel shall use the PPE.The remaining 10 % water quantity shall be poued during mixing. mouth. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. which has to be kept continued for at least 3 to 5 minutes until a uniform lump free consistency is achieved. Industrial cleaner shall be used followed by washing with soap and water where grout comes in contact with skin. gloves. masks. Method Refer to the sketch attached The space to be grouted shall be cleaned to remove all dirt and loose particles using compressed air The surrounding area shall be shaded to avoid the effects of temperature extremes The grouting operation shall be carried out in pieces on the tank circumference The surface shall be soaked in water for 24 hours prior to conmmence the operations Sandfilling shall be carried out into the spaces leaving a clear portion 200 mm wide for the grouting purpose. A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly. A backing rod 25 mm dia shall be provided as shown on the sketch The space to be filled in various locations shall be prepared by form strips of the size equal to the thickness of the grout circumferentially and radially. The mixer shall be clean with no standing water. skin and foodstuffs. eyeprotection etc. Major Equipment Paddle Mixer Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. FM shall explain in full in the language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the toolbox talks every day and check that the same are followed up regularly QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. FM and workforce for the operations SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. All these statements constitute management documents. Drgs Underground WaterTank Structural Details Specification Definitions PSM Project Site Manager CSM Construction Manager CS Construction Superintendent SE Site Engineer FM Foreman QC Quality Control Responsibilities PSM shall control the overall operations CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly CS shall control. monitor and direct the SE. 2006 Page 273 of Grout Flow Cone Attachment Sketch #98 Excavation water tank Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment for ccb underground Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to excavate the area for the underground water tank foundation where one cable trench is passing 1400 mm apart from one of the longitudnal (East) walls Reference Documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the access to the formation shall be provided from the two shorter sides by benching The location of the longitudnal walls shall be marked adding 50 mm margin for the backblinding Longitudnally the excavation line shall be kept to vertical profile that is feasible for the soil is sufficiently stiff Necessary forms shall be erected in stages for the vertical / back blinding and the concrete poured to form a soil protective surface After the blinding is over. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . further activities of the tank construction shall be followed according to the relevant drawings and the specifications Major Equipment Excavator Truck Attachment Sketch #99 Excavation water tank Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment for ccb underground Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 274 of Safety Prior to the commencement of work. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements relevant to the deep excavation. Required safety arrangements shall be made by installing barricades and night lights A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed. who immediately implement the instructions accordingly to get the measures to an acceptable standard Method Refer to the sketch attached The setting out of the tank area shall be carried out to the relevant co-ordinates Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to the ITP requirement Safety barricades shall be provided according to the requirment Since the work is also in progress on the chiller area. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Required safety arrangements shall be made by installing barricades and night lights A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is observed. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 275 of Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to excavate the area for the underground water tank foundation where one cable trench is passing 1400 mm apart from one of the longitudnal (East) walls Reference Documents. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. who immediately implement the instructions accordingly to get the measures to an acceptable standard Method Refer to the sketch attached The setting out of the tank area shall be carried out to the relevant co-ordinates Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to check the coordinates Safety barricades shall be provided according to the requirment The location of the longitudnal walls shall be marked & the excavation lines demarcated according to the sketch attached Excavation shall commence from the free side and continued to the cable trench line following the section shown on the sketch The existing soil is stiff enough to be excavated to a vertical profile but tempararily. Drgs Underground WaterTank Structural Details Specification Safety Prior to the commencement of work. The works were executed for major oil companies. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements relevant to the deep excavation. further construction operations shall be carried out to the drawings and specifications Cubes shall be used to act as a support to the forms After the cubes placement.on the cable trench side pre cast concrete cubes 1mx1mx1m shall be used to retain the earth pressure as shown on the sketch After the cubes are placed in. further activities of the tank construction shall be followed according to the relevant drawings and the specifications Major Equipment Excavator Truck Attachment Sketch #99 Soakaway chambers Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. lighting poles etc. Manhole covers Method Pre casting Area. concrete pouring. rebars. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. forms. Only competent personnel shall be engaged to carry out the operation Crane and trailer operators shall abide by all traffic rules while carrying out operations and if so required. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Concrete. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk All safety precautions necessary during working on excavations. catch basins. a banksman shall be engaged to direct the movement The crane shall not be operated during the inclement weather conditions with dust storms Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. 2006 Page 276 of Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of soakaway chambers Reference documents Drawing No Specification Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. The works were executed for major oil companies. shall be applied to acceptable standards Adequate safety measures shall be adhered to during lifting and offloading precast perforated concrete manhole rings & covers to relevant locations avoiding any mishap BY OBSERVING THE REGULATORY CRANE FITNESS REQUIREMENT AND VALIDITY OF PERMIT. . Steps.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. mass concrete.the existing yard being used to pre cast manholes. shall be employed for this purpose also The following operations are involved to carry out the production of the soakaway chambers Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Rebars / Lifting Lugs. etc. the dimensions and the plumb shall be checked An Civil Contractor preliminary inspection shall be conducted External forms shall be erected to specified dia and height & correctly supported. placed and the cage prepared holding concrete spacers. the surface shall be levelled using a wooden float Top circular strip shall be finished with a wooden float and covered with polythene sheet An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted at regular intervals throughout the operations Immediately after the concrete is finished. The blockout form for the inlet pipe shall be prepared and fixed to the circular form wherever required Polystyrene sleeves shall be inserted for the steps to be grouted after the forms are struck After all the blackouts are fixed in. mass concrete ring footing. . the polythene sheet shall be removed followed by immediate covering the surface with saturated (soaked with mix quality water) hessian and recovered with polythene sheet to prevent evaporation from the hessian. Throughout the curing period. and positioned into the forms. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 277 of The typical size of the precast rings are dia 1800mm and 1200 mm & other details as shown on the sketch The internal forms shall be erected to the exact internal dia and the specified height Drain holes blockout forms dia 75 mm shall be fixed to the internal shutter to suit circular profile at ends 8 #s in each row for 1200 mm dia and 12 #s in each row in 1400 mm dia staggered as shown on the sketch The 8T(not specified) steel rebars shall be cut. bent to the circular shape. corrected if required and the plumb monitored An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & ITP for concrete pour signed off Concrete grade 30 shall be poured to the prepared units in 3 layers in vertical sequence The needle vibrator shall be used for the compaction of the concrete After the concrete is poured in full & well compacted. All the supports and dimensions shall be checked. and forming the correct alignment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. the surface shall be covered with polythene sheet with the edge lapped or tied down to exclude air circulation without permitting the membrane to be in touch with concrete surface according to the specifications After the concrete has stiffened but no longer than 2 hours. the hessian shall be maintained in a permanent wet condition using mix quality water The external and the internal forms shall be removed after a specified period of 24 to 36 hours as agreed The vertical concrete surfaces shall be draped with the saturated hessian immediately after striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet held firmly in place along all edges & kept continuously wet for the duration of curing The curing shall be continued for the specified period An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Similarly RCC covers 250mm thick with circumferential web section 150x450mm shall be precast to specified dia The relevant locations shall be made ready to receive the precast rings by completing the excavation. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. Trailer Transit mixer Attachment Lifting arrangement sketch Drain Holes locations indicative only #100 Epoxy flooring Buildings Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the relevant area to offload on to the prepared ‘location to receive’ The rings shall be installed on the marked location according to the correct orientation to the relevant layout drawing keeping one ring above the other in such a way that the steps are formed in vertical alignment and the perforations are staggered but centred vertically AN Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted Space surrounded by the mass concrete ring footing shall be backfilled with 40mm nominal single size stones Another ring shall be placed over the previous and jointed with cement mortar The excavation and laying of inlet pipe shall be carried out to the details and the block out filled with concrete. . The surrounding pipe and the rings shall be backfilled with 40 mm nominal single size stones AN Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted Precast covers shall be transported from the precasting yard. 2006 Page 278 of AN Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the'location to receive' & ITP signed off The rings shall be lifted by a mobile crane. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Mobile Crane. offloaded and properly located over the approved rings to the correct alignment Manhole cover bedding / bearing shall be made of concrete by forming to the given profile to suit the cover placing level After the bearing concrete stiffens. the cover frame shall be fixed and levelled using cement mortar 1 : 3 Forms shall be erected for the mass concrete surround with preformed chamfers and concrete poured to a level 50 mm above the grade level EPC Contractor surveillance / inspection / approval shall be according to the approved ITPs Major Equipment Compressor. Sealer Mixing Base and reactor components shall be poured into a mixing vessel and half a litre of Solvent # 2 added. The works were executed for major oil companies. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. All these statements constitute management documents. MBT MAR # Mastertop 1200i Resin Method Surface Preparation The floor base concrete shall be lightly scabbled to remove the laitance Surface shall be cleaned of all dust and dirt by compressed air An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted Prior to the application of Mastertop1230i the concrete scabbled & cleaned surface shall be sealed by applying Mastertop1200i resin diluted with 5% solvent #2 as follows. . 1230i aggregate shall be slowly added to the mixed components keeping the mixer running until the mixture is of smooth and lumpsfree consistency Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Specification Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. 2006 Page 279 of Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of Epoxy Flooring 3 and 5mm thick in buildings Reference documents Drawing No. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these components shall be mixed using a slow speed drill with a paddle attachment for 1 minute Sealer shall be applied at a rate of 5-8 sqm per litre using a medium pile roller Sealed surface shall be allowed to become tack free before the application of Mastertop1230i An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted Mastertop1230i shall be applied as follows Mixing Reactor base and colour pack components of the Mastertop1230i shall be poured into a vessel of 25 litre capacity The components shall be mixed with a drill with paddle attachment until a uniform colour is achieved. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Mastertop 1230i. rolling shall be carried out by a ‘Spiked Roller’ to release entrapped air and remove the trowel marks Rolling shall be continued until all air is released and a uniform colour is obtained Rolling shall again be carried out after 20 to 30 minutes Operator shall wear the ‘spiked shoes’ when using the ‘spiked roller’ to walk on wet material. Pin screed Attachment MBT 1230 i Data sheet #101 Epoxy flooring Buildings Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of Epoxy Flooring 3 and 5mm thick in buildings Reference documents Drawing No. notched trowel or steel float. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Short nap hair rollers Grinder. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. & like Specification Clause 13 Safety Prior to commence any activity. The works were executed for major oil companies. Immediately after the spread of the material to the required thickness. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Spiked roller. All these statements constitute management documents. Rolling shall cease before Mastertop 1230i begins to gel An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & ITP signed off Mastertop1230i shall be removed from the tools and equipment whilst still wet using cleaning solvent # 2 Equipment Slow speed drill with suitable paddle Brushes. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 280 of Laying Mixed material shall be poured on to the primed & sealed surface & spread to 5mm thickness in stores & warehouses and 3 mm thickness in other areas using a pin screed. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Mastertop 1230i. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. MBT MAR # Mastertop 1200i Resin Applicators Skilled applicators shall carry out the work Manufacturer’s demonstrator shall train a group of personnel on site for one room and later the remaining work of epoxy coating shall be carried out by this group Method (Surface Preparation) Equipment shall be protected by covering with polythene sheet The floor base concrete shall either be grit blasted or acid etching applied to remove the laitance Surface shall be cleaned of all dust and dirt by compressed air An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to accept substrate Prior to the application of Mastertop1230I. 1230i aggregate shall be slowly added to the mixed components keeping the mixer running until the mixture is of smooth and lumpsfree consistency (Laying) Mixed material shall be poured on to the primed & sealed surface & spread to 5mm thickness in stores & warehouses and 3 mm thickness in other areas using a pin screed. notched trowel or steel float. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 281 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Immediately after the spread of the material to the required thickness. . the prepared concrete surface shall be sealed by applying Mastertop1200i resin diluted with 5% solvent #2 as follows. All these statements constitute management documents. Mastertop1230i shall be applied as follows (Mixing) Reactor base and colour pack components of the Mastertop1230i shall be poured into a vessel of 25 litre capacity The components shall be mixed with a drill with paddle attachment until a uniform colour is achieved. rolling shall be carried out by a ‘Spiked Roller’ to release entrapped air and remove the trowel marks Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. (Sealer Mixing) Base and reactor components shall be poured into a mixing vessel and half a litre of Solvent # 2 added. All these components shall be mixed using a slow speed drill with a paddle attachment for 1 minute Sealer shall be applied at a rate of 5-8 sqm per litre using a medium pile roller Sealed surface shall be allowed to become tack free before the application of Mastertop1230i An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve that the surface is properly sealed with no imperfections. Short nap hair rollers Grinder. 2006 Page 282 of Rolling shall be continued until all air is released and a uniform colour is obtained Rolling shall again be carried out after 20 to 30 minutes Operator shall wear the ‘spiked shoes’ when using the ‘spiked roller’ to walk on wet material. Spiked roller. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Spiked shoes Attachment MBT 1230 i Data sheet #102 Epoxy flooring Buildings Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of Epoxy Flooring 3 and 5mm thick in buildings Reference documents Drawing No. The works were executed for major oil companies. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Mastertop 1230i. . the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. & like Specification Clause 13 Safety Prior to commence any activity. Pin screed. Rolling shall cease before Mastertop 1230i begins to gel An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & ITP signed off Mastertop1230i shall be removed from the tools and equipment whilst still wet using cleaning solvent # 2 Equipment Slow speed drill with suitable paddle Brushes.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. MBT MAR # Mastertop 1200i Resin Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Rolling shall cease before Mastertop 1230i begins to gel An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & ITP signed off Mastertop1230i shall be removed from the tools and equipment whilst still wet using cleaning solvent # 2 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. rolling shall be carried out by a ‘Spiked Roller’ to release entrapped air and remove the trowel marks Rolling shall be continued until all air is released and a uniform colour is obtained Rolling shall again be carried out after 20 to 30 minutes Operator shall wear the ‘spiked shoes’ when using the ‘spiked roller’ to walk on wet material. The works were executed for major oil companies. the prepared concrete surface shall be sealed by applying Mastertop1200i resin diluted with 5% solvent #2 as follows. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 1230i aggregate shall be slowly added to the mixed components keeping the mixer running until the mixture is of smooth and lumpsfree consistency (Laying) Mixed material shall be poured on to the primed & sealed surface & spread to 5mm thickness in stores & warehouses and 3 mm thickness in other areas using a pin screed. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 283 of Applicators Skilled applicators shall carry out the work Manufacturer’s demonstrator shall train a group of personnel on site for one room and later the remaining work of epoxy coating shall be carried out by this group Method (Surface Preparation) Equipment shall be protected by covering with polythene sheet The floor base concrete shall either be grit blasted or acid etching applied to remove the laitance Surface shall be cleaned of all dust and dirt by brush & vacuum cleaner An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to accept substrate Prior to the application of Mastertop1230I. (Sealer Mixing) Base and reactor components shall be poured into a mixing vessel and half a litre of Solvent # 2 added. Immediately after the spread of the material to the required thickness.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. notched trowel or steel float. All these components shall be mixed using a slow speed drill with a paddle attachment for 1 minute Sealer shall be applied at a rate of 5-8 sqm per litre using a medium pile roller Sealed surface shall be allowed to become tack free before the application of Mastertop1230i An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve that the surface is properly sealed with no imperfections. Mastertop1230i shall be applied as follows (Mixing) Reactor base and colour pack components of the Mastertop1230i shall be poured into a vessel of 25 litre capacity The components shall be mixed with a drill with paddle attachment until a uniform colour is achieved. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. and like MAR Ref Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Fabric backed Vinyl wall covering Suwide Scala N 5858 Manufacturer-Swide. Pin screed. Supplier / Sub Contractor-Trade Line Method The surface shall be made dry. 2006 Page 284 of Equipment Slow speed drill with suitable paddle Brushes. All these statements constitute management documents. smooth & free from grease A vertical line shall be marked at 200 mm from the corner to apply first drop Higher material roll # shall be used first Plenty of adhesive shall be coated on the wall portion for the first piece of material using a lambswool roller or a block brush Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . firm. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Spiked shoes Attachment MBT 1230 i Data sheet #103 Vinyl wall covering Buildings Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to apply Fabric Backed Vinyl Wall Covering paper over dry walls in buildings Reference documents Drawing No. Short nap hair rollers Grinder. The works were executed for major oil companies. Spiked roller. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 285 of Pieces shall be cut & numbered using a graphite pencil Strips shall be fixed in reverse alternate Material piece shall be cut to a length equal to wall height plus 40mm (20mm extra at ceiling and 20mm extra at skirting) Edge of the first piece shall be located against the vertical line making sure that there is a small selvedge at top and bottom for subsequent trimming Smoothening shall be carried out using a spatula along the length of the material Second length shall be placed against the adhesive tape and smoothened out with a spatula and if necessary rolled over The uppermost length shall fall off by itself while the lower length shall be removed. All these statements constitute management documents. A thin coat of adhesive shall be applied to the wall before the joint is closed Rubber roller shall be moved over the material to make sure that no bubble emerges A small vertical cut shall be made in the overlap near the ceiling using a Stanley knife Joint shall be closed and sealed smooth with spatula Before hanging the second piece the marker pins shall be placed at about 4 cm from the edge of the first piece Overlap shall be cut with a suitable cutting knife Slevedge shall be removed from the ceiling and the plinth with Stanley knife Knife shall be kept in cut and spatula moved An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted and the ITP signed off Equipment Rubber roller. Reference documents Specs (Gypsum Wall boards Systems) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.QCF Rev B #104 Dry wall linings buildings Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to install dry wall linings in the buildings. . Spatula. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.Civil Contractor / ITP / Rev B Check List. Stanley knife.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Marker pins Attachment SUWIDE Instruction Sheet ITP. 2006 Page 286 of STQ Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Kimmco Specialist Sub Contractor. tapered edges Moisture Resistant board 15 mm thick. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material MAR 076 Galvanised Studs. Runner Width 94mm-Thickness 0. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Furring channels-Galvanised Steel.7mm. Trade line. Knauf Australia. Runners & Furrings (Metal Framing System) Gypsum wall lining & wall partitions Framing System. .Trade Line Method De-mountable panels shall be fixed to flooring / top of tiles while the others to the screed Floors & Ceilings shall be constructed as specified For the levelling purpose. Material Width 50mm-Thickness 0.5mm thick 1. MAR Acoustical Fibreglass for demountable partitions Accoustical glasswool insulation material 60mm thick for internal partition walls & 50 mm thick for external walls. depth 22mm Metal Framing for dry wall partitions.2 x 2.TMI (Technical Material Industrial Company) UAE External wall lining-Studs & Runners Galvanised Steel Stud depth 63mm-Thickness 1mm. MAR Gypsum Wall Board system Regular wall board 12. Studs & Runners. shall be installed after one board is fixed Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted The other board shall be fixed after the approval of the insulation Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. Runner depth 65mm-Thickness 0.Isover Fibre Glass.4 m panel.Galvanised Steel Stud width 92mm-Thickness 1mm. a chalk line shall be marked to be used as a datum Floor and ceiling tracks shall be fixed by shot firing nails as per details Vertical studs shall be placed every 600mm c / c wherever possible Bracing shall be fixed between studs and walls & at all board joints for rigidity & strength to the requirement Gypsum boards shall be fixed using dry walls screws at 300 mm c / c in the middle and 200 mm c / c at the edges of the board For the internal partitions where the insulation is to be provided.7mm Metal Internal wall lining.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Kimmco. tapered edges. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. The works were executed for major oil companies.7mm. shall be installed prior to Gypsum board is fixed The tapered surface at the board joints shall be pasted from lower to higher level vertically with fibre tape to act as a support for joint compound to be filled in. . Reference documents Main Sub Station Utility Sub Station Building Sub Station Sub Station MAR Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. The works were executed for major oil companies. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 287 of On the external walls where the insulation is to be provided. Joint compound shall be filled in to a suitable & acceptable profile Hole ends posed due to the fasteners shall also be filled in with the compound All external corners shall have stainless steel corner beading fitted Gypsum board shall be sanded to smoothen the surface to receive sequential finishing items Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above operations and the ITP signed off Equipment Hilty relevant drills Attachment Trade Line method statement #105 Rubber flooring (buildings) Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to install Rubber Flooring in the buildings. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. The works were executed for major oil companies. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material MAR. 2006 Page 288 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the sub floor shall be even. wax. All these statements constitute management documents. Norament 926 Manufactured by Nora / Freudenberg-Germany-Colour # 0884 Manufacturer recommended Adhesives from UZIN-Werk German (MAR in process) 1) UZIN KR 430 A+B Two Component Polyurethane Adhesive for fixing 6mm thick Coned Back Rubber Tiles 2) UZIN GN 276 Neoprene adhesive for fixing Cove Skirting and Angles Primer PE 412 PUR KR 410 PUR Levelling Compound (To be used to remove large unevenness if so required) Specialist Applicator The flooring application shall be carried out by M / S JOS HANSEN. Smoothing spatula. wax Serrated blade 21 Attachment Adhesive data sheet from UZIN-Werk Manufacturer’s Installation instructions #106 Rubber flooring (buildings) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. it shall be roughened to provide a satisfactory bond with adhesive Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to approve that the primed surface is fit to receive the floor covering “Rubber tiled” floor shall be installed fully in accordance with pages 2-6 of the attached installation instructions Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above operations to ensure compliance with specifications and ITP requirements Equipment Adhesive spreader. clean. to the correct levels with no major unevenness & free of cracks. KR410 shall be applied to self level the surface Smaller unevenness shall be made up by the adhesive itself Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to approve that the surface is suitable Priming PE 12 PUR shall be applied in 1 or 2 coats depending on surface porosity Within 24 hours of priming while the surface is still tacky. firm. . floor covering operation shall proceed. paint residues with minimum porosity and roughness If required on large uneven areas. Hooked blade. Surface shall be free from oil. In case the primed surface has cured. dry. the authorised agent Method For installation. Reference documents Main Sub Station Utility Sub Station Building Sub Station Sub Station MAR Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. shall be made up by the adhesive itself The concrete surfaces are more than 28 days old Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to approve that the surface is suitable Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Surface shall be free from oil. 2006 Page 289 of Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to install Rubber Flooring in the Sub Station buildings. All these statements constitute management documents. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. wax. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the sub floor shall be even. firm. . The works were executed for major oil companies. paint residues with minimum porosity and roughness Smaller unevenness if any. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the authorised agent Method For installation. Norament 926 Manufactured by Nora / Freudenberg-Germany-Colour # 0884 Manufacturer recommended Adhesives from UZIN-Werk German (MAR in process) 1) UZIN KR 430 A+B Two Component Polyurethane Adhesive for fixing 6mm thick Coned Back Rubber Tiles 2) UZIN GN 276 Neoprene adhesive for fixing Cove Skirting and Angles Specialist Applicator The flooring application shall be carried out by an applicator approved and certified by M / S JOS HANSEN. clean. to the correct levels with no major unevenness & free of cracks. dry. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material MAR. . The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 290 of “Rubber tiled” floor shall be installed fully in accordance with pages 2-6 of the attached installation instructions Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above operations to ensure compliance with specifications and ITP requirements Equipment Adhesive spreader. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Smoothing spatula. wax Serrated blade 21 50 Kg Metal Roller Attachment Adhesive data sheet from UZIN-Werk Manufacturer’s Installation instructions #107 Rubber flooring (buildings) Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to install Rubber Flooring in the buildings. Reference documents Main Sub Station Utility Sub Station Building Sub Station Sub Station MAR Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Hooked blade. Surface shall be free from oil. 2006 Page 291 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. firm. the authorised agent Method For installation. . KR410 shall be applied to self level the surface Smaller unevenness shall be made up by the adhesive itself Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to approve that the surface is suitable Priming PE 12 PUR shall be applied in 1 or 2 coats depending on surface porosity Within 24 hours of priming while the surface is still tacky. Smoothing spatula. Hooked blade. paint residues with minimum porosity and roughness If required on large uneven areas. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. floor covering operation shall proceed. dry. to the correct levels with no major unevenness & free of cracks. clean. wax. wax Serrated blade 21 Attachment Adhesive data sheet from UZIN-Werk Manufacturer’s Installation instructions #108 Rubber flooring (buildings) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. it shall be roughened to provide a satisfactory bond with adhesive Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to approve that the primed surface is fit to receive the floor covering “Rubber tiled” floor shall be installed fully in accordance with pages 2-6 of the attached installation instructions Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above operations to ensure compliance with specifications and ITP requirements Equipment Adhesive spreader. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material MAR. The works were executed for major oil companies. Norament 926 Manufactured by Nora / Freudenberg-Germany-Colour # 0884 Manufacturer recommended Adhesives from UZIN-Werk German (MAR in process) 1) UZIN KR 430 A+B Two Component Polyurethane Adhesive for fixing 6mm thick Coned Back Rubber Tiles 2) UZIN GN 276 Neoprene adhesive for fixing Cove Skirting and Angles Primer PE 412 PUR KR 410 PUR Levelling Compound (To be used to remove large unevenness if so required) Specialist Applicator The flooring application shall be carried out by M / S JOS HANSEN. In case the primed surface has cured. the sub floor shall be even. All these statements constitute management documents. firm. Reference documents Main Sub Station Utility Sub Station Building Sub Station Sub Station MAR Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. Norament 926 Manufactured by Nora / Freudenberg-Germany-Colour # 0884 Manufacturer recommended Adhesives from UZIN-Werk German (MAR in process) 1) UZIN KR 430 A+B Two Component Polyurethane Adhesive for fixing 6mm thick Coned Back Rubber Tiles 2) UZIN GN 276 Neoprene adhesive for fixing Cove Skirting and Angles Specialist Applicator The flooring application shall be carried out by an applicator approved and certified by M / S JOS HANSEN. paint residues with minimum porosity and roughness Smaller unevenness if any. clean.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the sub floor shall be even. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material MAR. . to the correct levels with no major unevenness & free of cracks. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. wax. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 292 of Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to install Rubber Flooring in the Sub Station buildings. dry. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. The works were executed for major oil companies. Surface shall be free from oil. shall be made up by the adhesive itself The concrete surfaces are more than 28 days old Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to approve that the surface is suitable Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. the authorised agent Method For installation. Smoothing spatula. Hooked blade. The works were executed for major oil companies.Administration Building Colour RAL 9010.Ref MAR for fire proof material Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. wax Serrated blade 21 50 Kg Metal Roller Attachment Adhesive data sheet from UZIN-Werk Manufacturer’s Installation instructions #109 Suspended ceilings All buildings Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to install suspended ceilings in the buildings. All these statements constitute management documents.Acoustical Metal Ceiling Fully accessible suspended modular grid type perforated metal ceiling panels with concealed insulation pads. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material MAR . . 2006 Page 293 of “Rubber tiled” floor shall be installed fully in accordance with pages 2-6 of the attached installation instructions Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above operations to ensure compliance with specifications and ITP requirements Equipment Adhesive spreader. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.Telecom Room. Reference documents Specifications : for Acoustical Ceilings MAR MOM MM- Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. UAE MAR Satin Anodised Strip Ceiling with rounded off & closed cleat Product SMSC 100. MAR Mineral fiber ceiling. manufacturer SAS ceilings UK. MAR Humidity resistant tile suspended Ceiling Ceramaguard. . 2006 Page 294 of MOM MMSAS ceiling system 120. manufactured-Armstrong UK. fire alarm etc. Armstrong UK. Trade Line MAR Aluminium Strip Ceiling.. Manufacturer SAS Ceiling UK. Armstrong USA. Man-SAS. UAE MAR Insulation pads for metal acoustical ceiling Rockwool fill material with non combustible black glass tissue. Trade Line Drg & Drg MAR Plastic Faced Ceiling. spot lights. Manufacturer Saddi Metal. smoke detectors. UK Method Installation of Lay in suspended ceiling tiles.Mineral fiber lay in suspended ceiling-Plane Done Plus MOM MM.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies.Suspended Ceiling with colour coated Aluminium strip Only one colour RAL 9016 (Toilets)-Matador 100.VL BIO. all shall be provided to the requirement Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Manufacturer Matador.Prima. Drg 2& Drg MAR Metal Panel Suspended Ceiling 600 x 600mm metal panel suspended ceiling in a lay-in-system RAL 9010 (Cleaner’s Room Administration Building) System 130 TrueGrid T24 System.600 x 600 mm Acoustic Tiles 600mmx600mm & Aluminium Tiles 600mmx600mm on exposed suspension Chalk line shall be marked around the periphery to form a datum to be used for levelling purpose Suspension hangers shall be shot fired to the slab using Hilty equipment Wall angles shall be fixed to the correct levels using steel nails Main channels shall be fixed at 1200mm c / c to the details shown on shop drawings Cross Tees 1200mm shall be fixed perpendicular to the main channels at 600mm c / c to form cells of grid (600mmx1200mm) Cross Tees 600mm shall further be fixed at the centre of 1200mm Cross Tees to form cells in final grid (600mmx600mm) Full tiles shall be installed in 600mmx600mm cells & the ‘cut tiles’ to suit the site requirement as agreed Openings for AC diffusers. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. smoke detectors. . Ceilings shall not be fully closed until QC confirms that all preceding electrical & HVAC installations have been completed. Equipment Shot firing gun Attachment Trade Line method statement #110 Pit 21 water connection Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the connection of the water pipeline. spot lights. Drawing No: Operating Authority easement Drawing No: Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Installation of Aluminium Clip in Tiles Chalk line shall be marked around the periphery to form a datum to be used for levelling purpose Suspension hangers shall be shot fired to the slab at 1000mm c / c using Hilty equipment Wall edge trims shall be fixed to correct levels using steel nails Main channels shall be fixed at 1200mm c / c by holding clamps to the details shown on shop drawings Spring Tees shall be secured every 600mm by wire clips perpendicular to main channels Tiles 600mmx600mm shall be inserted into Spring Tees Openings for AC diffusers. All these statements constitute management documents. Ceilings shall not be fully closed until QC confirms that all preceding electrical & HVAC installations have been completed. 2006 Page 295 of Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above operations and the ITPs signed off.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. to the Civil Contractor camp. from the Operating Authority supply pit No 21. shall be provided all to the requirement Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above operations and the ITPs signed off. Reference documents Excavation permit. fire alarm etc. . the gap between the water pipe and the pipe sleeve shall receive a mastic seal. the water pipe shall be removed in accordance with the instruction of Operating Authority. that may be removed at a later date for future use if required. the pit wall shall be made good using a mortar mix of 1 part cement to 3 part sand. the laying of the drinking water pipeline. shall be adequate to allow the positioning of a purpose made Upvc pipe sleeve. a hole shall be made through the concrete pit wall. Attachment Work permit. Pipe jointing and cutting tools. The area around the pit and along the route of the pipeline shall be left clean of construction material. is indicated upon the drawing The pipe shall be located in a hand excavated trench. The route of the pipe from pit 21 to the pipe sleeve in avenue C. shall be capped with purpose made Upvc end caps. Upon the positioning of the pipe sleeve. The pipe sleeve through the wall of pit 21. The works were executed for major oil companies. The relevant pipe fittings required to control and monitor the water flow within the pipe. leaving the existing Operating Authority valve and small vent pipe. Responsibilities The Civil Contractor PSM shall ensure this method statement is implementation for the connection to pit 21. thrust blocks shall be installed to resist any pressure movements. When the water pipe is correctly located through the pipe sleeve. Drawing Site Sketch Operating Authority drawing No: #111 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Where necessary. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. as well as the reinstatement to pit 21. above the existing services. no provision against the ingress of water shall be required. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor the daily activities. The fittings within the pit provided by Civil Contractor shall be removed. Equipment Hand tools. As the hole is above the local water table.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Upon completion of the project. The size of the hole in the pit wall. Method The position of the proposed pipe location through the wall of pit 21 shall be marked. All these statements constitute management documents. advising and implementing all safety procedures. Using hand tools. 2006 Page 296 of Definitions Operating Authority EPC Contractor Civil Contractor PSM Project Site Manager. shall be located inside of pit 21. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Baseplates shall be clean and free of oil. Reference Documents Specification Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. loose concrete or dust shall be removed by compressed air.all standing water shall be removed leaving only a damp film. . 2006 Page 297 of Cement based non shrink foundation bases Using masterflow 928 t Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment grouting to Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to grout the base plates of stationary equipment / vessels foundation bases using cement based non shrink grout materia for a grouting thickness of 25 – 50 mm. damaged concrete and any oil soaked concrete areas without using mechanical bush hammer Prior to grouting. Base plates and equipment bases shall be uniformly supported in order to eliminate sag and distortion. paint and correctly aligned according to the drawings. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Method The surface of the foundation under the base plate or equipment to be grouted shall be chipped / scabbled & brushed to remove the weak upper layer of the concrete. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. Stainless steel shims 50x50x10 mm thick shall be in correct locations covered with mortar so as to allow at least 50 mm grout cover on shim sides. The levelling plates shall be set to proper elevation. Just prior to grouting. The concrete surface shall be soaked with clean water for 24 hours prior to grouting grouting to minimize the localized absorption as well as to assist the free flow of the grout. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Equipment bases shall be levelled using both anchor bolts and jackscrews. grease. 5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928 shall be used according to requirement. Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. . All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. which has to be kept on for at least 3 to 5 minutes until a uniform lump free consistency is achieved. 2006 Page 298 of The forms as shown on the attached sketch shall be erected on the required locations with chamfers.5 to 4. The mixer shall be clean with no standing water. so as to provide a durable and serviceable levelling layer for the floor covering placed above. 90 % of the measured quantity of water required to achieve the desired consistency according to the batch volume. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. An electric drill fitted with a paddle shall be used for the grout mixing purpose. all exposed grout shall be covered with clean dampen / saturated Hessian and kept moist until the applied grout is firm enough to receive a curing membrane Temperature less than 32 degree C shall be maintained for the 3 post pour continuous days Major Equipment Peddle Mixer Grout Flow Cone Attachment Sketch Masterflow Catalogue Masterflow Method Statement #112 Repair of concrete floor screeds Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Scope This statement outlines the repair procedures to be followed for the repair and reinstatement of defective floor screeds. shall be added to the mixer prior to adding Masterflow grout material. Water @ 3. The works were executed for major oil companies. which has to be added into the mixer gradually and remaining 10 % water quantity shall be poured during mixing . The grouting material shall be poured continuously using’ grout pour cone’ with a constant hydrostatic head of at least 15 cm Grouting shall extend to the edge of the concrete surface where it is to be finished with a 25 mm chamfer After pouring Masterflow 928 in place. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. The affected area shall be sawcut to the full depth of the top layer of screed (typically 35mm) and the affected section removed carefully so as to cause minimum disruption to adjacent areas. All these statements constitute management documents. Before commencing any repair activity. and any loose material removed. It is not intended to repair minor hairline cracks by this method. unless they have become otherwise damaged. A2.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. using a combination of polythene sheeting and ply boarding as appropriate. The repairs shall be selected from the following: Repair Type A – Removal and Reinstatement with Cement Screed. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. the SE shall ensure that previously completed works are suitably protected from damage and dust. 2. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . Before commencing any repairs in a room. this shall also ensure an overall uniform appearance of the repaired areas. It is not necessary to use resin injection on hollow sounding areas where there is no other sign of failure. As well as sealing any un-repaired hairline cracks. This may be carried out in conjunction with repair Type B above. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Responsibilities All inspection and repair work related to the concrete floor screeds shall be under the sole direction of a dedicated Site Engineer (SE) who shall have full authority and responsibility for ensuring that the works are carried out in accordance with this Method Statement. The repairs shall be carried out as follows: Repair Type A: Removal and reinstatement with Cement Screed A1. including preparation. Repair Type B – Repair with Epoxy Mortar This repair should be adopted where there are significant isolated cracks in the screed. Repair Type D – Surface Epoxy Coating This repair shall be applied as a final protective coating to all repaired areas. This repair should be adopted where the existing screed has completely disbonded and broken up. Repair Type C – Repair with Resin Injection This repair should be adopted where the screed appears to be disbonded and cracked or lifting but is otherwise intact. Procedure 1. 3. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The removed area shall be fully cleaned of all dust and debris. and access to the rooms restricted during repair. the SE shall agree the scope of the repairs to be undertaken with the Site Quality Manager. with the agreed repair marked on the floor. leaving loose isolated sections of screed. 2006 Page 299 of Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. The scope shall be recorded on a sketch and identify which type of repair is to be used and the approximate area of the repair. Repair activities shall be restricted to a limited number of rooms at any time. or construction joints between adjacent panels of screed. All these statements constitute management documents. and continue until resin is observed at the outer nipples. and seal using a trowel. using a brush and / or vacuum cleaner. Remove all dust and debris. remove any surplus water (the substrate should still be wet) and apply one coat of NITOBOND PVA bonding agent to all surfaces – horizontal and vertical. Allow to set for eight hours. Using a hammer and chisel. Ensure that further water is added to the hessian at least twice daily for a minimum of three days. covered with polythene sheeting. If unavoidable. If neccesary.g NitoMortar FC-B. This can be determined by the change in sound of the drill. Commence filling the central nipple. Ensure that no-one walks on the repair for minimum three days. Fix an injection nipple to the drilled holes using an epoxy mortar e. and insert into injection gun. B2. Immediately before placing the replacement screed. Ensure that the repair area is not walked on for 24 hours. This should typically be 5mm from the edge of the crack and 5mm deep. Mix the repair material – NITOMORTAR FC-B (or FC) – in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and firmly press the repair mortar into place using a steel trowel. C3. carefully chase a ‘V’ notch along the length of any crack and along the edge of any loosened area. to a depth of approximately 35mm.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. Repair Type B – Repair with Epoxy Mortar B1. Leave for 6 hours. Finish the material flush with the surrounding concrete. A7. . and make the surface good. B3. C5. or the floor could lift further. B4. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. A6. then remove the nipples and fixing mortar. Place and compact the replacement screed material. Do not attempt to place more than this. Remove the polythene sheet after 4 hours and replace with wet hessian. ensuring it remains in place. representing the interface between the two screed layers. Physically remove all loose material and clean using a using a wire brush or similar. 2006 Page 300 of A3. C4. Drill three 10mm holes in the area to be repaired. lay ply sheet over repair. A5. C1 Repair Type C – Repair with Resin Injection C2. The cleared area shall be thoroughly soaked (not just dampened) for at least one hour before reinstatement. It may be necessary to apply a second levelling coat if the material settles. Mix the repair resin – NITOFILL EPLV – in accordance with the manufacturers reccomendations. A4. Note that material usage rate should be approximately 1litre per 1m2. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. continue filling the outer nipples. Trowel and immediately cover with polythene sheeting placed flat against the surface. Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. All these statements constitute management documents. Ensure that the surface is not wet or damp. Attachment Check list Doc QCF Rev A Location Sketch #113 Repair of concrete floor screeds Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Scope This statement outlines the repair procedures to be followed for the repair and reinstatement of defective floor screeds. Ensure all repairs have been completed and allowed to cure (24 hours for epoxy repair – 5 days for cement screed repair). Firstly apply a stripe coat to any untreated minor cracks. 4. Mix the material – NITOFLOR FC140 . taking care to work the paint into the crack. The works were executed for major oil companies. D2. . Brush the surface thoroughly to remove all dust and debris. so as to provide a durable and serviceable levelling layer for the floor covering placed above. D4. ensuring that the material fully coats the surface but without ponding. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Ensure that the surface is not walked on for 24 hours. apply a single coat to the entire surface using a brush or roller. Starting at the furthest corner. D3. D5. Details of all repairs shall be recorded on a Screed Repair Sheet – see QCF 91 attached. 2006 Page 301 of Repair Type D – Surface Epoxy Coating D1. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 302 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. and access to the rooms restricted during repair. The cleared area shall be thoroughly soaked (not just dampened) for at least one hour before reinstatement. A9. or construction joints between adjacent panels of screed. Procedure 5. All these statements constitute management documents. 7. It is not intended to repair minor hairline cracks by this method. the SE shall ensure that previously completed works are suitably protected from damage and dust. Repair Type C – Repair with Resin Injection This repair should be adopted where the screed appears to be disbonded and cracked or lifting but is otherwise intact. including preparation. A10. The works were executed for major oil companies. 6. unless they have become otherwise damaged. using a combination of polythene sheeting and ply boarding as appropriate. Repair activities shall be restricted to a limited number of rooms at any time. This repair should be adopted where the existing screed has completely disbonded and cracked. the SE shall agree the scope of the repairs to be undertaken with the Site Quality Manager. Before commencing any repair activity. this shall also ensure an overall uniform appearance of the repaired areas.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The repairs shall be selected from the following: Repair Type A – Removal and Reinstatement with Cement Screed. This may be carried out in conjunction with repair Type B above. As well as sealing any un-repaired hairline cracks. The scope shall be recorded on a sketch and identify which type of repair is to be used and the approximate area of the repair. leaving loose isolated sections of screed. The repairs shall be carried out as follows: Repair Type A: Removal and reinstatement with Cement Screed A8. . with the agreed repair marked on the floor. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The affected area shall be sawcut to the full depth of the screed to be removed and the affected section removed carefully so as to cause minimum disruption to adjacent areas. It is not necessary to use resin injection on hollow sounding areas where there is no other sign of failure. and any loose material removed. The removed area shall be fully cleaned of all dust and debris. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Repair Type B – Repair with Epoxy Mortar This repair should be adopted where there are significant isolated cracks in the screed. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Responsibilities All inspection and repair work related to the concrete floor screeds shall be under the sole direction of a dedicated Site Engineer (SE) who shall have full authority and responsibility for ensuring that the works are carried out in accordance with this Method Statement. Before commencing any repairs in a room. Repair Type D – Surface Epoxy Coating This repair shall be applied as a final protective coating to all repaired areas. Drill three 10mm holes in the area to be repaired. carefully chase a ‘V’ notch along the length of any crack and along the edge of any loosened area. Allow to set for eight hours. Mix the repair resin – NITOFILL EPLV – in accordance with the manufacturers reccomendations. continue filling the outer nipples. 2006 Page 303 of A11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. to a depth of approximately 35mm. ensuring it remains in place. Trowel and immediately cover with polythene sheeting placed flat against the surface. B4. and insert into injection gun. C1 Repair Type C – Repair with Resin Injection C2. Ensure that further water is added to the hessian at least twice daily for a minimum of three days. then remove the nipples and fixing mortar. Finish the material flush with the surrounding concrete. Leave for 6 hours. and seal using a trowel. This should typically be 5mm from the edge of the crack and 5mm deep. Using a hammer and chisel. or the floor could lift further. All these statements constitute management documents. Physically remove all loose material and clean using a using a wire brush or similar. . Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The hessian to be kept damp the whole time A14. and make the surface good using epoxy mortar ( Nitomortar FC-B or FC). Remove the polythene sheet after 4 hours and replace with wet hessian. C3. Repair Type B – Repair with Epoxy Mortar B1. Remove all dust and debris. covered with polythene sheeting. This can be determined by the change in sound of the drill. If neccesary. lay ply sheet over repair. Place and compact the replacement screed material.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Ensure that no-one walks on the repair for minimum three days. A13. using a brush and / or vacuum cleaner. remove any surplus water (the substrate should still be wet) and apply one coat of NITOBOND PVA bonding agent to all surfaces – horizontal and vertical.g NitoMortar FC-B. Fix an injection nipple to the drilled holes using an epoxy mortar e. Do not attempt to place more than this. It may be necessary to apply a second levelling coat if the material settles. Mix the repair material – NITOMORTAR FC-B (or FC) – in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and firmly press the repair mortar into place using a steel trowel. C4. B3. The works were executed for major oil companies. and continue until resin is observed at the outer nipples. If unavoidable. Commence filling the central nipple. Note that material usage rate should be approximately 1litre per 1m2. B2. C5. representing the interface between the two screed layers. Immediately before placing the replacement screed. A12. Ensure that the repair area is not walked on for 24 hours. Attachment Check list Doc QCF Rev A Location Sketch #114 Epoxy grouting to Vibrating installation bases Using masterflow 648 cp General foundations Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to grout the base plates of vibratory installations using epoxy grout material for varying grouting thickness for normal thickness range Reference Documents Specification Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. taking care to work the paint into the crack. D3. All these statements constitute management documents. Brush the surface thoroughly to remove all dust and debris. Ensure that the surface is not wet or damp.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. D4. 2006 Page 304 of Repair Type D – Surface Epoxy Coating D1. Mix the material – NITOFLOR FC140 . Starting at the furthest corner. ensuring that the material fully coats the surface but without ponding. Details of all repairs shall be recorded on a Screed Repair Sheet – see QCF 91 attached. D5. Ensure all repairs have been completed and allowed to cure (24 hours for epoxy repair – 5 days for cement screed repair).in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. D2. 8. The works were executed for major oil companies. apply a single coat to the entire surface using a brush or roller. Firstly apply a stripe coat to any untreated minor cracks. Ensure that the surface is not walked on for 24 hours. In between the thin and the thick sections Refer to MBT clarification attached The following activities are involved for normal thickness Surface preparation Metal parts that should not be bonded to the grout like jack screws of the reciprocating machinery and part of the foundation bolts shall be sealed with tape prior to grouting.A gap between a base plate and substrate below 25 mm Thick section.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Base plates and equipment bases shall be uniformly supported in order to eliminate sag. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Method Thin section. oil. Stainless steel shims 50x50x10 mm thick shall be placed in correct locations covered with mortar so as to allow at least 50 mm grout cover on shim sides. Before the form work is fixed.A gap between a base plate and substrate above 80mm Normal thickness. 2006 Page 305 of Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. . All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Full extent of the foundation surface under the base plate or equipment to be grouted shall be chipped / scabbled & brushed to remove the weak upper layer of concrete and any oil soaked concrete areas prior to the installation of the base plate Base plate surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be grit blasted so as to expose white metal All surfaces and bolt pockets to receive grout must be clean & free of rust. dirt or contaminants that could impair bond Formwork Unless otherwise shown on design drawing. shall be fixed around the base plate to prevent the leakage of the resin keeping the top of the forms 25mm above the underside of the base plate A chamfer 25mm x 25mm shall be provided on the sides so that top of the chamfer and the top of grout are in one level in case the whole of the foundation area around the plate is to be grouted. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. dirt. The works were executed for major oil companies. the entire area under the base plate shall be grouted and the forms fixed around the plate keeping a minimum of 25 mm clearance from the plate edge and at least 50 mm from the edge of the pouring side so that total groutable area is equal to underside of the plate and the clearance around the plate. distortion and levelled using both anchor bolts and jackscrews. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. oil. paint and residual curing compound All base plate holding down bolts etc must be free of rust. it shall be ensured that the foundation area to be grouted and the bolts holes are clean A liquid tight formwork as practicable. Exposed surfaces shall be brushed with Solvent # 2 just before or as the grout gels Curing No curing is required Major Equipment Peddle Mixer / Mixing Vessel Attachment Sketches Masterflow 648 CP datasheet MBT Method statement Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. Mixed grout shall be steadily poured down the form work slope to avoid air entrapment Pouring shall be carried out only from one side of the base plate to avoid creation of voids and any reduction of the effective bearing area When the grout reaches the far side of the formwork which shall be ensured by poured material rising above the bottom of base plate.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . the pouring location has to move along the length of the base plate keeping the process continued until the whole area is completed. Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to ascertain the proper implementation of the procedures according to the manufacturer’s instructions Shoulders. Overmixing shall be avoided to prevent air entrainment Placing All bolt pockets shall be filled with grout prior to pouring the rest of the underplate space as a separate operation to prevent voids formation Pouring of the grout shall start from one end of the base plate and continued until the material reaches the far side. 2006 Page 306 of A 45 sloping surface above the form on the pouring side shall be constucted to create a pressure head to enable the grout material flow to cover full width of the pour A coating of an approved release agent shall be applied to the form work Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the form profile and general preparatory works Grouting application All dirt and debris shall be removed from the form work using compressed air Sufficient Grout material to completely fill the prepared area in a continuous process shall be made available Mixing equipment shall be demonstrated to be in a suitable as well as in good working condition A standby equipment shall also be made available Concrete surfaces to be grouted shall be completely dry before grouting Mixing Base and reactor components shall be poured into a suitable mixing vessel and mixing carried out for 1 minute or until successfully blended All required quantity of aggregate shall be added to the mixing vessel which is to be kept turning and mixing continued until a uniform lumpfree consistency is achieved. The works were executed for major oil companies. Interlocking Paving blocks Method All loose soil shall be cleared and formation level made up and well compacted (Laying Kerb stones) Setting out kerb excavation lines according to drawing Excavation upto the formation level i. 25mm thick for kerb stones Fixing kerb on the mortar to the true lines and levels with chamfer facing pavement & jointing with mortar Placing haunch back concrete grade 20.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 150 mm high in triangular section Filling above haunch portion with soil An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for kerb laying approval and ITP signed off (Laying Paving Interlocking blocks) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents.e 325mm from the kerb top level Form work fixing and pouring grade 20 concrete 200mm wide and 100 mm thick Bedding in cement mortar 1 :4. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Kerb stones. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 307 of #115 Kerbs & interlocking blocks paving around buildings Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to lay kerb stones and concrete interlocking blocks in paving around buildings Reference Documents Specification MAR and Safety Prior to commence any activity. Reference Documents Specification Specification Specification Specification Grouting Steel Structure Fabrication Painting Galvanizing Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. sand bedding shall be carried out using a plate vibrator pressing the blocks to the required level in 2 passes covering entire area with each pass to make the bedding even Sand shall be spread on the surface of the blocks with 2 more vibrator passes applied & brushed under the leading edge of the vibrator to allow the joints vibrated A Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve the paving Major Equipment Plate Compactor Attachment Manufacturer’s Conctruction method #116 Erection of steel structures (for higher levels) Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Scope The purpose of this Method Statement is to define the sequence and methodology that shall be implemented for the erection of the steel structures. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 308 of Thickness of the interlocking blocks 60mm Thickness of the sand bedding 50mm Top level of sand in joint from the kerb top level 50mm Sharp sand to be consumed shall be piled up along the area to be paved and evenly spread with the blocks laid over snugly to the agreed pattern and colour Plank runs shall be used to allow barrows to move on to avoid level disturbance The blocks shall be laid in full but at the edges of the obstacles such as inspection covers where cut blocks may be required. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . After sufficient blocks have been laid.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. whole blocks shall be laid first wherever possible and the trimmable blocks exactly marked & cut to the required size. Safety Before commencement of any task the relevant qualified labour force shall first receive a Safety Task Analysis Risk Reduction Talk about the task to be performed and all safety hazards shall be addressed as required. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 309 of Specification Structural Steel Erection ANSI A 10.P. The CS shall ensure that all safety requirements are implemented and explained to the erection work force. All these statements constitute management documents. Now the structures are at levels from 12m to 33m. Concrete Foundations The surface of the concrete foundation shall be prepared in accordance with the specification to receive grout. The EF shall control the workforce ensuring the full implementation of this method statement including all safety measures. Main activities to be implemented are: a) Safe access to elevated levels b) Man baskets c) Full body harness d) All P. Equipment e) Extra Harness Lanyard f) Stay ropes g) Life Line Method Material Receivables All structural steel material to be used for permanent works shall be received on site and checked against relevant documents. All concrete foundations on which the steel structures shall be erected shall be released by the QC department. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.13 Safety Requirements for Steel Requirements Relevant IFC Drawings Method Statement – Structural Steel Definitions CM CS EF Construction Manager Construction Superintendent Erection Foreman Responsibilities The CM shall plan and resourse the steel structure erection activies. These main columns or grid frames shall be assembled on the ground near the foundation. Method Briefing Structures erected to date were low levels. varying from 6m to 16m and access was easy. with the correct equipment resources. The CS shall control the day to day activities. All members shall be checked for quantity and identification and transportation damage.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. to ensure that they are implemented according to this procedure. . Stay ropes Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. upon completion of the civil activity. These shall then be installed on the columns using the appropriate capacity crane. Major Equipment Mobile cranes Man lift Man basket Guy ropes and tensioning equipment Flat bed trailers and forklifts\other mobile shifting equipment Air compressor Impact wrench Welding generators Grinding machines Drilling machines #117 Vinyl flooring buildings Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to lay Vinyl tiles floor finish on cement sand screed in buildings Reference Documents Specification Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The full body harness shall secure the steel catcher to the steel. All fasteners shall be installed and then the line & levels checked. All these statements constitute management documents. line & levels checked. the platform\handrails shall be installed as required as per drawings. Steel Catcher shall move around on the steel by the “Slip & Slide” method to get in position for the next member. so that the steel catchers can walk on the beams below with their Safety Harnesses hooked onto the life line. the grouting of the column base plates shall then be grouted as per the approved procedure. Steel Catcher crew with the necessary full body harness & lanyard shall be placed in position on the beams using either a man lift or man basket. Access ladders shall be installed as soon as possible for safe access. The works were executed for major oil companies. All splice plates shall be installed and bolted down before the horizontal members are connected. Platform\Handrails\Gratings: After completion of the main steel erection. The other option shall be to install step ladders. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . 2006 Page 310 of shall be used to secure these till the connecting horizontal member beams are installed. Life lines shall also be pulled between columns. When the first level of steel with the majority of the horizontal members are installed.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. dust and other deleterious matter immediately prior to floor installation Adhesive shall be spread evenly over the surface with a triangular notched trowel 1. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. . Notched Trowel Attachment Adhesive Manufacturer’s Conctruction method #118 Concrete paving Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to construct the concrete paving Reference Documents Drawing Road & Paving Details Sheet 1 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 311 of MAR Safety Prior to commence any activity. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Adhesive. The sub floor shall be dry and free from contaminants.5mm deep cut at 5mm centres with a sweeping motion at about 60 degree angle to horizontal & allowed to reach a tacky consistency Vinyl covering shall be placed into position and rolled using 68 kg roller to ensure overall contact A Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for approval and ITP signed off Major Equipment Roller 68 Kg. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. hardening compound .Laybond Multibond Gold (Multi Purpose Acrylic ) Method Surface shall be broomed followed by vacuum cleaning. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Vinyle Tiles. All these statements constitute management documents. Welded Wire Fabric. polythene sheet 0. Joint filler board. The thickness of the expansion joint shall be 20mm Refer to detail 9 At contraction joints 25x25 mm plastic crack inducer shall be provided as shown in the detail 10 & the joints cut for a depth of 20mm with a concrete cutting machine Welded wire fabric mesh dia 7mm –200# shall be placed in the bay centrally located with concrete spacers below Forms shall be set to correct levels so that the total thickness of the concrete is as specied on the drawings Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the pour approval Concrete shall be poured in one layer and compacted using parker vibrator to brush finish & to correct levels. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Crack Inducer. 2006 Page 312 of Specification Safety Prior to commence any activity. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.25mm shall be placed with end overlaps at least 150mm at all joints and intersections End forms shall be fixed on sides allowing a provision to place 20MS dowel bars 650mm long & 300mm centres half painted with 2 coats bitumastic paint with 100mm long cardboard cap containing compressible material such as cotton waste at the expansionjoint to the details shown on the drawing. Curing compound shall be spread on the surface for immediate curing covered with polythene sheet and later within 2 hours damp hessian added by removing polythene sheet temporarily and recovered thereafter The expansion joints between the two adjacent slabs shall be filled with an elastic joint filler and sealed with a chemical resistant sealant complying with the details shown on the drawings Refer to detail 12 – Details A & B Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Fibre Concrete grade 30. Oil resistant joint sealant Method All the relevant underground services shall be laid in all respects prior to the commencement of the pavement work The area to be paved shall be made ready by clearing all weak soil & by scarifying Approved sub base material 150mm thick shall be filled up to the bottom of the concrete slab following the profile given on the drawing and compacted to 95 % dry proctor density Weed killer chemical shall be applied to the soil to prevent the organic growth The whole area shall be divided into parts to suit the services and the contraction joints formations & as shown on drawings On the’ compacted filled area’ to be paved. 2006 Page 313 of Details A shows 20mm x 25 mm joint seal and detail B shows 15mm x 20mm slightly rounded to prevent damage to edges Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted Major Equipment Concrete Pump. Transit Mixer. Parker / Dr Kewande Vibrator. All these statements constitute management documents. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Reference documents Drawing Nos. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Proper illumination shall be provided in the dark area Safety Supervision The area to be tiled shall be closed for the general movement except those working there and be opened only when the tiling has properly been completed with hardboard cover protection spread on the newly laid flooring. Concrete cutting machine Attachment None #119 Central control building Ceramic tiles flooring system Top Index Scope Definitions Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to construct the ‘ceramic tiles flooring system’ which involves the laying of the bedding screed as well as the finishing layer with grouting the joints including movement joints. The works were executed for major oil companies. . Specifications page STQ Qand UBC & general construction practice Safety Prior to commence any activity. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted for the correct formation of joint alignment and the level profile The tiles shall be laid level or to 1. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The surface of the screed shall be cleaned by brush prior to the application of the adhesive.5 mm for wall tiles and 3 mm for floor tiles) The tiles shall neatly and accurately be cut to a close fit where necessary at abutments. pipes and the like. Particular care shall be taken in ‘wet’ areas to prevent low spots that may Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.Nitotile GP Joint filling grout – Approved proprietary material with matching shade. The total thickness of the ceramic tile flooring is 100 mm which includes 90 mm bedding screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) to be mixed by weight and 10 mm thick ceramic tiles. around outlets. shall be applied as described below. The adhesive shall be mixed with water using a slow speed drill to the water adhesive ratio per manufacturer’s data sheet. The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by weight. Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted to ascertain proper compaction and levels. . Localised variations in level for a nominally flat floor shall be a maximum of +. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Ceramic floor tiles 300 x 300 x 10mm. For General Area ‘RAK GP 21 G’ and for wet areas Johnson ‘Athena’ Cementitious adhesive.% falls in ‘wet’ areas as may be required. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Tiles shall then be laid on the adhesive layer with a twisting motion ensuring good contact between the tile and the adhesive bed.2-mm under a 3-meter straight edge. 2006 Page 314 of A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Method (Laying ceramic floor tiles by SEMI DRY method) The areas of concrete sub strata to be tiled shall be brush cleaned and dampened until absorption ceases followed by the finished floor level establishment by means of dots and rules. mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required for the bed. For this purpose the adhesive manufacturer’s instruction shall be adhered to. The tiles shall be correctly positioned in both directions the time these are placed forming joints using a proprietary tile spacer ( 1. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed board and given a smooth trowel finish. Adhesive Nitotile GP mix shall be applied in uniform thickness of 2 to 3 mm over the surface of the cement sand screed bedding and then combed horizontally. a movement joint of the same width in the bedded finish shall be positioned immediately above The movement joint cavities shall extend through the combined thickness of the finish and the bedding mortar. The works were executed for major oil companies. Grouting of the joints shall be carried out after a period of 24 hours after completion of laying of tiles.. Reference documents Project Specification Project Specification ACI 301 chapter 8. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the placement of structural concrete upon the project. completely filled and sealed after grouting of the normal joints takes place. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer Wheel barrows Mason’s tools in general Slow speed drill Attachment Adhesive manufacturer’s Datasheet #120 Concrete placement Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. The tolerance in the overall level shall not be more than 10 mm from required finishes. MOVEMENT JOINTS IN TILED FLOORS Unless otherwise indicated in the documents. machine bases etc.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . Definitions EPC Contractor Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 315 of promote water pooling. Where a structural movement joint is provided in the base. (Reef STQ Q) Excessive adhesive shall be removed with a damp cloth before the material has set. a 10 mm movement joint shall be formed at the perimeter of all the tiled floors and where the tiling meets structural features such as columns. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor the concrete activities. so that uncontrolled segregation does not occur. shall commence when the placement of the concrete is adequate. Refer to Method statement. The placement of the fresh concrete within the shutters.5 meters from the final location of the concrete. The Concrete Foreman shall ensure that the concrete crew is fully aware of this procedure and the correct methods of working. hoses. shall be placed over the set concrete. the reinforcement within the concrete pour. shall be inspected and approved as correct. For pours greater than two cubic meters in volume. the concrete can be discharged direct from the truck mixer. the concrete placement activity can commence. Consolidation of the fresh concrete. holding down bolts. Immediately the concrete finishing has been completed. no concrete shall be dropped from a height greater than two meters. For pours less than two cubic meters. steelfixer. shall be in a logical sequence. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. or in a manner that shall cause the segregation of the aggregates. Upon adequate setting of the concrete. 2006 Page 316 of Civil Contractor PSM Project Site Manager. Immediately prior to placement activities commencing. Regardless of the method of discharge. water etc). the white polythene sheeting shall be removed. has approved the concrete delivery. Concrete shall be placed in a sequence that ensures that cold joints are eliminated. when concrete placement has been completed. or any other critical embedded item is included within the pour. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. carpenter. shall be sprayed with clean water. The fresh concrete shall be compacted with pokers of sufficient size and number. ensuring that the edges are sealed to prevent the circulation of air. at the location of concrete placement. the concrete shall be covered with white polythene sheeting. Hessian which has been soaked in water. the concrete shall be discharged through a concrete pump. The concrete shall be discharged by one of two methods. Where encast plates. Concrete shall be placed at locations that do not exceed 1. advising and implementing all safety procedures.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The white polythene sheeting shall be replaced and sealed at the edges. Each subsequent layer of concrete shall be adequately compacted into the concrete layer below. compressors. When the site laboratory concrete technician. Method The structure that is to be concreted. The hessian shall be kept moist for a period of 14 days. by both Civil Contractor and EPC Contractor. Testing of Fresh Concrete. the surveyor shall check the location and elevation of that item. The works were executed for major oil companies. Responsibilities The Construction Superintendent shall ensure that the concrete Foreman implements this procedure. The maximum concrete layer thickness of 450 mm shall be observed. The permission to place concrete shall be authorized by EPC Contractor The concrete Foreman shall ensure that he has adequate equipment resources (vibrating pokers. . the defect shall be classified as minor or major. A major defect shall be brought to the attention of the QA department. .) When shuttering is removed from a pour. The works were executed for major oil companies. Where a defect is observed. A minor defect is one which does not impair the strength of the structure or is greater than 10mm by 10mm. #121 Precast rcc covers Cable & instrumentation trenches Top Index Scope Definitions Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of the covers for the Instrumentation and the electrical cable trenches. All these statements constitute management documents. Compressors. Concrete Pump.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 317 of (Note: it is proposed to apply for a specification concession to use a water based curing compound. Reference documents Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The repairs to the concrete surfaces shall be cured according to the requirement for fresh concrete. Equipment Truck Mixer. A major defect shall be any other surface defect that is larger than 10mm by 10mm. in leu of water curing. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the resultant concrete surface shall be inspected. Attachment ITP No: Concrete Placement. The method of repair of such defects shall be discussed and agreed with EPC Contractor. Vibrating Pokers. This minor defect shall be repaired using a patching mortar. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . to be flush with concrete Pre fabricated mesh. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Coloured concrete Grade 30 Red colour concrete for the covers to be used on Electric cable trenches Green colour concrete for the covers to be used on Instrumentation cable trenches Red or Green oxides to be added to the concrete @ 9 kg per cum Lifting Lugs. 2006 Page 318 of Drawing Nos Specifications Safety Prior to commence any activity. 16mm dia with exposed portion galvanised. the filled compacted base in the trench shall be prepared and polythene sheet spread to receive the covers. Relevant details 5 L & 5 H on the above drawing indicate transverse joints to be formed at a spacing of 3m in case of 150mm thick covers and 1 m in case of 50 mm (proposed to be substituted by 100 mm) covers The pre casting shall be carried out in the pre cast yard to the approved procedures using coloured concrete All other procedures pertaining to the concreting & transporting the members to the site locations shall be similar to as being adopted Prior to placing the covers. The works were executed for major oil companies. The covers shall be offloaded to the locations at the specified spacing leaving a gap of 25 mm between the ends to allow for the oil resistant joint sealant Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the correct alignment and level Major Equipment Transit mixer Wheel barrows Mason’s tools in general Trailor Crane Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. have been given on the Attachment. the details of the lifting lugs with the exposed steel portion of the lug to be galvanised. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. 7 dia at 200 / 200 Method Since various dimensions are involved for these typical pre cast concrete covers. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. All these statements constitute management documents. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Tack coat bituminous material 60 / 100 penetration to be applied @ 2.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.5 litres per sqm of road surface Asphalt for 40mm thick course according to requirement Water Method Traffic diversion if so required shall be effected to the requirement Damaged portion of the ‘wearing course’ shall be removed using ‘Asphalt Remover’ and the surface cleaned using a ‘Mechanical Cleaner’ Tack coat shall be applied to the clean surface according to the specified rate of application as above Asphalt shall be applied to a required thickness (minimum 40 mm) finished to full extent of the damaged area making up the level to the existing wearing course Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 319 of Sketching showing lifting lugs #122 Black top repair Ist street between Avenue c & b Top Index Scope Definitions Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the repair to the road-wearing course damaged superficially to a portion on Ist Street between Avenue ‘’ and Avenue ‘’. Reference documents None Safety Prior to commence any activity. All these statements constitute management documents. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. . The works were executed for major oil companies. Reference documents Attached sketch Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. . 2006 Page 320 of Laid material shall be spread and finished to the required level using Asphalt Finisher First rolling shall be carried out using pneumatic roller ‘6’ tonne capacity giving required number of passes Then second rolling shall be carried out using Tandem roller 8 / 10 tonnes capacity according to the requirement giving required number of passes Water shall be used during rolling according to the requirement Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the correct finished level Major Equipment Asphalt Remover Asphalt Finisher Pneumatic Roller Tandem Roller Water Tank Attachment None #123 Repair of Single leaf swing gates Top Index Scope Definitions Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the repair to the emergency gates to be installed in the sub station fence for transformers.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. A lock usable from outside is to be added to the gate. The works were executed for major oil companies. forms if necessary. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. A circumferencial overlap shall be made in such a way that a minimum of 100mm overlapping length lies below finished concrete level in addition to projection above A portion of the concrete necessary to allow working area (150 mm deep apprx) to weld the circumference on site shall be removed prior to the new post is erected for installation The new assembled post shall be properly aligned to the requirement Welding shall be carried out to the circumference After welding galvafroid or epoxy paint system shall be applied according to manufacturer’s instructions An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out for the approval of the welding and the paint system The surface of the broken concrete shall be cleaned and approved. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials New post Self levelling grout to specification Epoxy paint system or galvafroid Method Vendor – Link Middle East Ltd Existing gate post shall be cut using gas cutting equipment to a level as shown on the sketch and discarded A new post dia 88. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.slot by welding at the vendor’s shop with 70 mm out to out PVC coated per specification. prepared and self-levelling grout shall then be applied to the manufacturer’s instructions and finished accordingly Major Equipment Oxy Acetylene Gas cutting system Welding set Attachment Sketch showing proposed arrangement #124 Repair to Floor screed levels Top Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.9mm including a locking lug shall be added with a sleeve. . 2006 Page 321 of Safety Prior to commence any activity. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. . prior to applying the Rubber flooring Reference documents None Safety Prior to commence any activity. self levelling & pourable mix consistency is obtained Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.5 liters per bag of 25 kg material shall be used as per manufacturer’s instructions First 2 / 3 rd required quantity of water shall be added to the mixing vessel followed by gradually and slowly adding the material from the bag and mixed for 3 minutes minimum Remaining 1 / 3 rd required quantity of water shall be slowly added throughout to the mix and mixing continued until a smooth. The works were executed for major oil companies. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. sound and free from loose material and contamination such as plaster oil and grease Excessive laitance shall be removed by light scabbling or acid etching followed by washing and debris removed using vacuum cleaner Large cracks and holes shall be filled with a mix of Nitoflor leveltop and clean sharp sand made to a trowel consistency by adding small quantity of water. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Fosroc Nitoflor Leveltop This is a self-levelling. Clean water @ 6. Substrate shall be primed with 1:1 water Nito bond PVA mixture prior to the repair is done Mixing Material shall be mixed using a heavy-duty drill fitted with a purpose made paddle. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. cementitious underlay for a wide variety of floors finishes requiring a smooth level substrate Method Preparation The sub strata shall be clean. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 322 of Index Scope Definitions Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the repair to eliminate the uneveness from the floor screed surface. Reference documents BS code 8007 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Rolling shall be carried out immediately after material is placed. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. High spots or splashes shall be scraped off with the edge of a trowel after initial set Required thicknesss shall be achieved in one application only with maintaining continuous process of pouring and levelling until the designated area is completed Curing is generally not required An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out throughout during the above operations Major Equipment Heavy duty drill Mixing Vessel Squeegee and other tools Attachment Fosroc Data Sheet #125 Resin injection to leaking joint Sea water surge basin Top Index Scope Definitions Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the injection to the leaking joints at the sea water surge basin observed during water tightness test according to the BS code 8007. spread with trowel or squeegee and allowed to self level The material shall be rolled with a Fosroc spiked roller to achieve air release with final level. 2006 Page 323 of Material shall be poured onto the primed substrate. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. 2006 Page 324 of Safety Prior to commence any activity.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Masterseal 505 Concresive 1335 and 1320 Method Leakage Control Technology The’ leaking joints’ shall be reinstated by injecting resin using MBT material according to the MBT proposed statement and the material data sheet attached Preparation and application of a ‘Low Viscosity Polyurethane Injection Resin’ used for reinstating the structural integrity of cracked concrete accommodating slight movement The following operations are involved Preparation The location of the leakage shall be marked Leaking water shall be plugged with Masterseal 505 Once the water running is temporarily stopped. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. . holes shall be drilled on both sides of the expansion joint at an angle and at 200 to 500 mm spacing Metal screw packers shall be installed in the drilled holes and tightened so that the injected material does not leak Application First stage injection Concresive 1335 shall be injected into the packers to further stop the water as it foams and cures within 30 seconds stopping any flow of water Second stage injection Concresive 1320 shall be injected using a high pressure (up to 240 bars) an electrically operated injection machine at a suitable pressure. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Master Building Technology. The works were executed for major oil companies. This injection shall react with water as well as bubble up to a fine foam and seal the leaking crack / joints permanently Leak shall be checked again after 24 hours and re-injection applied if required Packers shall be removed the next day and holes re-profiled using non shrink grout During the complete operations Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to record that the leakage has been controlled to the code requirement Major Equipment High pressure electric Injection system Metallic Packers Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 325 of MBT Method Statement Material Datasheet #126 Resin injection to leaking joint Sea water surge basin Top Index Scope Definitions Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the injection to the leaking joints at the sea water surge basin observed during water tightness test according to the BS code 8007.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Concresive 2200 / Masterseal 505 Concresive 1335 and 1320 Method The leaking joints shall be reinstated by injecting resin using the MBT material according to the MBT proposed statement and the material datasheet attached Preparation and application of a low viscosity Polyurethane injection resin used for reinstating the structural integrity of cracked concrete accommodating slight movement The following operations are involved The location of the leakage shall be marked The water shall be pumped out from the basin Laitance and contaminants shall be removed from the surface from a band 50mm wide centered on crack using light grit blasting Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Reference documents BS code 8007 Safety Prior to commence any activity. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Master Building Technology . The port under injectin shall be closed at this stage and the other started being injected All ports shall be injected similarly Resin shall be allowed to cure.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Injection ports shall be removed and the paste ground ver the cracks if so required An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out for the approval of the welding and the paint system Water shall be filled to the specified test levl and test reconducted according to the code requirement Major Equipment Injection system / Hand gun Compressor Grit blasting unit Port flanges Grinder Attachment MBT Method Statement Material Datasheet #127 resin injection to leaking joint sea water surge basin Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . 2006 Page 326 of Holes shall be drilled along the center of the crack for packers at not more than 300 mm apart Compressed air shall be used to remove dust and debris Mixed concresive 2200 shall be applied to the bottom of the flange at perimeter ensuring the paste does not block the port Ports shall be located over the crack center Concresive 2200 shall be applied in a strip 20mm wide and 2-3 mm thick between the ports and the crack center after all the ports have been placed Forcing the paste into the substrate to ensure intimate contact and seal around the port and allowed to cure Application In case of flowing water Concresive 1335 shall be injected into the crack / joint befire using concresive 1320 and when the water ingress stops. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. the concresive 1320 shall be injected into the joint / crack Injection process shall be started from one end of the crack moving bottom upwards in the case of a vertical joint Both the components of concresive 1320 shall be mixed for at least 1 minute Injection gun shall be filled with mixed resin And connected to the port and injection started Resin shall continue to be injected until it starts flowing from the next port. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Master Building Technology. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.Track record for appraisal respecting Dicotech. 2006 Page 327 of Top Index Scope Definitions Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the injection to the leaking joints at the sea water surge basin observed during water tightness test according to the BS code 8007. The works were executed for major oil companies. the used quantity can be measured by counting the number of cans used According to Dicotech the most effective means of injection is from outside as point of crack or leakage can be seen which is almost impossible from inside Method Leakage Control Technology The’ leaking joints’ shall be reinstated by injecting resin using MBT material according to the MBT proposed statement and the material data sheet attached Preparation and application of a ‘Low Viscosity Polyurethane Injection Resin’ used for reinstating the structural integrity of cracked concrete accommodating slight movement The following operations are involved Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the applicator attached Measurement of injection quantity Since the material is supplied in small packing of 1 or 5 lts. All these statements constitute management documents. Reference documents BS code 8007 Safety Prior to commence any activity. Masterseal 505 Concresive 1335 and 1320 Master Builders Technologies confirms that Concressive 1335 is a flexible / compressible material once set. No materials are to be introduced into the expansion joint that interfere with the function of the joint (ref the attachment) Applicator. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. holes shall be drilled on both sides of the expansion joint at an angle and at 200 to 500 mm spacing Metal screw packers shall be installed in the drilled holes and tightened so that the injected material does not leak Application First stage injection Concresive 1335 shall be injected into the packers to further stop the water as it foams and cures within 30 seconds stopping any flow of water Second stage injection Concresive 1320 shall be injected using a high pressure (up to 240 bars) an electrically operated injection machine at a suitable pressure. 2006 Page 328 of Preparation The location of the leakage shall be marked Leaking water shall be plugged with Masterseal 505 Once the water running is temporarily stopped. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. This injection shall react with water as well as bubble up to a fine foam and seal the leaking crack / joints permanently Leak shall be checked again after 24 hours and re-injection applied if required Packers shall be removed the next day and holes re-profiled using non shrink grout During the complete operations Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to record that the leakage has been controlled to the code requirement Major Equipment High pressure electric Injection system Metallic Packers Attachment MBT Method Statement Material Datasheet Dicotech ref containing all details giving clarifications #128 Fire water line excavation around consumer receipt station Top Index Scope Definitions Material Method Equipment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Method Permit pertaining to the relevant excavation area shall be obtained from Plant Refinery division. Any existing services shown on the record drawings shall be located. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. 2006 Page 329 of Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation for Fire Water Lines to be laid by EPC Contractor around Consumer Receipt Station. Existing services drawings shall also be obtained to ascertain safety Supervision at the workface must have a copy of the permit. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. drawing and the method statement Attached sketch shows the location of the proposed Fire Water Line and existing Natural Gas pipe. . Method Statement for the part of road crossing shall be submitted separately Reference documents Specification Excavation & Backfilling for Underground installations Interconnects underground layout drainage Sheet 16 Safety Prior to commence any activity. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. identified & protected adequately with warning as required Cables or pipes that span the excavation shall be supported using split ducts and trays All existing services encountered shall be plotted by the surveyor on as built drawing The surveyor shall set out the routes of the proposed 8”dia fire water line trenches conforming to the IFC drawings and to the sections shown on the attached sketch keeping a clear level Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. the specified tests conducted and the results reported accordingly The surveyor shall provide level pins to indicate the correct elevation of the bedding required for 8” Fire Water line. compacted. compacted to the specification requirement. Operation department shall be invited to attend EPC Contractor engineer shall approve the suitability of the formation material by inspecting the trench bottom and after the approval. hand excavation shall be carried out When cable markers have been exposed. Barriers (including warning tape) shall be placed to indicate an open excavation The excavated material shall be stockpiled in agreed areas for reuse.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . The surveyor shall monitor the lines and levels of the excavation operation Exposed (Existing) cables and pipelines shall be checked for damage by EPC Contractor supervision and combined inspection shall be held by EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor. The fire water pipes shall be placed correctly within the trench by EPC Contractor (not Civil Contractor) in accordance with EPC Contractor own method statements (noting that Al Jaber equipment is under the Direct Control of EPC Contractor). a revised method of work may be necessary and in this instance. This evaluation shall be conducted by EPC Contractor Superintendent and Operator operations representative. all personnel shall be briefed Cables shall be protected by fitting split sleeves after exposure The trench shall be excavated by an excavator to correct lines and levels to the specification requirement providing benching where necessary and employing all safety means. Upon acceptance of the pipe installation. work shall be temporarily suspended and an evaluation made about the soil conditions. tested and reported The approved backfill material shall be spread uniformly in layers of 150 mm up to the existing ground level. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. the laid pipes shall be surrounded with further bedding material that shall be compacted using suitable equipment. compaction of the formation level shall be carried out . Surplus material shall be removed to the tip area in dump trucks. which shall also be applicable between the existing 132 kv cable and the proposed fire water line Where necessary or as defined on the work permit. Where necessary. tested and the results reported accordingly. 2006 Page 330 of difference between existing natural gas and proposed firewater line 1000mm. The bedding shall be laid. The works were executed for major oil companies. tested & reported accordingly The site shall be left tidy of excavated and backfill material Major Equipment Excavator Dump Truck Compactor Attachment Sketch and the drawing extract depicting proposed excavation route #129 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 331 of Road crossing For laying 1 for 20” raw ethane 1 for 6” propane First street Top Index Scope Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at the road crossings to construct culverts to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane at location identified on the attached drawing pertaining to First Street Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. All these statements constitute management documents. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. The works were executed for major oil companies. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. and floodlights etc.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert units. No oil spillage shall be allowed.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out of the trench. . No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. The works were executed for major oil companies. markers. cones. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe & well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culverts shall be carried out Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. a flagmen shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the ‘excavation work in progress’ by ‘flag signal’ Hand Excavation.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation. All these statements constitute management documents. covers and sleepers are heavy in load. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. in addition to the traffic sign boards. the night-lights. 2006 Page 332 of EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. Flagman-On both directions. proper care has to be exercised during raising and downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. A traffic management scheme shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections F Street Culvert XTH Existing Services 3 # cables exist north side of the proposed crossing already exposed The road shall be excavated in two instances by diverting the traffic on either lane completing one after the other as shown on the traffic management scheme Procedures Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively Instance 1 The asphalt pertaining to the crossing portion Stage-1 shall be removed Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details Major Equipment Excavator. Asphalt finisher. Compressor. Road Rollers Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #130 Road crossing For laying 1 for 20” raw ethane 1 for 6” propane First street Top Index Scope Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . 75-mm dia holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled with concrete Access boxout shall be closed with concrete after the pipes are laid Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services 8 mm galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details. fixing steps etc. covers. 2006 Page 333 of The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culverts including the laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Compactors. The works were executed for major oil companies. Dumper trucks. Jack Hammer.shall be carried out according to the drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members In addition. one access boxout at the end shall be provided to design details The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt Instance 2 The aforesaid activities shall be repeated for this instance for the crossing portion Stage-2 The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. The works were executed for major oil companies.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out of the trench.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. markers. in addition to the traffic sign boards. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. all work shall stop in the area and the Plant Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. the night-lights. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. Flagman-On both directions. . and floodlights etc. cones.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. 2006 Page 334 of Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at the road crossings to construct culverts to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane at location identified on the attached drawing pertaining to First Street Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. a flagmen shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the ‘excavation work in progress’ by ‘flag signal’ Hand Excavation. No oil spillage shall be allowed. shall be installed as required for a complete safety.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. All these statements constitute management documents. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. covers and sleepers are heavy in load. . No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert units.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. proper care has to be exercised during raising and downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation. All these statements constitute management documents. shall be carried out according to the drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members In addition. A traffic management scheme shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections F Street Existing Services 3 # cables exist north side of the proposed crossing already exposed The road shall be excavated in one instance by diverting the traffic on north side as shown Procedures Backfilling shall be carried out to the existing excavated cross trench on north end of the proposed crossing up to the natural ground level to provide effective traffic ‘divertion routes’ from the road carriageway according to the traffic management scheme attached Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively The asphalt pertaining to the crossing portion shall be removed Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. one access boxout on both ends shall be provided to design details The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions. fixing steps etc. 2006 Page 335 of The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. The works were executed for major oil companies. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culvert shall be carried out The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culvert including the laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels. 75 mm dia Holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting be filled in with concrete Access box out shall be closed with concrete after the pipe are laid Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services 8 mm galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details. covers. . Road Rollers Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #131 2 #s road crossings For laying 1 for 20” raw ethane 1 for 8” natural gas 1 for 6” propane & 1 for 14”desalinated water 1for 8” potable water Avenue -d Top Index Scope Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at the road crossings to construct culverts to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Jack Hammer. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case. Asphalt finisher. 2006 Page 336 of Major Equipment Excavator. Dumper trucks.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Compactors. the labour force shall receive a STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Compressor. 6” Propane & 8”Natural Gas 1# each 14” Desalinated Water and 8” Potable water at locations identified on the attached drawing pertaining to Avenue -D Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity. all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to have ‘ full safety standard’ effect. therefore. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. Flagman-On all directions. 2006 Page 337 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. proper care has to be exercised during raising and downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division.Excavation to expose the services if any. and floodlights etc. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert units.the workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out of the trench. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. . Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation. flagmen shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the ‘excavation work in progress’ by ‘flag signal’ Hand Excavation. A traffic management scheme shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. markers. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. cones. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. in addition to the traffic sign boards. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. covers and sleepers are heavy in load. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the night-lights. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. No oil spillage shall be allowed. shall be carried out manually. 2006 Page 338 of Avenue D .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Compactors. covers. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. one access boxout on both ends shall be provided to design details The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions. Culvert Procedures Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively Both the crossings shall be excavated in one instance together The asphalt pertaining to the crossing portion shall be removed Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services if any. Compressor. . fixing steps etc. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culvert shall be carried out The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culvert including the laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels. shall be carried out according to the drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members In addition. Asphalt finisher. The works were executed for major oil companies. Jack Hammer. Dumper trucks. All these statements constitute management documents. employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details Major Equipment Excavator. 75 mm dia Holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting be filled in with concrete Access box out shall be closed with concrete after the pipe are laid Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services 8 mm-galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details. Road Rollers Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #132 Treatment to moved expansion joints Sea water surge basin Top Index Scope Definitions Material Method Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Master Building Technology.Dicotech Method Roof Expansion Joint Preparation The joint shall be plugged with a rapid setting cement plug at top and soffit Application When the cement is set. The works were executed for major oil companies. cement plugs shall be removed from the top and sofit of the slab and the joint cleaned to a depth 100mm to get a uniform depth A suitable dia Backup rod shall be provided and the surface reprofiled using 2 part Polysulphide sealant “Arbokol AG2” and allow that to cure Base slab expansion Joint This joint shall be treated if the leakage is observed Preparation The adjacent area of the joint shall be groind . the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. drilling shall be carried out and screw packers fixed to inject polyurethane in the joint Concresive 1320. a two component. low viscosity flexible polyurethane resin shall be injected into the prepared joint using an electric injection machine affecting the joint sealed after polyurethane cures Next day. cleaned and plugged by rapid setting mortar Screw packers shall be drilled and fixed for injection Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Concresive 1320 Epoxy putty Concressive 2200 Hypaton / Combiflex Tape Colma Cleaner Applicator. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 339 of Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the injection to the moved expansion joints in the roof and the base at Sea Water Surge Basin observed during water tightness test Reference documents BS code 8007 Safety Prior to commence any activity. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Reference documents Project Specification Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 340 of Application Concressive 1320 shall be injected into the prepared space using an electric injection machine so as to seal the joint permanently after the polyurethane resin comes in contact with water The cement plugs & the old sealant from the joint shall be removed the next day Sides of the joint shall be ground using an angle grinder to remove any deleterious material to avoid debonding of the new sealant Backup rod shall be installed followed by priming the sides by “Arbo Primer” Joint shall be reprofiles using “Arbokol AG2” joint sealant and allowed to cure Adjacent area of the joint shall be ground to remove the coating from the surface An Aluminium foil shall be provided on top of the joint sealant 1mm or 2 mm thick “Hypaton Tape / Combiflex Tape” 200 mm wide shall be fixed using “Concressive 2200” (a 2 parts epoxy putty) after activating the tape with “Colma Cleaner” The top surface of the tpe shall be closed with the putty leaving a neat band of 50 mm joint in between The system shall be allowed to cure for 3 days prior to the basin is put to use Major Equipment High pressure electric Injection system Metallic Packers Attachment MBT Method Statement Material Datasheet #133 Testing of fresh concrete on site Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. . is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the on site testing of fresh concrete delivered from the Batch plant. for the purpose of concrete test cubes. Responsibilities The Construction Superintendent shall ensure that the laboratory technician is aware of the concrete program. These details shall be recorded upon the test record format QC. Slump Cone.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Cube molds. Method The Site Laboratory shall be informed of the concreting program. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The pumping operation shall then cease until the laboratory technician has completed his testing. The delivery ticket shall first be checked for the correct grade and type of concrete. the pumping operation can proceed. the concrete pump operator shall flush his line with the fresh concrete. The truck mixer shall discharge his delivery into the concrete pump. The laboratory technician shall ensure that he implements this procedure. Additional concrete cubes shall be taken as directed by the laboratory manager. Upon commencement of a pour. The temperature of the concrete sample shall be determined according to ASTM C1064. Each delivery of concrete to the site. A sample of concrete circulated through the concrete pump. The frequency of these concrete test cubes shall be three cubes per 100 cubic meters of delivered concrete. The initial discharge from the concrete pump line shall be discarded. shall report to the concrete Foreman. Equipment Truck Mixer. advising and implementing all safety procedures. Once these test results have been established as conforming to the specification requirements. All these statements constitute management documents. Subsequent deliveries of fresh concrete shall follow a similar procedure. The concrete Foreman shall assist the laboratory technician is testing the fresh concrete delivery. for conducting further tests upon hardened cubes as defined within the specifications. The laboratory technician shall take concrete samples from random truck mixers. The works were executed for major oil companies. Concrete Pump. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor the concrete activities. . Attachment ITP No: Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 341 of Project Specification Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor PSM Project Site Manager. shall be taken from the end of the concrete pump line. Thermometer. The exemption being that the initial discharge of the subsequent truck mixers shall not be discarded. A slump of the concrete sample shall be conducted according to ASTM C143. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. . 2006 Page 342 of #134 Road crossing To install culvert for 1# 14” desalinated water Corniche road / road c At gup gate noth Top Index Scope Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation and installation of 1 # pre cast culvert at the road crossing as shown on the attached sketch Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. 2006 Page 343 of followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out of the trench. the night-lights.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. Flagman-On both directions. markers. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert units. No oil spillage shall be allowed. proper care has to be exercised during raising and downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. and floodlights etc. .Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. cones. a flagmen shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the ‘excavation work in progress’ by ‘flag signal’ Hand Excavation. On West End exist certain services An electric pole exists on the West of the gate but out of culvert reach On the South adjacent to road exists sea water pipe in the trench Procedures Backfilling shall be carried out to the existing excavated sea water trench on south of the Corniche road crossing up to the natural ground level to provide effective traffic access to the working area from the road carriageway according to the traffic management scheme attached Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively subject to RRD approval Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culvert shall be carried out Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. covers and sleepers are heavy in load. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. in addition to the traffic sign boards. A traffic management scheme shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections Corniche Road Culvert Existing Services On East End of the crossing exist banks of electrical cables & also exist some utility pipes. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. covers. Road Rollers Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #135 Road crossing To install culvert For 1 # 14” desalinated water Avenue ‘c’ road gup gate east Main entrance Top Index Scope Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation and installation of 1 # pre cast culvert at the road crossing as shown on the attached sketch Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Dumper trucks. one access boxout on both ends shall be provided to design details The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions. . 2006 Page 344 of The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culvert including the laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details Major Equipment Excavator.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Asphalt finisher. shall be carried out according to the drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members In addition. The works were executed for major oil companies. Compactors. 75 mm dia Holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting be filled in with concrete Access box out shall be closed with concrete after the pipe are laid Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services 8 mm-galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details. fixing steps etc. Compressor. Jack Hammer. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. Flagman-On both directions. markers.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 345 of Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. .Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. and floodlights etc. the night-lights. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Pre cast members Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. a flagmen shall be engaged full time to direct the traffic about the ‘excavation work in progress’ by ‘flag signal’ Hand Excavation. in addition to the traffic sign boards. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. The works were executed for major oil companies. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. cones. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. all work shall stop in the area and the Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. No oil spillage shall be allowed. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out of the trench. proper care has to be exercised during raising and downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. covers. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. 2006 Page 346 of Since pre cast culvert units. All these statements constitute management documents. A traffic management scheme shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections Avenue C Culvert Existing Services On North and South end of the crossing exist many electrical cables. Two trees on either end shall be effected and need preservation On the side terrace a small portion of interlocking block paviors shall be effected Procedures Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively subject to RRD approval Trees under effect shall be removed and preserved The crossing shall be carried out in two instances Instance 1 Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . one access boxout on both ends shall be provided to design details The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions. covers and sleepers are heavy in load. fixing steps etc.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. shall be carried out according to the drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members In addition. 75 mm dia Holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting be filled in with concrete Access box out shall be closed with concrete after the pipe are laid Removed trees shall be replanted Instance 2 All the activities shall be repeated for this instance Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services 8 mm-galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details. minor irrigation cables & also exist some utility pipes. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culvert shall be carried out The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culvert including the laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels. Jack Hammer. Road Rollers Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #136 ROAD CROSSING TO INSTALL CULVERT FOR 1 # 14” desalinated water Avenue ‘c’ road gup gate east Main entrance Top Index Scope Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation and installation of 1 # pre cast culvert at the road crossing as shown on the attached sketch Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. The works were executed for major oil companies. . 2006 Page 347 of Major Equipment Excavator. Dumper trucks. Compressor. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Asphalt finisher.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. All these statements constitute management documents. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. Compactors. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. minor irrigation cables & also exist some utility pipes. markers. A traffic management scheme shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections Avenue C Culvert Existing Services On North and South end of the crossing exist many electrical cables. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert units. No oil spillage shall be allowed. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. cones. . In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. and floodlights etc. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. Two trees on either end shall be effected and need preservation On the side terrace a small portion of interlocking block paviors shall be effected Procedures Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively subject to RRD approval Trees under effect shall be removed and preserved The crossing shall be carried out in one instance Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. proper care has to be exercised during raising and installing / downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. The works were executed for major oil companies. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. the night-lights. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. 2006 Page 348 of Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. covers and sleepers are heavy in load.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench. Hand Excavation. Road Rollers Attachment Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #137 Road crossing To install culvert For 1 # 14” desalinated water Avenue ‘c’ road gup gate east Main entrance Top Index Scope Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 349 of After the exposure. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culvert shall be carried out The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culvert including the laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels. covers. Compressor. fixing steps etc. Compactors. one access boxout on both ends shall be provided to design details The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions. Jack Hammer. 75 mm dia Holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled in with concrete Access box out shall be closed with concrete after the pipes are laid Removed / Preserved trees shall be replanted Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services 8 mm-galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details. shall be carried out according to the drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members In addition. Dumper trucks.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . The works were executed for major oil companies. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details Major Equipment Excavator. Asphalt finisher. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. cones. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. All these statements constitute management documents. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. The works were executed for major oil companies. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. and floodlights etc. No oil spillage shall be allowed. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. the night-lights. markers. Hand Excavation.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. . therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. 2006 Page 350 of Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation and installation of 1 # pre cast culvert at the road crossing as shown on the attached sketch Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. covers and sleepers are heavy in load. 2006 Page 351 of Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert units. Access box out shall be closed with concrete after the pipes are laid Removed / Preserved trees shall be replanted & all landscaping reinstated to RRD / GUP satisfaction 8 mm-galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details. . shall be carried out according to the drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members 75 mm dia Holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled in with concrete In addition. minor irrigation cables & also exist some utility pipes. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. All these statements constitute management documents. one access boxout on both ends shall be provided to design details The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt The traffic diversion shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions. The traffic shall be diverted to use the North gate Trees under effect shall be removed and preserved The crossing shall be carried out in one instance Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. A traffic management scheme shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections Avenue C Culvert Existing Services On North and South end of the crossing exist many electrical cables. proper care has to be exercised during raising and installing / downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. covers.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culvert shall be carried out The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culvert including the laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels. fixing steps etc. Two trees on either end shall be effected and need preservation On the side terrace a small portion of interlocking block paviors shall be effected Procedures The entrance road shall be closed to all traffic. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Compactors. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. 2006 Page 352 of Major Equipment Excavator. Jack Hammer. Reference Documents Method Statement 36 approved for concrete repairs Item F (Renderoc Lax Tra FOSROC) Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. . Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Method 3 # Anchor bolts installed for this foundation were damaged post pouring The following operations are invloved to reinstate the bolts into the foundation The effected concrete portion shall be removed in a triangular form from the foundation corners in an approximate prismatic shape of base 250mmx200mm and height of the prism 600mm approximately. The works were executed for major oil companies. care shall be taken to not to damage the rebars. Road Rollers Attachment Sketch showing the traffic diversion #138 Replacement of misaligned anchor bolts in Foundation 55-vv-906 Using renderoc lax tra Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the replacement to the foundation damaged anchor bolts. Compressor. The exposed rebars shall be properly cleaned using hard brush so that no loose particles remain intact to the rebar surface Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Dumper trucks. During breaking the concrete. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Asphalt finisher. . The form and the concrete surface shall be properly sealed using silicon seal to avoid any leakage of the material Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the correct alignment of the anchor bolts and the forms Then the prepared surface shall be soaked in water for 24 hours prior to grouting The material shall be mixed with specified quantity of clean water according to the manufacturer’s instruction and poured in layers 200 mm thick Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the pouring operation After the approval of the repair works and giving allowance of specified number of days. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. properly leveled and plumbed. Chamfer shall be aligned properly. alignment . All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 353 of The surface of the broken concrete shall be cleared of all debris and new bolts installed in correct locations Forms shall be erected to the correct profile. further operations shall be carried out Major Equipment Peddle Mixer Attachment None #139 Replacement of misaligned anchor bolts in Foundation 55-vv-906 Using renderoc lax tra Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the replacement to the foundation damaged anchor bolts. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. Reference Documents Method Statement 36 approved for concrete repairs Item F (Renderoc Lax Tra FOSROC) Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. All these statements constitute management documents. The exposed rebars shall be properly cleaned using hard brush so that no loose particles remain intact to the rebar surface The surface of the broken concrete shall be cleared of all debris and new bolts installed in correct locations Forms shall be erected to the correct profile. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Method 3 # Anchor bolts installed for this foundation were damaged post pouring The following operations are invloved to reinstate the bolts into the foundation The effected concrete portion shall be removed in a triangular form from the foundation corners in an approximate prismatic shape of base 250mmx200mm and height of the prism 600mm approximately. further operations shall be carried out Major Equipment Peddle Mixer Attachment None #140 Buildings screeds for vinyl and epoxy floor finishes Top Index Scope Safety Material Method Equipment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. care shall be taken to not to damage the rebars. alignment . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. During breaking the concrete. Chamfer shall be aligned properly. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. properly leveled and plumbed. 2006 Page 354 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. . The form and the concrete surface shall be properly sealed using silicon seal to avoid any leakage of the material Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the correct alignment of the anchor bolts and the forms Then the prepared surface shall be soaked in water for 24 hours prior to grouting The material shall be mixed with specified quantity of clean water according to the manufacturer’s instruction and poured in layers 200 mm thick Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the pouring operation After the approval of the repair works and giving allowance of specified number of days. The works were executed for major oil companies. water Method (Laying floor screed by SEMI DRY method) The floor area to be laid with screed shall be divided in equal or as considered convenient strips / bays. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.5 cement –screened sand mortar The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. cleaned. the prepared surface shall be spread with cement slurry ratio 1:1 (1 part cement and 1 part sand) mixed with mix quality water The mortar for screed shall be mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity One layer application with 1:2. . screened sand. 2006 Page 355 of Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to lay the floor screed For the vinyl tile and the epoxy floor finishes Reference documents None Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the examination pertaining to the preparatory works for the ready to pour compartments Application After the preparation for the alternate bays or strips of 1500 mm width or as sized on site is ready with all levels. washed sand. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. bonding agent. The concrete surface shall be cleared of all loose particles and cleaned using hard wire brush to ensure enough roughness on the concrete surface The levels up to which the floor screed is to be laid. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. not more than1500mm wide so that alternatively screed could be laid in. shall be profiled by using Mechanical levelling points with steel pipes to maintain levels so that complete compartment is given a proper level The cleaned area shall be soaked with water 24 hours prior to the application of screed. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed board. duly soaked in water for 24 hours and ready for pouring. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Cement. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. . All these statements constitute management documents. The surface shall be kept wet for a period of 3 days and then protected till the floor finishes are laid over the surface Throughout the above operations Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer Wheel barrows Mason’s tools in general Attachment None #141 Buildings Screeds for vinyl and epoxy Floor finishes Top Index Scope Safety Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to lay the floor screed For the vinyl tile and the epoxy floor finishes Reference documents None Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. 2006 Page 356 of After compacting the layer of mortar.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the compacted surface shall be finished by a steel float to achieve a smooth surface ready to receive the vinyl tiles or the epoxy painting floor finishes and then covered with polythene membrane for immediate curing The finished surface shall be permanently cured by adding water soaked hessian after a few hours of finishing and recovered with polythene. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. cleaned.5 cement –screened sand mortar The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 357 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. bonding agent. not more than1500mm wide so that alternatively screed could be laid in. After compacting the layer of mortar. shall be profiled by using Mechanical levelling points with steel pipes to maintain levels so that complete compartment is given a proper level The cleaned area shall be soaked with water 24 hours prior to the application of screed. water Method (Laying floor screed by SEMI DRY method) The floor area to be laid with screed shall be divided in equal or as considered convenient strips / bays. The surface shall be kept wet for a period of 3 days and then protected till the floor finishes are laid over the surface Throughout the above operations Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer Wheel barrows Mason’s tools in general Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Cement. The concrete surface shall be cleared of all loose particles and cleaned using hard wire brush to ensure enough roughness on the concrete surface The levels up to which the floor screed is to be laid. duly soaked in water for 24 hours and ready for pouring. the prepared surface shall be spread with cement slurry ratio 1:1 (1 part cement and 1 part sand) mixed with mix quality water The mortar for screed shall be mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity One layer application with 1:2. . washed sand. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed board. Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the examination pertaining to the preparatory works for the ready to pour compartments Application After the preparation for the alternate bays or strips of 1500 mm width or as sized on site is ready with all levels. the compacted surface shall be finished by a steel float to achieve a smooth surface ready to receive the vinyl tiles or the epoxy painting floor finishes and then covered with polythene membrane for immediate curing The finished surface shall be permanently cured by adding water soaked hessian after a few hours of finishing and recovered with polythene. screened sand. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. bonding agent. All these statements constitute management documents. screened sand. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Scabbling of the concrete surface shall be carried out if so required The concrete surface shall be cleared of all loose particles and cleaned using hard wire brush to ensure sufficient roughness to receive the screed The levels up to which the floor screed is to be laid. washed sand. so that alternatively screed could be laid in. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Cement. The works were executed for major oil companies. water Method (Laying floor screed by SEMI DRY method) The floor area to be laid with screed shall be divided in equal or as considered practicable strips / bays. shall be profiled by using Mechanical levelling points with steel pipes to maintain levels so that complete compartment is given a proper level The cleaned area shall be soaked with water 24 hours prior to the application of screed. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. not more than1500mm wide (may be wider if convenient). 2006 Page 358 of None #142 Buildings Screeds for vinyl and epoxy Floor finishes Top Index Scope Safety Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to lay the floor screed For the vinyl tile and the epoxy floor finishes Reference documents None Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . the compacted surface shall be finished by a steel float to achieve a smooth surface ready to receive the vinyl tiles or the epoxy painting floor finishes and then covered with polythene membrane for immediate curing The finished surface shall be permanently cured by adding water soaked hessian after a few hours of finishing and recovered with polythene sheet. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawn off to the marked level with a screed board. cleaned. the pourable surface shall be spread with cement slurry ratio 1:1 (1 part cement and 1 part sand) mixed with mix quality water The mortar for screed shall be mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity One layer application with 1:2. duly soaked in water for 24 hours and ready for pouring. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. After compacting the layer of mortar. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies.5 cement –screened sand mortar The mix shall be placed in one layer progressively to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The surface shall be kept wet for a period of 3 days and then protected with hard boards spread over till the floor finishes are applied over the surface Throughout the above operations Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted Prior to full-scale commencement of the screeding operation. a sample shall be produced on site in the presence of EPC Contractor representative so that an agreement pertaining to the stated procedures to carry out the screeding and about the Quality could reach Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer Wheel barrows Mason’s tools in general Attachment None #143 Directional boring at 3# locations for 14”desalinated water pipe corniche road North of Operating Authority Top Index Scope Reference documents Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 359 of Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the examination pertaining to the preparatory works for the ‘ready to pour’ compartments Application After the preparation for the alternate bays or strips of 1500 mm width or as sized on site is ready with all levels. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect a full safety standard.3 m below ground. The laying pertaining to the remaining portion of the pipes other than the sleeve shall be carried out by ordinary approved procedures by excavation to the required level. Method The necessary permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. All these statements constitute management documents. Excavation Work PermitA copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site at the location shown on the sketch to be noticeable to all the persons involved A copy shall also be transmitted to EPC Contractor Barricades. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. bedding. bedding. cones.5 m GRP pipe approximately 2. compaction and the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested accordingly after the pipes are laid Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. . shall be installed as required at the pits for a complete safety. markers. 1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert. and floodlights etc.5 m dia 2 m from the culvert and 1 pipe 1 m dia about 3.3 m long has to pass beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) . Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area.5 m below the existing ground.1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert & the existing 1. the night-lights. 2006 Page 360 of Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the directional boring under the existing culverts to facilitate to lay the sleeves for pipe lines 1 # 14” Desalinated Water at 3 # locations Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained Trial pits shall be made manually on both ends of the proposed boring to ascertain the availability of the existing services and protect these from any damage and shall also be used for the bentonite trial at the receiving end Case 1 Existing 1 box culvert and a 14” dia pipe about 1 m from culvert A sleeve 5 m long of required material dia 20 “is to be laid beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section). The laying pertaining to the remaining portion of the pipes other than the sleeve shall be carried out by ordinary approved procedures by excavation to the required level. . compaction and the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested accordingly Case 2 Existing 1 box culvert and 1 pipe 1.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 4 # existing services also have been exposed A sleeve 7. 3 m from the existing ground level so that the top of the pipes is 1. The pipes shall then be raised over the existing 2 #s 6” dia ABB cooling water lines at about 2. 2006 Page 361 of Case 3 Existing 1 box culvert and 2 # 60” dia ABB Cooling water pipe laying at about 10 m from the culvert is in progress. . sufficient excavated space is available to lower the sleeve in to pull into the bore The excavated trench does not show any sign of water therefore.excavation Method which does not allow collapsing of the ground surface M / S Ditch Witch shall carry out the Directional Boring employing Jet Trac Directional Boring equipment according to their approved method statement Refer to the attached sketches based on the Ditch Witch guidelines Bentonite is pure clay to be used as a fluid / slurry formed by mixing water. no de watering shall be carried out Excavation shall be carried out according to the requirement The boring shall be carried out in stages. The laying pertaining to the remaining portion of the pipes other than the sleeve shall be carried out by ordinary approved procedures by excavation to the required level. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. bedding. Compactor Attachment Cross-Section Sketches showing 3 # cases Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.2 m from the ground level. The works were executed for major oil companies. First stageThe sleeve is in the trench on one end and the reamer fully underground. All these statements constitute management documents. The work for the portion to cross over ABB pipes shall be carried out after the ABB pipes are laid and backfilled On site. Proposed 14 “ Desalinated water pipe has to cross over ABB pipes keeping 1 m apart vertically A sleeve 5 m long has to pass beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. It shall be used to cool the drill bit and to lubricate the drill area The material displaced by the head / sleeves shall be discharged at the receiving end in the receiving pit and removed from the site All fully trained operators shall be used on the job Equipment Jet Track Unit (complete package). compaction and the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested accordingly. Crane. Second stageThe sleeve is partly pulled in and the reamer partly withdrawn Third stageThe sleeve further pulled and the reamer withdrawn accordingly Fourth stageFull portion of the sleeve is underground in the bore and the reamer out The excavated trenches on both ends shall be backfilled by Civil Contractor according to the specification requirement and the required tests carried out The reinstatement of the effected services shall be carried out after the directional boring is completed Directional Boring – A non. All these statements constitute management documents. shall be installed as required at the pits for a complete safety. 1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect a full safety standard. and floodlights etc. the night-lights.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . The laying pertaining to the remaining portion of the pipes other than the Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained Trial pits shall be made manually on both ends of the proposed boring to ascertain the availability of the existing services and protect these from any damage and shall also be used for the bentonite trial at the receiving end Case 1 Existing 1 box culvert and a 14” dia pipe about 1 m from culvert A sleeve 5 m long of required material dia 20 “is to be laid beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section). Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 362 of #144 Directional boring at 3# locations for 14”desalinated water pipe corniche road North of Operating Authority Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the directional boring under the existing culverts to facilitate to lay the sleeves for pipe lines 1 # 14” Desalinated Water at 3 # locations Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Method The necessary permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. cones. markers. Excavation Work PermitA copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site at the location shown on the sketch to be noticeable to all the persons involved A copy shall also be transmitted to EPC Contractor Barricades. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 363 of sleeve shall be carried out by ordinary approved procedures by excavation to the required level, bedding, compaction and the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested accordingly Case 2 Existing 1 box culvert and 1 pipe 1.5 m dia 2 m from the culvert and 1 pipe 1 m dia about 3.3 m below ground. 4 # existing services also have been exposed A sleeve 7.3 m long has to pass beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) ,1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert & the existing 1.5 m GRP pipe approximately 2.5 m below the existing ground. . The laying pertaining to the remaining portion of the pipes other than the sleeve shall be carried out by ordinary approved procedures by excavation to the required level, bedding, compaction and the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested accordingly after the pipes are laid Case 3 Existing 1 box culvert and 2 # 60” dia ABB Cooling water pipe laying at about 10 m from the culvert is in progress. Proposed 14 “ Desalinated water pipe has to cross over ABB pipes keeping 1 m apart vertically A sleeve 5 m long has to pass beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert. The pipes shall then be raised over the existing 2 #s 60” dia ABB cooling water lines at about 2. 3 m from the existing ground level so that the top of the pipes is 1.2 m from the ground level. The laying pertaining to the remaining portion of the pipes other than the sleeve shall be carried out by ordinary approved procedures by excavation to the required level, bedding, compaction and the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested accordingly. The work for the portion to cross over ABB pipes shall be carried out after the ABB pipes are laid and backfilled On site, sufficient excavated space is available to lower the sleeve in to pull into the bore De watering shall be carried out as per specification if necessary Excavation shall be carried out according to the requirement The boring shall be carried out in stages. First stageThe sleeve is in the trench on one end and the reamer fully underground. Second stageThe sleeve is partly pulled in and the reamer partly withdrawn Third stageThe sleeve further pulled and the reamer withdrawn accordingly Fourth stageFull portion of the sleeve is underground in the bore and the reamer out The excavated trenches on both ends shall be backfilled by Civil Contractor according to the specification requirement and the required tests carried out The reinstatement of the effected services shall be carried out after the directional boring is completed Directional Boring – A non- excavation Method which does not allow collapsing of the ground surface M / S Ditch Witch shall carry out the Directional Boring employing Jet Trac Directional Boring equipment according to their approved method statement Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 364 of Refer to the attached sketches based on the Ditch Witch guidelines Bentonite is pure clay to be used as a fluid / slurry formed by mixing water. It shall be used to cool the drill bit and to lubricate the drill area The material displaced by the head / sleeves shall be discharged at the receiving end in the receiving pit and removed from the site All fully trained operators shall be used on the job Equipment Jet Track Unit (complete package), Crane, Compactor Attachment Cross-Section Sketches showing 3 # cases #145 Directional boring at 3# locations for 14”desalinated water pipe corniche road North of gup Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the directional boring under the existing culverts to facilitate to lay the sleeves for pipe lines 1 # 14” Desalinated Water at 3 # locations. The concrete culverts are not in good condition and directional drilling or thrust bore is the method preferred by Operator (RRD) for carrying out this work Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area, therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect a full safety standard. Excavation Work PermitA copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site at the location shown on the sketch to be noticeable to all the persons involved A copy shall also be transmitted to EPC Contractor Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 365 of Barricades, cones, markers, the night-lights, and floodlights etc. shall be installed as required at the works for complete safety. Method The necessary permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained Trial pits shall be made manually on both ends of the proposed boring to check for existing services and protect these from any damage and shall also be used for the bentonite trial at the receiving end Case 1 Existing 1 box culvert and a 14” dia pipe about 1 m from culvert A carbon steel sleeve 5 m long of dia 20 “is to be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section), 1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert. The 14” dia GRE pipe shall then pass through the installed sleeve Case 2 Existing 1 box culvert and 1 pipe 1.5 m dia 2 m from the culvert and 1 pipe 1 m dia about 3.3 m below ground. 4 # existing services A sleeve 7.3 m long shall be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section), 1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the obstructions approximately 2.5 m below the existing ground. The 14” dia GRE pipe shall then pass through the installed sleeve Case 3 Existing 1 box culvert A sleeve 5 m long shall be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert. On site, sufficient excavated space is available to lower the sleeve in to pull into the bore The excavated trench does not show any sign of water therefore, no de watering shall be carried out Excavation shall be carried out according to the requirement The boring shall be carried out in stages. First stageThe sleeve is in the trench on one end and the reamer fully underground. Second stageThe sleeve is partly pulled in and the reamer partly withdrawn Third stageThe sleeve further pulled and the reamer withdrawn accordingly Fourth stageFull portion of the sleeve is underground in the bore and the reamer out The excavated trenches on both ends shall be backfilled by Civil Contractor according to the specification requirement and the required tests carried out The reinstatement of the effected services shall be carried out after the directional boring is completed Directional Boring – A non- excavation Method which does not allow collapsing of the ground surface Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 366 of M / S Ditch Witch shall carry out the Directional Boring employing Jet Trac Directional Boring equipment according to their approved method statement Refer to the attached sketches based on the Ditch Witch guidelines Bentonite is pure clay to be used as a fluid / slurry formed by mixing water. It shall be used to cool the drill bit and to lubricate the drill area The material displaced by the head / sleeves shall be discharged at the receiving end in the receiving pit and removed from the site All fully trained operators shall be used on the job Major Equipment Jet Track Unit (complete package), Crane, Compactor Attachment Cross-Section Sketches showing 3 # cases #146 Directional boring at 3# locations for 14”desalinated water pipe corniche road North of gup Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the directional boring under the existing culverts to facilitate to lay the sleeves for pipe lines 1 # 14” Desalinated Water at 3 # locations. The concrete culverts are not in good condition and directional drilling or thrust bore is the method preferred by Operator (RRD) for carrying out this work Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area, therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect a full safety standard. Excavation Work PermitA copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site at the location shown on the sketch to be noticeable to all the persons involved Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 367 of A copy shall also be transmitted to EPC Contractor Barricades, cones, markers, the night-lights, and floodlights etc. shall be installed as required at the works for complete safety. Method The necessary permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained Trial pits shall be made manually on both ends of the proposed boring to check for existing services and protect these from any damage and shall also be used for the bentonite trial at the receiving end Case 1 Existing 1 box culvert and a 14” dia pipe about 1 m from culvert A carbon steel sleeve 5 m long of dia 20 “is to be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section), 1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert. The 14” dia GRE pipe shall then pass through the installed sleeve Case 2 Existing 1 box culvert and 1 pipe 1.5 m dia 2 m from the culvert and 1 pipe 1 m dia about 3.3 m below ground. 4 # existing services A sleeve 7.3 m long shall be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section), 1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the obstructions approximately 2.5 m below the existing ground. The 14” dia GRE pipe shall then pass through the installed sleeve Case 3 Existing 1 box culvert A sleeve 5 m long shall be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert. On site, sufficient excavated space is available to lower the sleeve in to pull into the bore Dewatering shall be carried out as per specification if necessary Excavation shall be carried out according to the requirement The boring shall be carried out in stages. First stageThe sleeve is in the trench on one end and the reamer fully underground. Second stageThe sleeve is partly pulled in and the reamer partly withdrawn Third stageThe sleeve further pulled and the reamer withdrawn accordingly Fourth stageFull portion of the sleeve is underground in the bore and the reamer out The excavated trenches on both ends shall be backfilled by Civil Contractor according to the specification requirement and the required tests carried out The reinstatement of the effected services shall be carried out after the directional boring is completed Directional Boring – A non- excavation Method which does not allow collapsing of the ground surface Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 368 of M / S Ditch Witch shall carry out the Directional Boring employing Jet Trac Directional Boring equipment according to their approved method statement Refer to the attached sketches based on the Ditch Witch guidelines Bentonite is pure clay to be used as a fluid / slurry formed by mixing water. It shall be used to cool the drill bit and to lubricate the drill area The material displaced by the head / sleeves shall be discharged at the receiving end in the receiving pit and removed from the site All fully trained operators shall be used on the job Major Equipment Jet Track Unit (complete package), Crane, Compactor Attachment Cross-Section Sketches showing 3 # cases #147 Epoxy skirting in Central control building & sub stations on dry lining Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out epoxy skirting on dry lining in areas not exposed to impact or abuse Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Master Builders Technologies Concresive 1020 primer Concresive 2020 Epoxy Mortar Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 369 of Method Surface Preparation Surface shall be cleaned of all dust and dirt and other contaminants A 5 mm groove shall be formed on the dry lining to cove in the skirting Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the surface is clean and contaminants free Primer Coat Mixing of the base and reactor components shall be carried out in a vessel using an electric operated slow speed drill with a suitable paddle attachment making sure that the paddle reaches to the bottom and sides of the vessel and mixing carried out for 1 to 2minutes until a uniform consistency and colour is achieved Application The mixed material shall be applied to the surface using a stiff brush according to the stated coverage on the manufacturer’s datasheet High Build Epoxy Resin Mortar It is essential to apply the mortar while the primer being tacky otherwise a second priming coat shall be applied Thorough mixed mortar according to the manufacturer’s instruction shall be applied in a 3 mm layer to the primed surface with steel trowel pressed well into the surface compacting to ensure positive and permanent adhesion. Finishing shall be carried out by a steel trowel to bring the resin to the surface Mastertop Resin as suggested by the manufacturer is not applicable in this case Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Equipment Mixing Vessel Electric drill with paddle attachment Stiff brush Steel trowel Attachment MBT method statement #148 Epoxy skirting on dry lining Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 370 of Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out epoxy skirting on dry lining in areas not exposed to impact or abuse Ref Specs Outline building specification Page Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard . MBT instructions shall be adhered strictly Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Master Builders Technologies Concresive 2200 Epoxy Mortar 3mm thick ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ resin without aggregate component Method A sample was prepared on site in Central Control Building Battery Room approved by EPC Contractor Surface Preparation Sandpaper shall be rubbed lightly on the acrylic wall coating followed by wiping with a clean cloth to remove any residual dust & laitance Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the surface is clean and contaminants free High Build Epoxy Resin Mortar Concresive 2200 Base and the reactor components shall be mixed together using a trowel The mixed material shall be applied in 3mm thickness on the surface to the required level forming cove using the minimum of solvent on the trowel to aid workability Surface shall be finished smooth using a paint brush dipped in cleaning solvent # 2 Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations An allowance of 24 hours for curing shall be given prior to overcoating with ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ flooring compound using only resin without aggregate component Overcoating with Mastertop ‘1230is’ Resin (500 microns) The surface of the cured Concresive shall be rubbed lightly with sandpaper to remove any rough edges Areas prone to splashing with wet resin shall be protected and the free edges masked with 50mm wide tape The surface shall be sealed with Mastertop 1200 resin diluted with 5 % volume of solvent # 2 prior to applying ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ resin as follows Reactor shall be poured into base and mixed together for 1-2 minutes using a slow speed drill fitted with a spiral mixer, then solvent added and mixed for 1 minute Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page 371 of The mixed material shall be applied on the surface ensuring total coverage using a spiked roller. Sealer coat shall be allowed to cure to a tackfree state prior to applying ‘Mastercoat 1230 is’ resin coating Reactor B and Base A shall be poured into a suitable mixer and mixed together using a slow speed drill fitted with a suitable mixing paddle and mixed for about half a minute before ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ filler is added keeping the mixing on until a uniform colour is obtained free of streaks or lumps of unmixed filler Smooth Finish For the base coat ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ shall be applied @ 1.1 liter per m2. For the second coat ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ shall be mixed and applied @ 0.4 liter per m2 48 hours curing allowance shall be given Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Equipment Mixing Vessel, Electric drill with paddle attachment, Notched trowel, Soft brush, Attachment MBT method statement ref #149 Epoxy skirting on dry lining Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out epoxy skirting on dry lining in areas not exposed to impact or abuse Ref Specs Outline building specification Page Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard. MBT instructions shall be adhered strictly Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Master Builders Technologies Concresive 2200 Epoxy Mortar 3mm thick ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ resin without aggregate component Method A sample was prepared on site in Central Control Building Battery Room for inspection and acceptance by EPC Contractor Civil Contractor shall co-ordinate with EPC Contractor regarding moving of any UPS batteries that may be required prior to carrying out any skirting Surface Preparation Sandpaper shall be rubbed lightly on the acrylic wall coating followed by wiping with a clean cloth to remove any residual dust & laitance Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the surface is clean and contaminants free High Build Epoxy Resin Mortar Concresive 2200 Base and the reactor components shall be mixed together using a trowel The mixed material shall be applied in 3mm thickness on the surface to the required level forming cove using the minimum of solvent on the trowel to aid workability Surface shall be finished smooth using a paint brush dipped in cleaning solvent # 2 Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations An allowance of 24 hours for curing shall be given prior to overcoating with ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ flooring compound using only resin without aggregate component Overcoating with Mastertop ‘1230is’ Resin (500 microns) The surface of the cured Concresive shall be rubbed lightly with sandpaper to remove any rough edges Areas prone to splashing with wet resin shall be protected and the free edges masked with 50mm wide tape The surface shall be sealed with Mastertop 1200 resin diluted with 5 % volume of solvent # 2 prior to applying ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ resin as follows Reactor shall be poured into base and mixed together for 1-2 minutes using a slow speed drill fitted with a spiral mixer.1 liter per m2. then solvent added and mixed for 1 minute The mixed material shall be applied on the surface ensuring total coverage using a spiked roller. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 372 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. . Sealer coat shall be allowed to cure to a tackfree state prior to applying ‘Mastercoat 1230 is’ resin coating Reactor B and Base A shall be poured into a suitable mixer and mixed together using a slow speed drill fitted with a suitable mixing paddle and mixed for about half a minute before ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ filler is added keeping the mixing on until a uniform colour is obtained free of streaks or lumps of unmixed filler Smooth Finish For the base coat ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ shall be applied @ 1. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 373 of For the second coat ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ shall be mixed and applied @ 0. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.4 liter per m2 48 hours curing allowance shall be given Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Equipment Mixing Vessel. Soft brush. Electric drill with paddle attachment. Attachment MBT method statement ref RF / 2833 / 2000 / SRH / NH / 30. .10. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Bitumen MC1 Asphalt Concrete for Base / Under Course Tack Coat SS1h Asphalt Concrete for Wearing Course Method Traffic Management Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard. The works were executed for major oil companies.2000 #150 Road surface Reinstatement over box culvert crossings Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the reinstatement to the existing road surfaces removed from the crossings effected portions pertaining to Roads Avenue C. GUP Entrance etc. D. Notched trowel. Reference: Specification Section Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. First Street. one Pneumatic Tyre roller and one 2-axle Tandem rollers 8 to 10 tonnes capacity according to the specified procedures giving 6 passes overlapping the previous pass by 300mm of the previous trip using sufficient oil or water to moisten the wheels and fully compacted before asphalt concrete reaches 80 C An allowance for one hour shall be given to commence to lay the Wearing course after the base course is compacted by rolling Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Tack / Seal Coat using SS1h An application of the tack coat @ 0. The works were executed for major oil companies. testing and preparation for the primer The approved compacted surface shall be made ready for applying MC1 primer Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the suitability of the surface to receive the primer Primer shall be sprayed by tanker on the complete surface @ 0. Pressure boom. sand shall be used to blot the excessive bitumen prior to commence to lay the Base / Under course asphalt concrete 60 mm Thick Base / Under Course Asphalt Concrete Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the suitability of the primed surface to receive asphalt concrete Asphalt concrete shall be laid on the approved surface to the prepared profile so that a uniform 60 mm compacted thickness is obtained after compaction by rolling After spreading the material. All these statements constitute management documents. Road Rollers Attachment None Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.4 litres / sqm The surface shall be left for such time until the material dries out usually 24 hours post application otherwise. 2006 Page 374 of RRD Approved Traffic Management Scheme shall be implemented to the requirement Surface Preparation Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the backfill clearance Primer The portion of the backfilled earth 120mm deep shall be excavated from the existing road surface level followed by compaction.4 to 0.7 litres / sqm shall be carried out on the rolled surface of the Base / Under Course Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the correct Base Course surface profile and the Tack Coat acceptability 60mm Wearing Surface Course Asphalt Concrete shall be laid for the Wearing coat also in a similar manner ensuring that the top of the compacted material is at the same level as the top of the existing road surface on both sides of the culvert Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the surface is to the acceptable profile and compaction is carried out to the standards The area shall be fully cleared to the normal requirement The Traffic management scheme shall be removed and normal traffic restored Equipment Bitumen Tanker. the rolling shall be carried out by one 3 wheel roller. .8 to 1. Asphalt Concrete Spreader and paver.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material New stainless steel lift panel from OTIS Method New panel to be fixed over the damaged one shall be supplied by the factory Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the new panel adheres to the requirement This panel shall be placed over the existing damaged panel to check the compatibility to fixing Then the new panel shall be removed & glue applied on both surfaces to be adhered Glue shall be allowed to dry for a few minutes and then both surfaces shall be bonded together The protection film shall then be removed from the panel and surface cleaned using soft cotton cloth Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the new panel has been fixed properly to the damaged one Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum acceptable standard Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 375 of #151 Repair to lift Cladding panel Administration building Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to rectify the stainless cladding lift panel in the Administration Building Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Trisomet. Trisomet for Roof Panels. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. Wall Panels.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the structural items including the door posts and parapet etc shall be lined and levelled properly to the requirement within acceptable tolerances Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 376 of Equipment Attachment OTIS method statement #152 Fixing sheeting panels Wall & roof cladding Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to fix the roof and the wall panels for various structures to be cladded Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk.Corrugated Cladding Work shall be carried out by M / S Khalidiya Intersystems Method Preparation Prior to the commencement of the sheeting operations.by European Profiles (BS / HHR) Three types of panels shall be used as follows Maintenance Building-Roof Panels.Formawall Flat Car Parks. All these statements constitute management documents.Formawall for wall panels. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum acceptable standard Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. . Profile EP3-Corrugated steel sheet (Single Skin). Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material MAR 120. The works were executed for major oil companies. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. levelled and fixed to the specified requirement Fixing Roof Panels Valley gutters shall be fixed and aligned Internal ridge flashing shall be fixed in position Insulated Trisomet panels shall be fixed starting from the valley and rising to the ridge and all fixings fastened on the crown All end laps shall be sealed with mastic to prevent capillary humidity rise Procedure shall be repeated for the parapet wall by fixing and aligning the gutter External ridge flashing shall be fixed The entire roof shall be brush cleaned and colour caps fixed Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Fixing Formawall Flat Panels First Tier Drip flashing shall be fixed at the base of the wall to be used as a straight datum line The first formawall vertical panel shall be fixed to true plumb and fastened by steel screws throughout the joints and the next panel fixed along side of the first panel by providing a tight vertical joint & the process repeated till the end is reached Special flashing shall be fixed to the entire length of the first tier of vertical panels Second Tier The second tier of the blue panels shall be fixed in the same manner as the lower panel The procedure shall continue till all the sides are completed Special corner flashing shall be used internally and externally to provide an aesthetic finish at the corner joints Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Car Park Corrugated cladding Single long panel shall be fixed fastened to the straight end of the structure through the crown with one and a half profile overlapped on sides and mastic inserted between the sheets The procedure shall be continued to the curve where sheets are to be racked and cut to provide roof curvature The entire roof shall be brush cleaned and colour caps inserted Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Equipment Attachment Khalidiya method statement ref MAR approval reference #153 Fixing sheeting panels Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 377 of Wind brace clips shall be removed and the building cleaned Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the structural elements are aligned. . The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 378 of Wall & roof cladding Top Index Scope Reference documents Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to fix the roof and the wall metal panels for various structures to be cladded Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. levelled and fixed to the specified requirement Installation shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions in specification Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Material MAR Formawall for wall panels.Corrugated Cladding Work shall be carried out by M / S Khalidiya Intersystems Method Preparation Prior to the commencement of the sheeting operations.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.e Check List. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum acceptable standard Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Profile EP3-Corrugated steel sheet (Single Skin). Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Reference Specification (Metals) for fasteners.Formawall Flat Car Parks. Trisomet for Roof Panels. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents.by European Profiles (BS / HHR) Three types of panels shall be used as follows Maintenance Building-Roof Panels.Trisomet. the structural items including the door posts and parapet etc shall be lined and levelled properly to the requirement within acceptable tolerances Wind brace clips shall be removed and the building cleaned All necessary documentation i. Wall Panels. RFI etc shall be completed and submitted prior to the work commencement Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the structural elements are aligned. .2-83 “Field check of Metal Curtain Walls for water leakage” on the designated area Site Clearance All debris & excess material shall be removed making sure no weep holes and the drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dust and the sealants Equipment Man Lift Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. dirt etc & sealed to the manufacturer’s instructions with mastic to prevent capillary humidity rise Procedure shall be repeated for the parapet wall by fixing and aligning the gutter External ridge flashing shall be fixed The entire roof shall be brush cleaned and colour caps fixed Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to the ITP requirements Fixing Formawall Flat Panels First Tier Drip flashing shall be fixed at the base of the wall to be used as a straight datum line The first formawall vertical panel shall be fixed to true plumb and fastened by steel screws throughout the joints and the next panel fixed along side of the first panel by providing a tight vertical joint & the process repeated till the end is reached Special flashing shall be fixed to the entire length of the first tier of vertical panels Second Tier The second tier of the blue panels shall be fixed in the same manner as the lower panel The procedure shall continue till all the sides are completed Special corner flashing shall be used internally and externally to provide an aesthetic finish at the corner joints Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to the ITP requirements Car Park Corrugated cladding Single long panel shall be fixed & fastened to the straight end of the structure through the crown with one and a half profile overlapped on sides and mastic inserted between the sheets The procedure shall be continued to the curve where sheets are to be racked and cut to provide roof curvature The entire roof shall be brush cleaned and colour caps inserted Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Walls Field Check for water leakage Upon completion of the installation the wall shall be checked for Water Penetration in accordance with AAMA standard 501. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 379 of Fixing Roof Panels Valley gutters shall be fixed and aligned Internal ridge flashing shall be fixed in position Insulated Trisomet panels shall be fixed starting from the valley. The works were executed for major oil companies. rising to the ridge and all fixings fastened on the crown to the specification requirement All end laps shall be cleaned of all dust.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . Reporting of incidents Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged.first street For laying 2 # 100 mm sleeves For telephone cables Top Index Scope Safety Method including traffic management scheme Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation & lay the sleeves at the road crossings meant for the 2 # Telephone Cables Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. 2006 Page 380 of Electric Drills Attachment M / S Khalidiya method statement ref MAR approval reference Note-QA Documentation Formats shall be submitted separately #154 Road crossing At fire station. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels The formation shall be prepared to receive the bedding concrete Civil Contractor QC Inspections shall be conducted to approve the formation 100mm thick bedding Concrete shall be poured & cured according to the approved procedures 2 # 100 mm  PVC sleeves shall be laid to the exact locations and the levels Civil Contractor QC Inspections shall be conducted to approve the levels and the alignment Haunch concrete shall be carried out according to the standard details followed by the curing to the approved procedures Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or come out of the trench. Hand Excavation. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. All these statements constitute management documents. No oil spillage shall be allowed. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. markers. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. 2006 Page 381 of Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. A traffic management scheme shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch subject to RRD approval Drawing reference – The road shall be excavated in one instance by diverting the traffic to North as shown Procedures Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively The asphalt pertaining to the crossing portion shall be removed Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. and floodlights etc. cones. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation. . The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. the night-lights.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Road Rollers etc. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. wall and base slab movement joints due to the structural slide Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard. The works were executed for major oil companies. Concrete Trucks. Compressor.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Asphalt finisher. wall & base slab Top Index Scope Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the repair to the gaps created at the roof. All these statements constitute management documents. All safety means recommended by the manufacturer MBT as well as required to be adopted by the regulations shall be adhered to Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Jack Hammer. Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services Major Equipment Excavator. Compactors. Attachment Sketch showing the Traffic Management Scheme #155 Sea water surge basin Closing the structural gap On the roof. Dumper Trucks. Vibrators. Concrete Pump. 2006 Page 382 of Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out up to the road asphalt bottom level according to specifications The removed asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt concrete to the approved procedures The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and obstructions. . the above operations shall be repeated for the base slab with the exception of the soffit forms An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout these operations Wall Joint Gap Similarly. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 383 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Concresive 1320 from MBT Method Roof Slab Joint Gap The soffit portion of the joint shall be closed by using a form provided with a polystyrene baking rod to suit the sealant profile The internal surface and the external edges shall be cleaned using compressed air and the hard brush An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure the cleanliness and that the joint is ready to receive the material The material Concresive 1320 shall be prepared according to the manufacturer’s instructions and poured into the prepared space between the compressed filler and filled fully to the required level A bead shall be used to render a profile to suit the sealant Next day the form shall be removed and the sealant applied to the required profile giving the joint a smooth face An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Base Slab Joint Gap Similarly. the above operations shall be repeated for the wall with the exception of the soffit form but side forms in stages shall be erected An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout these operations Major Equipment Attachment Catalogue Page Concresive 1320 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. dry baseboard or ground inside a shelter to minimise contamination and wind effect It shall be ensured that the control box voltage is compatible with fitting Alignment / restraining clamps shall be used Pipe ends shall be cut square for electrofusion sockets Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . All safety means recommended by the manufacturer COSMOPLAST (refer to page 14 & 35 on the catalogue) as well as required to be adopted by the regulations shall be adhered to Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Pipes & fittings (COSMOPLAST) Method Electrofusion-Precautions A check shall be made that the pipes to be joined are of the same size to Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) and material. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 384 of #156 Hdpe pipes Butt fusion Top Index Scope Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the welding by fusion at joints between the HDPE pipes using COSMOPLAST advanced PE jointing technology Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Only compatible material shall be used The butt fusion machine shall be sited on a suitable clean. Heater plate should be cleaned or washed using only clean and cold water and dried with a clean lint free cloth or paper towel A check shall be made to ascertain that the trimmer is clean with undamaged blades in good condition It shall be ensured that clamp liners and securing screws of the correct size are available for the size of pipe to be joined. A check shall be made to ensure that the heater plate is at correct temperature Correct parameters shall be selected for the pipes to be joined Making the Joint In an emergency the ‘red stop reset button’ when put off shall stop all automatic cycles and set the machine safe and return to start of the cycle Dummy weld shall be made to remove any fine particles from the heater plate before every welding session. . All these statements constitute management documents. chassis and trimmer cables shall be connected to the computer After ensuring that hydraulic connections are clean. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 385 of Pipe / or spigot surfaces shall be scraped fully & surfaces & fittings kept clean It shall be ensured that correct fusion & cooling times are adhered to The joint shall be assembled & fused immediately after scraping pipe The joint shall be completed in one go The fitting shall not be allowed to be out of protective bags The dirty fittings shall not be used Prepared pipe surfaces shall not be touched Assemblies shall not be allowed to get damp before joining During welding cycle the weld shall not be touched The joint shall not be removed from the clamp unless full cooling time has elapsed The integral cutter shall not be removed from the saddle once the main has been drilled Pre jointing checks The regularly serviced equipment in good condition only shall be used It shall be ensured that correct joining parameters for the machine and the pipe being welded are known and clearly understood It shall be ensured that the generator has sufficient quantity of fuel for the duration of the programmed work.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. connection shall be made to the controller Generator shall be started & computer connected to the generator The pipe to be connected shall be selected The data shall be confirmed Pipe Preparation Pipe Preparation shall be carried out according to the description given on page on the manufacturer’s catalogue Making the weld Making the weld shall be carried out according to the description on page on the manufacturer’s catalogue Quality checks shall be conducted according to the description on page Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Lines must be clean and should sit fully in the pipe clamps to ensure correct alignment. after changing from one pipe size to another & also if heater has been allowed to cool Connection & Pipe selection Heater. For sockets the joint shall be cut out and use another fitting For saddles the main shall not be taped but a repeat weld carried out using a new fitting at least 200mm from the failed joint Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations according to the ITP and procedural requirements Major Equipment Generator. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Indelible Marker pen Attachment Cosmoplast Method Statement # Road crossings To construct box culverts ofh 2 & 3 Corniche road Ethylene export Top Index Scope Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of cast in situ culverts at road crossings for OFH 2 . Restraining & alignment equipment. Electrofusion control box. 2006 Page 386 of All Do’s described on page 13 shall be followed and don’ts on page 14 avoided Joint assembly preparation shall be carried out to description on page Pressure testing of joint shall be conducted to description on page Quality Check Quality shall be checked to description on page Check (Butt Fusion) That the fusion indicators have risen while fitted That no melted material or wire has exuded from the fitting That the pipe has not moved from the fitting That the area around the joint is clean Evidence of scraping shall be checked That the saddles are square on pipe That the print out is taken from control box and result checked In case the weld fails any of these checks. Pipe cutter. . 4 & 5 on Corniche Road Safety Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Scraping equipment. Welding tent / shelter & ground sheet.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. No oil spillage shall be allowed. cones. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert / cover units. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. proper care has to be exercised during raising and installing / downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. markers. and floodlights etc. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. the night-lights. 2006 Page 387 of Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. . therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Hand Excavation.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench. covers and sleepers are heavy in load. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. Drawing reference – Procedures For culvert OFH 3 the traffic scheme shall be implemented subject to the RRD approval Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. shall be carried out according to the drawings and approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members for sleepers and the culvert covers and 75 mm sling holes filled in with concrete The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt according to approved procedures Access box out shall be closed with concrete after the pipes are laid 8 mm-galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details. protection membrane application. Compressor. Road Rollers Attachment None #158 Road crossings To install culverts ofh 4 & 5 Corniche road ethylene export Top Index Scope Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. curing etc all shall be carried out in different stages according to the approved procedures.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Compactors. Asphalt finisher. . fixing steps etc. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culvert shall be carried out The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying cast in situ culverts i. All these statements constitute management documents. preparatory form work. 2006 Page 388 of The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details Major Equipment Excavator. re-bar placing . concrete pouring . placing covers.e laying blinding concrete. Jack Hammer. Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above construction stages according to the check lists and the ITPs requirement Laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels. Dumper trucks. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. All these statements constitute management documents. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. No oil spillage shall be allowed. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. Hand Excavation.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. markers.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench. 2006 Page 389 of Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation and installation of pre cast culverts at the road crossings Corniche Road Culverts OFH & for Ethylene Exports Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. The works were executed for major oil companies.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. the night-lights. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. cones. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. and floodlights etc.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details Major Equipment Excavator. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. shall be carried out according to the drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members 75 mm dia Holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled in with concrete In addition. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert units. Asphalt finisher. one access boxout on both ends shall be provided to design details The diverted services shall be reinstated Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt Removed / Preserved trees shall be replanted & all landscaping reinstated to RRD / GUP satisfaction 8 mm-galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to design details. 2006 Page 390 of The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culvert shall be carried out The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culvert including the laying of pipe sleepers anchored with standard dowels. Road Rollers Attachment None #159 Mdpe drinking water line – ny lines Top Index Scope Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Dumper trucks. covers and sleepers are heavy in load. . The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. fixing steps etc. Compressor. Compactors. covers. Jack Hammer. proper care has to be exercised during raising and installing / downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. Drawing reference – Procedures Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. 2006 Page 391 of Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the testing of MDPE water line – NY line Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. Hand Excavation. . In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. the night-lights. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. and floodlights etc. cones. No oil spillage shall be allowed. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. markers. All these statements constitute management documents. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 4. II Hydrotest Preparation 1. with a manifold on which a pressure safety valve adjusted at 1. where only designated personnel shall have access. During the following time periods. The pressure test pump. Venting facilities: All steel blind flanges shall be provided with bleed valves. Joints shall not be backfilled. that the hydrotest package checklist points have been verified and that the line is released for hydrotest and all safety precautions are taken. 5.2 30 minutes stand-up for stabilisation and monitoring shall be done for every 5 bar G. shade etc. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation. . proper care has to be exercised during raising and installing / downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the relevant safety measures Method Pretesting Preparation It is deemed that the line shall have been kept clean during storage and construction by keeping the open ends capped. Calibrated pressure gauge ranging from 0 to 25 bar G.1 The start time should be recorded. 7. covers and sleepers are heavy in load. The filling of sloped lines shall be done from the lowest point. 6. The works were executed for major oil companies. make up dummy spools shall be installed.5 times the length of the test pressure hose between pump and blind flange. 8. a taped off area shall be delimited around the test pump. Pressure Setting Testing 5 hours for Dias up to 4” b. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Pre cast members Since pre cast culvert units. Main Pressure Testing The 1. Once closed the pressure shall be taken up to the field hydrotesting pressure of 1.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the diameter of this area shall be 1. shall be installed on the line. All high points shall have a venting facility.5 times the piping design pressure shall be connected. The main blind flange shall be fitted inter alia. It is important that the backfill and compaction of the line is done according to the installation procedures. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. vents should be closed only when clear water with no air bubbles come through the vent. Any required temporary piping facilities. 2006 Page 392 of The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. 8. The pressure hose shall be connected to the blind flange manifold through a NPT connector. All these statements constitute management documents. Only when all vents are closed should the filling pump stopped. a triplex pump model shall be started and vents reopened to ensure any remaining air in the pipe escapes. 3 hours for Dias up to 4” 8. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.5 times maximum design pressure must be held for the following duration.5 times the design pressure. a. They must have valid calibration certificate. as this shall prevent the line from moving during pressuring as well as as providing protection against impacts. The line shall be filled with water the previous day to testing to allow for thermal stabilization over-night. 3. 2. The filling shall be done with all vents open. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. Personal movement shall be kept to a minimum Heavy equipment circulation shall be avoided. The piping systems are designed to withstand 1.5 times the design pressure of the pipes and fittings. Attachment Test Pack format. 9. The pressure may then be slowly released and the line gravity drained back. If the pressure abnormally drops during the testing. The works were executed for major oil companies.3 bar G / 1000 m of line. the safety valve shall release water which shall be kept for re-pumping at the end of the test period. the pumping may be continued until the leak is detected. 12. utmost care shall be taken to avoid damage or shock to the lines. 10. indicating a leak. The leak shall then be repaired and after depressurising and draining the line and then procedures 2 to 11 shall be followed. No loose rocks or bounders shall be closer that 1 (one) meter from the trench edges.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The hydrotest package shall be submitted in advance for COMPANY / EPC Contractor’s review.4 At 1. All civil works shall be stopped on the line. Reference Documents CENTRIA Drawings – CR-56 Roofing / Single Skin Definitions Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The pressure & temperature shall be monitored. After the holding time. NOTES: During stages 10 to 15.5 operating pressure the starting time shall be logged. #160 Roof & side cladding – plant area Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Scope The purpose of this Method Statement is to define the sequence and methodology that shall be implemented for the installation of the Roof and Side cladding on the mentioned structures. if no pressure drop exceeding 0. 13. 2006 Page 393 of 8. The required representatives shall complete and sign all paper work pertaining to the test. All Mechanical Compaction shall be stopped in the vicinity. hydrotest shall be considered as successfully passed. 11. . in the unlikely event the pressure would rise above this point. The test shall be monitored during this time.3 8. . a minimum of one sample shall be selected and tested by the independent laboratory. Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 394 of CM CS EF Construction Manager. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. INSTALLATION OF CLADDING : Roof and Side cladding The cladding sheets shall be installed. 2. The works were executed for major oil companies. all work shall stop in the area and the HSE department immediately notified Phone number : HSE Direct number Employees working in roof and side cladding shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. Erection Foreman. All cladding shall be checked for quantity and identification. Construction Superintendent . 1. The CS shall control the day to day activities The EF shall control the workforce ensuring the full implementation of this method statement including all safety measures. One by one from scaffolds and working platforms. to ensure that they are implemented according to this procedure. Materials shall be properly stored and protected. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident. Responsibilities The CM shall plan and resource the cladding erection activities. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Stee Structures The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Method MATERIALS RECEIVABLES All cladding material to be used for permanent works. All these statements constitute management documents. shall be received on site in the appropriate laydown area. The CS shall ensure that all safety requirements are implemented and explained to the erection workforce. NUTS & WASHERS) Upon receipt on site of the fasteners. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. with the correct equipment resources. The items shall be inspected against the necessary shipping documents. FASTENERS (BOLTS. to confirm specification conformance. Install in accordance with the approved erection drawings and instructions. All panels notched around beams and channel shall be flashed properly. 1 No. 1 No. . 1 No. 2 Nos. ERECTION of SHEETING (SIDE) Erection of side sheeting shall be lifted from ground between floor beams and side girts.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. (for further details see enclosed MOS from Centria) 3. Equipment Drilling Machines Screw Guns Screw Gun Sockets Rivet Gun Nibbler Double Cut Shear Jigsaw Vice Grips Sheet metal Snips Extension Cords 2 x 50m Drill bits 2 Nos. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. East and West sides shall follow. 1 No. 2 Nos. All edge cuts shall be coated with clear spar varnish. shall be done on site. etc. Miscellaneous Tools Attachment Scaffolding erection of side sheet #161 Ethylene export Foundations along fence below ‘fertil over head conveyor’ for pipe rack leading to sea Top Index Scope Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. since the sheets are too long to lower from roof because it is in one piece. using the right tools as listed. All cutting and notching of panels around windows. Panel cut offs shall be made after all material is erected. North side scaffolding shall be installed from ground floor and regarding laydown area EPC Contractor Construction team shall provide the same. 5. louvers. 7. then North and South sides. All bevel and notch cutting of panels shall be done on site. 2 Nos. CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE of SIDE & ROOF SHEETING Monitor on roof shall be sheeted first. 6. 2006 Page 395 of All panels shall be erected left to right unless otherwise noted. including flashing infills. 1 No. The works were executed for major oil companies. Roof and Flashings (corner) shall be last to be installed. 10 Nos. doors. 4. . further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing Barricades.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. cones. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. the night-lights. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. shall be installed as required for a complete safety.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. 2006 Page 396 of Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The objective of this statement is to outline the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction of the proposed pipe rack foundations along the fence from near PS 2061below ‘Fertil overhead conveyor’ & up to the sea for the Ethylene export facility Reference: Pipe Supports GA & RC Details Foundations Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Hand Excavation. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. No jumping shall be allowed Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. markers. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. and floodlights etc. The works were executed for major oil companies. Compressor. Concrete pump. All these statements constitute management documents. concrete pouring. concrete pouring. Shovel etc Attachment Drawing Copies #162 Reinstatement to ‘damage caused Flare pipe rack Column member 01537’ at grid 19a Top Index Scope References Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The objective of this statement is to outline the procedures to be adopted to carry out the reinstatement to the Flare Pipe Rack structural steel column located at grid which was damaged during construction operations by Civil Contractor effecting adversely the structural Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . non critical cathodic protection. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Procedures These foundations shall be located 3m off the existing Sulphur Plant fence towards the conveyor Layout shall be made by the surveyor to the design requirement Civil Contractor QC shall inspect the layout & approve Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables Remaining portion of the trench shall also be excavated manually to the defined levels All the post excavation operations shall be carried out according to the approved procedures such as formation levels. 2006 Page 397 of Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. concrete curing. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. backfilling Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to the checklists & ITP requirement from time to time Major Equipment Compactors. form work. bolts fixing. concrete protection. placing steel reinforcement. blinding. All these statements constitute management documents. One STQ was raised by Civil Contractor for the approval pertaining to the proposed and carried out operations but EPC Contractor responded to require a proper method statement References: STQ Specs. 2006 Page 398 of adequacy of the member necessitating the replacement & till that is achieved. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . Addition of 2 #s columns 203x46mm at mid spans both adjacent bays In turn anchorage of these columns through the top of member by Turfer to the existing column base Support of top bore pipe by wire sling & chain block around pipe & beam 2 #s chain blocks to support top beams around pipes Chain blocks to support 2#s bottom beams The arrangement applies to both additional columns The system is stable for the purpose of transferring the induced stresses until the new design column is erected to the original location Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the soundness of the temporary structure Safety officer shall ascertain the freeness of arrangements of the hazards Erection of the new column Procedures Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. the formation of a temporary arrangement to bear the existing erected structures and all dead & live elements. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.for Steel structure fabrication / for Painting / for Galvanizing / Project Preservation & Export Packing Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the work has to be carried out on the structural steel erection involving heavy cranes and other equipment movements for which all relevant required rules shall apply Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed Method The reinstatement involves the following main operations Formation of a temporary arrangement Erection of the new design structural steel column at grid 19A Temporary supporting arrangement to perform to achieve & maintain the structural stability pertaining to the permanent works as effected due to column at grid 19A damage as detailed on the attached sketch has been carried out to allow the dismantling & re-erection of the concerned members involving the following sub operations. the temporary structural arrangement provided to withstand the forces from the unstable structure shall be removed without effecting the permanent members Major Equipment Crane 30T / 50T. tightening shall be carried out & final level & alignment checked Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to comply with the ITPs & check list requirements After the assembly has been released. Guide ropes & tensioning equipment. Crane operator. Any damaged concrete shall be repaired to the agreed procedures Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to make sure that the prepared surface is satisfactory for the grouting and erection operations Fasteners. Shovel for minor steel members movement. Portable grinding machines. Flat bed trailer for fabricated material transpoprt. 2006 Page 399 of Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to the checklists & ITP requirement prior to commencing any operation Column structural material shall be received from Fabricator workshop & transported for galvanisation Identification of the delivered members shall be checked All the materials received shall be properly stored and protected Foundation The pier surface shall be properly scabbled. Scaffolding movable & stationary. All these statements constitute management documents. Air compressor. secured and levelled followed by the application of an approved grout material around the shims with a minimum 50mm cover to the plates to be embedded in permanently Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to make sure that the plates are properly located & levelled & as built survey report recorded The columns shall be installed on the pier using a crane. levelled and plumbed anchored by stay ropes to provide the stability to the member till the horizontal members are connected The foundation bolts shall be hands tightened only Necessary tightening or torquing shall be effected post grouting Existing horizontal members & bracing interconnecting these grid frames shall be joined The vertical & horizontal members assembly shall be carried out in sections On completion of each beam with all fastenings in place. brushed & made suitable for the further operations. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. steel erectors.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Riggers. . Portable drilling machines Manpower Foreman.One sample each of the bolt. Welding generator to the requirement. Impact wrench. the grouting shall be carried out to the approved procedures When the new structure is reinstated to full adequacy. nut & washer shall be selected & tested by an independent laboratory Stainless Steel shim plates (25 mm high) shall be placed at the column centre. Unskilled workers Attachment STQ copy #163 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. men baskets to the requirement. 2006 Page 400 of Maintenance warehouse Overcoating To epoxy painted surface With Mastertop top coat 44p access to corridors & walkway Top Index Scope References Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The objective of this statement is to outline the procedures to be adopted to carry out the floor surface topcoat on the epoxy painted surfaces of Corridors M16. M27 & walkway References: MAR 521 for Mastertop Coat 44 Submitted dated (pending approval) Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed Storage. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard Safety Supervision Measures suggested by the Manufacturer’s datasheet shall be strictly adhered to A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.The material Mastertop TopCoat 44 shall be stored in a shed out of direct sunlight Method Surface preparation The existing epoxy painted surface shall be watered Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. vacuum cleaner shall be used to clear all dust & dirt etc Masking tape shall be pasted on the periphery of the proposed area to receive Yellow colour paint coating Mixing Mix ratio Component A : Component B :: 4:1 by weight Component B shall be poured into component A & mixed manually until streak free consistency is achieved The mixed stuff shall be poured into a container & re-mixed for 30 seconds Application Coverage 0. Binder Course Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . the masking tape shall be removed & surface vacuum cleaned Masking tape shall again be applied to the periphery of the coated area to receive Black colour coating The Black colour coating shall then be applied to give a smooth appearance The surface shall then be well protected for 24 hours for drying & curing & not allowed to foot traffic Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above operations Major Equipment Vacuum cleaner. For mixing -clean container.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.12 Kg / Sqm The material shall be applied to the surface using rollers & the area completed The coated surface shall be left duly protected for 24 hours so that the applied coating is completely dried & cured After 24 hours. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 401 of After the surface is dry. rollers Attachment MAR 521 copy #164 Roads Bituminous Concrete Surfacing Top Index Scope References Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The objective of this statement is to outline the procedures to be adopted to carry out the Roads Bituminous Surfacing by Asphalt Concreting throughout the site planned permanent roads quantifying to.08 to 0. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed Material Premixed bituminous binder course and wearing course materials shall be supplied from Civil Contractor central batching. 2006 Page 402 of Approximate area 130. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . mixing & heating plant located on Highway Method According to the project drawing the asphalt concrete shall be laid in overall widths of 13m & 9m for plant & access roads respectively 13m width comprises of 9m central wearing course / carriage way & 2 m wide shoulder on each side 9m width comprises of 6m central carriage way & 1.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.000 m^2 Wearing Course Approximate area 70. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. All these statements constitute management documents.000 m^2 Including areas completed & excluding access road to Highway References: Roads & Paving Details Specification All Paving & Underground Services IFC drawings QCF Rev D & ITP MAR for Bitumen 60 / 70 MAR 525 for Bituminous primer MC 70 MAR 526 for Bituminous Tack Coat SS-1H Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk.5 m wide shoulder on each side Wearing course thickness being 40mm & that of dense bitumen binder course 60mm Paving works shall be carried out in 2 stages Stage 1 Laying & compacting bottom bituminous binder course Everyday production 7000 m^2 of laying & rolling during day time Stage 2 Laying & compacting top wearing carriageway This layer shall be carried out in the 4 th Quarter of year 2001 at a date to be determined in coordination with EPC Contractor Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. watered & compacted in accordance to the specification Main Operations The following main operations are involved Re-preparation of aggregate base course surface with water & compaction by pneumatic roller Application of Priming coat & drying out Application of 60mm thick dense binder course Power brooming the completed dense binder course Application of Tack coat & drying out Application of 40mm thick bitumen concrete wearing course Mixing All materials shall be mixed at Civil Contractor calibrated & approved Plant Asphalt plant All trucks and other equipment as included shall be readily available for inspection Transportation Material shall be transported from the plant to the planned location in good condition by trucks cleaned of all foreign material & covered with tarpaulin to prevent dust invasion in inclement / adverse weather conditions It shall be ensured by obtaining observations using thermometer that the material when laid is within 130 to 165 C Application Coverage Primer coat 0. 2006 Page 403 of The proposed work shall be divided into areas & carried out in sequence in both stages depending on the priority & production co-ordination as necessary to be kept in line to the proper execution of other dependent items Surface preparation Prior to the application of the dense bitumen binder course.8 to 1. The works were executed for major oil companies.4 litre / m^2 Tack coat 0.4 to 0.7 litre / m^2 Primer Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to ascertain the correct profile of the aggregate base course & corrections applied if so required All surfaces planned to be primed shall be barricaded & cleaned of all dirt & any objectionable material Bituminous material shall be applied evenly on the dry surface by means of a pressure distributor spray tanker within a temperature 30  to 70 C Surfacing Binder Course Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted prior to the commencement of binder course laying to make sure that the surface is satisfactorily clean. already laid & compacted aggregate base course shall be prepared suitable for this purpose Base course shall be corrected of any deviation more than 13mm from the designed profile at any point & not more than 9mm in 3m on the longitudinal grade at any location by either adding to or removing from the surface the deficient or redundant material respectively to bring the surface to the design shape. well dried & even to the specified priming conditions & to receive binder course Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 1 # 10 Tonnes capacity. 1# 15 Tonnes capacity Pneumatic Tired Rollers(tyre inflatable at 0. The works were executed for major oil companies. .62 Mpa )4 #s. All these statements constitute management documents. 1 # with 6m wide blade & 2 #s with 4m wide blade Steel wheel Tandem Rollers 2 #s. 2 #s 38 T & 2 #s 20 T Air Compressor 1 # Asphalt Cutting Machine 1# Plate Compactor 1 # Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. water tanks & sprinkling apparatus to keep the wheel sufficiently wet to prevent the bituminous mixture from sticking to the steel surface shall be employed to roll the profiled material immediately after the material is laid to the acceptable profile to prevent the formation of undue displacement or hair cracking The roller wheels shall be kept properly moistened without excess water or oil Rolling shall be commenced from the side and proceed towards the centre each trip overlapping the previous by at least 300 mm with keeping alternate trip not more than 5 km / h & it shall continue until the surface is impression free Mechanical compactors shall be engaged to compact the roller inaccessible area layers Pneumatic tyred rollers shall be engaged only after the compaction by wheel roller is over It is significant to make sure that the asphalt temperature does not fall below 80  C prior to full compaction is achieved Roller shall not pass over the edges of the freshly laid material generally except when the edge is located at a discontinuation for that day Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to make sure that the material is compacted to the standards and the temperature remains within limits mentioned as well as levels are maintained within specification tolerances particularly over the areas involving shoulders At the commencement of the work on the area involving the compacted & chilled edge. a bevel shall be cut out. 2006 Page 404 of The material upon arrival at the location shall be spread & struck off to the prepared profile by means of self powered spreading & finishing equipment attached with a strike off assembly distributing the mixture to a strip 3 m wide Rolling Steel Roller’s # of passes 6 to 8 depending on the surface condition Steel rollers 10 T capacity equipped with adjustable wheel scrapes.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. cleaned & tack coat applied to receive adjoining material No traffic shall be permitted until 24 hours lapse post rolling completion Wearing Course The planned surface shall be cleared of all dust & dirt using power broom or blowing Tack coat shall be applied to the specification requirement Immediately upon arrival the material shall be spread & rolled similarly as described in the foregoing Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to make sure that the material is compacted to the standards and the temperature remains within limits mentioned as well as levels are maintained within specification tolerances Major Equipment Required for the binder course Central Mixing Asphalt plant 1# Trucks 5 #s 38 Tonnes capacity each Paver 3 #s. 000 m^2 Including areas completed & excluding access road to Highway References: Roads & Paving Details Specification All Paving & Underground Services IFC drawings QCF Rev D & ITP Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk.000 m^2 Wearing Course Approximate area 70. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 405 of Jumping Jack Compactor 1 # Spray Tanker 1 # Additionally required for the Wearing Course shall be procured later Power Broom Vacuum Cleaner Attachment None #165 Roads Bituminous Concrete Surfacing Top Index Scope References Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The objective of this statement is to outline the procedures to be adopted to carry out the Roads Bituminous Surfacing by Asphalt Concreting throughout the site planned permanent roads quantifying to.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . Binder Course Approximate area 130. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. mixing & heating plant located on Highway Method According to the project drawing the asphalt concrete shall be laid in overall widths of 13m & 9m for plant & access roads respectively 13m width comprises of 9m central wearing course / carriage way & 2 m wide shoulder on each side 9m width comprises of 6m central carriage way & 1.5 m wide shoulder on each side Wearing course thickness being 40mm & that of dense bitumen binder course 60mm Paving works shall be carried out in 2 stages Stage 1 Laying & compacting bottom bituminous binder course Everyday production 7000 m^2 of laying & rolling during day time Stage 2 Laying & compacting top wearing carriageway This layer shall be carried out during November / December 2001 The proposed work shall be divided into areas & carried out in sequence in both stages depending on the priority & production co-ordination as necessary to be kept in line to the proper execution of other dependent items Surface preparation Prior to the application of the dense bitumen binder course. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed Material Premixed bituminous binder course and wearing course materials shall be supplied from Civil Contractor central batching. 2006 Page 406 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. already laid & compacted aggregate base course shall be prepared suitable for this purpose Base course shall be corrected of any deviation more than 13mm from the designed profile at any point & not more than 9mm in 3m on the longitudinal grade at any location by either adding to or removing from the surface the deficient or redundant material respectively to bring the surface to the design shape. watered & compacted in accordance to the specification Main Operations The following main operations are involved Re-preparation of aggregate base course surface with water & compaction by pneumatic roller Application of Priming coat & drying out Application of 60mm thick dense binder course Power brooming the completed dense binder course Application of Tack coat & drying out Application of 40mm thick bitumen concrete wearing course Mixing All materials shall be mixed at Civil Contractor calibrated & approved Plant Asphalt plant Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. . The works were executed for major oil companies. 4 to 0. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 407 of All trucks and other equipment as included shall be readily available for inspection Transportation Material shall be transported from the plant to the planned location in good condition by trucks cleaned of all foreign material & covered with tarpaulin to prevent dust invasion in inclement / adverse weather conditions It shall be ensured by obtaining observations using thermometer that the material when laid is within 130 to 165 C Application Coverage Primer coat 0. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. .8 to 1. well dried & even to the specified priming conditions & to receive binder course The material upon arrival at the location shall be spread & struck off to the prepared profile by means of self powered spreading & finishing equipment attached with a strike off assembly distributing the mixture to a strip 3 m wide Rolling Steel Roller’s # of passes 6 to 8 depending on the surface condition Steel rollers 10 T capacity equipped with adjustable wheel scrapes.7 litre / m^2 Primer Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to ascertain the correct profile of the aggregate base course & corrections applied if so required All surfaces planned to be primed shall be barricaded & cleaned of all dirt & any objectionable material Bituminous material shall be applied evenly on the dry surface by means of a pressure distributor spray tanker within a temperature 30  to 70 C Surfacing Binder Course Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted prior to the commencement of binder course laying to make sure that the surface is satisfactorily clean. water tanks & sprinkling apparatus to keep the wheel sufficiently wet to prevent the bituminous mixture from sticking to the steel surface shall be employed to roll the profiled material immediately after the material is laid to the acceptable profile to prevent the formation of undue displacement or hair cracking The roller wheels shall be kept properly moistened without excess water or oil Rolling shall be commenced from the side and proceed towards the centre each trip overlapping the previous by at least 300 mm with keeping alternate trip not more than 5 km / h & it shall continue until the surface is impression free Mechanical compactors shall be engaged to compact the roller inaccessible area layers Pneumatic tyred rollers shall be engaged only after the compaction by wheel roller is over It is significant to make sure that the asphalt temperature does not fall below 80  C prior to full compaction is achieved Roller shall not pass over the edges of the freshly laid material generally except when the edge is located at a discontinuation for that day Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to make sure that the material is compacted to the standards and the temperature remains within limits Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies.4 litre / m^2 Tack coat 0. a bevel shall be cut out. 2 #s 38 T & 2 #s 20 T Air Compressor 1 # Asphalt Cutting Machine 1# Plate Compactor 1 # Jumping Jack Compactor 1 # Spray Tanker 1 # Additionally required for the Wearing Course shall be procured later Power Broom Vacuum Cleaner Attachment None #166 Excavation for 200 pair Telecom Route (Direct Buried) parallel to Avenue D & 3rd street Top Index Scope Safety Method Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 408 of mentioned as well as levels are maintained within specification tolerances particularly over the areas involving shoulders At the commencement of the work on the area involving the compacted & chilled edge.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 1# 15 Tonnes capacity Pneumatic Tired Rollers(tyre inflatable at 0. The works were executed for major oil companies. cleaned & tack coat applied to receive adjoining material No traffic shall be permitted until 12 hours lapse post rolling completion Wearing Course The planned surface shall be cleared of all dust & dirt using power broom or blowing Tack coat shall be applied to the specification requirement Immediately upon arrival the material shall be spread & rolled similarly as described in the foregoing Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to make sure that the material is compacted to the standards and the temperature remains within limits mentioned as well as levels are maintained within specification tolerances Major Equipment Required for the binder course Central Mixing Asphalt plant 1# Trucks 5 #s 38 Tonnes capacity each Paver 3 #s.62 Mpa )4 #s. 1 # 10 Tonnes capacity. . All these statements constitute management documents. 1 # with 6m wide blade & 2 #s with 4m wide blade Steel wheel Tandem Rollers 2 #s. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved Barricades cones. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. 2006 Page 409 of Scope This statement aims to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation on the telecom route from N Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. Hand Excavation. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation. the night-lights. . The works were executed for major oil companies.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. markers. All these statements constitute management documents. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone references : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. and floodlights etc.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. All these statements constitute management documents. Drawing reference – Procedures The record drawing pertaining to the existing services shall be obtained from the RRD The following main operations are involved Setting out the proposed route in all respects from point marked #1 to #3 Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to approve the layout Trial pits shall be excavated manually to the dimensions 3mx2m in plus shape 1m wide & about 1 M deep @ 50 m intervals to expose the cables & the other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. Compactors Attachment Route sketch #167 Hand Excavation for 200 pair Telecom Route (Direct Buried) parallel to Avenue C Top Index Scope Safety Method Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 410 of Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. backfill shall be carried out to the approved procedures Major Equipment Excavator.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . The works were executed for major oil companies. all the existing cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench between the pits shall be excavated 500mm wide & 1000 mm deep by machine to the defined levels Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to approve the excavated profile A layer of sand bedding shall be filled to receive 200 pair telecom cables EPC Contractor shall lay the cable on the complete prepared route After the release of the cable laying. Dumper trucks. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. sand shall be filled on the sides and as well as 100mm thick over the cables Cable tiles shall be laid en route according to the standard details A layer of gatch fill 250mm thick shall be laid over the cable tiles & warning tape provided Over gatch fill up to the finished grade level. . Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. Hand Excavation. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone references : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. The works were executed for major oil companies. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. All these statements constitute management documents. and floodlights etc.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved Barricades cones. No jumping shall be allowed Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. markers. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. Drawing reference – Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. the night-lights. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. 2006 Page 411 of Scope This statement aims to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation on the telecom route from existing 500mm sleeve at N under road Avenue C & passing to existing Telecom Centre from N to N at E Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. sand shall be filled on the sides as well as 100mm thick over the cables Cable tiles shall be laid en route according to the standard details A layer of gatch fill 250mm thick shall be laid over the cable tiles & warning tape provided Over gatch fill up to the finished grade level. The works were executed for major oil companies. Compressor Attachment Route sketch #168 200 pair Telecom Road Crossing at Avenue D / 3rd Street Intersection along E Top Index Scope Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement aims to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out 2# 160 mm  ducts laying work for the telecom route to cross at E near Avenue D / 3 rd street intersection Drawing reference – Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. 2006 Page 412 of Procedures The record drawing pertaining to the existing services shall be obtained from the RRD The following main operations are involved Setting out the proposed route in all respects Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to approve the layout During manual excavation the exposed existing cables shall be properly protected and well supported temporarily Trench shall be excavated 500mm wide & 1000 mm deep manually to the defined levels Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to approve the excavated profile A layer of sand bedding shall be filled to receive 200 pair telecom cables EPC Contractor shall lay the cable on the complete prepared route After the release of the cable laying.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. backfill shall be carried out to the approved procedures Major Equipment Compactors. All these statements constitute management documents. the night-lights. 2006 Page 413 of In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. The works were executed for major oil companies. Hand Excavation. Banksman shall be engaged on for guiding equipment operation.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench. and floodlights etc. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be adopted for further excavation Access to trench. markers. No jumping shall be allowed Machine Excavation The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained.Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone references : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved Barricades cones. In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. Procedures The record drawing pertaining to the existing services shall be obtained from the RRD The following main operations are involved Production of the approved Traffic diversion scheme Setting out the proposed route in all respects Manual & mechanical excavation followed by duct laying Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. All these statements constitute management documents. Compressor Attachment Traffic Management Scheme. co-ordinate N / avenue C Top Index Scope Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement aims to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out 2# 160 mm  ducts laying work for the telecom route to cross at N @ Avenue C / Police check post intersection Drawing reference – Safety Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . all the existing cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated 500mm wide & 1000 mm plus deep by machine to the defined levels Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve the excavated profile 2 # 160mm ducts shall be laid in position to be surrounded with concrete After the approval. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Truck. 2006 Page 414 of Concrete surround & gatch fill Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to approve the layout During manual excavation the exposed existing cables shall be properly protected and well supported temporarily Trial pit shall be excavated manually to the dimensions 3mx2m in plus shape 1m wide & about 1 M deep to expose the cables & any other services employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables After the exposure. concrete shall be poured on the sides as well as 100mm thick over the ducts Gatchfill in 250mm thick layers shall be carried out up to the finished grade level to the approved procedures Traffic management scheme shall be removed after the backfill is completed Major Equipment Excavator. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Compactors. Route sketch #169 Manual Excavation 200 pair Telecom Road Crossing @ Access road to --------camp @ C / L. Access to trench. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. .The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved Barricades cones. all the existing cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation to the defined levels Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve the excavatedprofile Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. markers. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. Procedures The record drawing pertaining to the existing services shall be obtained from the RRD The following main operations are involved Production of the approved Traffic diversion scheme -sketch attached for diversion Setting out the proposed route in all respects Manual excavation followed by duct laying Concrete surround & gatch fill Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to approve the layout After the exposure. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. No jumping shall be allowed Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 415 of Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. the night-lights. Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone references : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. and floodlights etc. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. co-ordinate N / avenue C Top Index Scope Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement aims to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out 2# 160 mm  ducts laying work for the telecom route to cross at N @ Avenue C / between 5 th & 3rd street / Police check post intersection Drawing reference – Safety Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card / Toolbox talk. All these statements constitute management documents. concrete shall be poured on the sides as well as 100mm thick over the ducts Gatchfill in 250mm thick layers shall be carried out up to the finished grade level to the approved procedures Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Traffic management scheme shall be removed after the backfill is completed Major Equipment Compactor. therefore all the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’. Route sketch #170 Manual Excavation 200 pair Telecom Road Crossing @ Access road to Operating Authority camp @ C / L. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area. 2006 Page 416 of 2 # 160mm ducts shall be laid in position to be surrounded with concrete After the approval. compressor Attachment Traffic Management Scheme. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . the night-lights. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to all persons involved Barricades cones. Procedures The record drawing pertaining to the existing services shall be obtained from the RRD The following main operations are involved Production of the approved Traffic diversion scheme-sketch attached for diversion Setting out the proposed route in all respects Manual excavation followed by duct laying Concrete surround & gatch fill Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to approve the layout After the exposure. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Excavation Work Permit. all the existing cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported temporarily to continue the excavation to the defined levels Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve the excavated profile 2 # 160mm ducts shall be laid in position to be surrounded with concrete After the approval. The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained. markers.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. concrete shall be poured on the sides as well as 100mm thick over the ducts Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies.The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to enter in or come out of the trench. 2006 Page 417 of Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. and floodlights etc. . No jumping shall be allowed Method The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division. Access to trench. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone references : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. shall be installed as required for a complete safety. 2006 Page 418 of Gatchfill in 250mm thick layers shall be carried out up to the finished grade level to the approved procedures Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations Traffic management scheme shall be removed after the backfill is completed Major Equipment Compactor. ACES Laboratory Report reference dated Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. Method Statement. Removal of Hazardous Materials. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the removal and disposal of the material within the “Hazardous Material” location. ACES Arab Center For Engineering Studies. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. Reference documents EPC Contractor HSE Manual. The Civil Contractor safety officer shall implement these requirements. PSM Project Site Manager. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that the required safety and enviromental precautions are implemented for this activity. The PSM shall record and document the disposal process. Route sketch #171 Removal of contaminated soil Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. The works were executed for major oil companies. Operating Authority Regulations. compressor Attachment Traffic Management Scheme. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . Method Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. As the material is stable and inert. Specification. Samples of resultant exposed material shall be taken for analysis. Concrete Mix Design. All these statements constitute management documents. Definitions EPC Contractor Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. A temporary stockpile area shall be designated whilst the permanent disposal location is agreed. Specification Concrete Construction. The stockpile area shall be clearly identified. Reference documents Method statement. The dump truck shall be loaded carefully so that contaminated soil does not spill from the dumptruck whilst on route to the disposal area. 2006 Page 419 of The area identified and tested for “Hazardous materials”. prior to subsequent activities. Attachment ITP No: #172 Blinding concrete Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. Equipment Membrane. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Membrane accessories Primer and brush. The contaminated soil is dark black in color. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the preparation and placement of blinding concrete. Barrier tape shall define the limits. Concrete placement. A visual inspection of the excavated area. The works were executed for major oil companies. Formwork and Coatings. shall be disposed. to establish the removal of all the contaminated soil. shall be conducted. in acccordance with all relevant rules and regulations. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The identified contaminated soil shall be removed from the “Hazardous Material” area by excavator into the dump trucks. no special precautions are required for stockpiling conditions. All persons who shall be involved in this activity. The blinding concrete. these shall be installed such that removal of them as concrete is progressed. The blinding concrete shall be placed by one of the approved methods. when sufficiently set. as the application of the protective membrane requires a smooth finish. . shall be covered with hessian and water cured for 3 days. can be achieved easily and quickly. prior to the supervisor commencing any blinding activity. skip or pump) The blinding concrete shall be finished to a smooth finish. Attachment ITP No:. The supervisor shall complete form QCF. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. prior to notifying the QC inspector. the supervisor shall conduct line and level checks with the surveyor. tested and approved. When the QC inspector countersign the check list. The avoidance of ripples or protrusions must be avoided. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. The tradesman shall erect suitable battens and rails.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. shall be made aware of all safety issues relating to this activity and situation. The QC inspector shall check the element for compliance with the check list. Polythene sheeting shall be placed between the blinding battens. in such a manner that the Foreman can relate the data to the tradesmen. to the correct outside lines and finished level of the blinding concrete. All these statements constitute management documents. Where intermediate level rails are required. The surveyor shall set out the relevant line and level information. The relevant foremen shall ensure that the blinding activities are conducted in accordance with this method statement. #173 Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. blinding concrete can be ordered and placed according to the relevant procedures. Method The Foreman shall ensure that the formation level has been inspected. When the blinding battens and rails are completed. Blinding Check List. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that the relevant site supervision are aware of and understand the requirements of this method statement. Equipment Hand tools. QCF. (direct pour. Blinding Check list. 2006 Page 420 of Civil Contractor PSM Project Site Manager. Adequate overlapping of the polythene sheeting shall be done where joints occur. The works were executed for major oil companies. The quality documentation shall be kept by the QC department. The yard Foreman shall review the schedule and allocate the fabrication Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The store department shall be aware of the quality documentation requirements for reinforcement. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor . Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions.” the yard Foreman shall be issued with a current rebar schedule. PSM Project Site Manager. Formwork and Coatings. fabrication and storage of reinforcement. When reinforcement is to be “cut and bent. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the material receipt. Concrete Construction. . shall be made aware of all safety issues relating to this activity and situation. The storeman shall inform the QA department when a delivery of reinforcement is made. Reference documents Specification. All these statements constitute management documents. All persons who shall be involved in this activity. purchase order and quality documentation requirements. Method The storeman shall ensure that any reinforcement materials received upon site is in accordance with the specification requirements. The storeman and QC inspector shall review the reinforcement delivery and complete the Material receiving report QCF. 2006 Page 421 of Reinforcement receival & fabrication Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. in the appropriate storage facilities. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that the reinforcement fabrication department is aware of and understand the requirements of this method statement. the reinforcement material shall be stored in the reinforcement fabrication yard. When the incoming material inspection is completed and acceptable. This bar. Reinforcement Fabrication Check List. until such time as they are required upon site. that indicate the relevant bar no and schedule number from which they have been fabricated. The bundles shall be tagged with a suitable label. Formwork and Coatings. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. if correct shall be utilized as a check bar for all concurrent bars of that type. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the placement of reinforcement. Material required shall be sourced from the yard storage facilities. All these statements constitute management documents. The completed bundles shall be stored within the reinforcement yard. Bar bending machines. The correct bar diameter shall be cropped into the specified length as given on the bar schedule. Any error in bending of the bars shall be corrected prior to placement in storage The correct bent bars shall be stored in bundles. Equipment Bar cropping machines. The cropper operator shall crop the required bars of each diameter. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. checking against the check bars as he completes each bar. The works were executed for major oil companies. Attachment ITP No: QCF. Concrete Construction. The bending operator shall fabricate the required number of bars of each shape code. Fork lift truck. it shall be checked by the yard Foreman for correctness. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Reference documents Specification. Storage shall be in accordance with the procedure for store control. Upon bending of the first of each bar type. Material Receiving Report. QCF. 2006 Page 422 of process to the relevant operator. #174 Reinforcement placement Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. . Where a reinforcement bar clashes with such items. shall be collected from the stores and made available at the work site. The steel fixers shall place and tie. The reinforcement Foreman shall ensure that this method statement is understood by his steel fixers. The QC inspector shall inspect the structure for compliance with the reinforcement drawings and layout drawings. The requirement for installing the cathodic protection system to the reinforcement bars. pipes. reinforcement bars and accessories. Placement of adequate support chairs and stirrups. Particular attention to the following items shall be monitored by the chargehand steel fixer and Foreman: lap length of bars. shall be checked by the Foreman for validity. Method The relevant reinforcement bars. shall be made aware of all safety issues relating to this activity and situation. shall be conducted. The QC inspector shall only allow the next activity to commence. 2006 Page 423 of PSM Project Site Manager. The QC inspector shall endorse form QCF when acceptable. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The Foreman steelfixer shall ensure that the reinforcement has been checked. Should any inserts. require fixing within the structure. All persons who shall be involved in this activity. chairs. The material shall be stored at the worksite.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The current revision of the reinforcement drawing. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. The chargehand steelfixer shall inspect and check the fabricated reinforcement when all the placement of the reinforcement bars are complete. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. the steel fixer shall assist with the placement of these items. that applies to the structure being constructed. Pre concrete inspection. when all issues are acceptable. in accordance with the storage procedure. tie wire protrusions into cover areas. conduits. in accordance with the current reinforcement drawing. Concrete cover to formwork and outside faces. the chargehand shall inform the Foreman to resolve the issue with the engineers. An additional bar may be required to offset this moved bar. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that the reinforcement Foreman. stirrups and tie wire. the steel fixer shall move the relevant bar. The works were executed for major oil companies. prior to informing the QC inspector. bolts etc. The result of this inspection shall be recorded upon form QCF. Should any doubt arise about moving bars. spacer blocks. is aware of and understands the requirements of this method statement. The Foreman shall inform the engineer when these activities are complete. Equipment Hand tools. All these statements constitute management documents. Spacing of bars. All these statements constitute management documents. . The surveyor shall establish the lines and levels for the erection of the formwork. this shall be conducted. the most suitable method of formwork erection. Where pre-fabricated formwork can be assembled in the formwork workshop. All persons who shall be involved in this activity. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. He shall decide along with the engineer. Method The formwork Foreman shall review the drawing of the structure to be formed. The formwork Foreman shall ensure that his tradesmen understand this method statement. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The Foreman shall check that the preceding activities have been approved. Formwork and Coatings. 2006 Page 424 of Attachment QCF. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor PSM Project Site Manager. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that the formwork department is aware of and understand the requirements of this method statement. The sections of formwork required to form the structure. so that this activity may commence. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. shall be taken to the work site. Concrete Construction. These lines and levels shall be explained to the Foreman and supervisor in charge of the formwork activity. shall be made aware of all safety issues relating to this activity and situation. #175 Formwork erection Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the erection of formwork. Reference documents Specification. Pre Concrete Inspection form. QCF. Where large formwork elements are encountered. The supervisor and surveyor shall check the lines and levels of the formwork when all bracing and strutting is completed. #176 Concrete to paved areas Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 425 of The tradesmen shall ensure that the formwork faces are clean. embeddment check list. Where required. The chargehand carpenter shall monitor particular issues such as: Sealing of joints between formwork. The works were executed for major oil companies. with shutter form oil applied as applicable. Plumbness and verticality of formwork. the supervisor shall inspect the formwork and associated works. the formwork shall be adjusted to conform with the required lines and levels. formwork check list and QCF. Embeddment check list. The Foreman shall review the formwork when completed. . Provision where applicable of chamfer and channels. The QC inspector shall confirm the acceptance of this activity after review of the items. in good condition for the type of finish required. Provision where applicable for boxouts and inserts. The supervisor shall ensure that any damaged face of the formwork is repaired. Adequate bracing and supports. the supervisor shall ensure that these arrangements are securely braced. Attachment ITP No: QCF. Where anchor bolts or embedded plates are to be suspended in the structure.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Formwork check list. Formwork. When the formwork activity is complete. the QC inspector shall review the formwork bracing’s and supports with the engineer. Equipment Hand tools. in accordance with the current drawing. The tradesmen shall assemble and fix the formwork. recording his observations on form QCF. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All embeddments and bolt groupings shall be checked for location and level prior to the placement of concrete as well as after the concrete is placed. Reference documents Specification. The finish required to the paved areas shall be as defined and presented on a test panel. The relevant finish shall be applied to the paved area. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that the relevant department is aware of and understand the requirements of this method statement. Concrete Construction. Placement of the fibre concrete shall be by one of the approved methods. 2006 Page 426 of Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. advising the batchplant of the schedule and type of concrete. Method The concrete Foreman shall check to establish that the concerned paving areas are approved for placement of concrete. The works were executed for major oil companies. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Curing of the fibre concrete shall be in accordance with the method statement for curing concrete. Attention to edges and finish shall be an important responsibility of the concrete Foreman and chargehand. The concrete Foreman shall ensure that his concrete crew understand this method statement. The concrete forman shall arrange for the equipment he requires to place the concrete is available at the work site. The concrete shall be tested by the laboratory technician upon arrival at site. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the placing of concrete to paved areas. All persons who shall be involved in this activity. Consolidation of the fresh concrete shall be conducted under the supervision of the concrete Foreman. Compressor. Vibrators. Note: Fibre concrete. . The sequence of placement for the fibre concrete shall be agreed with the EPC Contractor engineer. shall be made aware of all safety issues relating to this activity and situation. The concrete Foreman shall order the required concrete. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor PSM Project Site Manager. Concrete pump. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Formwork and Coatings. Provision shall be made for emergency stop ends in case of batchplant or equipment failure. Concrete skip. Equipment Concrete truck mixer. Excavation and Backfill for underground Installations. All these statements constitute management documents. Reference documents Specification. The engineer shall ensure that there are no conflicts with existing services or other discipline issues. . shall be made aware of all safety issues relating to this activity and situation. Method Excavation. The works were executed for major oil companies. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. are approved for construction. All persons who shall be involved in this activity. The excavation Foreman shall direct the excavation equipment in an agreed sequence. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. A system for quick reference shall be established. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the excavation and backfilling to structures. The surveyor shall inform the excavation Foreman of these lines and levels. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that the relevant department is aware of and understand the requirements of this method statement.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 427 of Attachment ITP No: #177 Excavation & backfill to structures Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. Unsuitable material shall be removed Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Excavated material shall be classified by laboratory test. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor PSM Project Site Manager. The surveyor shall provide line and level engineering that shall enable the excavation of the structure. The engineer shall ensure that the current drawings relating to the excavation activity. The excavation Foreman shall ensure that his excavation crew understand this method statement. The engineer shall ensure that all subsequent activities are passed and completed. that would make sloping of the sides un practical. Dumptruck. the engineer shall instruct the Foreman to conduct this activity. the area shall be cleaned of waste materials and left tidy for the next activity. An acceptable test result shall allow the next layer of backfill to be placed and compacted. Upon approval to backfill. The backfill material shall be placed in layers according to the specification. The layer shall be moisturized and compacted to the agreed criteria. the sides of the excavation shall be sloped. The backfill material shall be sourced from the suitable material stockpile. #178 Telephone cable to site office Top Index Scope Reference documents Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Where material is classified as suitable. Safety barriers shall be erected as the work proceeds. the area shall be released for consequent activities. Any safety barriers shall be removed to the safety store. The laboratory test results shall be provided. Upon completion of the backfill activity. the required volume shall be stockpiled on site in an agreed location. A survey shall be conducted of formation level upon completion of the excavation. Backfill. to confirm compliance with his levels and lines. Excavation and Backfill check list. There is no requirement for ground de-watering equipment. All these statements constitute management documents. Equipment Excavator. 2006 Page 428 of off site to the tip area. Upon acceptance of these results. The formation shall be scarified and compacted to the required specification criteria. The surveyor and site engineer shall check the excavation. . shoring or support of the excavation side walls shall be agreed with EPC Contractor on site. This process shall continue until the structure is completed. Attachment ITP No: QCF. The formation shall be visually inspected for unsuitable material. The works were executed for major oil companies. Each backfill layer shall be tested by the test laboratory. Any such material shall be removed. Should restrictions be imposed by adjacent structures etc. Compactors. Where applicable. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. to the new site offices. Road Crossings. All persons. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 429 of Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. Method The surveyor shall peg the route of the telephone cable on site. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that the relevant permits are obtained prior to the commencement of work. approximately 600mm depth. to indicate a telephone cable location. The road crossing shall be constructed in two sections. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . The safety officer and the supervisor shall scan the route for existing services. shall be made aware of all safety issues relating to this activity and situation. The supervisor shall instruct the workforce. All these statements constitute management documents. excavation and placement of the telephone cable from the etisalet manhole to the north of the project site. Barriers and warning signs shall be erected to protect the section under construction. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor PSM Project Site Manager. The safety officer shall survey the route of the cable using the cat scan machine. the following procedure shall apply. The telephone cables shall be placed in the trench on the dune sand bed. A further layer of dune sand shall be placed over the cable. in the requirements of hand digging near existing services. giving 75mm of cover. The trench shall be dug with a smooth bottom. Any observations shall be recorded and indicated with spray paint upon the ground. Reference documents Operating Authority work permit. Where the line of the cable shall cross a road.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the survey. The works were executed for major oil companies. Marker posts shall be erected along the line of the trench. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. The trench shall be re-instated with general fill to ground level. using the cat scan machine. who shall be involved in this activity. Dune sand shall be placed to a depth of 75mm at the bottom of the trench. The safety officer shall scan the route for any existing services. A trench shall be excavated. The supervisor shall ensure that the conditions stated upon the work permits are implemented. to locate all existing services. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. to contain the concrete surround. The concrete shall be placed. #179 Electric cable from rlip substation to Civil Contractor camp Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. The trench shall be excavated using machine. Wet hessian and polythene sheet shall be placed over the fresh concrete. 2006 Page 430 of The asphalt shall be cut using a jackhammer with a spade tip. to the Civil Contractor camp substation. The concrete shall be placed flush with the level of the road surface. The 150mm upvc pipe duct shall be extended from the first section to the side of the road of section two. Dumptruck. excavation and placement of the electric power supply cable. The trench shall be excavated by machine. The procedure for the second section shall be similar to the first. from the Plant Light Industrial Park substation. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Curing shall continue for 24 hours. Attachment None. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The stop end placed in the first section of the road crossing shall be removed. A new stop end shall be positioned at the edge of the road shoulder. Lean mix concrete shall be placed and vibrated in the road-crossing trench. . The works were executed for major oil companies. The asphalt shall be cut using a jackhammer with spade tip. Reference documents Operating Authority work permit. The road barriers shall be removed when the concrete has cured. Compactors. Compressor and jackhammer. All these statements constitute management documents. 150mm diameter shall be placed in the road crossing. The barricades and warning signs shall be repositioned to protect the second section of the road crossing. vibrated and cured as described for section one. Removing the spoil to a suitable place by dumper. Equipment Excavator. A stop end shall be erected to both ends of the pipe. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the survey. A upvc duct. Method The surveyor shall peg the route of the electric power supply on site. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. approximately 200mm below the finished grade level. using the cat scan machine. covering the cables.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the following procedure shall apply. 150mm diameter shall be placed in the road crossing. The trench shall be re-instated with general fill to ground level. The safety officer and the supervisor shall scan the route for existing services. to locate all existing services. The supervisor shall instruct the workforce. approximately 600mm depth. The safety officer shall scan the route for any existing services. The concrete shall be placed flush with the level of the road surface. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that the relevant permits are obtained prior to the commencement of work. The road crossing shall be constructed in two sections. Within the Civil Contractor camp area. The supervisor shall ensure that the conditions stated upon the work permits are implemented. Dune sand shall be placed to a depth of 75mm at the bottom of the trench. A stop end shall be erected to both ends of the pipe. All persons. to indicate the electric cable location. A plastic warning tape shall be placed within the general fill. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Road Crossings. The works were executed for major oil companies. shall be made aware of all safety issues relating to this activity and situation. giving 75mm of cover. The asphalt shall be cut using a jackhammer with a spade tip. The trench shall be dug with a smooth bottom. Lean mix concrete shall be placed and vibrated in the road-crossing trench. The remainder of the route follows existing cables that supply other contractors camps. The safety officer shall survey the route of the cable using the cat scan machine. who shall be involved in this activity. The electric power cable shall be placed in the trench on the dune sand bed. Marker posts shall be erected along the line of the trench. A trench shall be excavated. A upvc duct. Removing the spoil to a suitable place by dumper. . The trench shall be excavated by machine. in the requirements of hand digging near existing services. Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. the trench shall be dug by machine. A further layer of dune sand shall be placed over the cable. Curing shall continue for 24 hours. 2006 Page 431 of Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor PSM Project Site Manager. Cable tiles shall be placed ontop of the dune sand. Wet hessian and polythene sheet shall be placed over the fresh concrete. A section of this route is within the new area of the Civil Contractor camp facility. Where the line of the cable shall cross a road. Barriers and warning signs shall be erected to protect the section under construction. Any observations shall be recorded and indicated with spray paint upon the ground. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Reference documents Operating Authority work permit. Dumptruck. excavation and placement of the water supply pipe. Responsibilities The PSM shall ensure that the relevant permits are obtained prior to the commencement of work. The stop end placed in the first section of the road crossing shall be removed. Attachment None. to the Civil Contractor camp. The road barriers shall be removed when the concrete has cured. 2006 Page 432 of The barricades and warning signs shall be repositioned to protect the second section of the road crossing. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor PSM Project Site Manager. to contain the concrete surround. The 150mm upvc pipe duct shall be extended from the first section to the side of the road of section two. . The supervisor shall ensure that the conditions stated upon the work permits are implemented. Compactors. vibrated and cured as described for section one. The concrete shall be placed. #180 Water supply to Civil Contractor camp Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. The procedure for the second section shall be similar to the first. Compressor and jackhammer. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Equipment Excavator. The trench shall be excavated using machine. A new stop end shall be positioned at the edge of the road shoulder. The asphalt shall be cut using a jackhammer with spade tip. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the survey. #181 Administration building substructure Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Sand backfill 75mm above the pipe shall be placed. All these statements constitute management documents. The rest of the trench shall be backfilled with general fill. into which a dune sand bed of 75mm shall be placed. Hand tools. . A section of this route is within the new area of the Civil Contractor camp facility. The remainder of the route is within the easement of road 5. The trench shall be excavated 700mm deep. The route within the easement area of road 5 shall be hand dug up to the fence line of the Civil Contractor camp. The trench shall be compacted using a plate vibrator. using the cat scan machine. shall be made aware of all safety issues relating to this activity and situation. 2006 Page 433 of Safety The Safety Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. Compactors. Method The surveyor shall peg the route of the water supply pipe on site. Equipment Excavator.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Any observations shall be recorded and indicated with spray paint upon the ground. All persons. The safety officer shall survey the route of the water pipe. The 200mm dia upvc pipe shall be laid and jointed. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Dumptruck. The works were executed for major oil companies. Machine excavation within the boundary of the Civil Contractor camp can be conducted. using the cat scan machine. to locate all existing services. who shall be involved in this activity. for existing services. The safety officer and the supervisor shall scan the route of the water pipe. Attachment None. it shall be removed. The excavated material shall be removed from site. in accordance with the membrane requirements. Specific training for each task that may present a safety hazard shall be given in toolbox talks. Design calculations shall be provided for this system. . After the bulk excavation to the foundations. Timber braces shall be used for bracing the shutters. The membrane system shall be inspected and accepted by either the vendor or his site trained representative. Traditional formwork of plywood and timber. Specification. The blinding concrete shall be primed with polyprime SB. 2006 Page 434 of Scope The purpose of this method statement. The surveyor shall set out for the blinding of the foundation pads. Specification. Where any loose material is encountered. A protective concrete screed shall be laid on top of the membrane. The finished surface of the blinding concrete shall be smooth. The cage shall be lifted into position using a crane. The Geotechnical engineer shall inspect the resultant formation for suitability. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The reinforcement cage shall be pre-fabricated.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. according to the IFC drawing. Concrete construction. Formwork and Coatings. Excavation & Backfill for underground installations. This procedure shall define all the work activities included in the sub-structure. Method The administration building shall be setout by the surveyor in accordance with the IFC drawings. Safety All workers shall be inducted prior to commencing on site. ready for the protective membrane application. Reference documents AFC Drawings. Timber forms shall be positioned to the pad footprint. The relevant site engineer and foremen shall supervise and control the activities according to the activity requirements. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents. prior to any further activities continuing. Specification. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor Responsibilities The Building Superintendent shall coordinate and organize the site activities according to this procedure. Concrete Buildings. for the construction of the sub-structure to the Administration Building. shall be erected for the pad foundations. Blinding concrete shall be placed and water cured for 24 hours. This protection screed shall be water cured for 24 hours. The membrane shall be applied according to the manufacturers data sheet. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The excavation for the foundations shall be a bulk excavation to formation level. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted. the area shall be hand dug to the relevant formation level. with reference to the project specifications. plus 300mm greater. The surface preparation of the pad foundation at the kicker position shall be scabbled. Specific details of the membrane application are defined in the method statement for protective membrane to below ground concrete. (Refer to the method statement for protective membrane application). The column starter bars. Formwork to the ring beam. A proprietary column formwork system. shall be wrapped with polythene. including the box-outs and inserts as applicable. Adequate bracing of the column forms shall be provided. shall be erected using traditional plywood and timber forms. to avoid splash contamination. Pouring of the concrete shall be done by pump when approved. Formwork for the column kicker shall be erected according to the column center lines provided by the surveyor. The column shall be cured according to the specification. The membrane and membrane protection screed shall be applied and approved as mentioned previously. Column concrete shall be pumped. while the pad concrete is placed. shall be placed. shall be erected to the manufacturers formwork drawings. Protection board shall be placed over the membrane. The protective membrane to the pad foundation and columns shall be applied by the trained applicators according to the manufacturers data sheet. Initial water curing of the concrete shall be conducted. The works were executed for major oil companies. Curing shall be conducted. .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The blinding concrete to the ring beam shall be placed in the same manner as the blinding for the pad foundation. Concrete shall be placed and vibrated to the kicker. Inspection of the column forms and reinforcement configuration shall be conducted and concrete placement permission obtained from Civil Contractor QC inspector and EPC Contractor. All these statements constitute management documents. in 150mm layers to the required density value. Formwork to the leanmix blocks that sits on the pad foundation for the ring beam and the interconnecting beams. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The reinforcement shall be according to the approved drawings. All formwork calculations shall be provided upon the formwork drawing. The finishes formwork and reinforcement configuration shall be inspected and concrete placement permission obtained from Civil Contractor QC inspector and EPC Contractor. (Refer to the method statement for protective membrane application). Backfill around the pad foundations shall be conducted using approved material. 2006 Page 435 of The reinforcement shall be checked by an electrician for electrical continuity relating to the cathodic protection requirement. The backfill shall be placed upto the level of the underside of the blinding concrete of the ring beam. The application shall be inspected and approved by the vendors site approved representative. Structural concrete shall be placed and compacted according to the specification requirements. Timber props shall be placed as required to brace the formwork. The column steel shall be installed according to the IFC drawings. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the management of the solid and liquid waste products. Compactors. Reference documents EPC Contractor Project Procedure Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor Responsibilities The Civil Contractor Project Manager shall ensure that the management of the waste disposal activities. Backfill shall be placed upto the underside of the floor slab. Dumptruck. All these statements constitute management documents. . in accordance with the requirements of Operating Authority waste management authority and the referenced EPC Contractor project procedure. 2006 Page 436 of The ring beam configuration shall be inspected by EPC Contractor and permission obtained for the placement of concrete. produced by Civil Contractor on the Company Petrochemical Project. The works were executed for major oil companies. The Disposal operation shall be managed by the transport department. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The ring beam shall be cured according to the specification. Protective membrane to the ring beam shall be applied and protected accordingly. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Concrete pump. Backfill against the ring beam shall be conducted using approved material in 150mm layers. are clearly defined. Attachment None.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Hand tools. Equipment Excavator. These backfill layers shall be tested and approved by the QC inspector. #182 Waste management Top Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. Concrete truck mixers. such as kitchen waste. The works were executed for major oil companies. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. which is scheduled for final commissioning by 25. Method Liquid Waste Liquid waste is identified as those materials. Solid Waste Solid waste. Sewage Vacuum Truck 6000 gallon capacity The trucking capacity of the above fleet is 80.30. dustbin waste. We have provided sewage drip trays for these filling pumps and contain any sewage spills during filling of the trucks.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Disposal arrangements for all categories of waste materials. located in the camp area.T.S. vendor has confirmed that water quality shall have 5-10 mg / litre of organic material.T.000 – 40. general waste materials.Transport Department has mobilized to Plant 2 nos. of Sewage Trailers each 12. is being commissioned. All these statements constitute management documents. within the sewage holding tanks. which is annotated by Manager of Mirfa Authority.A flexible hose shall be laid along fence line to first storm water culvert box for discharge of above water. site area and Civil Contractor surrounding facilities.Purpose built tanker trucks shall be used for the removal and disposal of all liquid waste materials while Sewage treatment Plant that is being built in the Camp. A purpose built waste truck. This Plant is made up of 2 units each of 100m³ / day capacity.000 gallons / day shall be treated at Mirfa Sewage Treatment Plant per attached letter. Daily. General waste includes kitchen waste.000gallon capacity.We intend to utilize around 150-200 m³ / day of treated water for the irrigation of lawns and trees in the camp. timber and burnable material. The facilities at the landfill site are for general waste. Based on the above available sewage treating capacity.P is operational.P. Figures demonstrate that the average daily sewage throughput is around 30g / day. . shall be in a safe and environmentally acceptable manner. where incineration and landfill is conducted. each 2000 gallon capacity1 no. shall be operated on a pre arranged schedule by the transport department. These trays are piped back to the septic tanks. Balance quantities of water shall be either discharges in the Earth Retention Pond located East of Avenue E. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. we can cater to more than 2400 persons when S.000-gallons / 24 hour. and close to 1600 persons without S. Earth bunds around sewage tanks are built to stop possible water ingress to these tanks and avoid undue health hazards. with facilities to tip skips into the on board collection unit.Consumption of fresh water along with sewage quantities in the camp are being currently recorded per attached.All sewage at site shall be treated in plant as follows:200 m³ / day at Sewage Treatment Plant in the Camp.P While S. water quality shall be tested to confirm suitability for above two means of disposal.000 gallons / day shall be treated at Operating Authority Plant housing Complex as per agreement with Operating Authority Management. is identified as waste material generated from the camp and site facilities. of Sewage Truck.T. have been agreed with Operating Authority waste management.P. domestic waste. Storage of these waste materials shall be in appropriate skips. and adequate drivers are on site to cater for transportation of sewage to the plant for treatment. sewage is being pumped out from Sewage Holding Tanks to Plant and Mirfa using Civil Contractor fleet. which makes throughput water suitable for irrigation and / or dumping in open desert. pending receipt of Client approval.2 nos. paper waste. 2006 Page 437 of Safety All activities conducted in connection with the management of the solid and liquid waste disposal.T. Formwork and Coatings. When the waste truck is full. is to define the procedure that shall be adopted. All these statements constitute management documents. A new hole shall be excavated as appropriate. under the direction of the landfill manager.Permits to use the Operating Authority land fill site is displayed upon the waste truck windscreen. for the construction of the Sea water basin. . it shall travel to the Operating Authority landfill site for emptying. Purpose made solid waste disposal truck. 2006 Page 438 of The waste truck shall empty the waste skips into the disposal unit of the waste truck. At this site. The waste truck shall inform the transport department each time this hole becomes full. the waste truck shall empty its contents into a pre dug hole. Attachment Daily Water Report Sewage Quantities Report Vendor Statement on Quality of Throughput Water Annotated letter for Sewage Treatment from Mirfa Authority #183 Sea water basin Top Index Scope Reference documents Definitions Responsibilities Safety Method Equipment Attachment Scope The purpose of this method statement. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Equipment Sewage Treatment Plant Purpose built liquid waste tankers. Reference documents IFC Drawings. Definitions EPC Contractor Civil Contractor Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Excavation & Backfill for underground installations. The driver of the waste truck shall complete a daily log book that records the number of trips made each day. Specification. Any spillage of waste material shall be cleaned up as the operation continues. Waste skips.The cycle shall continue during the operating hours of the land fill facility. Concrete construction. Specification. C) Wall slabs. When the high level area has been completed. the shear key shall be formed. The works were executed for major oil companies. The formation levels shall be approved by the Geotechnical engineer. B) Base slabs. shall monitor the application of the membrane system. Water curing of the blinding concrete shall be conducted for 24 hours. This section of construction shall include the outside toe blinding plus the required 300mm membrane lap area. commencing with the application of the primer with the self adhesive membrane being laid as appropriate. The application of the membrane shall be applied by the approved application team. that shall remove any water ingress from the working faces. any soft areas shall be excavated and removed from site. The procedure of constructing the shear key to these lower areas and blinding layer. The vendor or his approved site representative. in bay sizes that do not conflict with the base slab joint layout. Method The Sea water basin shall be set out by the surveyor according to the IFC drawings. The reinforcement to the floor slab sections shall be assembled carefully to avoid damage to the membrane. As the work progresses. The finish to all these blinding slabs shall be in accordance with the membrane manufacturers details. . B) Base Slabs. A) Blinding Concrete & Protective Membrane. The appropriate testing of the formation level shall be conducted. Using traditional plywood with timber batten construction formwork. The shear key shall be excavated to the correct line and level. This includes chamfers etc. 2006 Page 439 of Responsibilities The Civil Superintendent shall coordinate and organize the site activities according to this procedure. In conjunction with these activities. All these statements constitute management documents. A suitable drainage system at low level shall be provided.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The construction of the sea water basin shall be divided into the following gatagories: A) Blinding concrete and protective membrane. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The area shall be excavated to the correct lines and levels. internal blinding slabs shall be cast to the correct level. Where water has been allowed to stand. Safety All workers shall be inducted prior to commencing on site. a dewatering system shall be incorporated. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. shall be as previously described. the blinding system shall continue to the lower areas. A reverse formwork system shall be adopted for this element. The relevant site engineer and foremen shall supervise and control the activities according to the activity requirements. Specific training for each task that may present a safety hazard shall be given in toolbox talks. according to the manufacturers details. A further one metre section of blinding to the inside of the shear key shall provide the level for the internal blinding slabs. Curing shall continue. A proprietary formwork system shall be used for these sections. Striking of the forms shall be done in a safe and controlled sequence. Giffin Scaffco detail drawings and calculations shall be provided. the site engineer and Civil Contractor QC inspector. Any errors shall be rectified. EPC Contractor shall be informed of the readiness of the section for concrete. shall inspect the section for compliance shall all drawing requirements. The inside wall form shall be erected and braced. the various sections shall be placed and vibrated in careful controlled operation. The formwork shall be removed after the period defined in the specification. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 440 of The waterstop requirement shall be fabricated and installed according to the IFC drawings and manufacturers details. . C) Wall Slabs. The reinforcement and accessories shall be inspected and approved prior to the placement of the outside form closure. Waterstop accessories shall be included within the wall section at this stage. All waterstop accessories shall be positioned and jointed in strict conformance with the vendors instructions. The cathodic protection installation shall be installed and tested. Placement of concrete shall be conducted after EPC Contractor approval. Fixing details for the push-pull strongbacks shall be via a pre-drilled expansion bolt onto the floor slab section. The formwork shall be aligned and checked for completeness by the temporary work engineer. Where the base section occurs on a slope. The resultant concrete surface shall be inspected for surface defects and repaired as required. according to the approved repair procedure. All these statements constitute management documents. Screeding to the correct lines shall be conducted using an aluminium straight edge. Removal of the formwork shall be in accordance with the specification. Details of these tests shall be recorded. the structural concrete shall be placed. those details shall be included. who shall agree on the correct repair procedure. Each wall section shall follow this sequence. Curing of the wall section shall be in accordance with the specification. The reinforcement shall be erected according to the IFC drawing. Any surface defects shall be inspected between Civil Contractor and EPC Contractor QC inspectors. The works were executed for major oil companies. Curing of the slab section shall be according to the specification. The formwork to the floor slab sections shall be constructed from traditional plywood and battens. The joint details shall be in accordance with the relevant drawing detail.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. This sequence shall continue for each floor slab section. A sequence for the construction of these floor slab panels shall be discussed and agreed between EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor. Prior to the placement of concrete to a floor slab section. The pour rate and placement criteria shall be as defined by the formwork designer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Where specific joint details between floor slab sections are shown on the IFC drawings. The wall pour sections shall be constructed as per the IFC drawing details. Upon approval to place concrete from EPC Contractor. Backfill around the structure shall be conducted according to the specification requirements. Equipment Crane. #184 Excavation for Ethane & propane Gas pipeline interconnection Top Index Scope Definitions Material Method Equipment Attachment Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation and laying of Ethane and Propane pipeline from Gasco through to the Company project site and excludes the road crossings where separate method statements apply Reference documents Specification. Dewatering system. The works were executed for major oil companies. the application of the protective coating internally shall be applied. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. to test the integrity of the structure. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety riskSafety Supervision Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Excavation & Backfilling for Underground Structures Safety Prior to commence any activity. . 2006 Page 441 of The sequence of wall pours shall be provided by Civil Contractor.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Each layer shall be tested as the work proceeds. All these statements constitute management documents. Concrete truck mixers. The completed structure shall be filled with clean water. Upon completion of the sections. This application shall include all sealants to the expansion and contraction joints. Attachment None. to conform to specification casting times. D) General. Hand tools. Concrete pump. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 442 of A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. then adequate protection and warning shall be installed. Barriers (including warning tape) shall be placed to indicate an open excavation Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Cables or pipes that span the excavation shall be supported. hand excavation shall be carried out When cable markers have been exposed. Split ducts and trays shall be provided to protect and support these cables. a revised method of work may be necessary and in this instance. Where necessary. Operation department shall be invited to attend Cables shall be protected by fitting split sleeves after exposure The sides of the excavation shall be sloped .A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Where necessary or as defined on the work permit. Reporting of incidents Methods of work and tools to be used Potential hazards found in the Easement areas The approved work method statement EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working adjacent to live process areas Method Permits pertaining to the relevant excavation area shall be obtained from Plant Refinery division. Where necessary. . all personnel shall be briefed Exposed (Existing) cables and pipelines shall be checked for damage by EPC Contractor supervision and combined inspection shall be held by EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor. This evaluation shall be conducted by EPC Contractor Superintendant and Operator operations representative. The works were executed for major oil companies. Where the protection of these services are required. work shall be temporarily suspended and an evaluation made about the soil conditions. drawing and the method statement Any existing services shown on these drawings shall be located and identified. all work shall stop in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified Phone number : Shift Controller Emergency Number HSE Direct number Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes. The surveyor shall set out the route of the proposed gas pipeline trench conforming to the IFC drawings Supervision at the workface must have a copy of the permit. trial pits shall be hand excavated to expose services All existing services encountered shall be plotted by the surveyor on as built drawing The trench shall be excavated by a tracked excavator to correct lines and levels. tile markers and warning tape shall be replaced and provided between cable and tile markers This activity shall continue up to existing ground level. Electrical Building. Chlorination Building. The works were executed for major oil companies. Quality Metering Building) activities to be performed within the scope of the Water and Power Project (Pipelines). . Upon acceptance of the pipe installation. All these statements constitute management documents. The bedding shall be laid and compacted in accordance with the specification requirement. The test laboratory shall conduct the test and report the results The gas pipes shall be placed correctly within the trench by EPC Contractor (not Civil Contractor) in accordance with EPC Contractor own method statements (noting that Al Jaber equipment is under the Direct Control of EPC Contractor). Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The site shall be left tidy of excavated and backfill material Major Equipment Excavator Dump Trucks Compactors Attachment None Top General Scope This Procedure describes the civil works sequence pertaining to Water Pumping Station (Booster Pump Building. compaction of the formation level shall be carried out to the required specified density values. 2006 Page 443 of The excavated material shall be stockpiled in agreed areas for reuse. the pipes shall be surrounded with further bedding material which shall be compacted using suitable equipment The approved backfill material shall be spread uniformly in layers of 150 mm & compacted to the specification requirement and tested accordingly When backfilling. Surplus material shall be removed to the tip area in dump trucks.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Main Pump Building. The surveyor shall monitor the lines and levels of the excavation operation EPC Contractor engineer shall approve the suitability of the formation material by inspecting the bottom of the trench and after the approval. The site test laboratory shall conduct the density test and the resulting values pertaining to density and moisture contents shall be reported to confirm that the compaction carried out conforms to the specification requirement The surveyor shall provide level pins that indicate the correct elevation of the bedding required for the gas pipes. “Project” means the Water and Power Project (Pipelines) “Site” means the actual place or places. to which Plant is to be delivered or where work is to be done by Contractor. computer hardware and software. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 444 of Definitions and Abbreviations Definitions The following words and expressions shall have the following meanings hereby assigned to them: “Contract” means the agreement between the Owner and the Contractor for the execution of the Works. Project Manager and released by the Project Director. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. articles and things of all kind to be provided under the Contract other than Contractor’s Equipment. materials. CS & SE CS shall control. provided or made available by the Owner. The Owner is: “Plant” means machinery. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. “Works” means all Plant to be provided and work to be done by the Contractor under the Contract. Abbreviations The following abbreviations may be used in the procedure (where applicable): Civil Contractor QA Quality Assurance QM Quality Management QC Quality Control PQP Project Quality Plan HSE Heath. The works were executed for major oil companies. The Contractor is: “Engineer” means the person appointed by Owner to act as Engineer for the purpose of the Contract. co-ordination & direct the FM FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications & ITPs Approval / Authorisation This Procedure shall be reviewed by the QA Manager. monitor and direct the S E / FM and workforce for the operations SE shall carry out the operational technicalities.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Safety and Environmental PM CM CS / SE FM QCE Project Manager Construction Manager Construction Superintendent / Site Engineer Foreman Quality Control Engineer Description of Responsibilities PM shall control the overall operations & direct the CM & all divisional heads CM shall arrange the resources to the requirement & direct the divisional heads. . The Engineer is: “Owner” means the person designated as such in the Contract. “Contractor” means the person designated as such in the Contract. apparatus. levelled & jointed Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Drawings Specifications for civil works The records regarding the existing services shall be inquired Excavation The survey team shall set out the excavation lines to the details & fix the reference pegs The excavation area shall be marked according to the details shown on the reference drawings & to the requirement Additional area shall be included for the purpose to set out. . The works were executed for major oil companies. 95% proctor density shall be required.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. inspected & replaced with ordinary / structural backfill soil density shall be tested by an independent laboratory In areas where the required density is not achievable.3 m excavation shall be carried out to accommodate approved granular fill material The sequence shall continue till the required area is completely excavated Ramp shall be excavated to the requirement where mass excavation is carried out for the heavy equipment to enter & exit Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout these operations Water shall be sprinkled to protect the excessive dust flow into air as required All the operations shall be carried out to the Engineer’s satisfaction Procedures. All these statements constitute management documents. 2006 Page 445 of Distribution and Control This Procedure shall be distributed in a controlled manner by the Document Control Centre according to the Procedure Distribution Matrix Reference documents. In case the required density is not achieved. to form the benches & the safety barriers Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the approval of the setting out The excavation shall be carried out to the design lines & depth where a firm formation giving 93% of the dry soil / proctor density is obtained using excavator (reference given below) The excavated material shall be dumped into trucks directly from the excavator & transported to the earth stock piles about 70 to 100m off the operation area The excavated formation shall be proof rolled / dressed / compacted with a smooth vibratory roller 10 tonnes capacity Any soft or compressible areas detected by the proof-rolling shall be removed. further 0.Operational Sequence for the following buildings Booster pump building for 4 # pumps (0-10)(A-B) Instance 1 Electrical building (C-F)(1-8) located between pump buildings Instance 2 Main pump building 4 # pumps (G-H)(1-10) Instance 1 Chlorination building Instance 3 Quality Metering building Instance 4 Excavation shall be carried out to the methods described in the foregoing The formation shall be prepared by proof rolling to 93% proctor density in case of ordinary fill & tested by heavy dynamic sounding 16 blows / 10 cm penetration or 160 bar point resistance by Dutch cone test (refer Testing of ordinary fill) Where selected fill is specified. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. granular material shall be laid within the additional depth excavated & compacted to achieve the structural density Excavation shall be carried out for the underground services (drainage) to the details given on the IFC drawings Proper dressing & compaction shall be carried out for the bedding which shall be laid to receive the pipes Pipes shall be laid to the stringing lines. teeth shovel. Proper vibration for compaction shall be done by trained persons to break the cement particle suspension from the coating of microsilica particles & achieve specified concrete density. the preparations shall be carried out for the blinding concrete grade L to the design profile by placing timber scantling forms in position The surveyor shall fix the top of blinding level marks Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to the ITP & Checklist requirement The prepared formation shall be cleaned. On the damaged areas of the rebars where touch up is necessary. levelled to the profile & finished properly by floating so that the surface is good to receive concrete protection membrane profile Immediately after the concrete is dry & good enough to receive shading over it by polythene sheets. slabs internal 30mm. the remaining bedding & padding shall be completed according to the details & the backfill effected to the floor grade level to allow the work for blinding to proceed Instance 1 After having the excavation approved. the curing shall be carried out by covering the finished surface laid over with plastic sheets for 2 days Concrete protection membrane shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s instructions including the extended area around the foundation Rebars Epoxy coated rebars shall be cut & bent to shape in the yard & transported to the required location. cubes & air void etc) shall be conducted selectively by an approved laboratory representative @ the arrival of the transit mixer to the spot during pour & pour continued until whole planned lot is completed. A holiday detector may be used to examine the coating surface The column rebars shall be placed after the slab rebar placement is over & properly aligned Rebars for the cable trench wall shall be placed simultaneously with proper embedment All rebars shall be tied up using epoxy coated binding wire Suitable spacers shall be used to provide specified concrete cover Above ground external 50mm. . shall be applied with epoxy paint throughout the bars placement operation prior to any oxidation takes place. All these statements constitute management documents. underground & ground water 75mm. temperature. The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The vibrators shall not be allowed to touch either the form surface or the rebars & complete concreting area shall be covered for compaction by the vibrators Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. sprinkled with water & ready mix blinding concrete poured. beams & soffits internal 40mm. rebars fixing & levels Cleaning shall be carried out by compressed air & the forms lightly watered to maintain the temperature to avoid concrete flash setting The concrete pour shall commence & all site tests (slump. All overlaps shall be increased to ACI requirement. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The form surfaces shall be treated with an approved release agent (non staining mineral oil) The top of concrete marks shall be fixed on the form by a wooden / pvc bead Triangular chamfer 25x25mm shall be fixed to the external corners Kicker forms 70mm high shall be prepared for the columns to the requirement to be cast monolithic with previous slab concrete Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to ascertain proper alignment. Sea water contact 100mm The construct joint location shall be marked as shown on IFC drawings The formwork for the foundation slab shall be sawn to the accurate size & erected to the true setting out lines according to construction drawings & necessary supports & bracing to resist the concrete hydraulic pressure provided & not to have deflection more than 3 mm. spread by hand shovels. 2006 Page 446 of Part backfill shall be carried out @ the joints for test pressure resistance Pressure testing shall be carried out according to the specification & codes requirement After the approval is obtained. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Immediately after the concrete has stiffened enough to be surfaced. The works were executed for major oil companies. cold stopper joint with rebated vertical surfaces shall be provided which has to be scabbled & cleaned prior to next pour & shall be treated as a construction joint. saturated hessian shall be added over the concrete surface by removing & replacing the polythene sheet The surface of the concrete shall be covered with water for the required number of 7 days in general The side forms shall be struck after 24-36 hours. the finishing shall be carried out by steel float to the marked levels (by removing all extra material & filling in any depressions observed) To avoid the shrinkage cracks formation. Ambient not to exceed 37C rising. polythene sheets shall be covered over the finished concrete surface immediately for shading & after about 5 to 6 hours. . All these statements constitute management documents. finished & cured as aforesaid Concrete protection membrane shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s instructions including the extended area around the foundation Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. in case any pour break is inevitable due to accidental mechanical breakdown or any other cause. 2006 Page 447 of During concreting any peeling / debonding of the rebars epoxy coating shall be repaired by touch up paint prior to the oxidation takes place Temp @ discharge point not to exceed 30C.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the green surface sprinkled with water & the curing compound applied for the remaining period of curing In the second shift of structural casting. the remaining portion of the columns between the corbel & the ‘hollow core slab supporting girder’ shall be prepared for the steel placement & the formwork. care shall be taken that the vibrator nozzle penetrates to the previous layer also to attain the concrete integrity The top of the column & corbel shall be covered with polythene After a lapse of 24-48 hours the side forms shall be struck. water sprinkled on the green surface & curing compound sprayed over for remaining period (7 days in general) of curing of the sides The column rebars shall be placed in correct position according to the design details upto the top of the column including the crane corbel Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to ITP & checklist requirement Touch up epoxy paint to rebars shall be provided prior to the closure by the forms Sawn formwork shall be fabricated to the column design dimensions to cover casting up to the top of the corbel Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to concrete pour ITP & checklist requirement Concrete pour shall be carried out in 450 mm max vertical layers continued full height of pour While vibrating the second 450 mm layer. Ambient not to exceed 40C. Max permissible cast element 60C & temperature difference on two elements 15C During pouring. Proper centring & shuttering shall be provided for the supporting girders soffits Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to concrete pour ITP & checklist requirement Concrete pour shall be carried out to the procedures explained above followed by the curing The side forms shall be struck after 24-48 hours & curing compound sprayed as explained earlier The girder soffit props shall remain intact for 21 days post pour Approved prefabricated ‘hollow core slabs’ (provided with the extract fan openings) from the specialist manufacturer shall be suspended according to the propriety system & to the approved shop drawings excepting the specified grids A & H reserved for the access Pumps Bases (Booster) The formations for the pump bases shall be prepared & compacted to structural density Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to concrete pour ITP & checklist requirement Blinding concrete shall be laid on the relevant areas. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. .Cast Covers (optional) Pre casting shall be carried out in a yard on a prepared concrete / strong base Forms shall be sawn & prepared to the design size & chamfered accordingly Fabricated rebars shall be placed into the forms & spaced properly Any epoxy paint touch up required shall be given accordingly prior to any further oxidation Recessed GI Lifting lugs shall be fixed @ 1 / 5 th of the length from either end & part of the lugs without GI remain embed in the concrete Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to the ITP & checklist prior to the concrete pour Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 448 of Fabricated rebars shall be placed to the design details being given due continuous touch up at the epoxy coating damaged locations prior to any oxidation takes place Forms shall be prepared for the sides according to the dimensions with exposed corner chamfered Anchored bolts shall be fixed in to the design locations missing the rebars Necessary care shall be exercised during the concrete pour that the anchor bolts remain @ locations fixed & no excessive movement takes place A polystyrene sleeve may be used to allow for the grouting later Top of concrete levels shall be marked Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to concrete pour ITP & checklist requirement Concrete shall be poured into the prepared works according to the procedures explained in the foregoing as well as cured Pumps Bases (Main) Since these bases are designed to rest on the isolation over the foundation slab. elastic pads shall be installed to the design location over the foundation slab Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to concrete pour ITP & checklist requirement Fabricated rebars shall be placed to the design details being given due continuous touch up at the epoxy coating damaged locations Forms shall be prepared for the sides according to the dimensions with exposed corner chamfered Anchored bolts shall be fixed in to the design locations missing the rebars Necessary care shall be exercised during the concrete pour that the anchor bolts remain @ locations fixed & no intolerable excessive movement takes place A polystyrene sleeve may be used to allow for the grouting later Top of concrete levels shall be marked Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to concrete pour ITP & checklist requirement Concrete shall be poured into the prepared works according to the procedures explained in the foregoing as well as cured accordingly Cable ducts (RCC) @ whatever locations these ducts run. The works were executed for major oil companies. pre-cast covers shall be used in lieu Pre. All these statements constitute management documents. the preparatory forms & rebar fixing works shall be carried out Closed Block outs to the design dimensions wherever shown shall be fixed by timber prepared forms at the correct locations on the duct formwork Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to concrete pour ITP & checklist requirement Concrete shall be poured according to the procedures aforesaid & cured accordingly These ducts shall be covered with galvanized chequered plates (optional) fabricated to design details by providing a GI angle backing grid frame or if convenient & feasible. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed board. Only sufficient mortar shall be mixed and spread as can be consumed before it attains its initial set & rendered a steel float finish Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted The screed surface shall be applied with approved oil resistant coating to the specification External PC sandwitch panel shall be provided to the details shown on the manufacturer’s shop drawings & installation instructions Access ladders & platforms Access ladders & platforms shall be fabricated in the workshop & hot dip galvanized These shall be transported to the site in completed form & fixed to the prepared locations with the necessary fastenings Instance 2 Electrical Building Cable floor throughout excepting HVAC room Concreting shall be carried out similarly to the base slab as aforesaid Cable floor walls Shall be carried out similarly to the wall concreting as aforesaid HVAC room floor Forms shall be erected supported on centring & all other preparatory works shall be carried out as explained in the foregoing Structural Columns Shall be carried out in one instance up to the hollow core slab beam bottom as explained in the foregoing Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The mortar for screed shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by weight. approved protection shall be provided within specified period prior to deliver these units to the installation locations As & when required these covers shall be lifted by crane for loading onto a trailer & transported to the building location for off loading @ the correct location Roofing finishes shall be carried out to the upside down roofing system by the asphalt layer laid over with standard 500x500x50mm cement concrete tiles The roof finish shall be laid to a profile slope 3% (further details) HVAC ducting operations shall be completed including all fittings en route Electrical Fix shall be completed according to details on the shop drawings Pipe supports shall be completed prior to the start of flooring & other finishes Flooring Cement concrete screed flooring shall be carried out to the given 1 % slope by scabbling the foundation slab & dividing the area into the bays to be finished alternatively Details here The areas of concrete sub strata to be screeded shall be brush cleaned and dampened until absorption ceases followed by the finished floor level establishment by means of dots and rules. curing shall be carried out as explained in the foregoing After having the curing completed. The works were executed for major oil companies. mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required . The total thickness of the screed flooring is 70 mm bedding screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) by weight and shall be applied as described below. 2006 Page 449 of Concrete shall be poured in to the agreed number of prepared units / covers in one time & steel float finish given Immediately after finish is given.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. . the screws fixed into plugs in predrilled holes if so required. Metal lath shall not be provided where drawing shows a groove in the rendering or the plaster. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Plastering shall not commence until all the mechanical and electrical services. office.5 m of block wall shall be raised Where solid block wall is required. HVAC room & all electrical rooms to be plastered with emulsion paint inside Details PREPARATION OF BACKGROUNDS TO BE PLASTERED OR RENDERED All surfaces to be plastered / rendered shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust and loose particles. The works were executed for major oil companies. Junctions of different background and the chases for the electrical conduits as well as other services pipes shall be treated by fixing 200mm wide metal lath. the hollows shall be filled with concrete the next day Proper curing of the mortar joints shall be carried out Small gap shall be left between the wall top course & the structural concrete for expansion joint formation Wall finishes Corridor. 1 White Silica) as specified shall be applied on the surface by trowel and 1-day allowance given for the succeeding coat to commence with. pipes and Ist stage fixtures have been installed and approved. the width shall be bridged completely for a distance of 150 mm on both sides. The metal lath shall be stretched out and fixed along each edge at 100 mm centres using stainless steel fasteners such as washers and shot fired pins. beam or slab dividing block panels. a concrete column. nails or screws and lapped joints tied with galvanized wire. 2006 Page 450 of Corridor structure In the first go. Where a rendering or plaster is to be continuous across backgrounds of different types. Where small widths of one material less than 300 mm wide are involved e. conduits. A slurry coat consisting of 400 kg Cement (white) to 1 cum of sand (No. Block work surfaces shall have the joints raked out during construction. a strip of metal lath minimum 300 mm wide with an isolating membrane of polythene sheet or building paper behind. the columns shall be poured followed by the slab to be cast monolithic with suspended girders Prefabricated Hollow core slabs Shall be carried out as explained in the foregoing in the instance 1 Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to concrete pour ITP & checklist requirement Block walls 200 mm thick / 150 mm thick as the case may be SS / GI Hold fasts shall be shot fired to the RCC columns @ 400 mm c / c to embed into the block course mortar Membrane treatment to the details shall be applied on the surface to receive the block wall Ist levelling course shall be prepared with mortar spread & wet blocks arranged in position properly tamped with hammer & strung with line dori / thread All the courses shall be laid in such a way that no plumb in joints are formed Necessary small pieces / bats may be cut using a suitable electric operated grinder Rebar 8-mm shall be laid on every alternate course In one day operation not more than 1. control room.g. All these statements constitute management documents. shall be fixed across the junction. Concrete surfaces shall be scabbled by mechanical means to remove all laitance exposing the aggregates to 3 mm depth Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted for the approval of the prepared surfaces. . Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. sand and water may first be mixed in the required proportion with allowance to stand undisturbed for at least 16 hours before mixing with cement. PREPARATION OF MIXES FOR PLASTERING OR RENDERING Slurry coat 400 kg cement: 1 cum sand Second and third coats 300 kg cement: 50 kg lime: 1 cum sand Plaster thickness 19 mm walls and 14 mm ceilings The hydrated lime shall first be thoroughly mixed with sand and then cement added keeping mixer on until the material is uniform in appearance. square and true to line with clout nails or plaster dabs at not more than 600 mm centres to each mesh wing. Profile dots shall be formed on the surfaces. be combed with evenly spaced wavy horizontal lines approximately 20 mm apart and 5 mm deep (less in case of first coat on metal lathing). Civil Contractor inspection shall be conducted for the proposed profile approval. Before applying any coat. as uniformly thick as possible and not less than 8 mm or more than 13 mm thick in any part. All coats shall be applied with firm pressure to exclude air and to ensure a good bond. . The whole of the batch shall be used within an hour of being mixed APPLICATION OF THE VARIOUS PLASTER OR RENDER COATS The work shall not start until the background has been prepared and (all the services have been finished according to requirement and the relevant specifications as described earlier). First undercoat applied to metal lathing shall be well worked into the lath to ensure that the material is completely embedded. however. 2006 Page 451 of FIXING BEADS AND STOPS Beads. checks or other structural defects. First coat shall be trowel applied and scored to form a key for the second coat allowing at least one day before the start of the next coat. the ingredients mix must be protected from drying out. Slurry coat shall be trowel applied allowing at least one day to start the succeeding coat Two render coat applications shall be carried out. other blemishes displaying straight arises and true angles. suitable to receive water which at this stage be added in sufficient quantity to produce the mix stuff workable. Laps of one coat shall not occur over laps of preceding coat. If allowed to stand for a longer period. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Corner / angle beads at all openings as well as plaster ground stops at terminals shall be installed by using stainless steel fasteners.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. Plaster shall be rodded and straightened to uniform surfaces in true planes. The undercoat shall be left rough and open by the edge of the trowel after it has been long enough to set firm. the hydrated lime. The undercoat shall be applied either by laying on with or throwing from a trowel or float. uniform in colour and consistency. The steel trowel applied steel float finishing coat shall not be less than 5 mm or more than 10 mm thick. Each coat shall finish free from cracks. Finish surfaces shall be flush with grounds / stop beads. taking care not to over work the surface. corner beads. the background or the preceding coat shall be brushed down to remove any loose particles and dampened sufficiently to ensure uniform absorption. free from trowel marks. All coats shall be prevented from drying out too quickly and the work be carried out in shade during hot period. stops and the like shall be fixed plumb. outlet boxes and similar details. All renderings shall be protected by properly constructed hessian or similar screen during hot period Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. To improve the workability of the mix. All these statements constitute management documents. The surface shall not be scratched. when it is to receive a Tyrolean finish. with horizontal joints aligning in walls that adjoin or be adjacent The tiles shall be neatly and accurately cut to close fit where necessary at abutments and around outlets. External angles shall be pencil rounded Care shall be taken when rendering up to beads or stops to avoid excessive polishing at the arris and damage to the galvanizing. if the walls are out of plumb by not more than 6 mm. a thick bed adhesive shall be applied in preferance to cutting the defective areas and making good Deviation from true vertical or plumb in the surface of plastering exceeding 6 mm shall be made good Thin bed adhesive shall not be used for fixing tiles with backs incorporating deep keys or frogs for which thick . the trueness of the plaster shall be such that when tested with a 3 m straight edge no gap exceeds 3 mm Where the gap lies between 3 and 6 mm. irregularities or blemishes with straight. washroom & lavatory shall be room height tiles Details given below Material Glazed Tile size specified 108 x 108 mm Setting material (ultra set polyurethane adhesive ) recommended by manufacturer Cushion edges Rounded external corners Head Jamb and Cill trim shapes Wain scot cap Surface bullnose or bull nose cap External corners Bullnose shapes or as specified Internal corners Field butted square Grouting material Water proof epoxy tiling grout with antifungicide additive (Commercial white sanded latex portland cement type) Application Mesh reinforcement shall be incorporated in the plaster where The structure is out of line and the thickness of the plaster exceeds 13 mm The plaster is to be applied over different structural materials The surfaces of the structural wall shall be subject to excessive movement .e. light weight concrete block of all types Examination The strata to receive the tiles shall be examined closely to ascertain that the moisture content is within permissible limits to allow the fixing operation Where the tiling is to be bedded in a thin bed adhesive. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents.g. Inspections for the approval shall be conducted.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. before the protective screens are removed The surface of the finish coat shall be smooth. 2006 Page 452 of Each coat shall be kept damp by means of a fog spray of water for a minimum of 3 days to allow before a subsequent coat is applied or in the case of a finish coat. level or plumb angles. pipes and the like Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.5 mm for wall tiles) Joints shall be horizontal and vertical. Battery room shall be acid resistant tiles up to 1.bed adhesives must be used Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ITP requirement The tiles working sketch shall be approved before the work commences so that cut tiles be kept to a minimum and where they do occur be as large as possible The tiles shall be correctly positioned in both directions the time these are placed forming joints using a proprietary tile spacer (1.2 m level Details given below Lounge (kitchen).. true and free from waviness. . Movement joints not less than 6 mm shall be provided: At all internal vertical corners At all angles with structural walls and ceilings To form bays not greater than 3000x4500 mm Over all structural movement joints: The joints shall be carried through the plastering to the structural wall. no gap exceeds 3 mm Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ITP requirement The joints shall be grouted well to completely fill in as well as appear flush after the adhesive has set and not less than 48 hours post fixing. The works were executed for major oil companies. Glazed edge tiles shall be used at the exposed edges. . social rooms & HVAC rooms shall be tiled floors Details given below Office shall be heavy duty PVC tiles Details Control room.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.. The tiles shall be fixed in position prior to the adhesive gets dried for that it shall be prepared and applied on a small area not exceeding 1m x 1m at a time with a trowel to dry plaster surface in a manner recommended by the manufacturer followed by the tiles pressed firmly into with a twisting / sliding action tapping firmly and cleaned as soon as the bedding be completed. The tiles shall fit closely to the electrical outlets and fixtures allowing plates. collars. Flooring finishes Corridors. All these statements constitute management documents. edges or / and corners keeping the ‘on going pattern’ or joint alignment. The finished surface of the tile shall be firm and true such that when checked with a 3 m straight edge. Method (Laying ceramic floor tiles by SEMI DRY method) The areas of concrete sub strata to be tiled shall be brush cleaned and dampened until absorption ceases followed by the finished floor level establishment by means of dots and rules. overlap the tiles. For General Area ‘RAK GP 21 G’ and for wet areas Johnson ‘Athena’ Cementitious adhesive. under equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions as well as terminated neatly at obstructions. partially filled with an approved joint filler and finished flush with an approved sealant recommended by the manufacturer for the relevant situations. 2006 Page 453 of The tiles shall be extended into recesses. covers etc.Nitotile GP Joint filling grout – Approved proprietary material with matching shade. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. electrical rooms shall be false floor with heavy duty PVC tiles Details Materials Ceramic floor tiles 300 x 300 x 10mm or as the size may be. Surplus grout shall be cleaned off from the tiles surfaces as neatly as possible as the work proceeds using a damp cloth and the joints tooled smooth. The grout haze shall be removed according to the manufacturer’s instructions for the use of acid and chemical cleaners The tile work shall be rinsed thoroughly with clean water prior to and post using chemical cleaners followed by polishing with soft cloth. The works were executed for major oil companies. blinding. Particular care shall be taken in ‘wet’ areas to prevent low spots that may promote water pooling. Localised variations in level for a nominally flat floor shall be a maximum of + / . The surface of the screed shall be cleaned by brush prior to the application of the adhesive. Where a structural movement joint is provided in the base.5 mm for wall tiles and 3 mm for floor tiles) The tiles shall neatly and accurately be cut to a close fit where necessary at abutments. The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by weight. a movement joint of the same width in the bedded finish shall be positioned immediately above The movement joint cavities shall extend through the combined thickness of the finish and the bedding mortar. around outlets. The adhesive shall be mixed with water using a slow speed drill to the water adhesive ratio per manufacturer’s data sheet. The tiles shall be correctly positioned in both directions the time these are placed forming joints using a proprietary tile spacer (1. RCC precast covers Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . Tiles shall then be laid on the adhesive layer with a twisting motion ensuring good contact between the tile and the adhesive bed. MOVEMENT JOINTS IN TILED FLOORS Unless otherwise indicated in the documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Battery room shall be acid resistant tiles Details as above Transformer RCC works all shall be carried our in a similar manner as described in the foregoing & necessary concrete protection membrane applied accordingly Valve chambers These shall be constructed to the details & include excavation. 2006 Page 454 of The total thickness of the ceramic tile flooring is 100 mm which includes 90 mm bedding screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) to be mixed by weight and 10 mm thick ceramic tiles. mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required for the bed. All these statements constitute management documents. The tolerance in the overall level shall not be more than 10 mm from required finishes.2-mm under a 3-meter straight edge. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted for the correct formation of joint alignment and the level profile The tiles shall be laid level or to 1. pipes and the like. Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted to ascertain proper compaction and levels. a 10 mm movement joint shall be formed at the perimeter of all the tiled floors and where the tiling meets structural features such as columns. Adhesive Nitotile GP mix shall be applied in uniform thickness of 2 to 3 mm over the surface of the cement sand screed bedding and then combed horizontally.. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed board and given a smooth trowel finish. Excessive adhesive shall be removed with a damp cloth before the material has set. RCC bases & walls. shall be applied as described below.% falls in ‘wet’ areas as may be required. For this purpose the adhesive manufacturer’s instruction shall be adhered to. machine bases etc. Grouting of the joints shall be carried out after a period of 24 hours after completion of laying of tiles. completely filled and sealed after grouting of the normal joints takes place. The works were executed for major oil companies. Spray application shall only be used for painting of epoxy resin base The dried films shall be free from bloom. discoloration and extraneous matter No exterior or exposed paint work shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions like sandstorms Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . 2006 Page 455 of Chlorination building Instance 3 Pipe duct After excavation. Application All paints shall be prepared and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Priming paints shall be applied by brush. concrete protection membrane activities are completed in a similar manner as explained in instance 1 & 2. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. shrinkage. Manufacturer’s name. initials or recognised trade mark Title and specification number Whether primer or undercoat or finishing coat Whether for internal or external use Colour reference Method of application Batch number and date of manufacture Samples Sample panel of 1 sqm in area shall be prepared for each type The following operational sequences shall be involved Surface Preparation Priming Coat Filler Coat to the requirement Intermediate Coat Finishing Coat All according to the approved system as aforesaid detailed for reference. blinding. wrinkling. the preparatory works for the pipe duct shall be carried out to the design location Foundation slab shall be carried out similarly with column starter rebars placed in Structural RCC columns shall be constructed accordingly RCC wall between the chlorine storage & chlorine dosage shall be constructed to the roof soffit level according the foregoing explaination Prefabricated Hollow core slabs Shall be carried out as explained in the foregoing the instance 1 Parapet shall be constructed accordingly to the shown layout Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations according to concrete pour ITP & checklist requirement Wall finishes Internally to be plastered & emulsion paint External surface to be emulsion paint Concrete surface shall be epoxy coated Details Application (painting) GENERAL Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers clearly labelled with the following information. sheeringness. sagging. sags and drips shall be avoided. Prior to the application of a coating. Any thick runs or collections of paint shall be removed before these harden The colour of the final coat shall be as approved. Moveable parts shall not to be painted. Each coat shall be allowed to dry for the time specified by the manufacturer before application of any succeeding coat All coatings shall be cleaned as specified by the manufacturer before the next coat is applied All fixtures and surfaces not to be painted shall be properly protected during application and upon completion of the work all paint and varnish removed from glass. 2006 Page 456 of Surfaces to be painted shall receive the first coat of paint as quickly as possible after the preparation has been completed Each coat shall be applied uniformly over the entire surface. TEST EQUIPMENT Coating thickness meter such as Elcometer ‘Minitector” Model 150 Wet fill thickness combs EPOXY COATING Priming shall be applied over the whole area to be coated There shall be strict control of surface cleanliness between primer and epoxy coating / and between coats of the same. SPRAY APPLICATION All equipment for spray application shall be inspected before any application begins. The works were executed for major oil companies. Spray guns. edges shall be strip coated first and at extra pass made later. voids. etc. fixtures. BRUSH APPLICATION Brushes shall be of a style and quality that permit proper application of the material Brushing shall be done so that a smooth coat as nearly uniform in thickness as possible is obtained without any deep or detrimental marks Paints shall be worked into all corners and crevices. hoses and pumps shall be cleaned before new material is added. The manufacturer of the coating shall stipulate primer and epoxy recoat interval for all curing temperatures likely to be encountered and these be adhered to with a maximum tolerance of +4 hours. any damage to the previous coating shall be repaired with the specified material. . In hot weather such additional precautions as are necessary shall be taken to ensure that the specified dry film thickness on priming or finish coats is obtained COATING QUALITY Coatings shall be free from pinholes. dust. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Coating materials containing heavy pigments that have a tendency to settle shall be kept in suspension during the application by the power driven. bubbles. foreign inclusions and any such defect shall be repaired. The surface being painted shall be free of visible moisture throughout these operations The paint shall be applied only to the clean dry primed or previously coated surfaces. On beams and irregular surfaces. Where this is exceeded. FILM THICKNESS Specified film thickness for coating materials shall be strictly adhered to and observed by checking with an appropriate film thickness gauge. All these statements constitute management documents. Vacuum removal of dust and sand shall be employed and contamination removed. Skips. it shall be removed with suitable abrasive paper. Where dirt or dust has been trapped in the painted surface.. surfaces to be recoated shall first be suitably abraded to remove gloss and provide a key Wet thickness gauges shall be used by the coating operators continually to check that sufficient paint is being applied to achieve the desired dry film thickness Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. runs. continuous agitator Spray gun shall be held at right angles to the surface and each pass overlap the previous one by approximately 50%.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. covering. air voids Hessian rolls to requirement Plastic sheets to requirement Internal Vibrators to requirement (5000-10000 cycle / minute) Compressors to requirement Attachment Sketches & design of RCC precast cover Paint system table Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. All these statements constitute management documents. blinding. . the preparatory works for the pipe duct shall be carried out to the design location Foundation structural beams shall be constructed Foundation slab shall be carried out similarly with column starter rebars Structural RCC columns shall be constructed accordingly Preparation shall be carried out for the centring & shuttering for the suspended cast in situ slab Preparation shall be carried out for placing rebars Concrete Pouring arrangement shall be carried out all according to the requirement RCC Parapet shall be constructed according to the shown layout Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to concrete pour ITP & checklist requirement Wall finishes Internally to be plastered & emulsion paint External surface to be emulsion paint Concrete surface shall be fair face & epoxy coated Floor finishes shall be cement screed ½ % slope with floor tiles Major Equipment. The works were executed for major oil companies. concrete protection activities are completed in a similar manner as explained in instance 1 & 2. 2006 Page 457 of Floor finishes Cl2 storage shall be cement screed ½ % slope with Cl2 resistant finish Details Dosing room shall be cement screed ½ % slope with acid resistant finish Details HVAC rooms shall be floor tiles Details given above Control room shall be with floor tiles with special skirting for electrical equipment Details given above Quality Metering building Instance 4 After excavation. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Excavator 1 # Shovel 1 # Dumper trucks 2 #s Drum Vibratory Roller / Compactor 1 # Water tanker as & when required (The aforesaid equipment are required only for excavation operations) Concrete Batching plant Water tanker as & when required Concrete pump to requirement Concrete transit mixers to requirement Thermometers for maxima / minima & ambient All testing equipment such as slump cone. All these statements constitute management documents. 2. these shall be installed such that removal of them as concrete progresses can be achieved efficiently. All materials for the immediate as well as set concrete curing shall be arranged by him Site Engineer shall direct the surveyor for the setting out lines & levels in conjunction with the Project Engineer Surveyor shall be responsible to set out form lines & establish top of blinding levels. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Surveyor shall also prepare the pre pour survey report in conjunction with Site Engineer for check by QA Engineer QA Engineer shall check the report as well as the setting out all according to drawings & request inspection by Company 4. the formation shall be made to required levels & profiles. Timber forms shall be erected for the required thickness of 100 mm from the formation level. 2006 Page 458 of Top Blinding concrete 1. Drgs # Concrete General Specifications Drgs # GA at Ground Floor Level QCS 3. The works were executed for major oil companies. 6. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Material Method SRC 20 from Ready Mix Qatar The surveyor set out the relevant line and level information in such a manner that the Foreman can relate the data to the tradesmen.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Necessary top of blinding levels shall be fixed The trades man shall erect suitable battens and rails to the correct outside lines and finished level of the blinding concrete. Prior to commencing blinding. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. Responsibilities The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer shall arrange all materials. All persons involved shall be imparted tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE aw well as other required equipment whenever necessary 5. . Where intermediate level rails are required. equipment & man power for the item & direct the Site Engineer & Foreman to resort appropriate action for the smooth execution of the item. Scope Reference documents The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the preparation and placement of blinding concrete prior to subsequent activities. The occurrence of ripples or protrusions shall be avoided as the application of the protective membrane requires a smooth surface finish. The Foreman & Site Engineer shall ensure that the formation level has been inspected. . tested and approved prior to the commencing any blinding activity. Major Equipment Review of concrete test result & filing system. Batching Plant. The blinding concrete shall be placed by direct pour method. 2006 Page 459 of When the blinding battens and rails are completed. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Anti-termite treatment shall be applied according to specialist method statement. 9. All materials for the immediate as well as set concrete curing shall be arranged by him Site Engineer shall direct the surveyor for the setting out lines & levels in conjunction with the Project Engineer Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. QC Engineer shall check the correctness of the work done all according to design & specifications Prior to application of anti-termite treatment. All these statements constitute management documents. The blinding concrete. Attachment -Inspection Check Sheet supplier at arrival of the truck mixer at the Site shall be tested on 7 & 28 days in the presence of Company / Contractor QA Engineers. shall be covered with hessian and water cured for specified period. Responsibilities The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer shall arrange all materials. Scope Reference documents The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the preparation and placement of blinding concrete prior to subsequent activities. The works were executed for major oil companies.Cubes taken by the concrete Concrete transit mixer. Drgs # Concrete General Specifications Drgs # GA at Ground Floor Level QCS 3. the Site Engineer shall conduct line and level checks with the surveyor. All results shall be forwarded to Company office for information & necessary action if any. 7. Hand tools 8. due to failure on any of 7 or 28 days. when sufficiently set. results recorded & signed by all parties immediately. The blinding concrete shall be finished to a smooth surface. Contractor QA / QC Engineer shall inspect the formation and RFI be prepared for the Company inspection Anti-Termite application shall be carried out on the footing areas.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. equipment & man power for the item & direct the Site Engineer & Foreman to resort appropriate action for the smooth execution of the item. 2. Filing of these results shall be made by the Contractor DCC based on QA & Project Engineer direction so as these reports are conveniently traceable Blinding concrete 1. Where intermediate level rails are required. The Foreman & Site Engineer shall ensure that the formation level has been inspected. Major Equipment Concrete transit mixer. All these statements constitute management documents. Hand tools 8. Attachment -Inspection Check Sheet Review of concrete test result & filing system. Anti-termite treatment shall be applied according to specialist method statement. All results shall be forwarded to Company office for information & necessary Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. 2006 Page 460 of Surveyor shall be responsible to set out form lines & establish top of blinding levels. The works were executed for major oil companies. All persons involved shall be imparted tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE aw well as other required equipment whenever necessary 5.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 7. When the blinding battens and rails are completed. Batching Plant. Material Method SRC 20 from Ready Mix Qatar The surveyor set out the relevant line and level information in such a manner that the Foreman can relate the data to the tradesmen. The blinding concrete. these shall be installed such that removal of them as concrete progresses can be achieved efficiently. shall be covered with hessian and water cured for specified period.Cubes taken by the concrete supplier at arrival of the truck mixer at the Site shall be tested on 7 & 28 days in the presence of Company / Contractor QA Engineers. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Contractor QA / QC Engineer shall inspect the formation and RFI be prepared for the Company inspection Anti-Termite application shall be carried out on the footing areas. The blinding concrete shall be placed by direct pour method. The blinding concrete shall be finished to a smooth surface. . when sufficiently set. Necessary top of blinding levels shall be fixed The trades man shall erect suitable battens and rails to the correct outside lines and finished level of the blinding concrete. the Site Engineer shall conduct line and level checks with the surveyor. QC Engineer shall check the correctness of the work done all according to design & specifications Prior to application of anti-termite treatment. the formation shall be made to required levels & profiles. Prior to commencing blinding. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. Timber forms shall be erected for the required thickness of 100 mm from the formation level. Surveyor shall also prepare the pre pour survey report in conjunction with Site Engineer for check by QA Engineer QA Engineer shall check the report as well as the setting out all according to drawings & request inspection by Company 4. tested and approved prior to the commencing any blinding activity. 9. results recorded & signed by all parties immediately. The occurrence of ripples or protrusions shall be avoided as the application of the protective membrane requires a smooth surface finish. 6. the reinforcement material shall be stored in the reinforcement fabrication yard in the appropriate storage facilities. 2006 Page 461 of action if any. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Scope Reference documents and storage of The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the material receipt. The works were executed for major oil companies. Responsibilities The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer shall arrange all materials. Filing of these results shall be made by the Contractor DCC based on QA & Project Engineer direction so as these reports are conveniently traceable Receipt. purchase order and quality documentation requirements. fabrication reinforcement 1. 2. The quality documentation shall be kept by the QA / QC department & filed accordingly. All persons involved shall be imparted tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE as well as other required equipment whenever necessary 5. The store man shall inform the QA / QC department when a delivery of reinforcement is made. scaffolding. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . The store man and QA / QC shall review the reinforcement delivery and complete the Material receiving report. equipment. When the incoming material inspection is completed and acceptable. Drgs # Concrete General Specifications All Structural Drawings & Contractor’s produced BBS documents QCS 3.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Material All re-bars shall be procured from the approved source according to material submittal documentation records The Project Engineer. QA Engineer & store man shall ensure that any reinforcement materials received upon Site is in accordance with the specification requirements. safety related items & man power for the item & direct the Site Engineer & Foreman to resort appropriate action for the smooth execution of the item. Site Engineer shall direct the rebar foremen / charge hand for the correct application to BBS in conjunction with the Project Engineer QA Engineer shall involve physically during fabrication & check the fabricated rebars all according to drawings & Bar Bending Schedule 4. due to failure on any of 7 or 28 days. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. All these statements constitute management documents. fabrication and storage of reinforcement. The bundles shall be tagged with a suitable label that indicate the relevant bar reference and BBS document reference from which these have been fabricated. 2. The bending steel fixer shall fabricate the required number of bars of each shape code checking against the check sample when each bar is completed. 8. The works were executed for major oil companies. The correct bar diameter shall be cropped into the specified length as given on the bar schedule. QA & rebar Foreman shall review the schedule and allocate the fabrication process to the relevant fabricator / steel fixer. Project Quality Engineer Shall control & supervise the activity making sure that the work is done according to quality procedures & ITPs & proceed for Company approval Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. it shall be checked by the Site Engineer. 2006 Page 462 of 6. Any error in bending of the bars shall be corrected prior to placement in storage. . 1. shall be utilized as a check sample for all concurrent bars of that type. All these statements constitute management documents. Method When reinforcement is to be “cut and bent. Specification Section 5 The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer Shall arrange all materials required such as concrete blocks. 3. This bar if examined correct. Upon bending of the first of each bar type. The cropping steel fixer shall crop the required bars of each diameter. The completed bundles shall be stored within the reinforcement yard until such time as those are required upon Site. Major Equipment Attachment Scope Reference documents Responsibilities BBS Proforma Bar cropper & Bar bending Block works above grade level The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the construction of block works above grade level & upper floors. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The Site Engineer. QA & Foreman for correctness. washed Sand. Material required shall be sourced from the yard storage facilities.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Storage shall be in accordance with the procedure for store control by taking into stock the delivered quantity into permanent material file & issuing to Site for the required quantity for fabrication Details for the total reinforcement required for the Project & the delivered quantity shall be recorded 7.” the Foreman shall be issued with a current rebar schedule by the Project Engineer. The correct bent bars shall be stored in bundles & protected against ingress of moisture using plastic sheet cover at the end of the day. water etc & ensure that the activity is carried out according to the contract & QCS / QNBS as well as all quality procedures are strictly adhered to. cement. Mortar shall be mixed using a small concrete mixer on Site Sand & cement shall be piled up near by mixer A timber measuring box shall be used to ensure that 1:3 ratio is maintained for dry mixing of cement & sand respectively Dry washed sand shall be poured into mixer keeping the drum rotating & then cement added gently When both materials show a uniform colour of dry mix. Polythene sheets as specified The surveyor shall set out the relevant line on the beams or the slab The surface to receive block work shall be cleared of all dust. proper scaffolding as well as access arrangements are made 5. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Water. Coarse Sand. Mason shall establish the course profile line using string & level letting string pass around end control blocks Wall ties shall be fixed to the RCC columns as required by shotfiring or concrete nails at every 4th course Mixing of Mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 c sand) The mortar layer shall be laid on the formation & leveled. All persons involved shall be imparted tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE as well as other required specific equipment whenever necessary Shall make sure that at higher levels of work. The works were executed for major oil companies. required quantity of water shall be added into the drum Mixing shall be allowed for a minimum period of 3 minutes to produce quantity of mortar sufficient to be consumed within one hour Laying of block courses First layer shall be laid to the established profile on concrete surface width wise keeping block stretcher parallel to wall giving 10 to 12 mm gap for the mortar filling Mortar shall be filled into the gaps using mason trowel Mortar shall be laid over the whole course 10 to 12 mm thick uniformly spread & leveled Blocks shall be kept on the bottom layer gently so that the joint of both are staggered Block shall be cut square if required Mortar shall be filled into the joints as well as on the top surface. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. All these statements constitute management documents. Expanded Polystyrene 50 mm thick. 2006 Page 463 of Site Engineer / Foreman Shall carry out the execution of item physically according to the direction given by Project Engineer as well as Quality Engineer 4.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. lined & leveled Similarly further layers shall be formed Not more than 5 layers shall be constructed in one day Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Wall ties (Catnic). the concrete surface shall be made to required level & profile by mortar laying adjustment so that preferably whole number of block courses are formed. dirt & oily material Prior to commencing block work. . Material Method Blocks 200 mm wide. 6. Cavities ties (Catnic). Cement. cement.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Project Quality Engineer Shall control & supervise the activity making sure that the work is done according to quality procedures & ITPs & proceed for Company approval Finishing Engineer / Foreman Shall carry out the execution of item physically according to the direction given by Project Engineer as well as Quality Engineer Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. plaster sand water etc & ensure that the activity is carried out according to the contract & QCS / QNBS as well as all quality procedures are strictly adhered to. Sand Measuring box. previous layer shall be cleaned well & further operation carried out & curing for the bottom layers done by spray water from sides Curing shall be carried out to make sure that all the mortar is cured to a minimum of 3 days Cavity walls Both inner & outer skin walls shall be raised simultaneously Expanded Polystyrene & polythene sheet as vapour barrier shall be inserted between these skin walls Cavity ties shall be embedded into mortar layers placed perpendicular to the wall axis sloped towards outer skin @ spacing of 900 mm horizontally as well as 600 mm vertically Care shall be taken not to permit any mortar falling into cavity 7. 3. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. ‘Rendering’ applies to external surface while ‘plastering’ applies to internal surface 2. Scope The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for plastering & rendering the block walls & RCC surfaces. The works were executed for major oil companies. . Reference documents Responsibilities Specification Section 5 The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer Shall arrange all materials required such as. 2006 Page 464 of All layers shall be true vertical & in horizontal profile A gap 12 to 20 mm to be filled later with compressed filler board shall be left between the wall top & the beam / slab soffit in non suspended ceiling areas Wall surface shall be cleaned using wire brush to take off all mortar peels & protrusions All joints shall be well surfaced & trowel raked in to make it good enough to receive plaster / rendering Block cavities at the corners. junctions and column ties shall be filled with concrete Next day if required for further block layer. Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer. Hand tools Plastering & Rendering the block walls & RCC surfaces 1. All these statements constitute management documents. Fixing beads and stops Beads. All bituminous & water repelling agents shall be removed if present on the surface Concrete surfaces shall be scabbled by mechanical means to remove all laitance exposing the aggregates to 3 mm depth Contractor & Company inspections shall be conducted for the approval of the prepared surfaces. the width shall be bridged completely for a distance of 150 mm on both sides. Where a rendering or plaster is to be continuous across backgrounds of different types. All aforesaid activities shall be carried out under Contractor QA / QC check Company inspection shall be conducted for the proposed profile approval. shall be fixed across the junction. A slurry coat consisting of 400 kg Cement (white) to 1 cum of sand (No.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Plaster profile dots shall be formed on the surfaces. beam or slab dividing block panels. proper scaffolding as well as access arrangements are made 5. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Corner / angle beads at all openings as well as plaster ground stops at terminals shall be installed by using steel fasteners. Metal lath shall not be provided where drawing shows a groove in the rendering or the plaster. a concrete column. Junctions of different background and the chases for the electrical conduits as well as other service pipes shall be treated by fixing approved 200mm wide metal lath. Where small widths of one material less than 300 mm wide are involved e. a strip of metal lath minimum 300 mm wide with an isolating membrane of polythene sheet or building paper behind. pipes and Ist stage fixtures have been installed and approved. conduits. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. square and true to line with clout nails or plaster dabs at not more than 600 mm centres to each mesh wing. Plaster Sand. the screws fixed into plugs in predrilled holes if so required. Water. Plastering shall not commence until all the mechanical and electrical services. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. All persons involved shall be imparted tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE aw well as other required specific equipment whenever necessary Shall make sure that at higher levels of work. Block work surfaces shall have the joints raked out as specified during construction. nails or screws and lapped joints tied with galvanized wire. Furring & Lathing (Internal Galvanized Steel. External Stainless Steel) Preparation of backgrounds to be plastered or rendered All surfaces to be plastered and rendered shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust and loose particles. The metal lath shall be stretched out and fixed along each edge at 100 mm centres using steel fasteners such as washers and shot fired pins. . Material Method Cement. 6.g. 2006 Page 465 of 4. 1 White Silica) as specified shall be applied on the surface by trowel and 1-day allowance given for the succeeding coat to commence with. All these statements constitute management documents. stops and the like shall be fixed plumb. the background or the preceding coat shall be brushed down to remove any loose particles and dampened sufficiently to ensure uniform absorption. All these statements constitute management documents. as uniformly thick as possible and not less than 8 mm or more than 13 mm thick in any part and scored to form a key for the second or final coat allowing at least one day before the start of the next coat. . The works were executed for major oil companies. Mortar shall be mixed using a small concrete mixer on Site Sand. During this application care shall be taken to make sure that the material is well worked into the laths for proper embedment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. lime & cement shall be piled up near by A timber measuring box shall be used to ensure that the required ratio is maintained for dry mixing of cement & sand respectively Dry washed sand shall be poured into mixer keeping the drum rotating & then cement added gently followed by hydrated lime When added materials show a uniform colour of dry mix. suitable to receive water which at this stage be added in sufficient quantity to produce the mix stuff workable. uniform in colour and consistency. Total thickness 15 mm internal. First coat shall be trowel applied either by laying on with or throwing from a trowel or float. required quantity of water shall be added into the drum to produce semi dry mortar Mixing shall be allowed for a minimum period of 3 minutes to produce quantity of mortar sufficient to be consumed within one hour Application of the various plaster or render coats The work shall not start until the background has been prepared and all the services have been finished according to requirement and the relevant specifications as described earlier. the ingredients mix must be protected from drying out. Before applying any coat. the hydrated lime.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 466 of Preparation of mixes for plastering or rendering Slurry coat 400 kg cement: 1 cum sand Base coat 300 kg cement: 50 kg lime: 1 cum sand (1200 kg) Finish coat 300 kg cement: 10 kg lime: 1 cum sand (900 kg) Plaster thickness According to drawings & specifications. If allowed to stand for a longer period. sand and water may first be mixed in the required proportion with allowance to stand undisturbed for at least 16 hours before mixing with cement. Slurry coat for proper adhesion shall be trowel applied allowing at least one day to start the succeeding coat Two plaster or render coat applications shall be carried out. The whole of the batch shall be used within an hour of being mixed Mixing of semi dry mortar The mortar layer shall be laid on the formation & leveled. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. To improve the workability of the mix. 20 mm external The hydrated lime shall first be thoroughly mixed with sand and then cement added keeping mixer on until the material is uniform in appearance. Finish surfaces shall be flush with grounds / stop beads. All aforesaid activities shall be carried out under Contractor QA / QC Engineer check Inspections for the Company approval shall be requested. be combed with evenly spaced wavy horizontal lines approximately 20 mm apart and 5 mm deep (less in case of first coat on metal lathing).Checklist. true and free from waviness. Hand tools Roofing system 1. All these statements constitute management documents. All coats shall be applied with firm pressure to exclude air and to ensure a good bond. before the protective screens are removed The surface of the finish coat shall be smooth. checks or other structural defects. All coats shall be prevented from drying out too quickly and the work be carried out in shade during hot period. Plaster shall be rodded and straightened to uniform surfaces in true planes. 7. Laps of one coat shall not occur over laps of preceding coat. Each coat shall finish free from cracks. Sand Measuring box. External angles shall be pencil rounded Care shall be taken when rendering up to beads or stops to avoid excessive polishing at the arris and damage to the galvanizing. The finishing coat shall be steel trowel applied The finishing coat shall not be less than 5 mm or more than 10 mm thick and shall be laid on with a trowel and finished with a steel float. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 2006 Page 467 of This coat shall be left rough and open by the edge of the trowel after it has been long enough to set firm.b The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . 2. Scope Reference documents Responsibilities The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for application of roofing system Specification Section 5. Sand Measuring box. All renderings shall be protected by properly constructed hessian or similar net shade screen during hot period Each coat shall be kept damp by means of a fog spray of water for a minimum of 3 days to allow before a subsequent coat is applied or in the case of a finish coat. level or plumb angles. other blemishes displaying straight arises and true angles. outlet boxes and similar details. irregularities or blemishes with straight. Attachment . Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer. First coat applied to metal lathing shall be well worked into the lath to ensure that the material is completely embedded. The works were executed for major oil companies. 3. ITP Mechanical Mixer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. taking care not to over work the surface. Hand tools 8. corner beads. free from trowel marks. These quantities are indicative only. All persons involved shall be imparted tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE as well as other required specific equipment whenever necessary Shall make sure that at higher levels of work. Material Cement. Geotextile / Terram. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. proper scaffolding as well as access arrangements are made Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk 5. Plaster Sand. Water. All services drains or other necessary items required to be in place prior to the roofing commences. Lime chips. Paver. Foaming agent. Method Specialist Contractor Specialist approved sub contractor shall be engaged for this system execution Method The roofing system shall be carried out to the following operational sequences. The works were executed for major oil companies. Company Inspection shall be conducted. on the pad foundations and other up-stands at a specified height from the slab level for tugging waterproofing membrane into the parapet with sealant applied over. shall be completed in all respects including grouting. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental procedures. Aluminum flashing (All items according to approvals) 6.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The area shall be cleared and made dry. All these statements constitute management documents. Polystyrene. shall be constructed prior to commence any roofing system operation. Concrete surface shall be scabbled mechanically or if approved by Company my be acid etched to remove laitance On the existing RCC suspended slab all large foundations if any. Waterproofing membrane. Project Quality Engineer Shall control & supervise the activity making sure that the work is done according to quality procedures & ITPs & proceed for Company approval Finishing Engineer / Foreman Shall carry out the execution of item physically according to the direction given by Project Engineer as well as Quality Engineer 4. Actual mix design shall be included by the sub contractor The lightweight screed using special foam concrete shall be laid in to the following mix design to produce a density of 650 to 750 Kgs / cum Sand / Cement: 1 / 1 Cement: 350 Kg / cum Sand: 350 Kg / cum Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. A groove shall be formed around the periphery of the area. 2006 Page 468 of Shall arrange all materials required through the sub contractor ensure that the activity is carried out according to the contract & Specificationsas well as all quality procedures are strictly adhered to. . mineral surface finished. an aerator and a pump. TERRAM membrane with 100-mm overlaps shall be laid over top of the insulation boards. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Before laying water proofing membrane. water shall be drained out and the membrane left to dry out. Application on the AC foundation & up-stands shall be carried out according to the details shown on the sketch Company Inspection shall be conducted & ITP signed off Whole surface shall be flooded with water for a period of 72 hours after plugging in all roof drains After successful completion of the test. Extruded polystyrene insulation boards with rebated edges 50 mm thick shall be laid over the dry membrane ensuring all areas are properly covered. left for one day to dry out. pipe supports etc. gravel (nominal size 19 – 38 mm) filling shall be carried out to create a good aesthetic. The second layer shall be laid when the first has dried out followed by forming smooth finish to the required falls and cross-falls Company Inspection shall be conducted The completed screed shall be cured with fresh water for two days and thereafter. The surfaces to be laid with screed shall be formed using mortar dabs to the specified profiles to 1 % slope. The ‘foam concrete screed’ shall be laid in two layers to avoid settlement. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.2 Lit / cum The ingredients shall be mixed using a mechanical mixer. . laying in of water proofing membrane shall be commenced with by full torching over the primed screed allowing 100mm wide side and end overlaps. shall be loosely laid over the filter membrane. All small and light pre cast pedestals / foundations for the cable trays. The works were executed for major oil companies. The dressing shall be carried out over the angle fillet and up-stands properly terminating into pre formed grooves by tugging the membrane into the groove as well as rainwater outlets and around penetrations. All these statements constitute management documents. Once dried. Company inspection shall be conducted by the manufacturer’s representative and all coordination made. 2006 Page 469 of Water: 210 Lit / cum Foaming agent: 1. A warranty for the specified period of 10 years shall be issued by the specialist contractor and Contractor according to the contract requirement Concrete pavers in the form of pre cast concrete tiles 400mm x 400 mm x 40 mm shall be laid loose over PVC TILE PADS to be provided at all the intersections and at the corners as shown on the sketch. a coat of bituminous primer shall be applied to all the proposed surfaces.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11.. torched over main membrane and tugged into groove as aforesaid. UV resistant. if any. A cement sand angle fillet of 50 x 50 mm triangular cross section shall be formed at all directional changes. The membrane shall be tugged into the groove and sealed with JOINT SEAL bituminous Mastic. At the borders where cut tiles may be required. Exposed vertical surface of the membrane shall be protected by applying MGP flashing membrane 300 mm girth. All these statements constitute management documents. . 5.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Major Equipment Mixer. 3. (Laying ceramic floor tiles by SEMI DRY method) Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. covering and protecting the sealant all according to details. Appendix A Section 5 The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer Shall arrange all materials required through the sub contractor ensure that the activity is carried out according to the contract & Specificationsas well as all quality procedures are strictly adhered to. Materials Method Approved Ceramic floor tiles 200 x 200 x 8 mm. Project Quality Engineer Shall control & supervise the activity making sure that the work is done according to quality procedures & ITPs & proceed for Company approval Finishing Engineer / Foreman Shall carry out the execution of item physically according to the direction given by Project Engineer as well as Quality Engineer 4. All persons involved shall be imparted tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE as well as other required specific equipment whenever necessary Proper illumination shall be provided in the dark area The area to be tiled shall be closed for the general movement except those working there and be opened only when the tiling has properly been completed with hardboard cover protection spread on the newly laid flooring. cut and bent to the given profile. 2006 Page 470 of Plain mill Aluminum flashing of required girth. 6. Specification. or 150 x 150 x 8 mm as approved Joint filling grout – Approved proprietary material with matching shade. 2. Aerator. Pump Attachment ITP & check list Laying ceramic floor tiles 1. Scope Reference documents Responsibilities The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for Laying ceramic floor tiles on RCC floor surfaces. shall be fastened with stainless steel screws above the groove. 2-mm under a 3-meter straight edge. Tiles cutter Attachment Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. a movement joint of the same width in the bedded finish shall be positioned immediately above The movement joint cavities shall extend through the combined thickness of the finish and the bedding mortar. Application of Water Proofing treatment shall be carried out for the wet areas.% falls in ‘wet’ areas as may be required. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. pipes and the like. Company visual inspection shall be conducted A slurry of 1 part cement to 1 part sand by volume shall be poured over the surface of the semi – dry mix bedding and spread with a trowel until it is approximately 2 mm thick Dry tiles shall then be laid on the slurry and beaten firmly into position with a wooden beater ensuring a true surface contact between the tiles and bedding is formed. machine bases etc. Particular care shall be taken in ‘wet’ areas to prevent low spots that may promote water pooling.5 mm for wall tiles and 3 mm for floor tiles) The tiles shall neatly and accurately be cut to a close fit where necessary at abutments. All these statements constitute management documents. Grouting of the joints shall be carried out within a period of not less than 24 hours after completion of laying of tiles so as to allow the grout attach itself firmly to the bedding. a 10 mm movement joint shall be formed at the perimeter of all the tiled floors and where the tiling meets structural features such as columns. Localized variations in level for a nominally flat floor shall be a maximum of +. The finishing layer shall be 10 mm thick and be laid as described below. 2006 Page 471 of A continuous procedure to lay tiles over the cement mortar screed The areas of concrete sub strata to be tiled shall be brush cleaned and dampened until absorption ceases followed by the finished floor level establishment by means of dots and rules. MOVEMENT JOINTS IN TILED FLOORS Unless otherwise indicated in the documents. The total thickness of the ceramic tile flooring is 100 mm which includes 90 mm bedding screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) by weight and shall be applied as described below. Sand Measuring box. around outlets. The tiles shall be correctly positioned in both directions the time these are placed forming joints using a proprietary tile spacer (1. Only sufficient mortar shall be mixed and spread as can be covered with tiles before it attains its initial set.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. completely filled and sealed after grouting of the normal joints takes place. Hand tools. The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by weight. Where a structural movement joint is provided in the base. The tolerance in the overall level shall not be more than 10 mm from required finishes. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed board. The works were executed for major oil companies. .. Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer. Company Inspection shall be conducted for the correct formation of joint alignment and the level profile The tiles shall be laid level or to 1. mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required for the bed. or 150 x 150 x 8 mm as approved Joint filling grout – Approved proprietary material with matching shade. Scope Reference documents Responsibilities The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for Laying ceramic floor tiles on RCC floor surfaces. 2006 Page 472 of ITP & check list Laying ceramic floor tiles 1. The total thickness of the ceramic tile flooring is 100 mm which includes 90 mm bedding screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) by weight and shall be applied as described below. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. 2. 3. The finishing layer shall be 10 mm thick and be laid as described below. All these statements constitute management documents. . (Laying ceramic floor tiles by SEMI DRY method) A continuous procedure to lay tiles over the cement mortar screed The areas of concrete sub strata to be tiled shall be brush cleaned and dampened until absorption ceases followed by the finished floor level establishment by means of dots and rules. The works were executed for major oil companies. Specification Appendix A Section 5 The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer Shall arrange all materials required through the sub contractor ensure that the activity is carried out according to the contract & Specificationsas well as all quality procedures are strictly adhered to. Application of Water Proofing treatment shall be carried out for the wet areas. 6. All persons involved shall be imparted tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE as well as other required specific equipment whenever necessary Proper illumination shall be provided in the dark area The area to be tiled shall be closed for the general movement except those working there and be opened only when the tiling has properly been completed with hardboard cover protection spread on the newly laid flooring. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Project Quality Engineer Shall control & supervise the activity making sure that the work is done according to quality procedures & ITPs & proceed for Company approval Finishing Engineer / Foreman Shall carry out the execution of item physically according to the direction given by Project Engineer as well as Quality Engineer 4. Materials Method Approved Ceramic floor tiles 200 x 200 x 8 mm. 5. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. pipes and the like. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The tolerance in the overall level shall not be more than 10 mm from required finishes. mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required for the bed. Sand Measuring box. Company visual inspection shall be conducted A slurry of 1 part cement to 1 part sand by volume shall be poured over the surface of the semi – dry mix bedding and spread with a trowel until it is approximately 2 mm thick Dry tiles shall then be laid on the slurry and beaten firmly into position with a wooden beater ensuring a true surface contact between the tiles and bedding is formed. . MOVEMENT JOINTS IN TILED FLOORS Unless otherwise indicated in the documents.2-mm under a 3-meter straight edge. testing & commissioning of the building drainage system. Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer. Tiles cutter Attachment ITP & check list Building drainage system Scope The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the installation. Particular care shall be taken in ‘wet’ areas to prevent low spots that may promote water pooling.% falls in ‘wet’ areas as may be required. Reference documents Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. completely filled and sealed after grouting of the normal joints takes place. The tiles shall be correctly positioned in both directions the time these are placed forming joints using a proprietary tile spacer (1. Only sufficient mortar shall be mixed and spread as can be covered with tiles before it attains its initial set. Where a structural movement joint is provided in the base. Company Inspection shall be conducted for the correct formation of joint alignment and the level profile The tiles shall be laid level or to 1. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed board. a 10 mm movement joint shall be formed at the perimeter of all the tiled floors and where the tiling meets structural features such as columns.5 mm for wall tiles and 3 mm for floor tiles) The tiles shall neatly and accurately be cut to a close fit where necessary at abutments. 2006 Page 473 of The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by weight. Hand tools.. Localized variations in level for a nominally flat floor shall be a maximum of +. a movement joint of the same width in the bedded finish shall be positioned immediately above The movement joint cavities shall extend through the combined thickness of the finish and the bedding mortar. The works were executed for major oil companies. Grouting of the joints shall be carried out within a period of not less than 24 hours after completion of laying of tiles so as to allow the grout attach itself firmly to the bedding. machine bases etc. around outlets. All these statements constitute management documents. equipment.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Surveyor shall be responsible to set out drainage lines & establish bedding levels. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Excavation shall be carried out in the compacted backfill to the trench width & depth from floor trap location to the building external wall from where. necessary PVC sleeves shall be inserted into RCC beam or block wall depending on the pipe level at the building line. All these statements constitute management documents. the pipe shall be embedded in the external landscape. Project Manager / Project Engineer shall arrange all materials. Material Approved pipes & fittings. Backfill shall be carried out in layers & compacted all according to agreed procedure given somewhere else. All materials for the disciplinary works shall be arranged by him. All working as well as shop drawings shall be prepared & submitted to Company for approval under his supervision. 2006 Page 474 of Drgs # Concrete General Specifications references Responsibilities The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan. Site Engineer & Contractor QA / QC Engineer shall check all alignments & levels according to approved drawings & make sure that all works comply with specifications & request inspection by Company Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. All persons involved shall be imparted with tool box talk for the activities concerned & would use PPE as well as other required equipment whenever necessary. safety related items & man power for the item. Site Engineer shall direct the surveyor for the setting out lines & levels in conjunction with the Project Engineer & plumbing Foreman / coordinator. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . All permanent material pertaining to this discipline shall be submitted for Company approval & procured accordingly. scaffolding. bedding material (dune sand) Method Prior to the commencement of the drainage works at the time of the below grade slab backfill. Pipe route shall be set out by the surveyor & checked by the Contractor Site as well as QA / QC. All access to the work location at higher levels shall be checked & tagged by the safety Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. direct the Site Engineer & plumbing Foreman to resort appropriate action for the smooth execution of the item. Equipment All tools. All these statements constitute management documents. granular bedding 130 mm thick shall be done & pipe laid to the prepared bedding & joints made according to manufacturer’s specification or instruction Alignment shall be corrected to the design profile & levels checked Portion of the pipe shall be temporarily anchored to hold the pipe from uplift during testing Contractor QA / QC shall check the laid pipe according to ITP & request Company Engineer for witnessing the test Water or air test as practical shall be conducted according to specifications & approval granted if the leakage is within acceptable limits or the pipe passes successfully defined air pressure. testing apparatus Attachment Inspection Check Sheet Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. to the outlets provided at the locations shown on the contract as well as shop drawings & the standard details. . Similarly all other pipes shall be tested After the test is successful. After all excavation is carried out for the pipe route & all other pipes for the area. using given slope of 1 % to 1. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. surrounding concrete 150 mm thick shall be laid Backfill shall be carried over the surrounding concrete as well as over the soft fill material all according to specifications All pipes shall be checked by Contractor QA / QC Engineer & Company as well as final testing shall be conducted at final commissioning. These external pipes shall be laid to the specified grade from building line / bend to the outlet end into the French drain on the excavated & prepared concrete bedding 150mm thick over blinding 75 mm thick over 130 mm thick granular bedding for the hard landscape portion For the pipe portion in the soft landscape portion. bedding shall be carried out by sand After initial testing & approval. 2006 Page 475 of Proper slope or gradient shall be formed from inlet point at floor trap level to the building line calculated from the Manhole IL & the pipe level at Manhole inlet.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. This discharge shall be collected at these rain water units & further discharged into the vertical stacks of rain water pipes fixed in plumb & connected to the French drains to be constructed to the standard details. granular backfill shall be carried out according to specification up to 300 mm top of pipe Similarly all pipes shall be fixed from the WC seats to the building line to the Manhole & vertical stacks shall be provided on the walls for the vent pipe system Vertical stack shall be clamped into walls according to the standard details. through the pipes located below the external landscape. These pipes shall be true plumb & joints filled according to the manufacturer’s specification & contract specifications. Rain water as well as condensate discharge from the terrace shall be collected.25% to the roofing system graded on the foam concrete course. Finishing Engineer / Foreman Shall carry out the execution of item physically according to the direction given by Project Engineer as well as Quality Engineer. Scabbling of the concrete surface shall be carried out if so required. ITPs & proceed for Company approval. Any snag observed during visit. . All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Safety Supervision A competent officer shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures being adopted.(Etching requires 10% concentration hydrochloric acid to be mixed with water for forceful application on RCC or Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Project Manager / Project Engineer Shall arrange all materials required ensuring that the activity is carried out according to the contract & Specificationsas well as all quality requirements procedures are strictly adhered to. Project Quality Engineer Shall control & supervise the activity making sure that the work is done according to quality procedures. water Method (Laying floor screed by SEMI DRY method) All the rooms shall be laid in full area in one go. 2006 Page 476 of Floor screed Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to lay the floor screed For the vinyl tile and the epoxy floor finishes Reference documents Ground Floor Plan First Floor Plan Specifications Responsibilities The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan. The works were executed for major oil companies. bonding agent. for proper bonding with the hardened surface or etching the surface if so agreed by Company. washed sand. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the Project Site safety requirements. shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately would act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Materials Cement. Safety Prior to commencement of any activity. The proposed designated area shall be laid according to the location of joints as shown on shop drawing separately. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk. 5 cement – screened sand mortar. thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawn off to the marked level with a screed board. Contractor QC & Company inspection shall be conducted for the examination pertaining to the preparatory works for the ‘ready to pour’ compartments. One layer application with 1:2. the surface shall be finished by a steel power float to achieve a smooth surface ready to receive the vinyl tiles or the epoxy painting floor finishes and then. site is madeup with all levels. The concrete surface shall be cleared of all loose particles and cleaned using hard wire brush to ensure achievement of sufficient roughness to receive the screed. The finished surface shall be permanently cured by adding water soaked hessian after a few hours of finishing and recovered with polythene sheet. duly soaked in water for 24 hours and ready for pouring. covered with polythene membrane for immediate curing. cleaned. Throughout the above operations. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Benefit of etching is that ot avoids scabbling or hacking. which process roughenes the concrete surfaces. The mix shall be placed in one layer progressively to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required. Application After the preparation for the area or alternate bays or strips of 1500 mm width or as sized on.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The levels up to which the floor screed is to be laid. . 8 mm T re-bars shall be placed in both directions @ 300 mm c / c to protect cracks formation. the prepared surface shall be spread with cement slurry ratio 1:1 (1 part cement and 1 part sand) mixed with mix quality water. After compacting the layer of mortar. The works were executed for major oil companies. No traffic shall be allowed over the finished surface. In case. All these statements constitute management documents. The cleaned area shall be soaked with water 24 hours prior to the application of screed. shall be profiled by using Mechanical leveling points with steel pipes to maintain levels so that complete compartment is given a proper level. The surface shall be kept wet for a period of 3 days and then protected with hard boards spread over till the floor finishes are applied over the surface. which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity. 2006 Page 477 of concrete surface followed by immediate washing out by water. are taped for adjoining protection from scouring). The mortar for screed shall be mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency. Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted. thickness of screed is more than 75mm. Border of portions to be applied etching. a sample shall be produced on site in the presence of Company representative so that.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. an agreement pertaining to the stated procedures to carry out the screeding and about the Quality could reach. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the Project Site safety requirements. Project Quality Engineer Shall control & supervise the activity making sure that the work is done according to quality procedures & ITPs & proceed for Company approval Road Engineer / Foreman Shall carry out the execution of relevant item physically according to the direction given by Project Engineer as well as Quality Engineer Safety Prior to commence with any activity. Material Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Major Equipment Mechanical Mixer Wheel barrows Mason’s tools in general Power float Attachment ITP Concrete interlocking blocks Scope This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adapted to lay kerbstones and concrete interlocking blocks in paving around buildings Reference Documents Site Development Plan Miscellaneous Details 2 & 6 Specification Responsibilities The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Project Engineer Shall arrange all materials required through the subcontractor ensuring that the activity is carried out according to the contract & Specifications as well as all quality requirement procedures are strictly adhered to. 2006 Page 478 of Prior to full-scale commencement of the screeding operation. Any snag observed during visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately. being rightly adopted. would act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard. . Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures whether or not. Alignment tolerance shall be 3 mm in 75 mm both ways vertically as well horizontally. 450mm from the kerb top level. Fixing 12 T re-bars @ 200 c / c vertically supported to forms. 2006 Page 479 of Approved Kerb stones. Approved Interlocking Paving blocks Red as well as Grey or other approved colour according to landscaper design drawings & specifications. Plank runs shall be used to allow barrows to move on to avoid level disturbance. The works were executed for major oil companies. End to end butting mortar thickness shall be 3 mm. Form work fixing and pouring grade 20 concrete 150mm wide and 150 mm thick high. Excavation up to the formation level i. First. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Method All loose soil shall be cleared and formation level made up to defined requirement. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. Thickness of the sand screed bedding 100mm. Form work fixing and pouring grade 20 concrete 450mm wide and 150 mm thick. as shown in (triangular fillet section) Filling up to top of vertical concrete with earth fill & compaction. All areas below proposed interlocking course to be filled with 100 mm thick sand screed all according to conventional procedures. 25mm thick for kerb stones grade 20. Placing haunch back fillet concrete grade 20. (Laying Paving Interlocking blocks) Thickness of the interlocking blocks 60mm. Bedding in cement mortar 1 :3. Pouring grade 20 concrete all according to approved procedures. Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for kerb laying approval and ITP requested to be signed off by Company. surveyor shall set plotting the pattern borders all according to shop drawing as well as design drawings. Fixing kerb on the mortar to the true lines and levels with chamfer facing pavement & jointing with mortar. well compacted properly to specifications & approved pesticide treatment applied.e. . (Laying Kerb stones) Setting out kerb excavation lines according to as shown on drawing. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Grey colour interlock blocks shall be laid to position & profiled to form the border pattern or as agreed with Company. sand bedding shall be carried out using a plate vibrator pressing the blocks to the required level in 2 passes covering entire area with each pass to make the bedding even. The works were executed for major oil companies. the fill in course to the border areas shall be carried out by laying Red colour blocks. All these statements constitute management documents. whole blocks shall be laid first wherever possible and the trim able blocks exactly marked & cut to the required size. 2006 Page 480 of First. The blocks shall be laid in full but at the edges of the obstacles such as inspection covers where cut blocks may be required. Sand screed shall be spread on the surface of the blocks with 2 more vibrator passes applied & brushed under the leading edge of the vibrator to allow the joints vibrated.80mm Tack Coat Wearing Course SC Type 1. After sufficient blocks have been laid. After profile is well formed to the Company approval.200mm Sub Base Class B-150mm Prime Coat MC 1 Base Course BC Type 1. Major Equipment Plate Compactor Attachment ITPs Roads Works on the Drive ways Scope The objective of this statement is to outline the procedures to be adopted to carry out the Roads Works on the Drive ways Sub Grade .40mm References: Site Development Plan Miscellaneous Details 2 Specification Responsibilities The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. . Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & Company requested to approve the paving. e. mixing & heating plant Method The following sequences shall be involved to do the road work Clearing all services according to the Project drawings and inspections / Approvals Preparation of the area to be structured by removing top soil. the compaction by rolling shall cease Density test shall be conducted all according to approved ITPs requirement Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Project Quality Engineer Shall control & supervise the activity making sure that the work is done according to quality procedures & ITPs & proceed for Company approval Road Engineer / Foreman Shall carry out the execution of item physically according to the direction given by Project Engineer as well as Quality Engineer Safety Prior to commence any activity. 2006 Page 481 of Shall arrange all materials required through the sub contractor ensure that the activity is carried out according to the contract & Specificationsas well as all quality procedures are strictly adhered to. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the Project Site safety requirements. Applying pesticide treatment if required Application of all pre work items such as construction of kerb stone to complete section of detail 2 given on Project drawing Miscellaneous details 2 Prepared surface shall be inspected by Contractor and Company Sub base class B material shall be spread on the area in strips of required thickness keeping more than design thickness by 25mm i. All these statements constitute management documents. 150+25 mm Sub base approved fill material to interlock the class B material shall be spread on the spread material & dry rolling carried out to produce correct profile of the section Water shall be sprayed on the surface to make it penetrate in to & around all the voids of the spread material & compaction by heavy roller started to densify the whole course. profiling levels to the Project drawing & compaction. placing in imported fill material. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent officer shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. After required number of passes probably 6 given by 18 to 12 tonne rollers bringing the laid material to the required thickness 150 mm & exhibiting rebound on the surface. . Any snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard Material Approved Sub Base Class B Approved Prime Coat MC1 Tack Coat Premixed bituminous binder course and wearing course materials shall be supplied from Approved central batching. The works were executed for major oil companies. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. 8 to 1. 2006 Page 482 of Compacted course shall be left for drying in due course allowing it to be ready to receive Prime Coat MC1. All these statements constitute management documents.7 litre / m^2 Primer Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to ascertain the correct profile of the aggregate base course & corrections applied if so required Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.4 to 0. any repair observed during visible inspection shall be repaired in rectangular or square shape or as agreed with Company Asphalt concrete Asphalt concrete shall be laid in widths of drive way roads according to the Project drawing Wearing course thickness being 40mm & that of dense bitumen binder course 80mm Paving works shall be carried out in 2 stages Stage 1 Laying & compacting bottom bituminous binder course Stage 2 Laying & compacting top wearing carriageway Surface preparation Prior to the application of the dense bitumen binder course.4 litre / m^2 Tack coat 0. The works were executed for major oil companies. Drying time shall not be less than 48 hours Prior to the start of the Prime course spreading. . already laid & compacted aggregate base course shall be prepared suitable for this purpose Base course shall be corrected of any deviation more than 13mm from the designed profile at any point & not more than 9mm in 3m on the longitudinal grade at any location by either adding to or removing from the surface the deficient or redundant material respectively to bring the surface to the design shape.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. watered & compacted in accordance to the specification all as stated above Main Operations The following main operations are involved Re-preparation of aggregate base course surface with water & compaction by pneumatic roller Application of Priming coat & drying out Application of 60mm thick dense binder course Power brooming the completed dense binder course Application of Tack coat & drying out Application of 40mm thick bitumen concrete wearing course Mixing All materials shall be mixed at Approved calibrated & approved Asphalt plant All trucks and other equipment as included shall be readily available for inspection Transportation Material shall be transported from the plant to the planned location in good condition by trucks cleaned of all foreign material & covered with tarpaulin to prevent dust invasion in inclement / adverse weather conditions It shall be ensured by obtaining observations using thermometer that the material when laid is within 130 to 165 C Application Coverage Primer coat 0. 2006 Page 483 of All surfaces planned to be primed shall be barricaded & cleaned of all dirt & any objectionable material Bituminous material shall be applied evenly on the dry surface by means of a pressure distributor spray tanker within a temperature 30  to 70   C Surfacing Binder Course Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted prior to the commencement of binder course laying to make sure that the surface is satisfactorily clean. All these statements constitute management documents. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. cleaned & tack coat applied to receive adjoining material No traffic shall be permitted until 12 hours lapse post rolling completion Wearing Course The planned surface shall be cleared of all dust & dirt using power broom or blowing Tack coat shall be applied to the specification requirement Immediately upon arrival the material shall be spread & rolled similarly as described in the foregoing Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to make sure that the material is compacted to the standards and the temperature remains within limits mentioned as well as levels are maintained within specification tolerances Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. well dried & even to the specified priming conditions & to receive binder course The material upon arrival at the location shall be spread & struck off to the prepared profile by means of self powered spreading & finishing equipment attached with a strike off assembly distributing the mixture to a strip 3 m wide Rolling Steel Roller’s # of passes 6 to 8 depending on the surface condition Steel rollers 10 T capacity equipped with adjustable wheel scrapes. The works were executed for major oil companies. . water tanks & sprinkling apparatus to keep the wheel sufficiently wet to prevent the bituminous mixture from sticking to the steel surface shall be employed to roll the profiled material immediately after the material is laid to the acceptable profile to prevent the formation of undue displacement or hair cracking The roller wheels shall be kept properly moistened without excess water or oil Rolling shall be commenced from the side and proceed towards the centre each trip overlapping the previous by at least 300 mm with keeping alternate trip not more than 5 km / h & it shall continue until the surface is impression free Mechanical compactors shall be engaged to compact the roller inaccessible area layers Pneumatic tyred rollers shall be engaged only after the compaction by wheel roller is over It is significant to make sure that the asphalt temperature does not fall below 80  C prior to full compaction is achieved Roller shall not pass over the edges of the freshly laid material generally except when the edge is located at a discontinuation for that day Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to make sure that the material is compacted to the standards and the temperature remains within limits mentioned as well as levels are maintained within specification tolerances particularly over the areas involving shoulders At the commencement of the work on the area involving the compacted & chilled edge. a bevel shall be cut out. 2006 Page 484 of Major Equipment Required for the binder course Central Mixing Asphalt plant 1# Trucks 1 #s 38 Tonnes capacity each Paver 1 #s.15 Tonnes capacity Pneumatic Tired Rollers (tyre inflatable at 0. 1# . The works were executed for major oil companies.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 10 Tonnes capacity.80mm Tack Coat Wearing Course SC Type 1. . Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.40mm References: Site Development Plan Miscellaneous Details 2 (use your reference) Specification (use your reference) Responsibilities The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer Shall arrange all materials required through the sub contractor ensure that the activity is carried out according to the contract & Specificationsas well as all quality procedures are strictly adhered to. All these statements constitute management documents. Project Quality Engineer Shall control & supervise the activity making sure that the work is done according to quality procedures & ITPs & then would proceed for obtaining Company approval Road Engineer / Foreman Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.62 Mpa ) -1 #s 38 T & 1 #s 20 T Air Compressor 1 # Asphalt Cutting Machine 1# Plate Compactor 1 # Jumping Jack Compactor 1 # Spray Tanker 1 # Additionally required for the Wearing Course Power Broom Vacuum Cleaner Attachment ITPs Roads Works on the Drive ways (Revised) Scope The objective of this statement is to outline the procedures to be adopted to carry out the Roads Works on the Drive ways Sub Grade .200mm Sub Base Class B-150mm Prime Coat MC 1 Base Course BC Type 1. 1 # with 6m / 3m wide blades Steel wheel Tandem Rollers 1 #s. Applying pesticide treatment if so required. the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the Project Site safety requirements. . Application of all pre work items such as construction of kerb stone to included section of detail 2 given on Project drawing Miscellaneous details 2 (ndicate your reference) Prepared surface shall be inspected by Contractor and Company Sub base class B material shall be spread on the area in strips of required thickness keeping more than design thickness by 25mm i. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Water shall be sprayed on the surface to have it penetrate into & around all the voids of the spread material & compaction by heavy roller started to densify the whole course. profiling levels to the Project drawing & compaction. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk Safety Supervision A competent officer shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. The works were executed for major oil companies. 150+25 mm Sub base approved fill material to interlock the class B material shall be spread on the spread material & dry rolling carried out to produce correct profile of the section. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. placing in imported fill material. 2006 Page 485 of Shall carry out the execution of item physically according to the direction given by Project Engineer as well as Quality Engineer Safety Prior to commence any activity. Any snag observed during the visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately would act to bring the safety measures implemented to an acceptable standard Material (all according to approvals) Approved Sub Base Class B Approved Prime Coat MC1 Tack Coat Premixed bituminous binder course and wearing course materials shall be supplied from Approved central batching. All these statements constitute management documents.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Clearing implementation of all services works according to the Project drawings and inspections / Approvals completed. mixing & heating plant Method The following sequences shall be involved to do the road work.e. Preparation of the area to be road structured by removing top soil. Density test shall be conducted all according to approved ITPs requirement Compacted course shall be left for drying in due course. The works were executed for major oil companies. Drying time shall not be less than 48 hours. already laid & compacted aggregate base course shall be prepared suitable for this purpose Base course shall be corrected of any deviation more than 13mm from the designed profile at any point & not more than 9mm in 3m on the longitudinal grade at any location by either adding to or removing from the surface the deficient or redundant material respectively to bring the surface to the design shape. the compaction by rolling shall cease. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. allowing it to be ready to receive Prime Coat MC1. Prior to the start of the Prime course spreading. 2006 Page 486 of After required number of passes probably 6 given by 18 to 12 tonne rollers bringing the laid material to the required thickness 150 mm & exhibiting rebound on the surface.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. any repair observed during visible inspection shall be repaired in rectangular or square shape or as agreed with Company Asphalt concrete Asphalt concrete shall be laid in widths of drive way roads according to the Project drawing Wearing course thickness being 40mm & that of dense bitumen binder course 80mm Paving works shall be carried out in 2 stages Stage 1 Laying & compacting bottom bituminous binder course Stage 2 Laying & compacting top wearing carriageway Surface preparation Prior to the application of the dense bitumen binder course. watered & compacted in accordance to the specification all as stated above Main Operations The following main operations are involve Re-preparation of aggregate base course surface with water & compaction by pneumatic roller Application of Priming coat & drying out Application of 60mm thick dense binder course Power brooming the completed dense binder course Application of Tack coat & drying out Application of 40mm thick bitumen concrete wearing course Mixing All materials shall be mixed at Approved calibrated & approved Asphalt plant All trucks and other equipment as included shall be readily available for inspection Transportation Material shall be transported from the plant to the planned location in good condition by trucks cleaned of all foreign material & covered with tarpaulin to prevent dust invasion in inclement / adverse weather conditions It shall be ensured by obtaining observations using thermometer that the material when laid is within 130 to 165 C Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . All these statements constitute management documents. A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. 2006 Page 487 of Application Coverage Primer coat 0. a bevel shall be cut out. . cleaned & tack coat applied to receive adjoining material No traffic shall be permitted until 12 hours lapse post rolling completion Wearing Course The planned surface shall be cleared of all dust & dirt using power broom or blowing Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.4 to 0.4 litre / m^2 Tack coat 0. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.7 litre / m^2 Primer Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to ascertain the correct profile of the aggregate base course & corrections applied if so required All surfaces planned to be primed shall be barricaded & cleaned of all dirt & any objectionable material Bituminous material shall be applied evenly on the dry surface by means of a pressure distributor spray tanker within a temperature 30  to 70 C Surfacing Binder Course Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted prior to the commencement of binder course laying to make sure that the surface is satisfactorily clean. All these statements constitute management documents. well dried & even to the specified priming conditions & to receive binder course The material upon arrival at the location shall be spread & struck off to the prepared profile by means of self powered spreading & finishing equipment attached with a strike off assembly distributing the mixture to a strip 3 m wide Rolling Steel Roller’s # of passes 6 to 8 depending on the surface condition Steel rollers 10 T capacity equipped with adjustable wheel scrapes. The works were executed for major oil companies. water tanks & sprinkling apparatus to keep the wheel sufficiently wet to prevent the bituminous mixture from sticking to the steel surface shall be employed to roll the profiled material immediately after the material is laid to the acceptable profile to prevent the formation of undue displacement or hair cracking The roller wheels shall be kept properly moistened without excess water or oil Rolling shall be commenced from the side and proceed towards the centre each trip overlapping the previous by at least 300 mm with keeping alternate trip not more than 5 km / hour & it shall continue until the surface is impression free Mechanical compactors shall be engaged to compact the roller inaccessible area layers Pneumatic tyred rollers shall be engaged only after the compaction by wheel roller is over It is significant to make sure that the asphalt temperature does not fall below 80  C prior to full compaction is achieved Roller shall not pass over the edges of the freshly laid material generally except when the edge is located at a discontinuation for that day Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to make sure that the material is compacted to the standards and the temperature remains within limits mentioned as well as levels are maintained within specification tolerances particularly over the areas involving shoulders At the commencement of the work on the area involving the compacted & chilled edge.8 to 1. safety related items & manpower/workforce for the item & direct the Site Engineer & Foreman to resort appropriate action for the smooth execution of the item. 10 Tonnes capacity. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. 2006 Page 488 of Tack coat shall be applied to the specification requirement Immediately upon arrival the material shall be spread & rolled similarly as described in the foregoing Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to make sure that the material is compacted to the standards and the temperature remains within limits mentioned as well as levels are maintained within specification tolerances Major Equipment Required for the binder course Central Mixing Asphalt plant 1# Trucks 1 #s 38 Tonnes capacity each Paver 1 #s. All these statements constitute management documents. 3.62 Mpa ) -1 #s 38 T & 1 #s 20 T Air Compressor 1 # Asphalt Cutting Machine 1# Plate Compactor 1 # Jumping Jack Compactor 1 # Spray Tanker 1 # Additionally required for the Wearing Course Power Broom Vacuum Cleaner Attachment ITPs Preparatory works pertaining reinforcement placement 1. 2. 1 # with 6m / 3m wide blades Steel wheel Tandem Rollers 1 #s. . binding wires. 1# . Scope Reference documents Responsibilities The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the preparatory works pertaining reinforcement placement on Site for all elements Drgs # Concrete General Specifications All Structural Drawings & Contractor’s produced BBS documents The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer shall arrange all fabricated materials.15 Tonnes capacity Pneumatic Tired Rollers (tyre inflatable at 0. scaffolding.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. reinforcement bars and accessories. All persons involved shall be imparted tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE as well as other required specific equipment whenever necessary 5. The material shall be stored at the workSite. Method The relevant reinforcement bars. The steel fixers shall place and tie. (generally. practice of fabrication rebarssoffsites is made a contract condition for keeping the working site tidy) 6. stirrups and tie wire. On updated drawings shall be used on site. The Foreman steel fixer shall ensure that the reinforcement has been correctly placed prior to informing the Site Engineer & QC. in accordance with the current reinforcement drawing under direct supervision of re-bar Foreman. . The works were executed for major oil companies. Particular attention to the following items shall be monitored by the chargehand steel fixer and Foreman: Lap length of bars. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. Appropriate concrete cover to formwork and outside faces. Spacing of bars. Material All fabricated re-bars shall be taken from the fabrication yard on Site location for placement.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. in accordance with the storage procedure pertaining to fabricated & non fabricated re-bars. chairs. Site Engineer. shall be collected from the stores as well as fabrication yard and made available at the work Site. The current revision of the reinforcement drawing that applies to the structure being constructed shall be checked by the Project Engineer. spacer blocks. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The Site Engineer & chargehand steel fixer / Foreman shall check the fabricated reinforcement when all the placement of the reinforcement bars are complete. 2006 Page 489 of Site Engineer shall direct the rebar foremen / charge hand for the correct application all according to design & details to place the fabricated as well as well on Site cut re-bars in conjunction with the Project Engineer QA Engineer shall involve role physically during placement & check the assembled re-bars all comply or be in line according to drawings & details 4. QA for validity. The result of this inspection shall be recorded upon Pre concrete inspection check list by Site Engineer & QA. Placement of adequate support chairs and stirrups. on industrial projects. Tie wire protrusions into cover areas (protrusions should be in to the non cover core areas). grade slab. stub columns. An additional bar may be required to offset this moved bar. the steel fixer Foreman shall arrange for the placement of these items according to directions by Project Engineer / Site Engineer. Attachment Check list proforma Pouring of concrete 1. Reference documents Drgs # Concrete General Specifications All Structural Drawings. Where a reinforcement bar clashes with such items. 8. All these statements constitute management documents. temporary access to Site requirement. Project or Site Engineer. The works were executed for major oil companies. pipes. conduits. The Company inspection shall be conducted based on QA recommendations after complete checking 7. Generally trailors are used. the steel fixer shall move the relevant bar. the chargehand shall inform the Foreman & Site Engineer to resolve the issue with the Company Engineer. The QC shall inspect the re-bars placed in the structure for compliance with the design drawings and details as well as other working and shop drawings. scaffolding. Should any doubt arise about moving bars. safety related items & manpower for the item & direct the Site Engineer & Foreman to resort appropriate action for the smooth execution of the item. Site Engineer shall direct the foremen / charge hand for the correct application of pours all according to specification & convention in conjunction with the Project Engineer. additional chairs if required.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The Foreman shall inform the Site Engineer when these activities are complete. Should any inserts. . spacing & numbers. Site Engineer shall be physically available to control the pour Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Responsibilities The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer shall arrange concrete from batching plant. based on the decision of Company Engineer. require fixing within the structure according to design details or shop drawings. ground beams. super structure columns. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. bolts etc. boundary walls 2. stairs. 2006 Page 490 of QC shall check all items of different shapes. spacer blocks. contract documents Specifications section 5 (indicative) 3. Major Equipment Appropriate material transportation arrangement to work location. Scope The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the pouring of concrete into various elements of the structures such as foundations. beams & suspended slabs. Necessary access to the location shall be prepared using proper supports or platforms duly inspected by the safety in charge. Material Method Ready Mix Concrete From Qatar Ready Mix grade M 20. stubs. In case the concrete does not meet the specification requirement. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. the order for the release of concrete from the batching plant shall be placed. . has to be transported to the Site location. After the truck is approved by the QA / Company. 2006 Page 491 of QA Engineer shall involve physically during pouring & check the slump. All persons involved shall be imparted with tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE as well as other required equipment whenever necessary Proper scaffolding shall be arranged for the formworks 5. codes & specification requirement 4. Arrangement shall also be made for the filling of the concrete cubes on Site to specification requirement according to standard procedures. air voids etc. After the inspections of the preparatory works pertaining to any element namely footings. suspended slabs etc & the relevant approval by Company. The concrete laying gang already present on the Site location shall receive & pour the concrete mix into the prepared elements from not more than 2 m. slump. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. where the pump equipment shall receive the concrete load & pump out into the in situ delivery location. columns. M 35 (Approved) Approved concrete repair compound for post pour repair if so necessary The supply order for estimated quantity may be placed in advance but real confirmation shall be done based on the pour approval. Immediately. 6. The works were executed for major oil companies. temperature. air volume etc all according to agreed procedures. at the arrival of the truck mixer of concrete on Site. The required quantity shall be sequenced depending on the consumption frequency on Site. all to the specification requirement shall be taken care of by the ready mix supplier in the presence of the QA & Company Engineer. temperature. The concrete shall be poured either by the concrete pump or by the mobile crane depending on the necessity & convenience. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer shall monitor and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. the truck load shall be liable to be rejected. 2006 Page 492 of As soon as. The grade slab shall be poured in one go in depth bay wise between ground beams. the slab concrete shall be poured & the whole slab completed. Inspection shall be made immediately post formstriking & any defect observed in concrete shall be brought to Company Engineer’s notice for deciding remedial action. Top level of the concrete shall be leveled & the columns / lift well wall form top covered with plastic sheet. the mix depth at one rotation shall be 450 mm & in different strips vertically. The widened portion of the stub in touch with soil shall also be poured in strips not more than 450 mm deep. Into columns. pouring shall be completed avoiding formation of cold joint. pouring shall be completed avoiding formation of cold joint. beams shall be poured first around the slab & prior to the formation of cold joint. shall Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Water shall be sprayed over the form during hot weather prior to pouring to avoid flash setting of concrete with re-bars. shall be agreed in the beginning of the pour with the Company Engineer. For the suspended slabs. In case some plant’s breakdown is reported. Vibrator shall not be allowed to touch the forms side or re-bars. insertion vibrator shall be used by a trained operator to compact the mix till no more bubbles appear. The joints if so required. immediately the last poured line shall be stopped by a formed surface arrangement to terminate concrete pour at that point & in no way. Into lift well walls. The works were executed for major oil companies. Vertical surface shall be covered with saturated Hessian further covered with polythene sheet or alternatively. The portion of the pipe chute shall be inserted into column preparatory works to allow for a 2 m maximum vertical fall. curing compound shall be sprayed over the water wet surface to form a impermeable membrane not to permit evaporation. the mix depth at one rotation shall be 450 mm & in different strips vertically. enough mix is available in the element to compact the mix conveniently.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Each Footing shall be poured in one go if not more than 500 mm in depth. All these statements constitute management documents. . Over vibration shall not be permitted. Vertical forms of the columns shall be struck after 48 hours. In such case.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Curing compound suits curing purpose only during the initial stages on the slabs but. Immediate curing shall be applied by spreading polythene sheet cover on wet slabs & footings. scaffolding. Attachment Quality check forms. Curing compound is either wax based or water based that works to 60% effective extent while water works to near equivalent laboratory conditions. approved repair material shall be used according to manufacturer’s instructions. If so disturbed. 3. previous formed joint shall be scabbled / hacked to expose all aggregate by removing laitance completely. water curing is required. 7. . vibrators. polythene sheet shall be withdrawn temporarily & saturated hessian placed over concrete & then. The works were executed for major oil companies. mobile crane. washed with cement slurry & new concrete pour commenced making proper bond with old concrete. 2. transit trucks. 2006 Page 493 of recommence prior to 24 hours with further approval obtained. Concrete General Specifications All Structural Drawings The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer shall arrange all required materials in time. it shall be immediately relocated according to the Company Engineer Site approval. Scope Reference documents Responsibilities The purpose of this method statement is to define the general criteria for the post concrete repair to all structures & elements. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. later. All these statements constitute management documents. recovered with polythene sheet & concrete cured for specified period prabbly 7 yo 14 days depending on the defined specifications. temporary access to repair location. Then after about 2 hours. curing compound sprayer 8. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Due care shall be taken that no spacers. If so. Immediately after the compaction of concrete is over & concrete starts setting in. arrangements for applying U1 finish to the top of slab surface shall be done by timber tampering. electric conduits or any other insert is disturbed from its design or worked location. Material sampling & testing forms Post concrete repair 1. Major Equipment Batching plant. repair to hardened concrete is required. safety related items & man power for the item & direct the Site Engineer & Foreman to resort appropriate action for the smooth repair concerned. 6. Prior to polythene sheet covering. all according to manufacturer’s & agreed procedures & specification requirement 4. the concrete surface shall be cured according to the relevant procedures included in concrete method statement i.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. the surface shall be repaired using Nitomortar FC or equivalent other with compatible bonding agent Nitobond AR. application of curing by spraying curing compound to form a continuous membrane or by continuous application of water. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Site Engineer shall be physically available & be responsible to supervise the repair application in conjunction with QA / QC QA Engineer shall involve physically during repair. The works were executed for major oil companies. Material Method / QC & Approved concrete repair compound Upon removal of the formwork. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All persons involved shall be imparted tool box talk for the activities concerned & shall use PPE as well as other required equipment whenever necessary All precautions shall be adopted to protect attacks by propriety chemicals according to manufacturer’s instructions & proper disposal of the used items 5. A. Minor defects as described in A – D below shall be repaired as soon as practical.e. The repair shall then be left for curing in for 24 hours using cover of polythene sheet on the repaired surface. 2006 Page 494 of Site Engineer shall direct the foremen / charge hand for the correct application of repairs according to manufacturer’s specification / instruction & method statement in conjunction with the Project Engineer. This surface repair shall be conducted as soon as the formwork is removed whilst the concrete is still green. More significant defects as described in E – H shall be subject to joint inspection / agreement between Company and Contractor. All these statements constitute management documents. Sand runs / scouring Water movement inside the shutter can result in a streaky appearance with a loose sandy finish. Where no surface imperfections have occurred. Pin holes / blow holes Where small defects to the concrete surface have occurred. such as pin holes or holes smaller than 3mm in diameter or depth. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer monitors and implement all HSE and environmental precautions. . Nitobond AR shall be applied by brush on repaired surface B. the concrete surface shall be inspected by the QA Site Engineer to establish if any surface defects have occurred. discuss with Company engineer who may inspect visually & finalise for repair application These shall be repaired by brushing dry cement powder directly into the cracks while the concrete is less than 3 days old and covering with damp hessian.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. discuss with Company engineer who may inspect visually & finalise for repair application Misalignments due to shutter movements etc. shall be ground back to provide a smooth transition between areas. C. D. discuss with Company engineer who may inspect visually & finalise for repair application. The repair shall then be cured in accordance with the agreed procedure using water or curing compound as appropriate. Should the depth of the repair exceed 15mm. The works were executed for major oil companies. Plastic shrinkage cracks Cracking caused by plastic shrinkage usually results in a series of diagonal cracks 0. Vertical sections up to 50 mm. the ground profile length shall be 2-3 times the size of the maximum misalignment. the repair shall be conducted in two layers. Large overhead sections up to 20 mm. All these statements constitute management documents. The repair area shall then be soaked with water and Nitobond AR bonding agent applied. who may inspect visually & finalise for Nitomortar FC application. The bonding agent shall not be allowed to dry. Honey combing / segregation / minor voids Contractor QA / QC & Site Engineer shall inspect the surface & if such honeycombing observed. The repair shall be conducted as soon as the formwork is removed. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. providing a scratch coat on the first layer. After grinding. Where occurring at joints between panels. the surface shall be reinstated using ‘Nitomortar FC (B) & bonding agent Nitobond AR. Any loose material shall be removed by stiff brushing and then repaired as ‘A’ above. Contractor QA / QC & Site Engineer shall inspect the surface & if such cracks are observed. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. . The area shall be troweled with Renderoc TG mortar. The Renderoc TG mortar material shall be troweled firmly into the repair area. discuss with Company. 2006 Page 495 of Contractor QA / QC & Site Engineer shall inspect the struck surface & if such runs are observed. Minor misalignments (Typically Less than 2cm) Contractor QA / QC & Site Engineer shall inspect the surface & if such misalignment is observed.5mm wide & 3 mm deep. Renderoc TG mortar Minimum applied thickness 10 mm. It shall consist of chipping the repair area free of laitance and exposing any voids. Care shall be taken to ensure that specified concrete cover is maintained all times. E. discuss with Company who may inspect visually & finalise for repair application This repair shall consist of chipping the affected area to remove any laitance and voids. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. G. Plastic settlement cracks Cracking caused by settlement of concrete can result in a series of cracks which mirror the reinforcement pattern in horizontal surfaces or appear to arch on vertical surfaces. Porous / spongy surface Contractor QA / QC & Site Engineer shall inspect the surface & if such cracks observed. The repair shall be water cured along with the parent concrete. All these statements constitute management documents. The works were executed for major oil companies. Any repairs not covered by the above procedure shall be dealt with on a case-by-case basis and agreed with Company before commencing repairs. (Note . discuss with Company engineer who may inspect visually & finalise for repair application Any such cracks shall be chased out to a depth of 10-15mm and filled with an epoxy mortar such as Renderoc TG.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. All repairs noted above shall be recorded on the post-pour inspection form. Where reinforcement is exposed in a void.a distance of one and a half times the stone size shall be allowed around all exposed reinforcement). It may not be necessary to raise a non-conformance report provided the repairs are carried out as indicated above and agreed with Company. This repair shall be carried out while concreting some other elements of the same grade of concrete as repair element. the surrounding concrete shall be chipped away to provide adequate space to place fresh concrete around the reinforcement. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. The repair area shall be formed to retain the concrete such as letter box type form for vertical surface. The chipped repair area shall be soaked and then be primed with a bonding agent such as Nitobond AR. . The surface finishes to the repair shall be as the same standard as the surrounding concrete. The surface shall then be reinstated using Nitomortar as ‘A’ above. Fresh concrete of the same grade as the surrounding concrete shall be used to repair the defect. H. 2006 Page 496 of Small pockets horizontally up to 100mm. Formwork shall be provided to retain the fresh concrete repair. Major voids (Typically Deeper than 5cm) Contractor QA / QC & Site Engineer shall inspect the surface & if such honeycombing observed. discuss with Company engineer who may inspect visually & finalise for repair application All affected surfaces shall be ground back to good concrete usually only 2-3mm below the surface. The bonding agent shall not be allowed to dry. Contractor QA / QC & Site Engineer shall inspect the surface & if such cracks observed. Maximum length up to 3 m F. Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Asphalt premix etc First of all. The works were executed for major oil companies. safety related items. Safety The Safety Engineer / Officer monitor and implement all HSE. codes & specification requirement 4. 6. 2006 Page 497 of Attachment Manufacturer’s datasheets pertaining to the following materials Nitomortar FC. All persons involved shall be imparted with tool box talk for the activities concerned & all workers shall use PPE as well as other required equipment whenever & whatsoever necessary 5. manpower & direct the Site Engineer & Foreman to resort to appropriate action for the smooth execution of the item. traffic scheme shall be implemented to divert the traffic all according to the road crossing permit granted by Plant Operating Authority. Scope The purpose of this statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the laying of sewerage pipeline from the circular manhole located in the premises to the existing manhole on the street 2.Drainage & Surface Water Lay out The responsibilities regarding the supervising personnel on Site shall be according to Project Approved Quality Plan Project Manager / Engineer shall arrange all required materials in time. Material Method Ready Mix Concrete From Qatar Ready Mix grade M 20.MBT equivalent materials shall also be used for the aforesaid repairs after Company approvals Sewerage pipeline from the circular manhole located in the premises to the existing manhole on the street 1. Plant Operating Authority road safety & traffic smooth flow requirement. Reference documents Responsibilities Drgs # S D Plan. Renderoc TG Note. Site Engineer shall be physically available & be responsible to control the operations QA Engineer shall involve physically during operations to inspect all works all according to agreed procedures. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. All these statements constitute management documents. Nitomortar FC (B). M 35 (Approved) Approved fill material. Nitobond AR. . 3.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Site Engineer shall direct the foremen / chargehand for the correct execution of all operations to specification & traditional convention in conjunction with the Project Engineer. A hole shall be made in the wall of existing manhole under official supervision. Approved material shall be filled in layers duly compacted accordingly up to the formation level of the existing road. Inspection shall be conducted all according to ITP requirement. Testing shall be conducted as required after the pipeline is properly anchored. Excavation shall be carried out to the formation profile according to the defined IL + bedding concrete for the pipe.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. Immediately after the completion of the operations. transit trucks Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Inspection shall be conducted all according to ITP requirement. The works were executed for major oil companies. Major Equipment Attachment Drawing not included Batching plant. 7. Road course that was dismantled or removed. surrounding concrete shall be poured & cured. Extra strength vitrified pipe 150 mm dia shall be laid on the bedding & jointed. 2006 Page 498 of The setting out shall be done from the CMH-1 manhole location to the existing manhole location on the road as indicated on the included plan (no attached in this copy of publication) Portion of the road surface shall be removed mechanically Portion of the soil below the road surface & that from the CMH-1 location shall be excavated manually. All these statements constitute management documents. required pipe inserted accordingly & sealed. Bedding concrete shall be laid. shall be reinstated to the original status to the satisfaction of the Engineer. traffic diversion shall be removed & traffic reinstated. Any existing services discovered during manual excavation shall be intimated to Plant Operating Authority as well as to the concerned department for raking proper action. 8. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. Upon successful completion of the test. finished to defined profile & cured. . Formation shall be properly dressed & compacted. 2006 Page 499 of Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose.A work based on personal experience for improving young engineers / students knowledge Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by P Eng Suraj Singh April 11. The works were executed for major oil companies. . All these statements constitute management documents.